JP2022111246A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement of a game.

SOLUTION: On the basis of an establishment of a specific condition, a specific game where a plurality of number of times of open operations is set that can change variable means from a regulation position to an open position is performed by specific game performance means. The type of a specific game performed by the specific game performance means is determined by specific game type determination means. As the specific games determined by the specific game type determination means, a plurality of specific games at least having different open operation patterns is stored by storage means. Thus, the specific game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, which gives an effect to enhance amusement of the game.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a pattern display device as one of the game machines. In this pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole, a starting condition is established, and the patterns on the pattern display device start to change. If the stop symbols after the variation are a combination of predetermined symbols, a big win is achieved, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

Specifically, in the special game state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is closed after being opened for a predetermined time (or the time until a predetermined number of prizes are won), and such opening and closing operations are performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16 times) are repeated. A large amount of prize balls can be paid out by winning the game balls into the large prize winning opening in the open state.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-700

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is advantageous to the player based on the ball entry means into which the game ball can enter and the game ball entering the ball entry means. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege, variable means capable of changing the ball entry means between an open position where game balls can enter and a restricted position for restricting the entry of game balls, based on the establishment of specific conditions. , a specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the opening operation for varying the variable means from the regulated position to the open position is set a plurality of times, and a type of the specific game to be executed by the specific game execution means are determined. It has specific game type determining means and storage means for storing at least a plurality of specific games having different opening motion patterns as the specific game determined by the specific game type determining means.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when the specific game is being executed, the game ball on the regulation position of the variable means is moved forward by the opening operation after the next time. It has a ball entry assisting means for facilitating entry into the ball entering means.

A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the plurality of specific games stored in the storage means includes a game ball when the variable means is varied to the open position. is more advantageous than the first specific game and the first specific game containing many advantageous opening operation patterns, which is one of the patterns of the opening operation in which the ball is easily entered into the ball entering means by the ball entering assist means. At least a second specific game configured with a small number of opening action patterns is set.

In the gaming machine according to claim 4, in the gaming machine according to claim 3, the first specific game executes the advantageous opening operation pattern a predetermined number of times, and then the opening in the advantageous opening operation pattern. The opening operation in which the variable means is varied to the open position in a period longer than the operation is set at least once, and the second specific game is the predetermined number of times of the entering ball assisting means It is composed of an opening operation of a disadvantageous opening operation pattern that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry assisting means.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, when the game ball enters the ball entry means into which the game ball can enter, the privilege giving advantage to the player is given by the privilege giving means. The ball entry means is varied by an open position in which a game ball can enter, a regulation position in which entry of a game ball is restricted, and a variable means. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the specific game executing means executes the specific game in which the opening operation for changing the variable means from the restricted position to the open position is set a plurality of times. The type of the specific game executed by the specific game executing means is determined by the specific game type determining means. As the specific game determined by the specific game type determining means, at least a plurality of specific games having different opening motion patterns are stored by the storage means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the specific game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, when the specific game is being executed, the game ball on the regulation position of the variable means is moved to the next position by the ball entry assisting means. Since the ball is easily entered by the ball-entering means in the subsequent release operation, there is an effect that the player can be more advantageous.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 2, it is possible to set a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that sharpness can be imparted to the game.

According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 3, it is possible to set a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous. Therefore, there is an effect that sharpness can be imparted to the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled operation unit viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled operation unit viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; (a) and (b) are front perspective views of a compound action unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the compound action unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the compound action unit; Fig. 2 is a front exploded perspective view of a pair of slide members, a rear cover, a first gear group and a second gear group; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of a pair of slide members, a rear cover, a first gear group and a second gear group; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of a meniscus member; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of a meniscus member; 4 is a partial front view of the compound action unit; FIG. 17(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the compound action unit taken along line XVIIa-XVIIa of FIG. 16, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the compound action unit after the driving device has been moved from (a). 4 is a partial front view of the compound action unit; FIG. (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the compound motion unit taken along line XIXa-XIXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the compound motion unit after separating the drive motor from the drive gear from (a). is. (a) is a front view of a two-layer gear, and (b) is a rear view of the two-layer gear. (a) is a rear view of a compound action unit, and (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a) is a rear view of a compound action unit, and (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a) and (b) are rear views of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a) is a rear view of a compound action unit, and (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a) is a rear view of a compound action unit, and (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a) and (b) are partial rear views of the compound action unit. It is a front view of a pair of slide members in a 2nd embodiment. 4 is a front view of a pair of slide members; FIG. (a) is a front view of a two-layer gear in a third embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the two-layer gear, and (c) is a side view of the two-layer gear. (a) is a front view of a reversing gear, (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear, and (c) is a side view of the reversing gear. (a) is a front view of a two-layer gear in a fourth embodiment; (b) is a bottom view of the two-layer gear; It is a sectional view of a layer gear. (a) is a front view of a reversing gear, (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear, and (c) is a partial side view of the reversing gear as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIc in FIG. 32(a). . It is a front view of the two-layer gear in 5th Embodiment. It is a partial front view of a second gear group. It is a partial front view of a second gear group. It is a front exploded perspective view of the two-layer gear in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a) to (c) are rear views of the two-layer gear in the seventh embodiment. (a) to (e) are rear views of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a) and (b) are front views of a compound action unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a compound action unit. (a) to (e) are rear views of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a) and (b) are front views of a compound action unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a compound action unit. It is a graph which shows the speed change of a two-layer gear. (a) and (b) are rear views of the two-layer gear in the eighth embodiment. (a) to (e) are rear views of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. 4 is a graph showing rotational speed of a double layer gear; (a) is a front perspective view of a specific winning opening 650, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the specific winning opening 650. FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the exploded specific winning opening 650. FIG. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the exploded specific winning opening 650. FIG. (a) is a front view of the specific winning device 650 with the front cover removed, (b) is a sectional view taken along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. 52(a), and (c) is a ) taken along line LIIc-LIIc. (a) is a diagram schematically showing display screen area division setting and effective line setting in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen in the first control example. be. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing ball entry timing in the opening/closing operation of the ball entry regulation plate. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ball entry timing in the opening/closing pattern A of the ball entry regulation plate, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the ball entry timing in the opening/closing pattern B of the ball entry regulation plate. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detection timing of various sensors and the content of effect display based on the detection results; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an appearance effect on the normal effect screen during the jackpot game in the first control example, and (b) is an appearance effect on the special effect screen during the jackpot game in the first control example. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation and escape production|presentation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a capture effect and an escape effect on the special effect screen during the jackpot game in the first control example, and (b) is a special effect during the jackpot game in the first control example. It is the figure which showed typically the appearance production|presentation and recapture production|presentation by a screen. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an appearance effect and a failure effect on the special effect screen during the jackpot game in the first control example, and (b) is a normal effect during the jackpot game in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the capture production|presentation by a screen. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the spherical character and the display content in the character-linked production. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the spherical character and the display content in the character-linked production. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents in a background-linked effect. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents in a background-linked effect. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the first control example, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the first control example; It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first winning random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot determination value in the first control example, and (b) is the first control example in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the hit type counter C2 and the type of the jackpot, and (c) shows the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 in the first embodiment and the determination value of the hit of the normal symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed the relationship typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example, (b) is the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of the big hit in the first control example FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship, and FIG. 4C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of deviation (normal) in the first control example, (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (probability variation) in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM within a sound ramp control device in a first control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the sound ramp control device in the first control example; It is a block diagram showing. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a character-linked effect table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a background lottery table in the first control example. It is a diagram. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a work RAM within the display control device in the first control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image in the first control example. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A in the first control example, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface B in the first control example. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 9 is a flow chart showing a variation pattern setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing background change extraction processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a jackpot command process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flow chart showing a jackpot winning process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation processing during a jackpot performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. 8 is a flowchart showing entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a jackpot display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing ball-entering effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing appearance effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing escape effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing failure effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing capture effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a recapture effect process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 7 is a flowchart showing timing notification processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a rear surface change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 4 is a flow chart showing error command processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an advance notice effect command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the SW effect of the comment-based effect in the second control example. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the SW effect of the continuous hit system effect in the second control example. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the SW effect of the touch-based effect in the second control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM within an audio ramp control device in a second control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device in the second control example; It is a block diagram showing. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a winning normal reach comment background table in the second control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a winning super reach comment background table in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a comment background table at the time of deviation in the second control example; (b) schematically shows the contents of the fixed comment background table at the time of deviation in the second control example; FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram showing the content of a hit time fixed comment background table in the second control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a comment table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a repeated hit type effect lottery table in the second control example. is. 13 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing SW effect selection processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a notice effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing an example of an effect screen of a continuous-hit-type effect in the third control example. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing an example of an effect screen for a continuous-hit-type effect in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the sound ramp control device in the third control example, and (b) shows the contents of the RAM 223 in the sound ramp control device in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first lottery table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a second lottery table in the third control example. FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a third lottery table in the third control example, and FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a fourth lottery table in the third control example (e) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fifth lottery table in the third control example, and (f) is the sixth lottery table in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first remaining time lottery table in a third control example, and (b) shows the contents of a second remaining time lottery table in the third control example. FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a third remaining time lottery table in the third control example. 14 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing SW depression adaptation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing SW effect selection processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing SW effect selection processing 3 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ball entry timing in the opening/closing pattern at the time of the big win C in the fourth control example, (b) is the opening/closing pattern at the time of the small win in the fourth control example, FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing ball entry timing; It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot command process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing inter-round processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 26. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), through gate 67 , variable display unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. , and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 16R probability variable jackpot and a 16R short-time jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “16R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, and the “15R short-time jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds. Later, it is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state and becomes a time saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and allows some of the balls launched to the game board that flow down the right side of the game board to pass through. is configured to When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ' is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

As a result, during normal operation, the electric accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Aim the ball so that it passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and by winning in the first winning hole 64, you can get many chances for a big win lottery and win a big win. It is advantageous for the player to aim to become.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second prize-winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by winning the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

It should be noted that the selection ratio of the type of jackpot to be selected in the case of a jackpot may differ between when the ball wins in the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball wins in the second prize winning port 640. . Specifically, the probability of winning the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is compared to the probability of winning the ball in the second winning port 640 when the ball wins in the first winning port 64. set higher than As a result, the change due to the way the ball is hit can be made clearer.

A first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the first variable prize winning device 65 includes a triangular opening/closing plate in a front view that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing to the right around the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the opening/closing plate is tilted to the right by driving the large opening solenoid to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternately repeat the state of

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. In this embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. A first ball sensor 650a and a second ball sensor 650b provided in the specific winning unit 650 are connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and signals output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 includes the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, the first accessory motor 330c, the second accessory motor 340c, the entrance A sensor 651a, an exit sensor 652a, a detour sensor 653a, etc. are connected respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motor 472 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 26. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, the accommodation structure of each unit 300 and 400 in the rear case 210 will be described.

5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 in which the operation unit 200 is disassembled and viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates a state in which the compound action unit 400 is attached to the rear case 210 .

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 has a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and one side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 6) is open. A rear case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, so that the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third pattern display device 81 can be arranged).

The action unit 200 is configured as one unit by accommodating the front unit 300 and the composite action unit 400 in the inner space of the rear case 210 .

Specifically, the compound action unit 400 is formed with an external shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 , and is surrounded by the outer wall portion 212 while being in contact with the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 . It is disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 in such a manner that the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5) of the compound action unit 400, a rectangular opening is formed at a position coinciding with the opening 211a of the rear case 210 in a front view.

In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the front unit 300 is arranged in a stacked state on the front side of the compound action unit 400 and accommodated in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined action unit (for example, the combined action unit 400) is arranged in a layered state in which another action unit (for example, the front unit 300) is superimposed on the front side. , in a front view, a given action unit can be shielded by another action unit.

In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made of a light-transmissive material and the player can visually recognize the action units arranged on the back side of the game board 13, a predetermined action unit The player can see only the required part of the screen, and the other parts can be shielded from the player by another action unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member that is shielded by the other motion units on the assumption that the entirety of the effect member will be visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in designing can be improved. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, an outline of the operation mode of the compound operation unit 400 will be described. 5 to 7 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG.

FIG. 8 is a front view of the operation unit 200. FIG. Note that FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the pair of slide members 420 of the compound action unit 400 is arranged at the extended position.

At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the pair of slide members 420 of the compound action unit 400 are retracted above and below the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of slide members 420 are slidably moved in directions facing each other, and the pair of slide members 420 are positioned at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the position of the third pattern display device 81). front, see FIG. 2).

These operation units 300 and 400 are formed to be independently operable, and are arranged in a superimposed (stacked) state as described above. Those arranged in different layers can be operated at the same time even if the operating member projects inwardly of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. As shown in FIG. In other words, the action units 300 and 400 can be operated not only individually, but also in combination with each other, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the compound action unit 400, the retracted position and the extended position of the pair of slide members 420 are formed as the ends of the movable range of the pair of slide members 420. As shown in FIG.

Next, the compound action unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 24. FIG. 9(a) and 9(b) are front perspective views of the compound action unit 400. FIG. 9(a) shows a state where the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 9(b) shows a state where the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 are arranged at the extended position. . The projecting position of the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 is formed as the end of the movable range of the slide member 420 located on the opposite side of the retracted position described above.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pair of slide members 420 of the compound action unit 400 are slid vertically, and in the course of the slide movement, the half-moon members 460 move into the shaft support holes 421a of the slide members 420 (see FIG. 12). is rotated around Next, the overall configuration of the composite action unit 400 will be described.

10 is an exploded front perspective view of the compound action unit 400, FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the compound action unit 400, and FIG. 12 is a pair of slide members 420, a back cover 430, and a first gear group. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of 440 and second gear group 450, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the compound action unit 400 includes a pair of base members 410 arranged in a left and right pair and fastened and fixed to the rear case 210. The base members 410 are connected to each other and vertically moved. a pair of slide members 420 that are slidably formed on each other, a rear cover 430 that forms a space between the slide members 420 and the main body 421 by being fastened to the back of the main body 421 of the slide members 420, and the slide member 420 and the rear cover 430, the second gear group 450 is also arranged between the slide member 420 and the rear cover 430, and the second gear group 450 is reversed. It mainly includes a half-moon member 460 engaged with a gear 453 and a driving device 470 for generating driving force for moving the slide member 420 .

The base member 410 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate elongated in the vertical direction and serves as a skeleton of the compound action unit 400. a plurality of slide holes 412 drilled in the thickness direction and extending in the vertical direction; alignment walls 413 formed on opposing surfaces of a pair of base members 410 as wall surfaces parallel to the extending direction of the slide holes 412; A fixed rack gear member 414 having rack gears 414a and 414b formed on the side surface opposite to the side surface that abuts against the alignment wall 413 in the state (see FIG. 9).

The slide holes 412 are elongated holes for regulating the sliding direction of the slide member 420. The pair of intermediate slide holes 412a are connected substantially in the center of each base member 410 and extend in the same direction. An outer slide hole 412b is formed outside the slide hole 412a (opposite side to the side facing the pair of base members 410), and an inner slide hole 412b is formed inside the intermediate slide hole 412a (side facing the pair of base members 410). and an inward slide hole 412c. Note that the outer slide hole 412b and the inner slide hole 412c are alternately formed in the vertical direction. That is, for example, when the outer slide hole 412 b is formed in the upper portion of the base member 410 , the inner slide hole 412 c is formed in the lower portion of the base member 410 .

The fixed rack gear member 414 is fastened to the base member 410 while being in contact with the alignment wall 413 for the purpose of transmitting driving force to the first gear group 440 and the second gear group 450, and has a rod shape with a rectangular cross section. Permanent rack gear 414a which is a member to be formed and which is carved across the outer surface, which is the side surface that abuts against the alignment wall 413, and the surface opposite to the outer surface formed in parallel with the outer surface. and a limited rack gear 414b which is a rack gear carved adjacent to the front side (front side in FIG. 10) of the permanent rack gear 414a and which is carved only near the center of the base member 410.

The permanent rack gear 414a meshes with the second gear group 450, and the limited rack gear 414b meshes with the first gear group 440, the details of which will be described later. In the limited rack gear 414b, the starting gear tooth 414b1 (end gear tooth) arranged on the side where meshing with the deformed gear 441 of the first gear group 440 starts is formed larger than the other gear teeth. (See FIG. 10).

The slide member 420 is a member that has a half-moon member 460 arranged in the center and slides up and down. It should be noted that the slide members 420 are formed as a pair of upper and lower slide members 420, and the structure of each slide member 420 is common (point symmetrical about the central point in front view). Description of the slide member 420 is omitted.

That is, one slide member 420 has a main body portion 421 formed in a rectangular plate shape elongated in the left-right direction and having both ends formed with steps toward the front side, and a main body portion 421 extending vertically downward from both ends of the main body portion 421 . A pair of extended leg portions 422 to be transmitted, a pair of side wall portions 423 extending from the upper and lower ends of the body portion 421 toward the back side (front side in FIG. A first shaft support pin 424 is provided and a plurality of shaft support pins 424 are provided in series in the left-right direction, and a plurality of second shaft support pins 425 are provided so as to protrude from the back surface of one end (the right side in FIG. 11) of the main body portion 421. and are mainly provided.

The body portion 421 has a large-diameter shaft support hole 421a drilled in the central portion, a rotation restriction hole 421b drilled in an arcuate shape coaxial with the shaft support hole 421a, and a side wall portion 423 at the upper end. and a slide restricting wall portion 421c whose central side is one step closer to the side wall portion 423, and slide restricting pins 421d which project toward the back side at both end portions and are formed as a pair of upper and lower slide restricting pins 421d. be.

The shaft support hole 421a is an opening through which the arcuate wall portion 461c of the semicircular member 460 is inserted, and the diameter of the shaft support hole 421a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the arcuate wall portion 461c. The semicircular member 460 and the reversing gear 453 are connected through the shaft support hole 421a so as not to rotate relative to each other.

The rotation restriction hole 421b is an opening through which the locking pin 461e of the semicircular member 460 is inserted, and the width of the rotation restriction hole 421b is slightly larger than the diameter of the locking pin 461e. Further rotation of the half-moon member 460 is restricted by abutting the locking pin 461e on the end of the rotation restricting hole 421b.

The slide restricting wall portion 421c is a portion that accommodates the slide rack 442 of the first gear group 440 between the upper side wall portion 423 of the main body portion 421, and the stepped portion exerts an urging force on the slide rack 442. is formed in such a manner that one end of the urging spring 442c that provides the

The slide regulating pin 421d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the ring-shaped collar member C and is inserted through the intermediate slide hole 412a of the base member 410, and the retaining plate B is fastened and fixed at the tip.

The collar member C (see FIG. 17(a)) is formed in a ring shape having a flange (large diameter portion). The outer diameter of the flange is formed to be larger than the width of each of the slide holes 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a, and the outer diameter of the ring portion in which the flange is formed is each of the slide holes 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a. is formed slightly smaller than the width of Therefore, the flange is interposed between the body portion 421 of the slide member 420 and the body portion 411 of the base member 410, and the ring portion of the collar member C is accommodated in the intermediate slide hole 412a with a slight gap. As a result, the slide restricting pin 421d is formed to be freely movable in the extending direction of the intermediate slide hole 412a, while its movement in the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the intermediate slide hole 412a is restricted.

The retainer plate B (see FIG. 19(a)) has a main body formed with a width larger than the width of each of the slide holes 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a. Therefore, the slide member 420 is connected to the base member 410 so that it cannot be pulled out when the retaining plate B is fastened to the slide restricting pin 421d.

Further, the retainer plate B has a fastening hole formed in the surface that abuts on the end portion of the slide regulating pin 421d, and the circumference of the fastening hole is built up in the same shape as the ring portion of the collar member C. As shown in FIG. The built-up portion is accommodated in the intermediate slide hole 412a. As a result, the collar member C is arranged at the root portion of the slide restricting pin 421d, and the build-up portion of the retainer plate B is arranged at the tip portion thereof, so that the axis of the slide restricting pin 421d is positioned in the intermediate slide hole. It can be stably supported while matching the opening direction of each of the slide holes 412a to 412c including 412a (see FIG. 19(a)).

The transmitted leg portion 422 is a portion to which the driving force of the driving device 470 is transmitted. A protruding slide regulating pin 422b, a front side wall portion 422c covering the side surface of the front side of the rack gear 422a in the tooth width direction (perpendicular to the direction of continuous gear teeth), and and a notch portion 422d that is an arc-shaped notch.

The slide control pin 422b is provided with a collar member C and a retainer plate B similarly to the slide control pin 421d, and is inserted through the slide holes 412b and 412c of the base member 410. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the slide regulating pin 422b of the leg 422 to be transmitted on the right side in front view is inserted through the outer slide hole 412c of the base member 410, and the slide regulating pin 422b of the leg to be transmitted 422 on the left side in front view is inserted. 422 b is inserted through the inner slide hole 412 c of the base member 410 . As a result, in a state where the retaining plate B is fastened to the slide restricting pin 422b, the axis of the slide restricting pin 422b is aligned with the opening direction of each of the slide holes 412b and 412c to stably support the slide member 420 and the base. Member 410 may be non-withdrawable.

The front wall portion 422c is formed so as to overlap the gear teeth of the drive gear 473 when viewed from the front in the assembled state (see FIG. 18).

The cutout portion 422d has a representative circle slightly larger than the addendum circle of the drive gear 473 in a state where the pair of slide members 420 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 9A). are formed in a portion where the representative circle is projected onto the front wall portion 422c in a front view.

The side wall portion 423 is provided with notch portions 423a that are notched above and below a region in which the shaft support hole 421a of the main body portion 421 is formed. The notch portion 423a serves as a portion through which the drive lever 467 of the half-moon member 460 passes.

The first shaft support pins 424 include a plurality of raised shaft support pins 424a (three positions in this embodiment) continuously provided from the rear surface of the slide member 420, and a two-layer gear adjacent to the shaft support hole 421a of the slide member 420. and a pivot pin 424b.

Since the raised shaft support pin 424a has a ring-shaped portion having the same height around it, the second gear group 450 to be inserted is raised from the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420 (a predetermined distance from the main body portion 421). pivoted. Thereby, the first gear group 440 can be arranged in that space.

The rear cover 430 is a member that covers the body portion 421 and the pair of side wall portions 423 of the slide member 420 by being fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the slide member 420, and is a pair of insertion holes through which the slide restriction pins 421d are inserted. A hole 430a is drilled in each one end.

The first gear group 440 is a gear group accommodated between the slide member 420 and the rear cover 430 and meshed with the limited rack gear 414b. A slide rack 442 engraved with a rack gear 442b and slidably moved along the slide restricting wall portion 421c of the slide member 420, a pair of transmission gears 443 for transmitting the rotation of the deformed gear 441 to the slide rack 442, and a deformed gear. 441 and a pair of transmission gears 443, an intermediate plate 444 that is a plate-like member that axially covers the transmission gear 443 disposed on the side of the deformed gear 441 and is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420; , is mainly provided.

The deformed gear 441 has a starting gear tooth 441a which is formed to be larger than the other teeth among the gear teeth which are cut.

The deformed gear 441 and the pair of transmission gears 443 are pivotally supported by the plurality of second pivot pins 425 of the slide member 420, respectively.

The slide rack 442 includes a main body portion 442a formed in a rectangular rod shape, a rack gear 442b formed on one side surface of the main body portion 442a and meshed with the transmission gear 443, and a protruding portion protruding from the side surface of the main body portion 442a. and a biasing spring 442c that is locked to the protrusion that is engaged.

The biasing spring 442c is engaged with the stepped portion of the slide restricting wall portion 421c of the slide member 420 to generate a biasing force that pushes the slide rack 442 back toward the transmission gear 443 side.

The intermediate plate 444 is a plate that divides the first gear group 440 and the second gear group 450 into front and rear, and has a pivot pin 444a protruding toward the front side.

A transmission gear 451 that meshes with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 among the plurality of gears of the second gear group 450 is supported on the shaft support pin 444a.

The second gear group 450 has a role of reversing the half-moon member 460 by rotating the reversing gear 453 using the vertical displacement of the slide member 420, and has a plurality of parts (four in this embodiment) in the left-right direction. ) are continuously provided and the outer end gear is meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410, and the inner end portion of the plurality of transmission gears 451 opposite to the permanent rack gear 414a. A two-layer gear 452 in which gear teeth 452a of the upper layer (back side layer) are meshed with a transmission gear 451 pivotally supported by and a reversing gear 453 to be meshed with.

Among the plurality of gears, the transmission gear 451 is supported by the shaft support pin 444a of the first gear group 440, and the other gears are supported by the slide member 420. It is pivotally supported by pin 424a.

As described above, since the raised shaft support pin 424a has a ring-shaped portion with the same height around it, the transmission gear 451 is raised from the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420 (a predetermined distance from the main body portion 421). pivoted. As a result, the axial heights of the transmission gear 451 pivotally supported by the pivot pin 444a of the first gear group 440 and the other transmission gears 451 can be matched. That is, the plurality of transmission gears 451 are pivotally supported with each other at a predetermined distance from the body portion 421 of the slide member 420 .

The two-layer gear 452 is formed of a resin material, and has gear teeth 452a engraved on the upper layer (back side layer), dividing gear teeth 452b engraved on the lower layer (front side layer), and upper and lower layers. and a sliding wall portion 452d that is an arcuate wall surface that slides on the arcuate recessed portion 453c of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 20).

Since the gear teeth 452a are always meshed with the transmission gear 451, the two-layer gear 452 is always rotated when the slide member 420 slides up and down.

The lower layer of the two-layer gear 452 is composed of an area in which the dividing gear teeth 452b are formed and an area in which the sliding wall portion 452d is formed. A starting gear tooth 452b1, which is larger than the gear tooth 452b2, is engraved. It should be noted that recessed portions 452b3 and 452b4 (see FIG. 20) formed on both sides of the starting gear tooth 452b1 as receiving portions for the gear teeth (see FIG. 20) are formed deeper than the recesses between the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. As a result, starting gear teeth 453b1, which are formed to be larger than intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of a reverse gear 453, which will be described later, can be received in good mesh (a state in which the gear teeth mesh deeply). Therefore, even if the gear teeth have different sizes, the meshing relationship between the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 can be maintained well.

The depressions 452b3 and 452b4 formed on both sides of the starting gear tooth 452b1 serve as receiving portions for the starting gear tooth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23(b)). Of the recessed portions 452b3 and 452b4, the side closer to the sliding wall portion 452d is referred to as a first recessed portion 452b3, and the opposite side of the first recessed portion 452b3 is referred to as a second recessed portion 452b4.

The gear tooth 452b is smaller than the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the dividing gear tooth 452b and larger than the intermediate gear tooth 452b2. As a result, as will be described later, the deviation of engagement between the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the starting gear teeth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 is suppressed, and the accuracy of rotation is improved when the engagement continues. can be made

It should be noted that the time when meshing starts means the time when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 start coming into contact with each other, and is not limited to the time when the gear teeth start coming into contact with each other. In this embodiment, it means the time when the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 come into contact with each other.

Further, the term "continuous meshing" means a state in which the intermediate gear teeth 452b2, 453b2 are meshed after the starting gear teeth 452b1, 453b1 are meshed.

As a method of increasing the size of the starting gear tooth 452b1, a method of increasing the face width (the length along the axial direction of the gear) is also conceivable. However, in the present embodiment, the starting gear teeth 452b1 and the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed to have the same tooth width for the reason that the two-layer gear 452 can be easily formed into a two-layer structure. ) and increased tooth depth.

The disk portion 452c is formed so as to be overlapped with the gear teeth of the transmission gear 451 adjacent to the two-layer gear 452 and the gear teeth of the reversing gear 453 adjacent to the two-layer gear 452 when viewed in the axial direction (FIG. 21(b)). reference). As a result, when the transmission gear 451 and the reversing gear 453 move in the axial direction, the respective gear teeth are brought into contact with the disc portion 452c, thereby suppressing the transmission gear 451 and the reversing gear 453 from wobbling. and further movement of the transmission gear 451 and the reversing gear 453 can be suppressed.

The reversing gear 453 is a member that reverses the half-moon member 460 by being engaged with and rotated by the two-layer gear 452, and is formed in a cylindrical body portion 453a through which the cylindrical main body 462a of the half-moon member 460 can be inserted. and a reverse gear tooth 453b formed outward from one end of the main body portion 453a, and a main body portion 453a formed adjacent to the reverse gear tooth 453b in the direction along the outer circumference of the cylindrical main body 462a. and an arc-shaped recess 453c, which is an arc-shaped wall surface that is arranged axially symmetrically with the two-layer gear 452 and slides on the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, and a wide protrusion in which the arc-shaped recess 453c is formed. It mainly includes an engaging projecting receiving portion 453d and an engaging projecting portion 453e projecting radially from a position obtained by dividing the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 453a into three equal parts.

At both ends of the reverse gear tooth 453b, starting gear teeth 453b1 which are larger (tooth thickness and tooth depth) than the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 (gear teeth other than those at both ends) are engraved. A recess 453b3 formed between the starting gear tooth 453b1 and the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d as a gear tooth receiving portion is deeper than the recess formed between the intermediate gear teeth 453b2. It is formed. As a result, the starting gear teeth 452b1, which are formed to be larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452, can be received with good meshing (a state in which the gear teeth mesh deeply). Therefore, even if the gear teeth have different sizes, the meshing relationship between the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 can be maintained well.

The arc-shaped concave portion 453c is a portion that abuts against the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, and is formed with a curvature radius that is approximately the same as the radius of the sliding wall portion 452d.

The locking protrusion 453e is fitted to an arc-shaped wall portion 461c formed in the main body portion 461 of the half-moon member 460 in a non-rotatable manner. As a result, the reversing gear 453 and the semicircular member 460 are rotated together.

Next, referring to FIGS. 14 and 15, the meniscus member 460 will be described. 14 is a front perspective view of meniscus member 460 and FIG. 15 is a rear perspective view of meniscus member 460. FIG. 14 and 15 illustrate a state in which the front cover 466 is removed from the body portion 461 of the half-moon member 460. As shown in FIG.

The semicircular member 460 is a semicircular plate that is arranged in the center of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 10) and is rotated along with the slide movement of the slide member 420 so that the top and bottom are reversed. A body portion 461 which is a member and forms the skeleton of the half-moon member 460, a central gear 462 having a tubular body 462a inserted through a connecting hole 461a drilled near the center of the body portion 461, and the central gear 462. A crank gear 464 having a plurality of claw members 463 slidably moved along the main body portion 461 with the rotation of the claw members 463, a slide pin 464b inserted through a slide hole 463a formed at the base of the claw members 463, and a center A transmission gear group 465 disposed between the gear 462 and the crank gear 464 and meshing with the central gear 462 and the crank gear 464, a front cover 466 fastened and fixed from the front side of the main body portion 461, and a driving lever 467 (see FIG. 12) fastened and fixed to the end of the tubular body 462 a of the central gear 462 .

The body portion 461 includes a connecting hole 461a through which the central gear 462 is inserted, a plurality of pivot pins 461b through which the crank gear 464 and the transmission gear group 465 are supported, and an inner circumference of the reverse gear 453 around the connecting hole 461a. A circular arc-shaped wall portion 461c protruding with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter and formed with a notch into which the locking projection 453e is fitted, a claw-shaped hook portion 461d on which the biasing spring is hooked, and and a locking pin 461e that protrudes.

The locking pin 461e is inserted through the rotation restricting hole 421b of the slide member 420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 21(a)). Thereby, the rotation angle of the half-moon member 460 is restricted.

The central gear 462 includes a tubular main body 462a inserted through the connecting hole 461a of the main body 461, a flange portion 462b formed radially from one end of the tubular main body 462a, and a flange portion 462b. A gear tooth 462c is formed radially inwardly from the outer peripheral surface of 462b, and a drive lever 467 is formed so as to be fastened and fixed to the other end opposite to one end of cylindrical main body 462a. and a claw-shaped hook portion 462e on which the other end of the urging spring is hooked.

The claw member 463 mainly includes an elongated slide hole 463a through which the slide pin 464b of the crank gear 464 is inserted, and a slide plate portion 463b, which is a long plate-like body projecting toward the front side. .

The slide plate portion 463b is inserted into an elongated slide hole 466a formed in the front cover 466. As shown in FIG. As a result, the claw member 463 is slidably formed in the extension direction of the slide hole 466 a of the front cover 466 .

The crank gear 464 has a main body portion 464a which is supported by the shaft support pin 461b of the main body portion 461 and has gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and a slide projecting eccentrically from the rotating shaft of the main body portion 464a. and a pin 464b.

The main body portion 464a is rotated with the rotation of the central gear 462 by meshing with the central gear 462 and the transmission gear group 465 .

The slide pins 464b are moved about the pivot pins 461b by rotating the main body 464a. Thereby, the slide pin 464b is moved between a first position (see FIG. 14) located close to the central gear 462 and a second position spaced apart from the central gear 462 . This movement of the slide pin 464b causes the claw member 463 to move along the slide hole 466a of the front cover 466 (see FIG. 26(b)).

The front cover 466 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the body portion 461 and accommodates each member of the half-moon member 460 between itself and the body portion 461, and the slide plate portion 463b of the claw member 463 is inserted therethrough. An elongated slide hole 466a is drilled.

The drive lever 467 has a long plate-shaped lever portion 467a (see FIG. 13) extending radially outward and an insertion hole 467b (see FIG. 13) and are mainly provided.

The lever portion 467a (see FIG. 13) is a portion that is pushed by the slide rack 442. When the lever portion 467a is pushed by the slide rack 442, the center gear 462 is rotated.

Returning to FIG. 10 to FIG. 13, description will be made. The driving device 470 includes a fastening plate portion 471 that is raised to the front side in the central portion of the base member 410 and that is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, and a drive motor 472 that is fastened and fixed to the fastening plate portion 471. and a drive gear 473 inserted through the drive shaft of the drive motor 472 .

The fastening plate portion 471 has a pair of restriction wall portions 471a and 471b which are formed to have an arcuate cross section along the outer shape of the motor case of the driving gear 472 and extend toward the front side. The inner side in the assembled state) extends to approximately the middle position of the motor case, and the other regulating wall portion 471b (the outer side in the assembled state) extends longer than the extended end of the one regulating wall portion 471a. These pair of restricting wall portions 471 a and 471 b are used as guides when the driving motor 472 is pulled out from the fastening plate portion 471 .

The drive gears 473 are arranged to face the rack gears 422a of the pair of slide members 420 from both sides and are meshed from both sides.

Next, an outline of movement of the pair of slide members 420 of the compound action unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. FIG. 16 and 18 are partial front views of the compound action unit 400, FIG. 17(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the compound action unit 400 along line XVIIa-XVIIa in FIG. 16, and FIG. 19A is a partial cross-sectional view of the compound action unit 400 after the driving device 470 has been moved from FIG. 17A, and FIG. 19A is a partial cross-sectional view of the compound action unit 400 taken along line XIXa-XIXa of FIG. and FIG. 19(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the compound action unit 400 after the drive motor 472 is separated from the drive gear 473 from FIG. 19(a). 16 and 17 illustrate a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIGS. 18 and 19 illustrate a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18 , the pair of slide members 420 sandwich the drive gear 473 of the drive device 470 between the legs 422 to be transmitted. At this time, the rack gear 422 a of the leg portion 422 to be transmitted, which is arranged to face the drive gear 473 , is meshed with the single drive gear 473 . As a result, the drive gear 473 is rotated by the drive motor 472, so that the legs 422 to be transmitted, which are opposed to each other with the drive gear 473 therebetween, are synchronously slid.

That is, in a state where the slide member 420 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the drive gear 473 is rotated clockwise in a front view, so that the upper slide member 420 moves downward and the lower slide member 420 moves downward. are moved upward with each other at the same speed. At this time, the pair of drive motors 472 arranged on the left and right sides are synchronously controlled, and the pair of slide members can be stably slid.

Also, the respective weights of the pair of slide members 420 are applied to the driving gear 473 in opposite directions. For example, a weight is applied to the drive gear 473 on the right side in front view from the upper slide member 420 in a direction to rotate the drive gear 473 clockwise, and the lower slide member 420 rotates the drive gear 473 counterclockwise. A weight is applied in the direction of rotation. As a result, if the weights of the pair of slide members 420 are made equal, the drive gear 473 can be kept stopped due to the weight balance of the pair of slide members 420 even if the power of the drive motor 472 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power of the drive motor 472 is cut when the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at an arbitrary position, the pair of slide members 420 can be kept stopped at that position.

A pair of transmitted leg portions 422 of the slide member 420 are meshed with the drive gear 473 from the same direction. That is, for example, the pair of left and right transmitted leg portions 422 of the upper slide member 420 are meshed with the drive gear 473 from the right side in front view, and the pair of left and right transmitted leg portions 422 of the lower slide member 420 Both are meshed with the driving gear 473 from the left side in front view.

As a result, even if one of the transmitted legs 422 meshing with the driving gear 473 suddenly moves (for example, moves in a direction in which the distance from the meshing driving gear 473 increases), One of the transmitted leg portions 422 and the other transmitted leg portion 422 connected through the body portion 421 is moved in the same direction as the one of the transmitted leg portions 422 . That is, since it is moved away from the driving gear 473 that meshes with it, it is possible to suppress the application of a large load to the driving gear 473 that meshes with the other leg 422 to be transmitted.

Here, for example, one leg 422 to be transmitted of the slide member 420 meshes with the driving gear 473 from the right side in front view, and the other leg 422 to receive transmission meshes with the driving gear 473 from the left side in front view. Then, one of the transmitted leg portions 422 is moved in a direction in which the distance from the driving gear 473 increases, and the other transmitted leg portion 422 is pressed against the driving gear 473 . As a result, a large load is applied to the drive gear 473 meshing with the other leg 422 to be transmitted.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a large load from being applied to the driving gear 473 as described above. can be improved. Also, the shape of the pair of slide members 420 can be made the same, and the members can be shared.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), the driving gear 473 and the front wall portion 422c interfere with each other in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 19(a)). On the other hand, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state spaced apart from the outline of the notch 422d in a front view. Note that the positional relationship between the slide member 420 and the drive gear 473 that "the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state in which the drive gear 473 is spaced apart from the outer shape of the notch portion 422d in a front view" will be described as a specific phase position.

Therefore, in a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position (specific phase position), which is the end of the movable range, the drive gear 473 can be pulled out through the notch portion 422d formed in the transmission receiving leg portion 422. . Accordingly, the drive gear 473 can be replaced without removing the slide member 420 from the base member 410 (see FIG. 17(b)). Therefore, the maintainability of the driving gear 473 can be improved.

Here, the pair of slide members 420 are arranged opposite to each other with the drive gear 473 interposed therebetween, and are meshed with the drive gear 473 by the rack gears 422 a of the respective leg portions 422 to be transmitted. In this state, both of the pair of slide members 420 need to be similarly arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 16), so the driving gear 473 and the rack gear 422a are meshed with arbitrary gear teeth. It's not a good thing. That is, the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420 have a fixed relationship between the gear teeth that mesh with each other (the representative gear teeth of the rack gear 422a contacting the representative gear teeth of the drive gear 473 when meshed). is defined) to form a proper meshing condition.

The notch 422d of the slide member 420 can be used to form the proper meshing state. That is, as described above, the cutout portion 422d has a representative circle slightly larger than the addendum circle of the drive gear 473 when the pair of slide members 420 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 16). It is formed in a portion projected onto the front wall portion 422c in the front-rear direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 16) when the shaft and the central axis are aligned with each other.

Therefore, in a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the cutout portions 422d are arranged to face each other. In this state, the drive gear 473 is moved through the notch 422d (moved in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 16), so that the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a can be meshed in a proper meshing state.

In a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position (specific phase position), the pair of slide members 420 are blocked from moving outward in the vertical direction (the upper slide member 420 moves upward and the lower slide member 420 moves upward). 420 is blocked from further movement downward). That is, when the slide member 420 is randomly moved toward the retracted position, the slide member 420 is stopped at least at the retracted position (movement resistance increases).

Therefore, in the position adjustment of the slide member 420 when the maintenance worker replaces the drive gear 473, even if the slide member 420 is moved in the retraction direction at random, the slide member 420 remains at the retraction position (specific phase shift) at the end of the movable range. position). As a result, the drive gear 473 can be easily taken out through the notch 422d, and in this state, the drive gear 473 can be easily meshed with the rack gears 422a of the pair of slide members 420. As shown in FIG. Therefore, maintainability can be improved.

The arrangement of the driving device 470 will be described with reference to FIG. 17(a). As described above, the notch portion 422d is formed in the pair of slide members 420, so that the drive device 470 in the assembled state is fastened and fixed to the base member 410 with the pair of slide members 420 arranged at the retracted position. be able to. Thereby, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the driving device 470 can be improved.

That is, when the notch portion 422d is not formed in the front wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 (for example, when the front wall portion 422c is formed in the entire area of the rack gear 422a), the driving device 470 is attached to the base member 410. Even if an attempt is made to assemble the driving device 470, the drive gear 473 abuts against the front wall portion 422c, and the driving device 470 cannot be assembled to the base member 410. FIG. Therefore, the driving device 470 had to be arranged on the opposite side of the front wall portion 422c, and the degree of freedom in arranging the driving device 470 was low.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a notch portion 422d is formed in the front wall portion 422c. It can be arranged on the front side (the side on which the front wall portion 422c is arranged). Therefore, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the driving device 470 can be improved.

A front wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 is formed in a layer between the drive gear 473 and the drive motor 472, and by moving the slide member 420 from the retracted position, the drive gear 473 and the front wall portion 422c move forward and backward. They can be superimposed in a direction view (a view perpendicular to the page of FIG. 16). As a result, when replacing the drive device 470, it is possible to select whether to remove the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 together, or to remove only the drive motor 472 while leaving the drive gear 473.

That is, the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 can be separated by pulling out the drive motor 472 while the drive gear 473 is in contact with the front wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 19B). . As a result, the driving motor 472 can be replaced while maintaining the meshing state between the driving gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the leg 422 to be transmitted. Therefore, before and after replacement of the drive motor 472, it is possible to eliminate the need for re-engagement adjustment between the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the transmission receiving leg 422, thereby improving maintainability.

At this time, the driving gear 473 overlaps the front wall portion 422c of the pair of leg portions 422 to be transmitted facing each other with the driving gear 473 interposed therebetween when viewed in the front-rear direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 18) (see FIG. 18). Therefore, when the drive gear 473 is pulled out from the drive motor 472, force is applied to the drive gear 473 from at least two points arranged opposite to each other with the rotation shaft interposed therebetween. Therefore, tilting of the drive motor 472 with respect to the drive gear 473 is suppressed.

Further, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out from the fastening plate portion 471, the drive motor 472 can be moved along the regulation wall portions 471a and 471b while being pressed against the regulation wall portions 471a and 471b. Inclination of the axis with respect to the drive gear 473 can be suppressed. Accordingly, deformation of the drive gear 473 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 19( a ), one regulation wall portion 471 a is formed so as to retreat toward the fastening plate portion 471 from the front end surface of the motor case of the drive motor 472 . As a result, the drive motor 472 can be pulled out using the extended end of one of the regulation wall portions 471a as a fulcrum S. That is, since the extended end of the one regulation wall portion 471a and the side surface of the drive motor 472 are arranged adjacent to each other, the extended end of the one regulation wall portion 471a serves as the fulcrum S and the side surface of the drive motor 472 (see FIG. 19). In (a), the point of action W is shown inside the drive motor 472 for easy understanding). can be As a result, the force required to pull out the drive motor 472 can be suppressed depending on the setting of the power point. FIG. 19(a) shows the relationship between the fulcrum S and the point of action W and a virtual lever.

In addition, the drive motor 472 can be pulled out while pressing the drive motor 472 against the other regulation wall portion 471b arranged to face the one regulation wall portion 471a. As a result, the degree of inclination of the drive motor 472 with respect to the drive gear 473 when the drive motor 472 is pulled out can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), the other restricting wall portion 471b is formed to protrude forward (upward in FIG. 19(a)) from the extending end portion of the restricting wall portion 471a. As a result, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out with the one regulation wall portion 471a as the fulcrum S, in a state W1 where the point of action W is closest to the other regulation wall portion 471b, the drive motor 472 is pulled out from the other regulation wall portion 471b. It is possible to apply a force directed in the direction of pushing back to the point of action W. Therefore, the movement of the drive motor 472 in the direction perpendicular to the drive shaft can be prevented by the other regulation wall portion 471b. As a result, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out, it is possible to reliably prevent the drive motor 472 from moving in the direction away from the one regulation wall portion 471a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the two-layer gear 452 involved in rotation of the half-moon member 460 of the compound action unit 400 will be described. 20(a) is a front view of the two-layer gear 452, and FIG. 20(b) is a rear view of the two-layer gear 452. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the two-layer gear 452 is a gear member in which different gear teeth are engraved on the front side and the back side with the disk portion 452c as a boundary. As shown in FIG. 20(a), the starting gear tooth 452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d is formed larger than the intermediate gear tooth 452b2. Therefore, as will be described later, the starting gear tooth 452b1 can be endowed with durability to withstand collision (abutment) with the reverse gear 453. FIG. In this embodiment, only the starting gear teeth 452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d are formed large, and the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed small, so that durability is improved and material costs are reduced. It is possible to achieve both.

The two-layer gear 452 includes a depression bottom wall portion 452e as a wall surface that forms the bottoms of the first depression portion 452b3 and the second depression portion 452b4, and a push-back rib 452f that connects the depression bottom wall portion 452e and the ring-shaped rib. , provided.

Here, the second recess 452b4 is required to be deep enough as a recess to receive the starting gear tooth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23), while the first recess 452b3 is designed to engage the reversing gear 453. It is a recess into which the projecting receiving portion 453d enters. Therefore, the depth of the second recessed portion 452b4 is not required, but in the present embodiment, the depths of the first recessed portion 452b3 and the second recessed portion 452b4 are substantially the same. As a result, the amount of heat shrinkage of the resin material near the first recessed portion 452b3 and the second recessed portion 452b4 during molding of the two-layer gear 452 can be made uniform, and the moldability of the two-layer gear 452 can be improved. can.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), a space is formed in an area surrounded by the sliding wall portion 452d, the wall portion formed by the bottom of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2, and the recessed bottom wall portion 452e. At this time, the slide wall portion 452d and the recessed bottom wall portion 452e are formed to have substantially the same plate thickness, thereby suppressing the occurrence of sink marks peculiar to resin molding. Also, the material cost of the resin material can be suppressed.

Here, the recessed bottom wall portion 452e is not necessarily required to ensure the function of the two-layer gear 452. On the other hand, the starting gear tooth 452b1 and the sliding wall portion 452d are formed in a manner in which they are connected by the recessed bottom wall portion 452e. Therefore, it is possible to disperse the impact when the starting gear tooth 452b1 comes into contact with the reverse gear 453 (see FIG. 23(b)).

The pushback rib 452f is connected to the recess bottom wall portion 452e of the second recess portion 452b4. Here, the direction of the line of force of the force F generated when the reverse gear 453 is brought into contact with the starting gear tooth 452b1 (see FIG. 23(b)) is directed toward the pushback rib 452f. As a result, even when a space is formed in an area surrounded by the sliding wall portion 452d of the double-layer gear 452, the wall portion formed by the tooth bottom of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2, and the recessed bottom wall portion 452e, the push-back rib 452f is formed. can improve the resistance against the force F. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deformation of the starting gear tooth 452b1 due to the impact at the time of contact.

As shown in FIG. 20(b), gear teeth 452a are formed around the circumference of the two-layer gear 452. As shown in FIG. Since the gear teeth 452a are always meshed with the transmission gear 451 (see FIG. 21(b)), the two-layer gear 452 is always rotated when the sliding member 420 slides up and down (see FIG. 21(a)). .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 26, the details of the movement of the compound action unit 400, that is, the actions of the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 that are moved by transmission of the driving force of the driving device 470 will be described. do. 21 to 26 describe the operation of the compound action unit 400 in chronological order. 21 to 26, illustration of the rear cover 430 is omitted in order to facilitate understanding.

21(a) and 22(a) are rear views of the compound action unit 400, and FIGS. 21(b) and 22(b) are rear views of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453. FIG. 21 shows a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. A state in which the end portion of the shape receiving portion 453d is arranged to face the first recess portion 452b3 of the two-layer gear 452 is illustrated. 21(b) and 22(b), in the two-layer gear 452, the dividing gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d are illustrated by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are illustrated by imaginary lines. be.

As shown in FIG. 21(b), in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position, the reversing gear 453 is such that the arc-shaped concave portion 453c of the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d prevents the two-layer gear 452 from sliding. The surface is circumscribed by the wall portion 452d. Thereby, the posture of the reversing gear 453 can be maintained.

In this case, the mechanical engagement between the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d and the sliding wall portion 452d acts as a holding mechanism for maintaining the attitude of the reversing gear 453. As shown in FIG. Therefore, in order to maintain the posture of the reversing gear 453, it is not necessary to dispose other members such as elastic springs.

In addition, the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 and the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 abut on both sides of a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the two-layer gear 452 and the rotating shaft of the reversing gear 453. be done. Therefore, the rotation of the reversing gear 453 can be prevented regardless of the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453, and the posture of the reversing gear 453 can be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 22(b), when the pair of slide members 420 is moved, the transmission gear 451 that meshes with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 among the plurality of transmission gears 451 is rotated. Along with the rotation, the other transmission gear 451 and the two-layer gear 452 meshing with the transmission gear 451 with the gear teeth 452 are also rotated. On the other hand, since the reverse gear 453 is not meshed with the two-layer gear 452, it is maintained in the same posture as the retracted position.

While the pair of slide members 420 are moving, the arcuate recess 453c of the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d receives sliding friction from the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452. As shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the arc-shaped concave portion 453c of the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d is in contact with the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, thereby suppressing the concentration of sliding friction in one place. Frictional force can be distributed over the entire arcuate recess 453c. As a result, it is possible to suppress local application of a large force to the reversing gear 453 from the two-layer gear 452 . In addition, the effect of maintaining the attitude of the reversing gear 453 can be improved by increasing the contact points between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 .

23(a) and 23(b) are rear views of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453. FIG. Note that FIG. 23(a) shows a state in which the two-layer gear 452 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise from FIG. 22(b) in a rear view, and FIG. A state in which the two-layer gear 452 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the rear view is illustrated. In FIG. 23, the dividing gear tooth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 are illustrated by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As described above with reference to FIG. 22(b), before the reversing gear 453 abuts against the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452, the end of the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 contacts the two-layer gear. 452 is arranged to face the first recessed portion 452b3.

At this time, since the end of the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d arranged to face the first recessed portion 452b3 is not in contact with the two-layer gear 452, the effect of maintaining the posture of the reverse gear 453 is canceled, and at least 1 rotation direction (clockwise direction on the paper in FIG. 22(b)).

As shown in FIG. 23(a), the two-layer gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. is rotated before That is, the reversing gear 453 is rotated by the sliding friction applied from the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 to the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 . At this time, the reversing gear 453 is rotated in such a manner that the engaging projecting receiving portion 453 d enters the first recessed portion 452 b 3 of the two-layer gear 452 .

That is, the reversing gear 453 is slightly rotated by the sliding friction applied from the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 to the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23(a)), and then It abuts on the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the layer gear 452 (see FIG. 23(b)). This can suppress the impact when the reversing gear 453 and the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 come into contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 23(b), the position where the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 begin to abut is the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the two-layer gear 452 and the rotation axis of the reversing gear 453. It is formed at a position (upper in FIG. 23(b)) returned to the opposite side of the two-layer gear 452 in the rotational direction.

As a result, the force applied to the reversing gear 453 when the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 begin to abut each other has a component directed in the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 and It is transmitted separately to the component that goes to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress excessive rotation of the reversing gear 453 when the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start contacting each other.

That is, when the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 begins to abut against the reverse gear 453, the teeth do not mesh with each other from the beginning. Therefore, if the force applied in the rotational direction of the reversing gear 453 when it abuts against the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 is excessive, the reversing gear 453 rotates at a higher speed than the two-layer gear 452 ( move). In that case, there is a possibility that meshing between the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 may fail.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the force applied from the two-layer gear 452 to the reversing gear 453 at the start of contact is also generated in the direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 (direction toward the rotation axis). , the rotational resistance of the reversing gear 453 can be temporarily increased. That is, the rotation resistance can be increased by pressing the reversing gear 453 against the rotating shaft. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive rotation of the reversing gear 453 when the two-layer gear 452 starts contacting the starting gear teeth 452b1.

In addition, since the starting gear teeth 452b1 and 453b1 are formed to be larger than the gear teeth 452a of the two-layer gear 452, it is possible to prevent disengagement of the teeth when the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 start meshing. .

Here, the larger the gear teeth, the greater the play (backlash) that is formed. become. That is, when the gear teeth are miniaturized, even a slight deviation in the positional relationship (phase relationship) between the meshed gears may cause the meshed teeth to be shifted by one tooth.

In this embodiment, the transmission gear 451 to which the driving force of the driving device 470 (see FIG. 10) is transmitted is more important than the play (backlash) generated between the transmission gear 451 and the gear teeth 452a of the double-layer gear 452. The play (backlash) generated between the starting gear tooth 452b1 and the starting gear tooth 453b1 of the reverse gear 453 is larger. That is, the phase shift of the two-layer gear 452 caused by the relationship with the transmission gear 451 is smaller than the phase shift between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 and is permissible. As a result, it is possible to prevent deviation of the teeth when the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 start meshing.

When the two-layer gear 452 begins to abut against the reversing gear 453 in the rotational direction, the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 begins to abut against the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 . That is, the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d is used as a substitute for the gear tooth that begins to mesh with the starting gear tooth 452b1. Thereby, the durability of the reversing gear 453 can be improved.

That is, the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d formed with the arc-shaped concave portion 453c is not a portion that engages with the gear teeth of the two-layer gear 452, but contacts the outer peripheral surface of the two-layer gear 452 to act as a reverse gear. It is part of the role of maintaining the posture of 453. Therefore, unlike the gear teeth, the size is not limited according to the size of the mating gear teeth. In addition, it is desirable that the portion that abuts when the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start contacting is large and strong, and the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d is attached to that portion. By using it, the durability of the reversing gear 453 can be improved.

When the slide member 420 is moved by the driving force of the driving device 470 (see FIG. 10), the transmission gear 451 meshing with the permanent rack gear 414a is rotated, and the two-layer gear 452 is rotated accordingly. That is, the driving device 470 and the two-layer gear 452 are not directly meshed, but at least the transmission leg 422 meshing with the driving gear 473 is interposed between the driving device 470 and the two-layer gear 452. do. As a result, the impact when the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 abut against each other is transmitted to the driving device 470 in a relaxed state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving device 470 from being damaged by the impact at the time of contact.

24(a) and 25(a) are rear views of the compound action unit 400, and FIGS. 24(b) and 25(b) are rear views of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453. FIG. 24 shows a state in which the pair of half-moon members 460 are rotated by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 22(a), and FIG. The state immediately after completing 180 degree rotation is illustrated. 24(b) and 25(b), in the two-layer gear 452, the dividing gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d are illustrated by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are illustrated by imaginary lines. be.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), when the half-moon member 460 is rotated, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reverse gear 453 are meshed.

In this embodiment, the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 are formed larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear tooth 452b1 that abuts against the reversing gear 453 at the start of abutment with the reversing gear 453 is improved, and damage to the two-layer gear 452 can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24(b), the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 are meshed with the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 and 453b2, so that the backlash is greater when the meshing continues than when the meshing starts. can be made smaller. As a result, the rotation of the reversing gear 453 can be made smooth when the meshing continues. Therefore, it is possible to improve both the durability of the starting gear teeth 452b1 that collide at the start of meshing and the smoothness of rotation of the reverse gear 453 .

In addition, since the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 are formed smaller than the gear teeth 452a, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reverse gear 453 mesh in the circumferential direction. error (play) is smaller than the error in meshing between the gear teeth 452 a and the transmission gear 451 . As a result, the accuracy of the operation of the reversing gear 453 when meshing continues can be maintained below the meshing error between the gear teeth 452 a and the transmission gear 451 .

As shown in FIG. 25, when the half-moon member 460 has finished rotating 180 degrees, the engagement between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 is released, and the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 and the circle of the reversing gear are separated. The arc-shaped concave portion 453c abuts on the surface. Therefore, the posture of the reversing gear 453 is maintained, and the half-moon member 460 in which the locking protrusion 453e (see FIG. 12) of the reversing gear 453 and the arcuate wall portion 461c (see FIG. 15) are fitted so as not to rotate relative to each other. attitude is maintained.

Next, referring to FIG. 26, the operation of the pawl member 463 of the half-moon member 460 will be described. 26(a) and 26(b) are partial rear views of the compound motion unit 400. FIG.

26, the illustration of the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 is partially omitted, and the limited rack gear 414b is visible and is enlarged. 26(a) shows the state immediately before the starting gear tooth 441a of the irregular gear 441 comes into contact with the starting gear tooth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b, and FIG. 26(b) shows the slide rack 442 moving. The state reached to the end is illustrated.

The engagement between the deformed gear tooth 441 and the limited rack gear 414b becomes defective if the deformed gear 441 is not brought into contact with the limited rack gear 414b in an appropriate posture. That is, if the deformed gear 441 contacts the limited rack gear 414b in a posture in which the starting gear teeth 441a of the deformed gear 441 and the starting gear teeth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b abut, they are meshed well. On the other hand, for example, if the gear teeth of the deformed gear 441 other than the starting gear teeth 441a and the starting gear teeth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b are in contact with each other, a meshing failure occurs in the middle of the meshing. , the rotation of the deformed gear 441 cannot be continued. In this case, the sliding movement of the slide member 420 is also stopped, causing malfunction of the slide member 420 .

In this embodiment, the slide rack 442 is maintained in the laterally outward direction by the biasing force of the biasing spring 442c. The deformed gear 441 receives force from the slide rack 442 via the transmission gear 443 . Therefore, the posture of the deformed gear 441 can be maintained in the appropriate posture described above.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the deformed gear 441 is engaged with the limited rack gear 414b and rotated, thereby rotating the transmission gear 443 and moving the slide rack 442. As shown in FIG. The slide rack 442 comes into contact with the driving lever 467 during movement, and the driving lever 467 rotates. Since the drive lever 467 is fastened and fixed to the center gear 462 (see FIG. 15) of the half-moon member 460, the rotation of the drive lever 467 causes the center gear 462 to rotate. As a result, the crank gear 464 is rotated (see FIG. 14), and the claw member 463 is moved in the direction in which it protrudes. Therefore, the claw member 463 can be moved in conjunction with the movement of the slide member 420 .

Next, a compound action unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the cutout portion 422d of the leg 422 to be transmitted is arranged to face the front side of the drive gear 473 when the slide member 420 is arranged at the retracted position. 24, the notch 2422d of the leg 2422 to be transmitted faces the front side of the drive gear 473 while the slide member 2420 moves from the retracted position to the extended position. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

27 and 28 are front views of a pair of slide members 2420. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. A state in which the gear 453b1 (see FIG. 23(b)) begins to abut is illustrated. Also, the illustration of the driving device 470 is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIG. 27, in a state where the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged at the retracted position, the front side of the drive gear 473 (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 27) is covered with the front tooth width direction side surface of the rack gear 422a. The front wall portion 2422c is overlapped.

As shown in FIG. 28, the pair of slide members 2420 is placed at a position where the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the starting gear teeth 453b1 of the reverse gear 453 (see FIG. 23(b)) begin to abut. In this state, a notch portion 2422d is formed on the front side of the driving gear 473 (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 27). The notch portion 2422d is formed in a circular shape slightly larger than the addendum circle of the drive gear 473 .

As shown in FIG. 28, the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state separated from the outline of the notch 2422d in a front view (specific phase position). Therefore, the drive gear 473 can be pulled out through the notch 2422 d formed in the transmitted leg 2422 , so that the drive gear 473 can be replaced without removing the slide member 2420 from the base member 2410 . Therefore, the maintainability of the driving gear 473 can be improved.

In this embodiment, the pair of slide members 2420 is moved from the retracted position, and the specific phase position is set in a state where the starting gear teeth 452b1 and the starting gear teeth 453b1 (see FIG. 23(a)) of the second gear group 450 begin to abut. Therefore, the maintenance worker can move the slide member 2420 to the specific phase position by relying on the increase in resistance when moving the slide member 2420 .

That is, when the slide member 2420 is moved, the transmission gear 451 (see FIG. 24(a)) is always in mesh with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 2410. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the resistance to rotation of the transmission gear 451 increases, it can be grasped as movement resistance of the slide member 2420 . Here, since the transmission gear 451 meshes with the two-layer gear 452 , the resistance generated when the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 start meshing is transmitted to the transmission gear 451 . Then, the resistance to rotation of the transmission gear 451 increases, so the movement resistance of the slide member 2420 increases. As a result, the maintenance worker can move the slide member 2420 to the specific phase position by relying on the increased movement resistance of the slide member 2420 .

Here, since the front wall portion 2422c does not overlap the driving gear 473 at the specific phase position, the effect of suppressing the wobbling of the driving gear 473 by bringing the front wall portion 2422c into contact with the driving gear 473 is weakened.

In this embodiment, a specific phase position (a state in which the cutout portion 2422d matches the drive gear 473) is formed during the movement of the pair of slide members 2420, that is, while the drive gear 473 is rotating. Therefore, when the drive gear 473 approaches the specific phase position, the drive gear 473 has a sufficient speed in the rotational direction (axis-perpendicular direction). Therefore, the wobble of the drive gear 473, which tends to occur at a specific phase position, can be alleviated by the momentum of the drive gear 473 in the rotational direction.

The base member 2410 has a triangular protrusion 2415 protruding toward the center (the center in FIG. 27) in the assembled state. It is possible to easily move the pair of slide members 2420 to the specific phase position by relying on the triangular protrusion 2415 .

Here, when removing the drive motor 472 together with the drive gear 473 in maintenance of the game machine 13, it is necessary to arrange the slide member 2420 at a specific phase position. However, since the drive motor 472 is arranged on the front side in such a manner as to hide the slide member 2420 (see FIG. 9), it is difficult to visually confirm that the notch 2422d is aligned with the drive gear 473 from the front side. be. Therefore, it is difficult to dispose the slide member 2420 at the specific phase position.

On the other hand, since the triangular projection 2415 is arranged at a position visible from the front side, it is possible to easily align the slide member 2410 with the aid of the triangular projection 2415 in maintenance. In this embodiment, when the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged at a specific phase position, the triangular projections 2415 and the triangular patterns formed at the ends of the slide members 2420 form a series of patterns. This makes it easier for maintenance workers to remove the driving gear 473 and perform maintenance.

Next, the two-layer gear 3452 and the reverse gear 3453 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case where the starting gear teeth 452b1 and 453b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 are formed large as viewed in the rotation axis direction, that is, the case where the tooth depth and tooth thickness are increased has been described. , In the double layer gear 3452 and the reverse gear 3453 in the third embodiment, the starting gear teeth 3452b1 and 3453b1 are formed to have the same shape as the other gear teeth when viewed in the rotation axis direction, but are formed to be large in the axial direction. That is, the tooth width is formed large. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

29(a) is a front view of the two-layer gear 3452, FIG. 29(b) is a bottom view of the two-layer gear 3452, and FIG. 29(c) is a side view of the two-layer gear 3452. .

As shown in FIG. 29, the two-layer gear 3452 includes a starting gear tooth 3452b1 which is disposed adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d and has a large tooth width, and a tooth root side of the starting gear tooth 3452b1. A circumferential rib 3452e extending from the circumferential side along the concentric circle of the two-layer gear 3452 and fixed to the front end face of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the starting gear tooth 3452b1 on the root side, and the starting gear. It mainly includes a radial rib 3452f that extends from the radial side surface of the tooth root side of the tooth 3452b1 toward the rotation shaft and is fixed to the front side end surface of the main body of the two-layer gear 3452.

The starting gear tooth 3452b1 has substantially the same tooth depth and tooth thickness as the intermediate gear tooth 452b2, but has a larger tooth width than the intermediate gear tooth 452b2. As a result, the rigidity of the starting gear teeth 3452b1 can be improved, and breakage of the starting gear teeth 3452b1 at the start of meshing with the reverse gear 3453 can be suppressed.

The circumferential rib 3452e is widest in the axial direction of the two-layer gear 3452 at the side surface of the starting gear tooth 3452b1, that is, the extension base point, and the width gradually decreases as the distance from the starting gear tooth 3452b1 increases. That is, as shown in FIG. 29(b), it is visually recognized in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The circumferential rib 3452e can improve the rigidity of the starting gear tooth 3452b along the circumferential direction of the two-layer gear 3452, and can prevent the starting gear tooth 3452b1 from bending in the rotational direction.

Circumferential rib 3452e extends to intermediate gear tooth 452b2 in the vicinity of starting gear tooth 3452b1 (in this embodiment, up to two adjacent to starting gear tooth 3452b1). This makes it possible to use the circumferential rib 3452e to generate a force that pulls the root of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 toward the starting gear tooth 3452b1.

That is, when the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the starting gear tooth 3452b1 and the reverse gear 3453 mesh with each other, the deformation (deformation in the direction away from the starting gear tooth 3452b1) occurring in the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 is caused by the circumferential rib 3452e. can be suppressed by

The reason why the circumferential rib 3452e is fixed only up to the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the starting gear tooth 3452b1 is that the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 located away from the starting gear tooth 3452b1 is reversed after rotation reaches a steady state. By meshing with the gear 3453 .

That is, when the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 distant from the starting gear tooth 3452b1 (for example, the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the middle of the pair of starting gear teeth 3452b1) meshes with the reverse gear 3453, the rotation is already in a steady state. , the reversing gear 3453 has a sufficient rotational speed. Therefore, the force that the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 receives from the reverse gear 3453 is small, and reinforcement by the circumferential rib 3452e is unnecessary.

The radial rib 3452f extends from the radial side surface of the tooth root side of the starting gear tooth 3452b1 toward the rotation shaft and is fixed to the front end surface of the main body of the two-layer gear 3452. The radial stiffness of 3452b1 can be improved. As a result, the reverse gear 3453 meshing with the two-layer gear 3452 is moved in the axial direction, and the rattling causes the front end of the starting gear tooth 3452b1 (upper end in FIG. 29(b)) to move toward the rotation shaft. It is possible to prevent the starting gear tooth 3452b1 from falling down even if it receives the force. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear teeth 3452b1 can be improved.

30(a) is a front view of the reversing gear 3453, FIG. 30(b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear 3453, and FIG. 30(c) is a side view of the reversing gear 3453. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 30, the reversing gear 3453 extends along the concentric circle of the reversing gear 3453 from the start gear tooth 3453b1 adjacent to the arcuate recess 453c and the side surface of the start gear tooth 3453b1 on the root side. and a circumferential rib 3453 f fixed to the main body of the reversing gear 3453 .

The starting gear tooth 3453b1 has substantially the same tooth depth and tooth thickness as the other intermediate gear teeth 453b2, but has a larger tooth width than the other intermediate gear teeth 453b2. This can improve the rigidity of the starting gear tooth 3453b1.

The circumferential rib 3453f is axially widest at the side surface of the starting gear tooth 3453b1, that is, at the extension base point, and the width gradually decreases with increasing distance from the starting gear tooth 3453b1. That is, as shown in FIG. 30(b), it is visually recognized in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The circumferential rib 3453f can prevent the starting gear tooth 3453b1 from bending in the rotational direction.

In addition, the circumferential rib 3453f extends toward the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d adjacent to the starting gear tooth 3453b1. This improves the rigidity of the starting gear tooth 3453b1 in the direction in which force is applied from the two-layer gear 3452 (the direction from the starting gear tooth 3453b1 toward the adjacent engaging projecting receiving portion 453d). Therefore, the durability of the starting gear tooth 3453b1 can be improved.

Next, the two-layer gear 4452 and the reverse gear 4453 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case where the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 is formed large as viewed in the rotation axis direction, that is, the case where the tooth depth and the tooth thickness are increased has been described. In the two-layer gear 4452, the starting gear teeth 4452b1 are formed to have the same shape as the other gear teeth when viewed in the rotation axis direction, but are formed to have a large tooth width. The face width is formed in such a way that it becomes more shortened away from the starting gear tooth 4452b1. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

31(a) is a front view of the two-layer gear 4452, FIG. 31(b) is a bottom view of the two-layer gear 4452, and FIG. 31(c) is XXXIc-XXXIc of FIG. 31(b). 4452 is a cross-sectional view of double layer gear 4452 at line.

As shown in FIG. 31, the two-layer gear 4452 includes a pair of starting gear teeth 4452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d, an intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 formed between the starting gear teeth 4452b1, and a starting gear tooth 4452b1. and a plate-like portion 4452e covering the front side surface of the teeth 4452b1 and the intermediate gear teeth 4452b2.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), the tooth width of the dividing gear tooth 4452b composed of the starting gear tooth 4452b1 and the intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 is the largest at the starting gear tooth 4452b1, and the tooth width of the intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 is the starting gear tooth 4452b1. It is shortened stepwise with reference to the starting gear tooth 4452b1 as it goes away from the gear tooth 4452b1.

The plate-like portion 4452e is formed in a manner to protrude from the tooth bottom side of the dividing gear tooth 4452b to a position equivalent to the addendum circle in a front view, and covers the front side surface of the dividing gear tooth 4452b. The plate-like portion 4452e is formed to draw a smooth curve when viewed from the bottom in accordance with the forming position of the front side surface of the dividing gear tooth 4452b (see FIG. 31(b)).

Here, consider the case where the front side surface of the dividing gear tooth 4452b is formed on the same plane, and the plate-like portion 4452e is also formed on the same plane. In this case, the disc portion 452c and the plate-like portion 4452e are arranged in order to increase the allowable amount of displacement of the reversing gear 4453 in the axial direction of the two-layer gear 4452 when the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 start meshing. , the axial position of the reversing gear 4453 during rotation is not fixed. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to accurately determine the axial position of the rotating reversing gear 4453, the reversing gear 4453 is slightly displaced in the axial direction at the start of meshing, causing the reversing gear 4453 to move toward the outer periphery of the plate-like portion 4452e. It may come into contact with the surface and cause misalignment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the positional deviation in the axial direction (upward in FIG. can be maximally allowed near start gear tooth 4452b1 where .

In addition, the plate-like portion 4452e is formed in a manner of drawing a smooth curve in which the distance from the disc portion 452c is shortened as the plate-like portion 4452e is separated from the starting gear tooth 4452b1 in a bottom view (see FIG. 31(b)). Therefore, as the reversing gear 4453 is brought into contact with the plate-like portion 4452e, the axial position of the reversing gear 4453 can be corrected more greatly as the engagement progresses (Fig. 31(b), moving downward). can be done). Therefore, the positional deviation in the axial direction when the two-layer gear 4452 and the reverse gear 4453 are meshed can be corrected as the meshing progresses.

32(a) is a front view of the reversing gear 4453, FIG. 32(b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear 4453, and FIG. FIG. 14 is a partial side view of a reversing gear 4453;

As shown in FIG. 32, the reversing gear 4453 includes a pair of starting gear teeth 4453b1 arranged adjacent to each other in the pair of arcuate recesses 453c and an intermediate gear formed in a region sandwiched between the starting gear teeth 4453b1. and gear teeth 4453b2.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), the reverse gear 4453 is formed in such a manner that the width of the starting gear teeth 4453b1 is maximized, and the width of the intermediate gear teeth 4453b2 decreases as the distance from the starting gear teeth 4453b1 increases. . The degree of shortening (inclination of the line connecting the upper ends of each gear tooth in FIG. 32(b)) is the degree of shortening of the face width of the dividing gear tooth 4452b of the double-layer gear 4452 (each gear tooth in FIG. 31(b) It is formed gently compared to the slope of the line connecting the upper ends of the

As shown in FIG. 32(c), the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 have widthwise end faces except for the intermediate gear teeth 4453b2 which are formed farthest from the pair of engagement projecting receiving portions 453d. (Fig. 32(b) upper end face) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the engagement projecting receiving portion side. As a result, it is possible to more rapidly correct the positional deviation while maintaining a large allowable amount of relative positional deviation in the axial direction when the reverse gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 start meshing.

That is, when the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reverse gear 4453 are meshed with the two-layer gear 4452, the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 are located on the engagement protruding receiving portion side (the shortest tooth width side, FIG. 32(c)). right side). Therefore, for example, compared to the case where the dimensions in the tooth width direction of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 are constant on the longest tooth width side (left side in FIG. 32(c)), the plate-like portion 4452e at the start of meshing A large gap (play) between the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to ensure a large allowable amount of positional deviation in the axial direction when the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 start meshing.

On the other hand, when the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reverse gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 are engaged with each other, the tooth width longest side of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 (the left side in FIG. It enters into the back side of the plate-like portion 4452e (downward in FIG. 31(b)). As a result, for example, compared to the case where the dimensions in the tooth width direction of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 are constant on the shortest side of the tooth width (the right side in FIG. It is possible to reduce the interval (play) between the immediately preceding plate-like portion 4452e and the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 (when escaping).

Therefore, when the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 mesh with the two-layer gear 4452, there is a gap between the plate-like portion 4452e and the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 from the start of meshing of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 to the release of meshing. The gap (play) can be reduced. This makes it possible to more rapidly correct the positional deviation between the reverse gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 .

Further, in this embodiment, the inclination of the plate-like portion 4452e (see FIG. 31(b)) is opposite to the inclination of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 (see FIG. 32(c)). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of rapidly correcting the positional deviation while maintaining a large allowable amount of positional deviation in the axial direction at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 .

The widthwise end surface of the intermediate gear tooth 4453b2 (upper end surface in FIG. 32(b)) formed farthest from the pair of engaging projecting receiving portions 453d is formed of a plane perpendicular to the rotating shaft of the reversing gear 4453. be.

Next, the second gear group 5450 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case where the two-layer gear 452 is formed only from a single resin material has been described. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

33 is a front view of the double layer gear 5452. FIG. As shown in FIG. 33, the two-layer gear 5452 has an embedding hole 5452g formed in a starting gear tooth 5452b1 along a direction parallel to the rotation axis, and an embedding member 5452h is embedded in the embedding hole 5452g.

The embedding hole 5452g is formed in the shape of a bottomed hole having a circular cross-sectional diameter, and the embedding member 5452h is formed in the shape of a column having a diameter equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the embedding hole 5452g. Thereby, the embedding member 5452h is fitted and fixed in the embedding hole 5452g.

The embedded member 5452h is a columnar member made of a metal magnetic material or a plastic magnetic material, and is divided into an S pole and an N pole on a plane along the axis. In FIGS. 33 to 35, the black-painted side of the embedded member 5452h is the N pole, and the opposite side is the S pole.

34 is a partial front view of the second gear group 5450. FIG. 34 shows the state immediately before the starting gear tooth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 abuts on the engaging projection receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 5453. FIG. Also, the disc portion 452c and the gear teeth 452a of the two-layer gear 5452 and the transmission gear 451 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 34, the reverse gear 5453 has an embedding hole 5453f drilled in the starting gear tooth 5453b1 along a direction parallel to the axis, and an embedding member 5453g is embedded in the embedding hole 5453f. As a result, the embedding member 5453g is fitted and fixed in the embedding hole 5453f.

The embedded member 5453g is a columnar member made of a metal magnetic material or a plastic magnetic material, and is divided into an S pole and an N pole on a plane along the axis.

As shown in FIG. 34, the plane that bisects the magnetic pole is a plane formed along the radial direction and passing through the axis, and the starting gear teeth 5452b1, 5453b1 are embedded with opposite poles facing each other. That is, the starting gear tooth 5452b1 has an N pole formed on the side facing the starting gear tooth 5453b1 when engaged (upper side in FIG. 34), and the starting gear tooth 5453b1 is formed on the side facing the starting gear tooth 5452b1 when engaged (lower side in FIG. 34). side) is formed with an S pole. As a result, in the meshing between the two-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453, a magnetic force is generated that attracts the meshing gear teeth 5452b1 and 5453b1.

That is, as the two-layer gear 5452 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 34 from the state shown in FIG. Attracted to 5452b1. As a result, the reversing gear 5453 is attracted by the magnetic force and rotated before the starting gear teeth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 and the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453 come into contact with each other. Therefore, compared to the case where the starting gear tooth 5452b1 abuts on the reversing gear 5453 in a stationary state, the impact at the time of contact and the load received by the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 at the time of contact can be reduced.

35 is a partial front view of the second gear group 5450. FIG. 35 illustrates a state in which the two-layer gear 5452 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 35 by a predetermined amount from the state in FIG. Also, the disc portion 452c and the gear teeth 452a of the two-layer gear 5452 and the transmission gear 451 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 35, a gap is formed between the two-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453 in front of the two-layer gear 5452 in the rotational direction. As a result, a load is applied to the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d not only when the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 start contacting each other, but also while the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 are being rotated by meshing. can be suppressed. Therefore, the strength required for the engaging projection receiving portion 453d can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the engaging projection receiving portion 453d can be improved.

Next, the second gear group 6450 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case where the two-layer gear 452 is integrally formed has been described, but the two-layer gear 6452 in the sixth embodiment does not have the starting gear teeth 452b1, and the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are separated. body profiled gear tooth member 6452g. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

36 is a front exploded perspective view of the dual layer gear 6452. FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 36 illustrates a state in which the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is removed from the disc portion 452c. In the present embodiment, the variant gear tooth member 6452g is formed of a metal material such as iron, so that the portion other than the variant gear tooth member 6452g of the two-layer gear 6452 is compared to the portion integrally formed of a resin material. The rigidity of the profiled gear tooth member 6452g is increased. In addition, by partially using a metal material, the weight can be reduced compared to the case where the entire two-layer gear 6452 is formed of a metal material, and the driving force required to rotate the two-layer gear 6452 can be suppressed. can.

As shown in FIG. 36, the two-layer gear 6452 includes a pair of deformed gear tooth members 6452g, an insertion hole 6452c1 which is a hole through which the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is inserted, and which is bored in the disc portion 452c, A gear tooth side cutout 6452b5 formed between the first recessed portion 452b3 and the second recessed portion 452b4 and sandwiching the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g, and the sliding wall portion 452d. A sliding part notch 6452d1 in which the sliding receiving part 6452g3 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is sandwiched, and L-shaped hooks formed at both ends of the sliding wall part 452d. A mold receiving portion 6452d2 is mainly provided.

The deformed gear tooth member 6452g includes a gear tooth body portion 6452g1 having a shape in which the starting gear tooth 452b1 in the first embodiment is extended to the tooth bottom side, and a gear tooth body portion 6452g1 extending from the end opposite to the tip of the gear tooth body portion 6452g1 to the back surface. A cylindrical insertion pin 6452g2 protruding from the side, a sliding receiving portion 6452g3 whose side surface forms part of the sliding wall portion 452d in the assembled state (see FIG. 37), and a gear tooth main portion 6452g1 slide against each other. A connecting portion 6452g4 that connects with the receiving portion 6452g3 is mainly provided.

The gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is formed such that the tooth thickness of the portion sandwiched between the gear tooth side cutouts 6452b5 is equal to or slightly larger than the size of the gear tooth side cutouts 6452b5. As a result, the gear tooth body portion 6452g1 is sandwiched between the gear tooth side notches 6452b5 in the assembled state (see FIG. 37).

The sliding receiving portion 6452g3 is formed such that its outer peripheral surface is smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the sliding wall portion 452d in the assembled state (see FIG. 37). The outer peripheral surface of the connecting portion 6452g4 faces the recessed bottom wall portion 452e with a slight gap in the assembled state (see FIG. 37).

In the assembled state (see FIG. 37), the insertion pin 6452g2 is inserted into the insertion hole 6452c1, and the gear tooth body portion 6452g1 is sandwiched between the gear tooth side notches 6452b5. Further, the connecting portion 6452g4 is arranged to face the recess bottom wall portion 452e of the second recess portion 452b4 with a slight gap therebetween, and the inner peripheral side of the sliding receiving portion 6452g3 is brought into contact with the hook-shaped receiving portion 6452d2. As a result, the gear tooth body portion 6452g1 is brought into contact with the reverse gear 453, so that the amount of rotation around the insertion hole 6452c1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 37 is a front view of the two-layer gear 6452 and the reversing gear 453. FIG. 37 shows a state in which the gear tooth body portion 6452g1 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is in contact with the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 453, and the disc portion 452c is shown by imaginary lines. be done.

As shown in FIG. 37, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g can cause the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 to receive the load applied from the reversing gear 453. As shown in FIG.

That is, even if the variant gear tooth member 6452g is made of a metal material, the portion supporting the variant gear tooth member 6452g is made of a resin material. In addition, the two-layer gear 6452 is formed to have a substantially uniform thickness in the radial direction in order to prevent the occurrence of sink marks during molding, so the rigidity is not sufficient. Therefore, when the deformed gear tooth member 6452g moves (rotates about the insertion hole 6452c1) due to the load generated when the two-layer gear 6452 and the reverse gear 453 are brought into contact with each other, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g presses against There is a risk that parts other than the deformed gear tooth member 6452g (the recessed bottom wall portion 452e, etc.) that receive the deformation will be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g begins to move in a direction to fill a slight gap formed between the outer peripheral surface of the connecting portion 6452g4 and the recess bottom wall portion 452e (with the insertion hole 6452c1 as the axis). ), the sliding receiving portion 6452g3 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is pressed against the arcuate recess 453c of the reversing gear 453. As shown in FIG. The arc-shaped concave portion 453c is a portion having sufficient radial thickness and high rigidity.

As a result, the odd-shaped gear tooth member 6452g can receive the load applied from the reversing gear 453 to the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453, and the portion of the two-layer gear 6452 other than the odd-shaped gear tooth member 6452g can receive the load. (the recessed bottom wall portion 452e, etc.) can be suppressed. Also, the arc-shaped concave portion 453c of the reverse gear 453 can be used to support the deformed gear tooth member 6452g.

Next, a compound action unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case where the position of the slide member 420 when the meniscus member 460 rotates is limited to one way has been described. At least two positions of the sliding member 420 can be formed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

38(a) to 38(c) are rear views of the dual layer gear 7452. FIG. Note that FIG. 38(a) shows a stationary state in which the rotation of the two-layer gear 7452 is stopped, and FIG. A state in which the speed is V1 is illustrated, and FIG. 38(c) illustrates a state in which the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is a second rotational speed V2 higher than the boundary speed Vb.

For ease of understanding, illustration of the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c is omitted. This also applies to subsequent drawings. Also, the boundary speed Vb means the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 when the projecting gear member 7452e is switched from the recessed state to the extended state.

As shown in FIG. 38, the two-layer gear 7452 is formed with a guide groove 7452d, which is a groove with a rectangular cross section formed radially outward from the rotating shaft, and a width slightly smaller than the groove width of the guide groove 7452d. and a protruding gear member 7452e having a gear-tooth-shaped tip, and an urging spring 7452f connecting the protruding gear member 7452e and the rotating shaft of the two-layer gear 7452.

Three guide grooves 7452d are formed by dividing the outer periphery of the two-layer gear 7452 into three equal parts in the circumferential direction, and a projecting gear member 7452e and a biasing spring 7452f are provided in each of the guide grooves 7452d. Intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the two-layer gear 7452 connecting the guide grooves 7452d.

As for the projecting gear members 7452e, the projecting gear members 7452e1 to 7452e3 are formed with the same mass, and the biasing springs 7452f are formed with the same spring constant.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), when the two-layer gear 7452 is in a stopped state, the projecting gear member 7452e is retracted toward the rotation shaft from the surface where the bottoms of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected. At this time, the irregular spring 7452f has a natural length.

As shown in FIG. 38(b), when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotational speed V1 lower than the boundary speed Vb, the projecting gear member 7452e is moved radially outward of the two-layer gear 7452. the power to do so. The projecting gear member 7452e is extended to a position where this force and the biasing force of the biasing spring 7452f are balanced. In the overhanging state, the protruding gear member 7452e is located closer to the rotation shaft than the surface where the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected (retracted state).

Therefore, as will be described later, when the two-layer gear 7452 rotates at the first rotation speed V1, the two-layer gear 7452 does not start meshing with the reverse gear 7453 (see FIG. 42). That is, the two-layer gear 7452 idles with respect to the reverse gear 7453 .

As shown in FIG. 38(c), when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotational speed V2 higher than the boundary speed Vb, the protruding gear member 7452e attempts to move radially outward of the two-layer gear 7452. the power to do so. The projecting gear member 7452e is extended to a position where this force and the biasing force of the biasing spring 7452f are balanced. In the overhanging state, the protruding gear member 7452e projects radially outward beyond the surface where the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected (overhanging state).

Therefore, as will be described later, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2, the projecting gear member 7452e of the two-layer gear 7452 contacts the reverse gear 7453 (see FIG. 39), Layer gear 7452 begins to mesh with reversing gear 7453 .

That is, whether or not the two-layer gear 7452 starts meshing with the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39) is determined by setting the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 higher or lower than the boundary speed Vb. can be selected. Therefore, by changing the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 during rotation (by changing the movement speed of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40) during movement), the half-moon member 460 (see FIG. 40) A plurality of variations of the placement of the slide member 420 when the is rotated can be prepared.

39-44, variations in placement of slide member 420 as meniscus member 460 begins to rotate will now be described. First, referring to FIGS. 39 to 41, a case (first speed pattern) in which the main driving gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2 immediately after the movement of the moving member 420 from the retracted position will be described.

FIGS. 39(a) to 39(e) are rear views of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 illustrating the rotation of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 in chronological order, FIG. 40(b), FIG. 41(a), and FIG. 41(b) are front views of the compound action unit 7400 showing the slide movement of the slide member 420 and the posture change of the meniscus member 460 in chronological order. To facilitate understanding, the illustration of the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c is omitted in FIG. 39, and the illustration of the fastening plate portion 471 and the drive motor 472 is omitted in FIGS.

39(a) and 40(a), 39(b) and 40(b), 39(c) and 41(a), and 39(d) and 41(b) are diagrams at approximately the same point in time, and are in correspondence with each other. In FIG. 39, the direction of rotation of the two-layer gear 7452 is indicated by an arrow, and as shown in FIG. formed in a manner that

As shown in FIG. 39(a), the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2 immediately after the start of movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40(a)), and the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated by a predetermined amount. , and the first protruding gear member 7452e1 abuts against the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39(b)). As a result, the reversing gear 7453 begins to rotate, and the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture (see FIG. 40(b)).

After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, so that the reversing gear 7453 continues to rotate and the posture of the half-moon member 460 changes. is continued (see FIGS. 39(c) and 41(a)).

After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 are meshed with each other, the second-layer gear 7452 is further rotated, so that the arc-shaped recessed portion 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is again engaged with the two-layer gear 7452. (see FIG. 39(d)), the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the semicircular member 460 with respect to the slide member 420 is fixed (see FIG. 41(b)).

After that, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26(b)), and stops rotating when the slide member 420 is stopped (see FIG. 39(e)). Thereafter, the protruding gear member 7452e is moved radially inward of the two-layer gear 7452 by the biasing force of the biasing spring 7452f.

Here, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated from FIG. 39(d) to the state of FIG. 39(e), the third protruding member 7452e3 and the first protruding member 7452e1 come into contact with the engaging projection receiving portion 453d. contact, and there is a possibility that the two-layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 will mesh again.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, an arc-shaped chamfered portion 7453e is formed at one end (upper end in FIG. 39(e)) of the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d.

When the third protruding member 7452e3 and the first protruding member 7452e1 are brought into contact with the chamfered portion 7453e, a radially inward force of the two-layer gear 7452 is applied to the third protruding member 7452e3 and the first protruding member 7452e1. As a result, before the third projecting member 7452e3 and the first projecting member 7452e1 mesh with the reversing gear 745, the third projecting member 7452e3 and the first projecting member 7452e1 can be respectively retracted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the two-layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 from meshing again.

Next, referring to FIGS. 42 to 44, immediately after the start of movement of moving member 420 from the retracted position, double layer gear 7452 rotates at first rotation speed V1, and during rotation, double layer gear 7452 rotates at the second rotation. A case (second speed pattern) in which rotation is performed at speed V2 (rotational speed V is changed) will be described.

42(a) to 42(e) are rear views of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 illustrating the rotation of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 in chronological order. 43(b), FIG. 44(a), and FIG. 44(b) are front views of the compound action unit 7400 showing the slide movement of the slide member 420 and the posture change of the meniscus member 460 in chronological order. 42, illustration of the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c is omitted, and illustrations of the fastening plate portion 471 and the drive motor 472 are omitted in FIGS.

42(a) and FIGS. 40(a), 42(b) and 43(a), FIGS. 42(c) and 43(b), FIGS. 42(d) and 44(a) ), and FIGS. 42(e) and 44(b) are diagrams at approximately the same point in time, and have a corresponding relationship with each other. In FIG. 42, the direction of rotation of the two-layer gear 7452 is indicated by an arrow, and as shown in FIG. is formed in a manner circumscribing the

As shown in FIG. 42(a), the two-layer gear 7452 rotates at the first rotational speed V1 immediately after the start of movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40(a)). Form.

Therefore, even if the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first protruding gear member 7452e1 does not come into contact with the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 7453. It is not started (see FIG. 42(b)). As a result, the slide member 420 is moved while the posture of the half-moon member 460 is maintained (see FIG. 43(a)).

The two-layer gear 7452 continues to rotate, and the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is changed to the second rotation speed V2 by the time the second protruding gear member 7452e2 approaches the engaging projection receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 7453. be done. As a result, the protruding gear member 7452e forms an overhanging state (see FIG. 42(c)), and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 comes into contact with the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d, thereby rotating the reversing gear 7453. As soon as it starts, the semicircular member 460 begins to change its posture (see FIG. 43(b)).

After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, so that the reversing gear 7453 continues to rotate and the posture of the half-moon member 460 changes. is continued (see FIGS. 42(d) and 44(a)).

After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 are meshed with each other, the second-layer gear 7452 is further rotated, so that the arc-shaped recessed portion 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is again engaged with the two-layer gear 7452. (see FIG. 42(e)), the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the semicircular member 460 with respect to the slide member 420 is fixed (see FIG. 44(b)).

After that, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26(b)), and the rotation is stopped when the slide member 420 is stopped.

Since the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 and the moving speed of the slide member 420 are in a proportional relationship, the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 can be easily changed by changing the rotational speed of the drive motor 472. can be done.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the position of the slide member 420 is changed in at least two ways when the half-moon member 460 starts rotating while the slide member 420 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position. be able to. That is, compared to the case where the two-layer gear 7452 rotates at the second rotation speed V2 from the start of rotation (see FIGS. 39 to 41), the speed changes from the first rotation speed V1 to the second rotation speed V2 during rotation. When changed (see FIGS. 42 to 44), the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the semicircular member 460 rotates can be moved toward the center side (vertical direction center side) (FIGS. 40(b) and 40(b) and FIG. 43(b)). As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

Next, representative examples of the above-described first speed pattern and second speed pattern will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a graph showing speed changes of the double layer gear 7452 . 45, the horizontal axis indicates the position (P) of the slide member 420 between the retracted position (P=0) and the extended position (P=Pmax), and the vertical axis indicates the sliding position of the slide member 420. The rotational speed V of the double layer gear 7452 rotated during movement is shown.

45, the first position P1 means the position where the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is initially arranged to face the reverse gear 7453 (see FIG. 39(b)), and the second position P2 means , the position where the second protruding gear member 7452e2 is initially arranged to face the reversing gear 7453 (FIG. 42(c)). shown.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated in the first speed pattern, the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the first position P1. In contrast, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated in the second speed pattern, the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the second position P2.

That is, by changing the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 while the slide member 420 is sliding, it is possible to change the position of the slide member 420 when the posture of the half-moon member 460 starts to change. Therefore, the variation of presentation of the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 can be increased.

Next, a compound action unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48. FIG.

In the seventh embodiment, the position of the slide member 420 when the half-moon member 460 rotates is changed by changing the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 during rotation. The compound action unit 8400 is formed such that the position of the slide member 420 when the half-moon member 460 rotates can be changed while maintaining the rotation speed of the two-layer gear 8452 at a constant speed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

46(a) and 46(b) are rear views of the dual layer gear 8452. FIG. 46(a) shows a state in which the two-layer gear 8452 rotates at the separation rotation speed V3, and FIG. 46(b) shows a state in which the two-layer gear 8452 rotates at the joint rotation speed V4. be done. The stationary state in which the rotation of the two-layer gear 8452 is stopped is the same as in FIG.

For ease of understanding, illustration of the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c is omitted. This also applies to subsequent drawings. Further, the separation rotation speed V3 means the rotation speed at which the first protruding gear member 7452e1 forms the retracted state while the second protruding gear member 7452e2 forms the protruding state, and the joint rotation speed V4 means the second protruding gear member 7452e2. It means the rotational speed at which both the first protruding gear member 7452e1 and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 form the protruding state.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotation speed V3, the protruding gear members 7452e are moved radially outward of the two-layer gear 8452 with different protrusion amounts. (at least the second protruding gear member 7452e2 has a greater amount of movement than the first protruding gear member 7452e1).

In this embodiment, the spring constants of the urging springs 8452f that connect the protruding gear members 7452e and the rotating shafts of the two-layer gears 7452 are formed differently. That is, the spring constant of the first biasing spring 8452f1 that connects the first projecting gear member 7452e1 and the rotating shaft of the two-layer gear 8452 is the second spring constant that connects the second projecting gear member 7452e2 and the rotating shaft of the two-layer gear 8452. 2 is made larger than the spring constant of the biasing spring 8452f2. The spring constant of the third biasing spring 8452f3 is made larger than the spring constant of the first biasing spring 8452f1.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the separation rotation speed V3, the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is positioned closer to the rotation shaft than the surface where the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected. (retracted state), and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 protrudes radially outward from the surface where the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected (protruding state).

Therefore, as will be described later, when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotation speed V3, the two-layer gear 8452 does not start meshing with the reverse gear 7453 at the first protruding gear member 7452e1, and the second protruding gear The member 7452e2 meshes with the reversing gear 7453. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the common rotational speed V4, a force tends to move the projecting gear member 7452e radially outward of the two-layer gear 8452. As shown in FIG. The projecting gear member 7452e is extended to a position where this force and the biasing force of the biasing spring 8452f are balanced. In the overhanging state, at least the first protruding gear member 7452e1 and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 protrude radially outward beyond the surface where the tooth tops of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected (protruding state).

Therefore, when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the common rotational speed V4, the first protruding gear member 7452e1 of the protruding gear member 7452e of the two-layer gear 8452 contacts the reverse gear 7453 so that the two-layer gear 7452 begins to mesh with the reversing gear 7453 .

Note that the operations of the two-layer gear 8452, the reversing gear 7453, and the slide member 420 when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the common rotational speed V4 are the same as the operations shown in FIGS. Description is omitted.

FIGS. 47(a) to 47(e) are rear views of the two-layer gear 8452 and the reversing gear 7453 showing the rotation of the two-layer gear 8452 and the reversing gear 7453 in chronological order. 40, 43 and 44 will be referred to in the description of FIG. 47, and the illustration of the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c will be omitted in FIG. 47 for easy understanding.

47(a) and the above-described FIGS. 40(a), 47(b) and 43(a), 47(c) and 43(b), 47(d) and 44(a) ), and FIGS. 47(e) and 44(b) are diagrams at approximately the same point in time, and have a corresponding relationship. 47, the directions of rotation of the two-layer gear 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 are indicated by arrows, and as shown in FIG. It is formed in a manner circumscribing a circle.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotation speed V3 immediately after the start of movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40(a)), so that the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is in the retracted state. , and the second projecting gear member 7452e2 forms a flared state.

Therefore, even if the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first projecting gear member 7452e1 does not come into contact with the engaging projection receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453. It is not started (see FIG. 47(b)). As a result, the slide member 420 is moved while the posture of the half-moon member 460 is maintained (see FIG. 43(a)).

The two-layer gear 8452 continues to rotate at the separation rotation speed V3, and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 comes into contact with the engaging protruding receiving portion 453d. It starts to change (see FIG. 43(b)).

After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 8452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, thereby continuing the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 and changing the attitude of the half-moon member 460. is continued (see FIGS. 47(d) and 44(a)).

After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 8452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 are meshed with each other, the second-layer gear 8452 is further rotated, so that the arc-shaped concave portion 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is again engaged with the two-layer gear 8452. (see FIG. 47(e)), the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is stopped, and the attitude of the semicircular member 460 is fixed (see FIG. 44(b)).

After that, the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26(b)), and stops rotating when the slide member 420 is stopped.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the position of the slide member 420 is changed in at least two ways when the half-moon member 460 starts rotating while the slide member 420 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position. so that no speed change is required during sliding movement of the slide member 420 .

That is, compared to the case where the two-layer gear 8452 rotates at the joint rotation speed V4 at a constant speed (see FIGS. 40 and 41), the case where the two-layer gear 8452 rotates at the separation rotation speed V3 at a constant speed (see FIG. 43) and FIG. 44), the arrangement of the slide member 420 can be moved toward the center side (the center side in the vertical direction) when the half-moon member 460 rotates (see FIGS. 40(b) and 43(b)). As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the separation rotation speed V3 and the joint rotation speed V4 mentioned above will be described by graphing them. FIG. 48 is a graph showing the rotational speed V of the double layer gear 7452. As shown in FIG. 48, the horizontal axis indicates the position (P) of the slide member 420 between the retracted position (P=0) and the extended position (P=Pmax), and the vertical axis indicates the position (P) of the slide member 420. In FIG. A rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 rotated during the slide movement of is shown.

On the horizontal axis of FIG. 48, the first position P1 means the position where the first projecting gear member 7452e1 first faces the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39(b)), and the second position P2 means , means the position where the second protruding gear member 7452e2 is first arranged to face the reversing gear 7453 (FIG. 42(c)).

As described above, in this embodiment, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the joint rotation speed V4, the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the first position P1. On the other hand, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the separation rotation speed V3, the half-moon member 460 starts to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the second position P2.

That is, if two kinds of slide movement speeds of the slide member 420 are set, the slide member 420 can be adjusted when the posture of the half-moon member 460 starts to change without changing the slide movement speed of the slide member 420 during movement. position can be changed. Therefore, the variation of presentation of the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 can be increased.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the claw member 463 of the semicircular member 460 moves due to the movement of the slide rack 442 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, when the half-moon member 460 is rotated, a locking pin is arranged in a rotational trajectory along which the drive lever 467 is rotated. A mode in which the claw member 463 is moved due to a rotation angle difference between the . In this case, the rotation of the half-moon member 460 and the movement of the claw member 463 can be interlocked.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the cutout portion 422d of the slide member 420 is formed in an arc shape, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be cut in a rectangular shape in a direction away from the drive gear 473 . As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the notch portion 422d can be improved, and the material required for the slide member 420 can be reduced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the shape of the tooth tip of the drive gear 473 is substantially circular has been described, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driving gear 473 may be divided into four parts in the circumferential direction, and the tooth depth of the gear teeth may be different for each divided part. In this case, by mounting the drive gear 473 with the short tooth depth of the gear teeth directed toward the leg 422 to be transmitted, the required size of the notch 422d of the leg 422 to be transmitted for passing the drive gear 473 can be achieved. can be reduced. On the other hand, it is possible to ensure the transmission of the driving force to the transmitted leg portion 422 at the portion where the tooth depth of the gear teeth is long. It should be noted that there may be portions in which gear teeth are not formed in the divided portions described above.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the driving gear 473 is attached and detached through the cutout portions 422d formed in the pair of transmitted leg portions 422 arranged to face each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the notch portion 422d may not be formed in the leg portion 422 to be transmitted, and the leg portion 422 to be transmitted may be formed so as to be movable in a direction (a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction) away from each other. In this case, the driving gear 473 cannot be removed when the pair of leg portions 422 to be transmitted are arranged close to each other, while the driving gear 473 can be removed when the pair of leg portions to be transmitted 422 are arranged with a distance therebetween. can do.

In the fifth embodiment, the embedding member 5452h made of a magnetic material is embedded in the embedding hole 5452g of the two-layer gear 5452, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration in which the periphery of the starting gear tooth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 is covered with a magnetic material may be used. As a result, the magnetic material can be arranged outside the starting gear teeth 5452b1, so that the distance between the reversing gear 5453 and the magnetic material can be shortened, and the magnetic material will work when the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 start meshing. The magnetic force can be made stronger.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the embedding hole 5453f is formed in the starting gear tooth 5453b1 of the reverse gear 5453 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the embedding hole 5453f may be formed in the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d and the embedding member 5453g may be embedded therein. In this case, the embedded members 5452h and 5453g are embedded so that the magnetic force of the embedded member 5453g and the magnetic force of the embedded member 5452h embedded in the two-layer gear 5452 repel each other. The impact when the gear 5453 abuts can be mitigated. That is, before the starting gear tooth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 abuts against the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453, the reversing magnetic force rotates the reversing gear 5453 away from the starting gear tooth 5452b1. can be done. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear tooth 5452b1 can be improved.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding gear members 7452e have the same mass, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, each protruding gear member 7452e may be formed with a different mass, and the spring constant of the urging spring 7452f that urges the protruding gear member 7452e having a larger mass may be formed larger. As a result, the difference in how the projecting gear member 7452e protrudes due to the magnitude of the mass can be alleviated by the magnitude of the biasing force of the biasing spring 7452f.

In the seventh and eighth embodiments, the projecting gear member 7452e of the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 is formed to be movable, so that the contact timing between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 can be changed. Although a case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reverse gear 7453 may be formed so as to be movable in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 . In this case, by moving the reverse gear 7453 away from the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452, it is possible to form a state in which they are not in contact with each other. can be Therefore, even if the movable projecting gear member 7452e is not required, the contact timing between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 can be changed.

In the seventh and eighth embodiments, the projecting gear member 7452e of the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 is formed to be movable, so that the contact timing between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 can be changed. Although a case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 may form a first state in which they do not mesh with the reversing gear 7453 and transmission gear 451 and a second state in which they mesh with the reversing gear 7453 and transmission gear 451 . In this case, while the drive force is not transmitted to the two-layer gears 7452, 8452 in the first state, the drive force can be transmitted to the two-layer gears 7452, 8452 in the second state. Therefore, even if the movable projecting gear member 7452e is not required, the timing at which the reverse gear 7453 starts operating can be changed.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the projecting gear members 7452e have the same mass and the urging springs 8452f have different spring constants, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, each biasing spring 8452f may have the same spring constant, and each projecting gear member 7452e may have a different mass. This makes it possible to adjust the amount of protrusion of each projecting gear member 7452e more easily than adjusting the spring constant.

Although the drive gear 473 is supported at one point on the drive shaft of the drive motor 472 in each of the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of pins are protruded from the end of a shaft support member fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 472, and a plurality of fitting portions are formed in which the pins are fitted to the rotating body portion of the drive gear 473. Alternatively, the shaft support member and the driving gear 473 may be engaged at a plurality of points. In this case, since the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 can be maintained by the pin being caught by the drive gear 473 in the rotational direction, the drive gear 473 and the plurality of pins are loosely fitted. can do.

As a result, the force required to separate the driving motor 472 and the rotating body portion of the driving gear 473 can be reduced, so that the front wall portion 422c of the transmitted leg portion 422 is deformed and excessive stress is applied to the driving motor 472. It is possible to prevent it from being added.

<First control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 121. FIG. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in each of the above-described embodiments, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted. In this control example, unlike each of the above-described embodiments in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed at the time of the big win, the entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened and closed at the time of the big win. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this control example, the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is configured to be opened and closed at the time of the big win, but this is not the only option. Whether or not the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened or closed may be changed, or may be changed for each round in one jackpot. As a result, the variation of the game is increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

First, the specific winning device 650 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52. FIG. 49(a) is a front perspective view of the specific winning device 650, and FIG. 49(b) is a rear perspective view of the specific winning device 650. FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled specific winning device 650, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the disassembled specific winning device 650. FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 52 is a front view and side cross-sectional view of the specific winning device 650. FIG. Note that FIG. 52 shows a state in which the front cover body 651 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 49(a) and 49(b), the specific winning device 650 includes a front cover body 651, a base member 652, and a rear cover body 655. As shown in FIGS. The front cover body 651 and the rear cover body 655 are respectively fastened with screws from the rear side of the base member 652, the front cover body 651 is fastened to the front side of the base member 652, and the rear cover body 655 is fastened to the rear side of the base member 652. is calculated to be As a result, an area in which game balls can flow is formed inside the specific winning device 650 . Also, the base member 652 is attached to the game board 13 while being inserted into an opening hole machined by a router. As a result, the specific winning device 650 is attached to the game board 13 .

In addition, although the details will be described later, a plurality of sensors are provided inside the specific winning device 650 for detecting that the game ball has flowed down, and based on the detection results of these sensors, the effect during the jackpot game is configured to change.

Details of the specific winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52 . 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the specific winning device 650 disassembled into a front cover body 651, a base member 652 and a rear cover body 655. FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the specific prize winning device 650 exploded in the same manner as in FIG. FIG. 52(a) is a front view of the specific winning device 650 with the front cover removed, FIG. 52(b) is a sectional view taken along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. 52(a), and FIG. 52(c). 52(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LIIc--LIIc of FIG. 52(a).

The front cover body 651 includes a front cover and an outer wall portion erected from the outer edge thereof, and is formed of a light-transmitting material in a box-like shape with one side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 50) open. In addition, openings with a width that allows game balls to flow down are provided in the upper right portion and the central left portion of the outer wall. As a result, when the front cover body 651 and the base member 652 are fitted together, the upper right opening serves as an entrance 651a through which game balls can flow down into the specific winning device 650, and the left central opening is A game ball inside the specific winning device 650 becomes an outlet portion 652c that can flow down to the outside. In addition, a guide wall is formed from the upper right opening to the central portion, and is configured to guide a game ball entered into the entrance portion 651a to the first specific winning port 650a, which will be described later. An entrance sensor 900a and an exit sensor 900c are arranged at the entrance portion 651a and the exit portion 652c, respectively, so that a game ball passing therethrough can be detected.

A second prize winning opening is provided in the upper part of the base member 652. A first specific winning opening 650a is formed in the lower right part, and a second specific winning opening 650b is formed in the lower left part so as to protrude from the front and rear sides. ing. A first ball entry sensor 652a and a second ball entry sensor 652b are provided above the first specific prize winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b, respectively, to detect the entry of a ball into each of the specific winning openings. be done. Above the first ball sensor 652a and the second ball sensor 652b, a ball ball restricting plate 654 that can slide in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. By sliding this ball entry control plate, the game ball can be entered into the first specific prize winning port 650a or the second specific prize winning port 650b, and can be changed to a state in which it is impossible to enter the game ball.

A detour channel 653 is provided near the upper portion of the entering ball restricting plate 654 and between the first specific winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b. A game ball that enters the inlet 651 a of the specific winning device 650 first flows down to above the first specific winning port 650 a and before the detour 653 . Here, when the ball entry regulation plate 654 is open (slid to the back), the game ball enters the first specific winning hole 650a, while the ball entry regulation plate 654 is closed. (Sliding forward), the game ball flows down to the detour channel 653 . A detour sensor 900b is provided at the upstream entrance portion 653a of the detour passage 653, and can detect passing game balls.

The game ball that has flowed down the detour channel 653 flows down to above the second specific winning port 650b and in front of the exit portion 652c. Here, when the ball entry regulation plate 654 is open (slid to the back), the game ball enters the second specific winning hole 650b, while the ball entry regulation plate 654 is closed. (Sliding forward), the game ball flows down to the outside of the specific winning device 650 from the exit portion 652c.

Here, both the first specific winning hole 650a and the second specific winning hole 650b pay out prize balls (game balls) based on winning. That is, even if the game ball enters the specific winning port 650 at the timing when the ball entry control plate 654 is closed and does not enter the first specific winning port 650a, it enters after passing through the detour channel 653. If it is time for the ball control plate 654 to open, the ball will enter the second specific prize winning opening 650b, and the prize balls will be paid out based on the winning. Therefore, based on the game ball that entered the specific winning device 650, it is possible to facilitate the payout of prize balls.

The detour channel 653 is formed on the front side and the back side of the base member 652 so that the game ball meanders and flows down. As a result, compared with the case where the game ball flows down without meandering, the path length of the detour channel can be lengthened, and the time for the game ball to flow down the detour channel can be lengthened. Therefore, even if the opening timing of the entrance ball restricting plate 654 is late, the game ball that has passed through the detour channel 653 can enter the second specific winning hole 650b.

Although the details will be described later, by determining the opening/closing pattern of the ball entry control plate 654 according to the time for the game ball to pass through the detour path 653, the game ball passing through the detour path 653 It is possible to determine an opening/closing pattern in which it is easy to enter a ball and an opening/closing pattern in which it is difficult to enter a ball. Further, if the path length of the detour path 653 can be adjusted, it is possible to adjust whether or not the game ball passing through the detour path 653 is likely to enter the second specific winning hole 650b. It should be noted that the passage time of the detour route 653 is not limited to the length of the route, and may be adjusted by changing the coefficient of friction of the road surface on which the game ball flows (for example, using a non-slip material).

A protrusion 652d is formed on the upper portion of the second prize winning port 640, and electric accessories 640a are arranged on the left and right. As a result, the game ball can enter the second winning hole 640 only when the electric accessory 640a is open. In addition, without being limited to this, it is also possible to allow the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 without forming the protrusion 652d and even when the electric accessory 640a is not opened.

The back cover body 655 is formed with a discharge passage through which game balls entering the above-described second winning port 640, the first specific winning port 650a and the second specific winning port 650b flow down, and the electric accessory 640a. and a variable solenoid 670 for varying the entry control plate 654 are provided.

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 53(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.53(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol consists of numbers from "0" to "9". Incidentally, each main pattern may be displayed with a pattern or the like attached together with the number.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) to be described later is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is "jackpot A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. Further, if it is a "jackpot B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned. In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, there is a SW effect and a background change effect that suggest (notice) that there is a high possibility that the special symbol will be a big hit. In that case, the display area in which the variable display is performed may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this control example) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls that entered the first winning hole 64, and the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 is an area for displaying a preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 53(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy wearing a headband in this control example) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action other than the predetermined action, or another character appears. A notice effect is performed by putting out.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball patterns are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In this control example, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is suspended up to four times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, the opening/closing pattern of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 and the game ball entry timing will be described. FIG. 54 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ball entry timing in the opening/closing operation of the ball entry restricting plate 654. As shown in FIG. The upper part of FIG. 54 shows the open/closed state of the entering ball regulation plate 654, and the middle part shows the timing at which the launched game ball enters the entrance part 651a of the specific winning device 650. The lower stage shows the timing at which the game ball that has not entered the first specific winning hole 650a and flowed down to the detour channel finishes flowing down the detour channel.

The timing at which the ball entry control plate 654 is open is the timing (first ball entry timing) at which the launched game ball enters the first specific winning hole 650a. On the other hand, the timing when the ball entry control plate 654 is closed is the timing when the launched game ball does not enter the first specific winning port 650a, and the game ball flowing down the detour channel 653 is the second specific winning port 650b. There is a timing (second ball entry timing) when the ball enters the second specific prize winning opening 650b and a timing (exit passage timing) when the ball does not enter the second specific prize winning opening 650b and flows down to the outside from the exit portion 652c.

The second ball entry timing and the exit passage timing are determined by whether or not the ball entry regulation plate 654 is open at the timing when the game ball finishes flowing down the detour path 653 . In FIG. 54, the second ball entry timing is reached after the first ball entry timing has elapsed, and the game ball launched at this timing does not enter the first specific winning hole 650a, and passes through the detour channel 653. It will flow down. After that, when the game ball finishes flowing down the detour channel 653, it is time to open the ball entry control plate 654, so the game ball enters the second specific winning hole 650b. On the other hand, at the exit passage timing after the second ball entry timing has elapsed, when the game ball finishes flowing down the detour channel 653, the ball entry regulation plate 654 is not at the timing to open (that is, it is closed), so the game ball does not enter the second specific winning hole 650b, but passes through the exit portion 652c.

Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball that has not entered the first specific winning hole 650a wins the second specific winning hole 650b by the opening/closing timing of the winning control plate 654.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the opening/closing pattern of the winning regulating plate 654 in this control example will be described. FIG. 55(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an opening/closing pattern A in which a game ball that has not entered the first specific winning hole 650a is likely to enter the second specific winning hole 650b. b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an opening/closing pattern B in which a game ball that has not entered the first specific winning opening 650a is less likely to enter the second specific winning opening 650b.

Although the details will be described later, this opening/closing pattern is selected based on the jackpot type. In this control example, the opening/closing pattern is configured to be selected based on the jackpot type, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured to be selected regardless of the jackpot type. As a result, even if the jackpot type is the same, the game value that the player can acquire varies depending on the opening/closing pattern, so that the player's interest can be improved.

The upper, middle, and lower stages of FIGS. 55(a) and (b) show the same timings as in FIG. 54, respectively, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the opening/closing pattern A shown in FIG. 55(a), one out of two game balls shot at regular intervals enters when the winning regulation plate 654 is open, and the other ball wins. It is opened and closed so that the ball enters when the regulation plate 654 is closed. Here, as shown in the figure, the detoured game ball enters the second specific winning hole 650b because the winning restriction plate 654 is in an open state after finishing flowing down the detouring channel 653.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing pattern B shown in FIG. 55(b), one out of two game balls launched at regular intervals enters the specific winning device 650 at the timing when the winning control plate 654 is open. is similar. However, as compared with the opening/closing pattern A, the timing at which the entering ball restricting plate 654 is opened for the second time is earlier, and the timing at which the first detoured game ball finishes flowing down the detouring channel 653 is as shown in the figure. Since the ball restricting plate 654 is closed, the ball does not enter the second specific prize winning opening 650b. Therefore, compared to the opening/closing pattern A, the opening/closing pattern B is an opening/closing pattern in which game balls are less likely to enter the specific winning opening.

It should be noted that the opening/closing timing of the ball entrance restricting plate 654 may be appropriately set without being limited to the opening/closing pattern described above. For example, it may be set so that all game balls that do not enter the first specific winning hole 650a enter the second specific winning hole 650b, or all balls enter the second specific winning hole 650b. It may be set not to (that is, all pass through the exit portion 652c). In addition, the opening/closing timing of the entrance ball restricting plate 654 is appropriately set according to the shape and length of the detour channel (required time required for the game ball to pass through).

Furthermore, a plurality of detour routes with different times for game balls to pass may be provided, and game balls that do not enter the first specific winning hole 650a may be distributed to those detour routes. For example, a detour route may be provided in which game balls that do not enter the first specific winning port 650a are more likely to enter the second specific winning port 650b, and detour routes are less likely to enter the second specific winning port 650b. As a result, even if the opening/closing pattern is the same, the ease with which a ball can be entered can be changed, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Furthermore, in this control example, one ball entry regulation plate 654 is used to regulate the entry of balls into the first specific prize winning port 650a and the second specific prize winning port 650b. A ball entry regulation plate may be provided individually to regulate the entry of the ball. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of variations for regulating the entry of a ball into each specific winning hole, and to improve the interest of the player.

Also, in this control example, entry of a ball into the first specific winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b, which are part of the specific winning openings, is restricted by the ball entry regulation plate 654 in the specific winning device 650. Although the case has been described, it is not limited to this, and instead of the first specific prize winning port 650a or the second specific prize winning port 650b, the second prize winning port 640 may be provided, or the general prize winning port 63 or the like may be provided. good too.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59, the detection results of various sensors provided inside the specific winning device 650 and the effect display during the jackpot game based on the detection results will be described. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detection timings of various sensors and the content of effect display based on the detection results. 57 to 59 are schematic diagrams exemplifying the contents of each effect display.

After the start of the jackpot game, when the first game ball enters the specific winning device 650, the entering ball is detected by the entrance sensor 900a (when the first ball entrance sensor in FIG. 56 is detected). As a result, an effect based on the first game ball (first ball effect in FIG. 56) is started, and an appearance effect is displayed (see FIG. 57(a)). The effect screen in this case is a normal effect screen displayed on one screen, as shown at the bottom.

Next, when the entrance sensor 900a detects the second ball and the third ball during the appearance effect display (in FIG. 56, when the entrance sensor detects the second ball and when the entrance sensor detects the third ball). , 2nd and 3rd game balls (2nd ball effect, 3rd ball effect in FIG. 56) are started, and the appearance medium number effect is displayed based on the respective detection results. As shown in FIG. 57(a), a design of a cat indicating the number of cats appearing is displayed in the lower right part by the medium number of appearances effect. This number of cats appearing indicates the number of pending effects, and when the effect based on the first game ball is completed, the number of cats appearing is reduced by 1 and the effect based on the second game ball is executed. It will be done.

When the detour sensor 900b detects that the first game ball does not enter the first specific winning port 650a and passes through the detour inlet 653a of the detour passage 653 (at the time of detection of the detour sensor in FIG. 56 ), the effect based on the first game ball is changed from the appearance effect to the escape effect (see FIG. 57(b)). The effect screen in this case is a special effect screen displayed on two screens, as shown at the bottom. With this special effect screen, an effect based on the first game ball (escape effect) can be displayed on the left side of the screen, and an effect based on the second game ball (appearance effect) can be displayed on the right side of the screen. (See FIG. 57(b)).

After that, when the first ball entry sensor 652a detects that the second game ball has entered the first specific winning hole 650a, the appearance effect based on the second game ball on the right side of the screen changes to a capture effect. (see FIG. 58(a)). When this capture effect ends, an appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed on the right side of the screen.

Next, when the second ball sensor 652b detects that the first game ball has finished flowing down the detour channel 653 and entered the second specific winning hole 650b, the game of the first ball on the left side of the screen is detected. The escape effect based on the ball is changed to a recapture effect (see FIG. 58(b)). When this recapture effect ends, there is no effect displayed on the left side of the screen, so the effect screen becomes a normal effect screen displayed on one screen as shown at the bottom, and the appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed. It will be done.

On the other hand, when the first game ball has finished flowing down the detour channel 653 and has passed through the exit portion 652c without entering the second specific winning opening 650b, the exit sensor 900c detects that the exit sensor 900c detects the 1 ball on the left side of the screen. The escape effect based on the game ball of the ball is changed to the capture failure effect (see FIG. 59(a)). When this capture failure effect ends, the effect displayed on the left side of the screen disappears as in FIG. 58(b) described above, so the appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed as the normal effect screen. .

Here, with reference to FIG. 59(b), a case where the capture effect is executed on the normal effect screen will be described. FIG. 59(b) is an effect display displayed when the first game ball enters the first specific winning hole 650a when the above-described FIG. 57(a) is displayed. As described above, when there is a game ball flowing down the detour channel 653 and a game ball between the entrance part 651a and the detour channel 653, the special effect screen displays an effect based on each game ball. visible at the same time. On the other hand, when there is a game ball in only one of them, the normal effect screen is configured to display an effect based on the corresponding game ball.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the display contents of the character-linked effect will be described. FIGS. 60 and 61 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and the first spherical role object 330 and the second spherical role object 340. FIG.

The character-linked effect is a effect that is executed during variable display. When this character-linked effect is executed, the variable display being executed is reduced and displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 60(a). Also, the first spherical role object 330 and the second spherical role object 340 are lit, and a pattern (PUSH pattern) in which the letters PUSH are surrounded in a circle is displayed on the upper right and upper left of the screen (see FIG. 60(a)). . The PUSH pattern displayed on the upper left moves to the lower right, and the PUSH pattern displayed on the upper right moves to the lower left (FIG. 60(b)).

Then, the two PUSH patterns are moved so as to overlap each other in the center of the screen (see FIG. 61(a)). The object 340 is extinguished, and a gauge indicating the remaining button pressing time is displayed at the lower right of the screen (see FIG. 61(b)). Here, the first spherical role object 330 and the second spherical role object each have a first spherical cover body (330a, 330b) and a second spherical cover body (340a, 340b). At the timing when the object 330 and the second spherical accessory 340 are turned off, they are moved to a position covering the front surface of the spherical accessory. These spherical cover bodies are movable by a first accessory motor 330c and a second accessory motor 340c (not shown).

Next, the background-linked effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 63 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display contents of the background interlocking effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

In this control example, a display suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed on the upper right of the screen as part of the background display. Specifically, background levels of “level 1”, “level 2”, “level 3” and “level 4” are displayed in the upper right portion of the third pattern display device 81 . The background level of "Level 1" is a display suggesting that the expectation of a big win is lowest, and the background level of "Level 4" is a display that suggests that the expectation of a big win is the highest. This background level is changed during the variable display or at the start of the variable display, and is changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the background change lottery process (see FIG. 92). A detailed description will be given later.

Here, with reference to FIG. 62, a case where the background level is changed during variable display will be described. When the background level is "level 1", the patterns on the left and right columns of the variable display are stopped, and the characters "continuous level 2" are displayed in the center (see FIG. 62(a)). After that, the variable display is started again and the background level is changed to "level 2" (see FIG. 62(b)). Here, the case where the background level is changed from "level 1" to "level 2" was explained, but it is also possible to change from "level 1" to "level 3" or "level 4" during the change display of 1 be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the case where the background level is changed at the start of the variable display will be described. In FIG. 62(b) described above, the variable display is stopped after the background level is changed to "level 2" (see FIG. 63(a)). After that, the next variable display is started, the characters "Level up!" are displayed on the upper part of the screen, and the background level is changed to "Level 3".

As described above, in this control example, it is possible to change the background level during the variable display of 1 as described with reference to FIG. 62, and as described with reference to FIG. can also be used continuously. As a result, even in the variable display after the first variable display in which the high expectation of the big win is displayed, the state of the high expectation of the big win can be continuously maintained, thereby enhancing the player's interest. can be improved.

In this control example, the explanation is omitted, but usually, in the game machine, when executing the variation of the special symbols, the characters indicating the degree of expectation of various jackpots, the display of comments, and the effects such as sound are executed. In such a configuration, since the notice display modes showing various different expectations are displayed, the player does not know which degree of expectation should be used to determine the degree of expectation for the big win. There is a problem that the player loses interest in the game or gets bored with the game early because the content of the notice cannot be understood. However, in this control example, since the background level is displayed on the background screen as the overall expectation level during the variable display of the special symbols, the game can be played with reference to the expectation level. Therefore, the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, since the background level is changed each time the pseudo-stop in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped is executed, it can be understood that the overall expectation has changed from the expectation in the pseudo-stop notice. can play games in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, the background level is changed by performing a pseudo-stop, but the background level is changed based on the display of an advance notice such as a character or a comment. It may be configured as Furthermore, the degree of expectation is not limited to being displayed on the background level. Then, by changing the display mode of the character (for example, by changing the pattern or color of the clothes), the character may be displayed so as to represent the overall degree of expectation.

Furthermore, in this control example, the background level is configured to be displayed not only in the current variation, but also when the current variation is stopped and the next variation is started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation of the number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbols is started in the state of the background level of 3, a temporary stop is executed once to display a variable mode with a high degree of expectation for the big win. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to make the player always aware of what the background level is when playing the game.

In addition, in this control example, the background level is used as the overall expectation level when the pseudo stop is performed. It may be configured to be displayed in levels. In this case, the change mode table selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is switched by changing the background level. Specifically, the display of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 without changing the fluctuation time notified from the main controller 110 and the rough display mode (reach, non-reach, etc.) For example, at background level 1, the display area is not divided into single display variations, and at background level 2, the display area is divided into two, and the third pattern is displayed independently in each of them. In the background level 3, it is similarly divided into three and the third pattern is variably displayed in each of them (multi display mode). By configuring in this way, the display of the background level indicates the degree of expectation depending on the contents of the variation mode of the special symbol (whether or not the temporary stop is varied), and the case of indicating the selection mode of the variation pattern. You can switch.

Furthermore, in addition to the configuration of this control example, depending on the game state such as the normal game state and the variable probability game state, it may be configured to vary the frequency of the background level rising, the width of the rise, or the frequency of the background level falling, the width of the fall, etc. . Furthermore, the higher the background level, the easier it is to select a variation pattern for executing a pseudo stop (provisional stop). Conversely, the lower the background level, the easier it is for a pseudo-stop to be performed. Further, a background level may be set in advance for the variation pattern to be variably displayed, and when the variation pattern is variably displayed, the background level may be set to the set background level.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 64 to 76. FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, and since it is the same as each control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the electrical configuration of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. FIG. In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display in the second symbol display device (not shown), and the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting in . The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display in the second symbol display device (not shown), and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to set the display in the .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of out of special symbols, and first initial value random number used for initial value setting of 1st per random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 77), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 86). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203j set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. FIG. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball corresponding to the winning in the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). An area 203a is provided, and in each of these areas, a first winning random number counter C1 and a first winning type counter C2 are set in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. and each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in time with the timing of passing through the starting port (through gate) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 77) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 86).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit. In addition, this first hit random number table is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special symbols The number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The first winning random number table 202a for the high probability of special symbols and the first random number table 202a for the low probability of special symbols are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (FIG. 66). reference).

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is one of "0 to 9" in the special symbol lottery. , "0 to 9", it is determined to be a jackpot. Also, when the game state is the normal game state, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0".

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and the ball enters the left first winning hole 64a or the right first winning hole 64b. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a deviation from the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode will be the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-399. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the probability of special symbols is low, there is one random number that becomes a jackpot of special symbols. stored. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 1 among the total number of random number values of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/400".

On the other hand, when the probability of special symbols is high, there are 10 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the first winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 10 among the total number of random numbers of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/40".

In addition, in this control example, the random numbers for the jackpot stored in the first winning random number table for the low probability and the random numbers for the jackpot stored in the first random number table for the high probability are used. In order to prevent duplicate values, random numbers are set for each jackpot. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this control example, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), the random number value that becomes a big hit is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that fraud can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, in the first win type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number is any one of "0 to 49" is "jackpot A". Also, when the random number is any one of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". In this control example, the number of types of jackpots is two, but the number of types is not limited to two. In addition, even if the value of the first win type counter C2 is the same, different jackpot types are selected for the jackpot based on the ball entering the first prize winning port 64 and the jackpot based on the ball entering the second prize winning port 640. may be configured to be With this configuration, for example, when a big win is achieved based on the ball entering the second winning port 640, the player can easily select a winning type that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player expect a big hit based on the ball entering the ball. Here, the second winning hole 640 is a winning hole that makes it easier to enter a ball in a time-saving game state, which will be described later. Therefore, when shifting to the time-saving game state, the state can be more advantageous for the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3. ” (for example, the range of 90-99) and “Completely out of reach” (for example, the range of 0-89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is used by the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into one for when the probability of special symbols is high and one for when the probability of special symbols is low. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In addition, in the low probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is narrow, 0 to 79, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64. table is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time lag, long-time lag, normal reach, super reach, and the like. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 86), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 67(a)) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is provided in

In the fluctuation pattern table 202d, for example, as fluctuation patterns for failure, "loss (for long time)", "loss (for short time)", various types of "loss normal reach", and various types of "loss super reach" are defined, As variation patterns of the jackpot A, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined. Then, a variation pattern is selected from various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table 202d according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). A variation pattern table 222a is also set in the sound ramp control device 113, and more detailed variation pattern contents corresponding to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output by the main controller 110 are stored in the variation pattern table 222a. more selected.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this example of control, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the normal symbol win is set by a normal symbol random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the normal symbol. If the winning random number value matches the winning random number set by the winning random number table, it is determined as a winning of the normal design. In addition, this random number table per normal design is for normal design low probability (normal state of normal design) and high probability of normal design hit than low probability (normal design) It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 66(c), when the probability of normal symbols is low, there are 24 random numbers that will win normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per normal symbol for low probability. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbols is displayed on the second symbol display device. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. , and the passage port 645 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the passage opening 645 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when normal symbols are won. and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per normal symbol for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variable display of the normal symbols is displayed on the second symbol display device. Runs for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. , and the electric accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds→3 seconds". Since the opening period of the electric accessory becomes very long as "0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times", the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加A table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202, which stores random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbols are won. However, the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 26).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device can be executed.

Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. FIG. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with a ROM 202 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data.

FIG. 65(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 65(a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. .

The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 66(a)) is, as described above, a table in which values of random numbers that are special symbol jackpots are defined. When the random value defined in the first winning random number table 202a and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, the first random number table 202a includes a table (first random number table 202a for low probability) for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit when the probability of the special symbol is low, and a high probability of the special symbol. A table (first winning random number table 202a for high probability) is provided for determining whether or not a special pattern is a jackpot at the time of probability, and the number of random numbers to be a jackpot included in each table is different. there is In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66(b)) is set so that the jackpot A and the jackpot B can be selected. Specifically, as the judgment value of the big win A, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to "0 to 49", and as the judgment value of the big win B is set to "50 to 99".

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 66(c), when the probability of the normal design is low (during the normal state of the normal design), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the second winning random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of , it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design. In addition, as described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessary attached to the passage port 645 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 67(a)) is a data table used for determining the display form of the fluctuation pattern, and the display form is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(a), a big hit variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 67(b)), a losing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 67(c)), At least a deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 67(d)) is defined. Although illustration is omitted, in addition to this, a variation pattern table and the like in the time saving game state are set.

With reference to FIG. 67(b), the big winning variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 67(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202d1. The large winning variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a large winning is set. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as variation patterns of the jackpot. For each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value.

Specifically, for the variation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", for the variation pattern of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds ), “180 to 198” are set as determination values of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, the variation pattern in which the judgment value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set is selected as a big win. Select from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 67(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is loss is set. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete failure is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", failure reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time and a long failure (10 seconds) with a long variation time are set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for outlier reach, "0 to 149" for different normal reach (30 seconds), "150 to 197" for different super reach (60 seconds), and special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 67(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be a deviation when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the aforementioned deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 65, the description is continued. FIG. 65(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller. The RAM 203 stores various counters shown in FIG. 64, the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, a stack area, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 86) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up processing (see FIG. 85) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 84) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a variable probability flag 203e. , a counter 203f during time saving, and a memory area 203z.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on winning the second winning opening 640 is stored.

More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is obtained at the timing when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 (start winning), and the obtained data is converted into four Among the vacant areas of the reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area (moved), determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area ) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Shift processing is performed to pack the data into a reserved area with an area number that is one smaller. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of variable display (variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero. 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S404 in FIG. 80). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 78).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 78 and S405 in FIG. 80). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the holding ball of the variable display held by the main controller 110 You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual variable display pending ball number held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203d increases the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to a maximum of 4 times. It is a counter that counts. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S704 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 82).

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (see S705 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S703 in FIG. 83: No).

The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state (probability variation gaming state). If the variable probability flag 203e is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is a low probability gaming state (including the time saving gaming state). In this control example, when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variable flag 203e is set to ON (see S1114 in FIG. 87). Then, it is set to OFF when a jackpot game is started (see S1102 in FIG. 87). In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

The counter 203f during time saving is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. This time-saving counter 203f is set to 100 when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot B (16R time-shortening jackpot) at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in this control example, when the variable probability game state is not set after the jackpot game, the game shifts to the time saving game state of 100 times.

The other memory area 203z is for setting (storing) other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device will be described. The input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via the bus line 224 composed of the address bus and the data bus as described above. The input/output port 225 includes the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, other devices 228, the first accessory motor 330c, the second accessory motor 340c, the entrance A center 900a, a detour sensor 900b, an exit sensor 900c, etc. are connected (see FIG. 4).

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . As described above, the rear image in this control example includes an indication (level indication) indicating the degree of expectation for a big win.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 68(a). As shown in FIG. 68(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222a, a character interlocking effect table 222b, an opening/closing pattern storage area 222c, a background lottery table 222d, a SW scenario storage area 222e, In addition, various data and programs required for game control are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (off, reach out, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

The role-linked effect table 222b is a table that defines the operation patterns of the spherical accessories (330, 340) and the pattern of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for executing the above-described role-linked effect. is. By setting the motion of the spherical role and the display effect based on this table, it is possible to execute the performance linked with the motion of the spherical role and the display effect. Details of the character-linked effect table 222b will be described later with reference to FIG. 69(a).

The opening/closing pattern storage area 222c defines the relationship between the opening/closing pattern of the ball entry control plate 653 of the specific winning device 650 and the jackpot type during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the case of a big win A, the opening/closing pattern A is selected, and in the case of a big win B, the opening/closing pattern B is selected. As described above, the jackpot A is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B in that it is in a variable probability state. In addition, as described above, the opening/closing pattern A is more advantageous to the player than the opening/closing pattern B in that the game ball easily enters the second specific winning hole 650b. Therefore, since the opening/closing pattern A is selected for the big win A, the big win A becomes a big win more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player will play the game in anticipation of a larger hit A, and the player's interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the opening/closing pattern B may be selected in the case of a big win A, and the opening/closing pattern A may be selected in the case of a big win B, without being limited to the above. Moreover, the selection of the opening/closing pattern may not be based on the jackpot type, and may be selected based on the value of the effect counter 223j, which will be described later, for example. As a result, even if the jackpot type is the same, whether or not it is advantageous to the player changes depending on the selected opening/closing pattern, so that the player is interested in both the jackpot type and the opening/closing pattern. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved. Furthermore, the opening/closing pattern may be selected based on the above-described jackpot type and the production counter, or the jackpot types and opening/closing patterns may be further increased, for example, the jackpot type C and opening/closing pattern C may be increased. .

The background lottery table 222d prescribes the background level to be shifted based on the winning/failure determination result, the current background level, and the value of the effect counter 223j, which will be described later. Based on this table, the background level can be changed in the background change lottery process (see FIG. 92). Details of the background lottery table 222d will be described later with reference to FIG. 69(b).

The SW scenario storage area 222e is an area that stores a SW scenario that defines a period during which pressing of the SW is effective in the above-described character-linked production. Based on this SW scenario, by controlling the lighting operation of the spherical accessories (330, 340) and the frame button 22, the effect content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 113 and the spherical accessory are displayed. (330, 340) and the lighting operation of the frame button 22 can be interlocked to produce an effect.

Here, the frame button 22 is lit during the SW valid period based on the SW scenario. By turning on the frame button 22, the player can be made to recognize that it is a period in which SW can be pressed.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 68(b). As shown in FIG. 68(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a jackpot effective flag 223e. , first ball entry flag 223f, second ball entry flag 223g, remaining counter 223h, measurement counter 223i, effect counter 223j, open/close pattern storage area 223k, round flag 223m, exit timing counter 223n, SW scenario setting area 223o, continuous At least a background flag 223p, a background flag 223q, a power-off processing flag 223x, a power-off flag 223y, and a memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It's becoming

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, the number of holding balls displayed in the variable display is added, or the main controller 110 changes in the special symbol When the display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 90). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 203c, its value can be updated.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of , a command for the number of pending balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled so that the pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1603 in FIG. 91), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is set. (See S2102 in FIG. 97). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 89). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 90), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S2108 in FIG. 97). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The jackpot valid flag 223e is turned on when the first round of the jackpot game is started and the jackpot effect becomes effective (see S1808 in FIG. 94), and is turned off five seconds after the jackpot game ends. (See S1819 in FIG. 94). By turning on this jackpot effective flag 223e, in the jackpot middle production process (FIG. 98), a jackpot production (see FIGS. 57 to 59) based on the detection results of various sensors provided in the specific winning device 650 is executed. will be executed.

The first ball entering flag 223f is turned on when the first ball entering command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1903 in FIG. 95), and the processing based on the reception of the first ball entering command is performed in the jackpot middle effect processing. It is turned off when executed (see 2211 in FIG. 98). The first ball entry command is a command that is transmitted when a game ball enters the first specific winning hole 650a by the first ball entry sensor 650a. When the first ball entry flag 223f is turned on, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a capture command for display to the display control device 114 based on the game ball detection result by the first ball entry sensor 650a of the main controller 110. can be sent to When the display control device 114 receives the capture command for display, it executes a process of displaying a capture effect (see FIG. 58(a)) on the third symbol display device.

The second ball entering flag 223g is turned on when the second ball entering command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1905 in FIG. 95), and the processing based on the reception of the second ball entering command is executed in the effect processing during the jackpot. is turned off (see S2214 in FIG. 98). The second ball entry command is a command sent when a game ball enters the second specific winning hole 650b by the second ball entry sensor 650b. By turning on the second ball entry flag 223g, based on the detection result of the game ball by the second ball entry sensor 650b of the main controller 110, the sound lamp control device 113 issues a display recapture command to the display controller. 114. When the display control device 114 receives the recapture command for display, it executes a process of displaying a recapture effect (see FIG. 58(b)) on the third symbol display device.

The remaining counter 223h is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after execution of the ending effect in the big win effect, and is incremented by 1 every time the big win command process is executed after the ending effect is executed. (See S1816 in FIG. 94). Also, when the remaining counter reaches a value of 5 seconds or more in the jackpot command process, it is reset (see S1818 in FIG. 94).

The measurement counter 223i is a counter for measuring the opening/closing timing of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 which is opened/closed by the main controller 110. When the game is being executed, 1 is added every time the effect processing during the jackpot is executed (see S2202 in FIG. 98). Also, when the above-described jackpot effective flag 223e is turned off, both are reset (see S1817 in FIG. 94). This measurement counter 223i is referenced together with the information of the opening/closing pattern storage area in the entrance passage process (FIG. 99), and is used to determine the timing at which the game ball enters the specific winning device 650. (See S2303 in FIG. 99).

The production counter 223j is a counter used for various lotteries such as character-linked production and background lottery, and is repeatedly updated within a range of 0-399. This effect counter 223j is updated by one by the process of S1315 each time the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

The opening/closing pattern storage area 223k stores information of the opening/closing pattern storage area 222c corresponding to the jackpot type when an opening command is received from the main controller 110 (S1802 in FIG. 94). As described above, the opening/closing pattern storage area 223k is referred to together with the measurement counter 223i in the entrance passage process, and is used to determine the timing at which the game ball enters the specific winning device 650. (See S2303 in FIG. 99). In this control example, the opening/closing pattern storage area is cleared and updated when an opening command is received, which is the timing at which the big win is started. may be cleared.

The in-round flag 223m is a flag indicating whether or not the round of the jackpot game is in progress (the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is being opened). This in-round flag 223m is set to ON when a round start command is received from main controller 110 (S1806 in FIG. 94), and is set to OFF when a round end command is received from main controller 110 ( S1810 in FIG. 94).

The exit timing counter 223n counts the number of game balls whose timing of entering the specific prize winning device 650 during the round of the jackpot game is exit passage timing. The exit timing counter 223n is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the passage timing is the exit timing in the entrance passage processing executed when the ball entering the specific winning device 650 is detected (Fig. 99 S2305). Also, in the entrance passage process, when the jackpot game ends and the jackpot effective flag 223e is turned off, both are reset (S1817 in FIG. 94).

This exit timing counter is referred to in the entrance passage process, and when the exit timing counter reaches a predetermined number or more during the round of the jackpot game in the opening/closing pattern A in which the ball is likely to enter the second specific winning opening 650b (that is, the second 2 When the number of game balls passing through the exit portion 652c without entering the specific winning hole 650b is greater than a predetermined number), a display timing notification command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2307 in FIG. 99). . When the display control device 114 receives the display timing notification command, the display control device 114 executes an effect display for changing the player's firing timing. As a result, in spite of the opening/closing pattern A that makes it easy for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650b, the player who is shooting the game ball at a timing that makes it difficult to enter the second specific winning opening 650b, Since the firing timing can be changed, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

The continuous background flag 223p indicates that, when a winning command based on the starting winning of a jackpot is received from the main controller 110, the background level indicating the degree of expectation of the winning of the jackpot is indicated by the time the variable display based on the starting winning is started. This is a flag for continuously changing (raising) the level. This continuous background flag 223p is set to ON when the effect counter is "0 to 49" when it is determined in the winning command reception process that a command for a big win has been received (see S1708 in FIG. 93). When the continuous background flag 223p is set to ON, background change data is set for each held ball (see S1707 in FIG. 93). Therefore, in the background change lottery process executed thereafter, the continuous background flag 223p is referred to, and if it is ON, the background change process is skipped (see S1601 in FIG. 92). It should be noted that the continuous background flag 223p is a flag that is automatically turned off at the start of the jackpot game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the winning command is received, if the result is a jackpot, the effect is performed to continuously increase the degree of expectation of the background. can be configured to run. In this case, by continuously changing the background in the case of losing reach or losing super reach, it is possible to maintain the degree of expectation for a bigger win even when the change is started.

The background flag 223q stores the set background level when the background is changed in the background change lottery process (FIG. 92) or the variable display setting process (FIG. 97). This background flag 223q is referred to in the background change lottery process, and a process corresponding to the current background level is executed (see S1604 in FIG. 92).

When main controller 110 detects a power cutoff, power cutoff processing flag 223x sends a power cutoff command to audio lamp control device 113, and when audio lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command, power cutoff flag 223y is set. It is set to ON, and power-off processing is executed (S1318 in FIG. 89). Then, when the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag 223x is set to OFF (S1320 in FIG. 89). This power-off processing in progress flag 223x is referred to in the start-up processing (see S1202 in FIG. 88), and if it is on, the power has been turned off during execution of the power-off processing (that is, the RAM has been destroyed). Then, without checking for RAM destruction, the processing in the case of RAM destruction is executed.

When main controller 110 detects a power cutoff, a power cutoff command is sent to audio lamp control device 113, and when audio lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command, power cutoff flag 223y is turned on. The setting is made, and power-off processing is executed (S1318 in FIG. 89). Then, in the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (FIG. 88), if the power-off flag 223y is ON, the working area of the RAM is cleared, and the power-off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1210 in FIG. 88). ).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 90) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and by the command determination processing, The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Here, with reference to FIG. 69(a), the details of the character linked effect table 222b will be described. FIG. 69(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character-linked effect table 222b.

This accessory-linked production table 222b defines the production selected by the variation pattern type and the value of the production counter. Specifically, when the variation pattern type is "normal reach", SW effect A1 is selected if the effect counter is "0 to 199", and SW effect A2 is selected if the effect counter is "200 to 349". is selected, and if the effect counter is "350 to 399", the SW effect A3 is selected. Further, when the variation pattern type is "super reach", if the effect counter is "0 to 199", SW effect B1 is selected, and if the effect counter is "200 to 349", SW effect B2 is selected. If the effect counter is "350 to 399", the SW effect B3 is selected. Furthermore, when the type of the variation pattern is "special reach", if the effect counter is "0 to 199", the SW effect C1 is selected, and if the effect counter is "200 to 349", the SW effect C2 is selected. If the effect counter is "350 to 399", the SW effect C3 is selected.

Here, as described above, different fluctuation times are set for each fluctuation pattern type. In this control example, the selected SW effect is changed according to the variation pattern type. As a result, it is possible to select a SW effect with an appropriate effect time according to the variation pattern.

Next, details of the background lottery table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 69(b). FIG. 69(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the background lottery table 222d.

The background lottery table 222d prescribes the background level of the transition destination based on the current background level and the effect counter 223j, and is prescribed so that the win/loss determination result is different between hit and miss.

Specifically, first, the case where the result of the win/fail determination is a hit will be described. If the result of the win/fail judgment is "win" and the current background level is "level 1", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 199", the transition destination background level will be "level 2", and " 200", the background level of the transition destination is "level 4", and the background level of "201 to 399" does not change. Also, when the current background level is "level 2", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 19", the background level to be transitioned to is "level 1", and if it is "20 to 159", The background level of the transition destination is "level 3", and if it is "200", the background level of the transition destination is "level 4", and if it is "201 to 399", the background level is not changed. Furthermore, when the current background level is "level 3", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 29", the transition destination background level will be "level 2", and if it is "30 to 139". For example, the background level of the transition destination is "level 4", and if it is "140 to 399", the background level is not changed. Further, when the current background level is "level 4", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 39", the background level of the transition destination is "level 3", and if it is "40 to 399", It is specified that the background level is not changed.

Next, a case in which the result of the judgment is "out" will be described. If the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149" when the result of the right/fail judgment is "out" and the current background level is "level 1", the transition destination background level is "level 2". 150 to 399", the background level is not changed. Also, when the current background level is "level 2", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 49", the transition destination background level is "level 1", and if it is "50 to 99", The background level of the transition destination is "level 3", and if it is "100 to 399", the background level is not changed. Furthermore, if the current background level is "level 3", the value of the effect counter 223j will be "level 2" if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 79", and will be "level 2" if it is "80 to 99". For example, the background level of the transition destination is "level 4", and if it is "100 to 399", the background level is not changed. Also, when the current background level is "level 4", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 299", the background level to be transitioned to is "level 3", and if it is "300 to 399", It is specified that the background level is not changed.

In this way, if the result of the hit/fail judgment is a win, the background level is defined to be easy to increase and difficult to decrease, and if the result of the hit/fail judgment is a failure, the background level is defined to be less likely to increase and more likely to decrease. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the background level indicating the degree of expectation for a big win from frequently increasing despite the result of the win/fail determination.

Next, referring to FIG. 70, the electrical configuration of display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 100) executed after the boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 101) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 76) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process during the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 102(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. In addition to an area 235d, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b is provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variable image area 235 b , the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 , and the player enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 . This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 with a fluctuation effect when a ball entry is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2403 and S2404 in FIG. 100).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 shows a power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 72(a). The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 performs the command shown in FIG. 72(b). As shown in FIG. 72( c ), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a symbol "○" at the lower right position of the screen, and "○" at the time of power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol big hit", the image shown in FIG. 72 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the fluctuation effect, and if it is "a special symbol omission", it is displayed in FIG. 72 (c) The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. 72(b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 73, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 73A and 73B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. 73(b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage", respectively.

As shown in FIG. 73, the rear images corresponding to the rear surfaces A and B of the rear surfaces A and B are horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81. It is prepared in the ROM 234 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the "city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 moves the corresponding rear image from position a to position a' to the initial position of the display area. , and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the position a to the position c by scrolling repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 73(a), the rear face A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear face A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the town stage, is displayed. 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as for the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage, as shown in FIG. back image area 235c.

Here, the operation of the frame button 22 by the player to change the stage is performed at arbitrary timing based on the player's will. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed within the range from position a to position a', and from position a including the initial position to position a Since the image data corresponding to the image during b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the player can press the frame button. When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of 22, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial position of the back B is immediately displayed in the third pattern. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing color tone over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 on the back surface B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear-surface image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 70) of the normal-use video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between positions b' and positions b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns (see FIG. 53) with numerals "0" to "9" as the third pattern are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device 81 changes. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the performance is not started immediately.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern which imitates is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by storing data corresponding to these characters in the character design area 235e. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

By providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, as described above, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

Next, the work RAM 233 provided in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, an appearing effect flag 223m, an appearing counter 223n, an escape counter 223p, a capture counter 233r, a recapture counter 223s, and a storage area 223z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, etc. , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is a effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state and that the entry regulation plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. , the round effect is a effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and notifies the player of the game value (short period of time of normal symbols) given to the player after the end of the big win, or the reserved special symbol. This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big win in the lottery.

A player can easily recognize the time period of normal symbols by informing the time period of normal symbols in the ending effect. The longer the time period of the normal pattern is, the more chances the ball passes through the through gate 67, so the chances of lottery of the normal pattern are increased and the chance of winning the normal pattern is also increased. Therefore, there are more chances that the electric accessory will be released as a jackpot of the normal symbols, so that the ball will easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the lottery for the special symbols will be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first prize winning port 64 is a prize winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the first prize winning port 64, a normal pattern jackpot is generated, and the electric accessory is released, and the balls enter the first prize winning port. If it becomes easier to enter 64, the number of prize balls will increase. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand, or in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if the game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that any one of the pending special symbol lotteries will result in a special symbol jackpot, the player can receive special symbols in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that a big win will occur, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will surely win a big win. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of the back surface is to display either back surface A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "town stage" or "empty stage"), or to display a back surface different from back surfaces A and B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back surface specifies that one of the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A and B as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A and B, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In this example of control, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 14) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 76), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 75). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 75).

The transfer data information includes the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 75, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 76) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 75, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2405 in FIG. 100). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S4905 in FIG. 120(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 36( )). When the display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination processing (see S2708 in FIG. 102(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see FIG. (b) S2709) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 103 to 116) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 117 to 119) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see 2705 in FIG. 102(b)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 120(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 121) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 76) described later is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 76), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 76) describing the contents of image rendering instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 102(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S4505 in FIG. 117) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 76), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. Therefore, the type and address of the storage RAM where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, . . . , error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see (b )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4507 in FIG. 117). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233j is set to indicate whether the image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by initial setting processing (see S2402 in FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 121) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S5013 in FIG. 121). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S5014 in FIG. 121). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing for that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k selects a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233k is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5102 in FIG. 122).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the buffer flag 233k to be drawn, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 102B) is executed (see S5102 in FIG. 122).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

Returning to FIG. 71, the description is continued. The in-appearance effect flag 233m is a flag indicating whether or not the above-described appearance effect (see FIGS. 57(a) and (b)) is being displayed during the jackpot game. This appearing effect in progress flag 233m is set to ON in the appearing effect process (S3607 in FIG. 109) when an appearing command for display is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and escape effect process (FIG. 110) or capture effect process. (FIG. 112) is set to OFF.

The on-appearance counter 233n is a counter indicating the above-described appearance effects and the number of pending appearance effects (see FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b)). This on-appearance counter 233n is incremented by 1 when a display appearance command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (S3608 in FIG. 109), and is subtracted by 1 in the escape effect processing (FIG. 110) or capture effect processing (FIG. 112). be done.

The escaping counter 233n is a counter that indicates the above-described escape effect and the number of pending escape effects (see FIG. 57(b), FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b)). This running counter 233p is incremented by 1 when a display escape command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (S3705 or S3707 in FIG. 110), and the failure rendering process (FIG. 111) or recapture rendering process (FIG. 113). 1 is subtracted at

The capture counter 233r counts the number of times the above-described capture effects (see FIGS. 58(a) and 59(b)) have been executed, that is, the number of game balls entering the first specific winning hole 650a. is a counter. This catch counter 223r is incremented by 1 when a display catch command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (see S3901 in FIG. 112), and is reset at the end of the jackpot game.

The re-capture counter 233s is a counter for counting the number of times the above-described re-capture effect (see FIG. 58(b)) has been executed, that is, the number of game balls entering the second specific winning hole 650b. This re-capture counter 233s is incremented by 1 when a re-capture command for display is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (S4002 in FIG. 113), and is reset at the end of the jackpot game.

The other storage area 233z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 103) of the display control device 113 is executed, the first stored command among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing determines that command. The command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 77 to 87. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Although not shown, in the process of S101, when the first ball entering sensor 652a detects the ball entering the first specific winning hole 650a in the specific winning device 650, the first ball entering command is set, A second ball entry command is set when the second ball entry sensor 652b detects that the ball has entered the second specific winning hole 650b. The first entering command and the second entering command set here are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and the external output processing (see FIG. 86) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 86). S1001), it is sent to the audio lamp controller 113. FIG.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example, 399, 99, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. After executing the through-gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and further, other processing that should be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. In the shooting control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of suspensions of variable display in special symbols) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed to start the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S208), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B will be given.

Incidentally, in this control example, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 lights the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S211). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), jackpot data is set based on the jackpot type (S212).

Then, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S213), and the process proceeds to S216. When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the processing of S217, it is determined that the jackpot has started in the jackpot control processing (S1004) of the main processing (see FIG. 86) (S1101: Yes). As a result, an opening command is set by the process of S1103, and an opening effect for notifying the start of a big win is executed. After the jackpot game is started, it is determined that the jackpot is in progress in the process of S1104 until the jackpot game ends (S1104: Yes). After that, when it comes time to end the jackpot game, it is determined in the process of S1111 that it is time to start the ending effect, and the ending command is set, and whether the probability variation flag is turned on according to the jackpot type (S1114). , the time saving medium counter is set (S1115).

In the processing of S211, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 1 or more (S214), and the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 1 If it is above (S214: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203f (S215), and the process proceeds to S216. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and the process proceeds to S216.

After completing the processing of S213, S214 or S215, a stop command is set (S216), and this processing ends. The stop command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output by the voice during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the stop command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 executes a process of stopping the variable display being executed with the stop type received by the stop type command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 78) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and is the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the "big hit of the special design" or "out of the special design" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81 perform It is a process for determining the production pattern (variation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be performed.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). If the variable probability flag 203e is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state with special symbols, and if the value of the variable probability flag 203e is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state with special symbols.

When the value of the variable probability flag 203e is ON (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the value of the high probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for use, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol jackpot is won is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become the winning match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the variable probability flag 203e is off (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and , the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol big win is obtained based on the special symbol big win random number table for low probability (S304). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. One of "0" is set as the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol. It is judged to be a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and three types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, It is determined what the jackpot type is among the jackpots B). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot It is determined to be B (16R short working hours jackpot) (see FIG. 66(b)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of symbol variations such as normal reach and super reach is determined. Note that the relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

For example, as the variation pattern for failure, "miss (for long time)", "miss (for short time)", various types of "missing normal reach", various "missing super reach", and various "missing special reach" are defined. , As a variation pattern for both jackpot A and jackpot B, various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified. Various types, "common super reach" types, and "common special reach" types are defined.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is changed. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order, or a complete out-of-order.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", set the complete out. , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. to decide.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 ends, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 86). be. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, for convenience of explanation, first the starting prize winning information processing (S105) will be explained, and then the look-ahead processing (S407) will be explained. First, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. If there is, it is a process for prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol from the reservation processing of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the reserved various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N) is changed. Acquire (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether there is no winning to the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning to the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, the number of special symbol reserved balls If the value (N) of the counter 203c is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area. Next, prefetching processing in S407, which will be described later, is executed, and the present processing ends.

Next, details of the prefetching process (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the prefetching process (S407). This look-ahead process (S407) is executed in the start-up winning process (see FIG. 80) described above, and performs look-ahead of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by various random number counters acquired based on the start-up winning. This process is for

In the look-ahead process (S407), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). In the process of S501, if it is determined that there is no new winning (S501: No), there is no need to execute the prefetching process, so this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that there is a new winning (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time when the variation based on the winning is started is the probability variable gaming state. (S502).

In the processing of S502, if it is determined that the game state at the time of start of variation is variable probability (S502: Yes), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the start winning processing (see FIG. 80) and , and the first winning random number table for high probability (see FIG. 66(a)) to acquire the lottery result.

On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the game state at the start of the fluctuation is not the probability change (S502: No), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 80) and the first winning random number table for low probability (see FIG. 66(a)), the lottery result is acquired.

Since the method of acquiring the lottery result in the process of S503 or S504 is the same as the process of S303 or S304 of the above-described special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the process of S503 or S504 is finished, a winning information command is set based on the result of the lottery (S505), and this process is finished. The prize winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . By receiving this prize winning information command, the audio ramp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball before the change starts. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute a background-linked effect, which will be described later. The winning information command set here may include information such as a variation pattern in addition to the result of the lottery. Thereby, in the sound ramp control device 113, it is possible to determine the fluctuation time and the fluctuation performance based on the held ball before the start of fluctuation.

Next, referring to FIG. 82, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the electric This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the win of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the win, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is performed. Including during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S601: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203f during time saving in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). In addition, the time-saving counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols. If the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols.

When the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In this control example, during the special symbol jackpot, the normal symbol lottery is less likely to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to make the specific winning device 650 win. However, when the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is released, the ball that is to be made to win the specific prize winning device 650 enters the second prize winning port 640 . Therefore, this is to suppress the opening of the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640, and make the state in which the specific prize winning device 650 is likely to win. In addition, since the specific winning device 650 is provided immediately below the second winning hole 640, even if the ball is prevented from entering the second winning hole 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the second winning hole A lot of balls enter the 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second winning hole 640 becomes maximum (4 times).

In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning random number table for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 66(c)).

In the process of S608, when the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 (S608:No), it transfers to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the low A lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired based on the normal symbol winning random number table for the probability time (S611). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 66(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S612: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present is a special symbol jackpot. (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second winning hole 640 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol comes off. , the number of times of opening the electric accessary and the opening time are set.

In the process of S615, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols, so the second winning port 640 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 (S614:No), it transfers to the process of S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, the opening period of the electric role product associated with the second winning opening 640 is set to 0.00. The time is set to 2 seconds, and the number of opening times is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the processing of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the second symbol display device 83 changes The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second pattern display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the opening period of the electric accessory becomes very long as "0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times", the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). Incidentally, the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the process of S622, if the variable time has not passed (S622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 86) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol win. is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and the process ends. When the start of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 86) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is performed. is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 77) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of suspensions of variable display in normal symbols) is obtained (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S703).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703 : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d 1 is added to the value (M) (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. area (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S912.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S913, S914) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 77). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 78) or the start winning process (see FIG. 80). Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Furthermore, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 87) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the entry regulation plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the ball entry regulation plate 654 of the specific prize winning device 650 is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the ball entry regulation plate 654 of the specific prize winning device 650 has passed or the first specific prize winning port 650a is opened. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have entered the second specific winning port 650b. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is closed. The opening and closing of the entry regulation plate 654 of the specific prize winning device 650 are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S625 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 82), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the open time and the number of open times set in the process of S616 or S617 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79) ends, the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79). Stop display (illumination display) is performed on the device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 82), the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 82), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or S618 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 82). (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (299 and 239 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1008, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 84 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1012), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1013). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt processing (see FIG. 86), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning This is a process for opening or closing the ball entry regulation plate 654 of the device 650 .

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the process of S208 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 78) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), the variable probability flag 203e is turned off (S1102), the opening command is set (S1103), and this process is finished.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 86). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the processing of S1104, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S1104: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1105). If it is time to start a new round (S1105: Yes), the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened (S1106), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1107). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted number of rounds is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is met (S1108). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened, or when the ball enters the first specific winning hole 650a and the second specific winning hole 650b is won by a predetermined number (for example, 10 in total), it is determined that the closing condition is established.

In the processing of S1108, if the closing condition of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is closed (S1109), and the round ends. A command is set (S1110), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is not satisfied (S1108: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1111). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state ends, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the process of S1111, when it is time to start the ending effect (S1111: Yes), an ending command is set (S1112), and it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was a jackpot A (S1113). In the processing of S1113, when it is determined that the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) was determined (S1113: Yes), the probability variable flag 203e is set to ON (S1114), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1113, if it is determined that the jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot) was determined (S1113: No), 100 is set to the time-saving medium counter 203f (S1115), and this process ends.

The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 86). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. FIG. Then, an ending command for display corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect. On the other hand, in the process of S1111, if it is not the timing to start the ending (S1111: No), the process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 99. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 88, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S1319 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 89, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1316 in FIG. 89), it executes power-off processing in S1319. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1319 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1319. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), it will transfer to S1204 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1319 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S1319, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1319 is executed (see S1318 in FIG. 89). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1319 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1319 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the power off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1210). Thereafter, after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1211), interrupt permission is set (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 and S1210, which are clearing processing of the work area of the RAM 223, are skipped, and the processing is shifted to S1211. After setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1211), is set (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1209 is skipped is that when the process of S1208 is reached from S1204 via the process of S1206, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 89, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has passed since the main process was started or the current process of S1301 was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has passed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1311. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S1302 to S1311 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short period (within 1 msec). , S1312 command determination processing, S1313 variable display setting processing, S1314 jackpot middle effect processing, and S1315 counter value updating processing are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated. The details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1309, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1310), then role product action processing is executed (S1311), and the process proceeds to S1312. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the process of S1310 is finished, the role product action process is executed (S1311), and the process proceeds to S1312. In the character object motion processing, actions such as spherical character objects (330, 340) are controlled based on the character object movement data set in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Fig. 96) and the variable display setting process (Fig. 97). This is processing for control. Here, since the accessory movement data is set based on the SW scenario in the SW presentation, the SW presentation and the spherical accessories (330, 340) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. ) can be interlocked with the operation of

In the process of S1312, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S1312). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the command determination process, in the process of S1313, a variable display setting process is executed (S1313). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an effect process during a big hit is performed (S1314). Details of the effect processing during the jackpot will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S1314 is finished, the effect counter 223j, which is a counter used for the above-described accessory-linked effect and background level lottery, is updated (S1315). Specifically, the value of the effect counter 223j is read from the RAM 223, 1 is added to it, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the effect counter 223j is stored in the effect counter 223j.

When the process of S1315 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1316). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1316 (S1316: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1318), and the power-off processing is executed (S1319). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1320), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1316 (S1316: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1317), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1317: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1317: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main process is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the pachinko hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1312). This command determination process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Further, in this process, when a command for the number of reserved balls is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1401). When a variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), variation pattern setting processing is performed (S1402), then background change lottery processing is performed (S1403), and the process returns to the main processing. Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91, and details of the background change lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1404). When the stop type command is received (S1404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1405), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1406), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 97) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1404: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from main controller 110 (S1407). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1407: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol ) is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1408). In addition, in the processing of S1408, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1408 ends, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the pending ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (start winning), or when a lottery for special symbols is performed. Therefore, each time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1408. It can be matched with the value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise etc. At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110.例文帳に追加Incidentally, when the process of S1408 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the processing of S1407, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1407: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1409). Then, when the winning command is received (S1409: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S1410), and the process returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (start winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained in the main controller 110, and Each value of each of the acquired counters C1 to C3 is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In addition, as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired in the main control device 110, apart from the original special symbol jackpot lottery, from each value of each counter C1 to C3 acquired, the original lottery Various information obtained when is performed is read ahead (predicted). When main controller 110 completes prefetching, a winning command including various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by prefetching is sent from main controller 110 to sound lamp controller 113 .

In the winning command process, various types of information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by prefetching in the main controller 110 are extracted as winning information from the received winning command, and the extracted winning information is stored in the RAM 223 as winning information. Store in area 223a. Then, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the value of the performance counter 223j, Decide whether or not to perform a series of productions. Details of this winning command process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1409, if the winning command has not been received (S1409: No), then it is determined whether or not a command related to the big win has been received from the main controller 110 (S1411). Then, when a jackpot-related command is received (S1411: Yes), the jackpot command process is executed (S1412), and the process returns to the main process. Details of this jackpot command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S1411, if no jackpot-related command has been received (S1411), then it is determined whether or not the first ball-entering command or the second ball-entering command has been received (S1413). Then, when the first ball-entering command or the second ball-entering command is received (S1413: Yes), the jackpot winning process is executed (S1414), and the process returns to the main process. Details of this jackpot winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1413, if the first ball-entering command or the second ball-entering command has not been received (S1413: No), a process corresponding to other commands is executed (S1415), and the main process is executed. return. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the variation pattern setting process (S1402) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 90) will be described. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern setting process (see S1402). This variation pattern setting process (S1402) is a process that is executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. Based on the received command, a variation pattern is selected, and a required effect command (SW effect command , advance notice effect command).

In this variation pattern setting process (S1402), first, the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1501), and a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table 222a based on the received variation pattern command ( S1502). Next, it is determined whether or not the selected variation pattern is the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1503). In the processing of S1503, when it is determined that the selected variation pattern is the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1503: Yes), the processing of S1504 to S1506 is executed to execute the SW effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1503, when it is determined that the selected variation pattern is not the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1503: No), since there is no need to execute the SW effect, the processing of S1504 to S1506 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S1507.

In the process of S1504, based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S1502 and the effect counter 223j, a SW effect is selected from the character linked effect table (S1504). Next, a SW effect command for display indicating the SW effect selected by the processing of S1504 is set (S1505), a SW scenario is acquired from the SW scenario storage area 222e based on the SW effect selected by the process of S1504, The acquired SW scenario is stored in the SW scenario storage area 223o (S1506), and the process proceeds to S1507.

Here, the SW scenario is the period during which the frame button 22 is set to be valid in accordance with the period of fluctuation of the special symbol, the content of the notice display, the display content displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed, etc. are set. It is what is done. This SW scenario is sequentially updated by the process of S2002 in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S1307), and the updated scenario is set. As a result, when the updated and set scenario is a scenario in which the effective period of the frame button 22 is set, it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 is valid. In the SW scenario, movable data of the spherical accessories 330 and 340 is also set, and the timing of moving the accessories is set to coincide with the start timing of the SW valid time.

In the processing of S1507, a notice effect is selected (S1507), a display notice effect command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S1508), and this processing ends. It should be noted that, when the SW effect is selected, the advance notice effect may not be selected and the advance notice effect may not be executed. As a result, the SW effect and the advance notice effect are not executed at the same time, and the game machine can be easily understood by the player. Further, when the SW effect and the advance notice effect are executed at the same time, the degree of expectation for the big win suggested by each may be the same or similar. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game machine from becoming incomprehensible to the player, for example, by executing an effect with a high degree of expectation in the SW effect and executing an effect with a low degree of expectation in the advance notice effect. can do.

Next, the background change extraction process (S1403) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 90) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing the background change lottery process (S1403).

In this background change lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous background flag 223q is on (S1601). If it is determined that the continuous background flag 223q is ON (S1601: Yes), background change data has already been set for the ball on hold, so background change lottery is not performed and the process proceeds to S1602. . In the process of S1602, it is determined whether or not the current background level is "level 4" (S1602). If it is determined that the current background level is "level 4" (S1602: Yes), there is no need to change the background level, so this processing ends. If it is determined that the current background level is not the background of "level 4" (S1602: No), the process proceeds to S1605.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if it is determined that the continuous background flag 223q is off (S1601: No), background change data is not set for the ball on hold, and background change lottery is performed. The process proceeds to S1603. In the process of S1603, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-variation of the hit is a one-time variation pattern (1603). to process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo-hit variation is a one-time variation pattern (S1603: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current background level is level 2 or less (S1604).

In the process of S1604, when it is determined that the current background level is level 2 or lower (S1604: No), the process proceeds to S1605. If it is determined in the process of S1604 that the current background level is level 3 or higher (S1604: No), the process proceeds to S1606.

When the processing of S1602 or S1604 is finished, the background with one level added is set, and the processing shifts to S1609.

On the other hand, in the process of S1606 executed after the process of S1603 or S1604, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S1606), and based on the result of the success/failure determination and the value of the effect counter 223j, the background lottery is drawn from the background lottery table 222d. (S1607). After that, it is determined whether or not the background has been changed (S1608). Go to processing.

In the process of S1609, the set background flag 223q is turned on (S1609), a display background change command indicating the set background is set (S1610), and the process ends. By setting this display background change command, the background is changed to the one set by the display control device 114 .

Next, the winning command process (S1410) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the winning command process (S1410). The winning command process (S1410) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1410 in FIG. 90). It is determined whether or not to start the effect of changing the background.

In this winning command process, first, winning information based on the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 (S1701), and it is determined whether or not the continuous background flag 223p is ON (S1702). If it is determined that the continuous background flag 223p is ON (1702: Yes), this processing ends. If it is determined that the continuous background flag 223p is off (S1702: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit in other winning information (S1703). If it is determined that there is a win in other prize information (S1703: Yes), the jackpot will be achieved before the start prize based on the prize is executed, and the effect of continuously changing the background cannot be executed. exit. If it is determined that there is no hit in other winning information (S1703: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a win (S1704). If it is determined that the win/loss determination is not winning (S1704: No), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the win is a hit (1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1705.

In the process of S1705, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223j is within the range of "0 to 49" (S1706). ” (1706: No), this process is terminated. In the processing of S1706, if the value of the effect counter 223j is in the range of "0 to 49" (S1706: Yes), the background change data is set for each of the held balls (S1707), then the continuous background flag 223p is turned on (S1708), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the jackpot command processing (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the jackpot command process (S1412). This jackpot command process (S1412) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1412 in FIG. 90). This is a process for determining the display mode of the ending effect.

In this control example, when the main control device 110 determines a "special symbol jackpot", the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state after the variation effect corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is completed. , the third symbol display device 81 starts a big win effect. The jackpot performance is divided into three periods of opening performance, round performance, and ending performance. When the jackpot performance is started, the opening performance is first performed, and the player is notified that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state. Next, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, a round effect is started, and each time a new round is started, the player is notified of the current round number. Then, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) ends, an ending effect is finally performed, and the player is notified of the end of the special game state. In this control example, when this ending effect is performed, a fixed effect display notifying that there is a starting prize that is a "special symbol jackpot" among the pending starting prizes, or A short period of time display for announcing the short period of time of the normal pattern corresponding to the "jackpot of the special pattern" is performed.

In the jackpot command process, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S1801). In the process of S1801, when it is determined that an opening command has been received (S1801: Yes), information on the opening/closing pattern in the opening/closing pattern storage area 222c corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the opening/closing pattern storage area 223k (S1802 ), an opening command for display is set (S1803), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1801 that the opening command has not been received (S1801: No), it is determined whether or not the round start command has been received (S1804). If it is determined that the round start command has been received (S1804: Yes), the display round command is set (S1805), and the in-round flag 223m is set to ON (S1806). After that, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first round command (S1807). When it is determined that the current is the first round (S1807: Yes), the big hit valid flag 223e is set to ON (S1808), and the process is terminated. Also, in the processing of S1807, even if it is determined that the current round is not the first round (S1807: No), this processing ends as it is.

If it is determined in the process of S1804 that the round start command has not been received (S1804: No), it is determined whether or not the round end command has been received (S1809). If it is determined that the round end command has been received (S1809: Yes), the in-round flag 223m is set to OFF (S1810), and this process ends.

In the processing of S1809, if it is determined that the round end command has not been received (S1809: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S1811). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S1811: Yes), a display ending command is set (S1812), 1 is added to the value of the remaining counter 223h (S1813), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S1811, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1811: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining counter 223h is greater than 0 (S1814). If it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is 0 (S1814: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1814 that the value of the remaining counter 223h is greater than or equal to 1 (S1814: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining counter 223h is greater than or equal to 5 seconds. (S1815). Specifically, since the remaining counter 223h is incremented by 1 each time the jackpot command process executed every 4 ms is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining counter 223h is 1250 or more. .

In the process of S1815, if it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is less than the value indicating 5 seconds (S1815: No), it means that 5 seconds have not passed since the end of the jackpot game, so the remaining counter The value of 223h is incremented by 1 (S1816), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1815, if it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is 5 seconds or more (S1815: Yes), it means that 5 seconds have passed since the end of the jackpot game, so the measurement counter 223i and , the value of the timing change counter is reset (S1817), then the value of the remaining counter 223h is reset (S1818), the jackpot effective flag 223e is set to OFF (S1819), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the jackpot winning process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the jackpot winning process (S1414). This jackpot winning process (S1414) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1414 in FIG. 90). Alternatively, it is a process executed when the second ball entering command is received.

In the jackpot winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot valid flag 223e is ON (S1901). In the process of S1901, when it is determined that the jackpot valid flag 223e is off (S1901: No), the entry to the first specific winning port 650a or the second specific winning port 650b is performed even though the jackpot game is not in progress. Since there is a ball, an error notification is made (S1906), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1901, if it is determined that the jackpot effective flag 223e is ON (S1901: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the first ball entering command has been received (S1902). In the process of S1902, if it is determined that the first ball entering command has been received (S1902: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the first specific winning hole 650a, so an effect based on the entering ball is executed. For execution, the first ball entry flag 223f is set to ON (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first ball entering command has not been received (S1902: No), the process of S1903 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1904.

After completing the processing of S1902 or S1903, it is then determined whether or not the second ball-entering command has been received (S1904). In the process of S1904, if it is determined that the second ball entry command has been received (S1904: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the second specific winning hole 650b, so an effect based on the entry is produced. For execution, the second ball entry flag 223f is set to ON (S1905), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1904 that the second ball-entering command has not been received (S1904: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1307) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1307). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1307) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not a SW scenario is set in the SW scenario setting area 223o (S2001). If it is determined that there is no SW scenario setting (S2001: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW scenario is set (S2001: Yes), the SW scenario is updated (S2002), and the accessory movement data set in the updated scenario is set (S2003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the SW valid period is now (S2004), and if it is determined that it is not the SW valid period (S2004: No), the process proceeds to S2007. On the other hand, in the process of S2004, if it is determined that the SW valid period is reached (S2004: No), it is determined whether or not the SW has been pressed (S2005). If it is determined that SW has been pressed (S2005: Yes), a display pressing command indicating SW pressing is set (S2006), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If it is determined in the process of S2005 that the SW is not pressed (S2005: No), the process proceeds to S2007.

In the process of S2007, it is determined whether or not the updated SW scenario is the end data of the SW scenario (S2007). If it is determined not to be the end data of the SW scenario (S2007: No), this process is terminated as it is. Since it is the end timing, the value of the SW scenario setting area 223o is reset (S2008), and this processing ends.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1313). This variable display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2101). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2101: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S2107. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S2102), and then in the process of S1502 of the fluctuation pattern setting process (see FIG. 91), the selection The variation pattern type in the variation production performed is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

Then, based on the selected variation pattern, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2104). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2105). In the process of S2105, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the character object movement data is set based on the SW scenario in the SW scenario storage area (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2107. The accessory movable data set by the processing of S2106 is referred to by the accessory action processing (S1311 in FIG. 89), and based on the set accessory movable data, the action and frame of the spherical accessory (330, 340) are determined. The lighting operation of the button 22 is set.

In the processing of S2107, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S2107). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2107: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2107: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S2108). The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2109).

Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2110), and is displayed based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notification to the control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2111). In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern of pseudo variation (S2112), and if it is determined that the variation pattern is not a variation pattern of pseudo variation (S2112: No), this process is terminated as it is . On the other hand, in the process of S2112, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is a pseudo fluctuation fluctuation pattern (S2112), the background flag 223q obtained by adding the background level corresponding to the number of pseudo fluctuations is set to ON (S2113), End this process.

Here, when the pseudo change is performed, the display data set in the display control device 114 are set in advance so that the background level is increased by one. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load without monitoring the temporary stop timing in the pseudo fluctuation and increasing (variable) the background level.

In this control example, the explanation is omitted, but usually, in the game machine, when executing the variation of the special symbols, the characters indicating the degree of expectation of various jackpots, the display of comments, and the effects such as sound are executed. In such a configuration, since the notice display modes showing various different expectations are displayed, the player does not know which degree of expectation should be used to determine the degree of expectation for the big win. There is a problem that the player loses interest in the game or gets bored with the game early because the content of the notice cannot be understood. However, in this control example, since the background level is displayed on the background screen as the overall expectation level during the variable display of the special symbols, the game can be played with reference to the expectation level. Therefore, the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, since the background level is changed each time the pseudo-stop in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped is executed, it can be understood that the overall expectation has changed from the expectation in the pseudo-stop notice. can play games in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, the background level is changed by performing a pseudo-stop, but the background level is changed based on the display of an advance notice such as a character or a comment. It may be configured as Furthermore, the degree of expectation is not limited to being displayed on the background level. Then, by changing the display mode of the character (for example, by changing the pattern or color of the clothes), the character may be displayed so as to represent the overall degree of expectation.

Furthermore, in this control example, the background level is configured to be displayed not only in the current variation, but also when the current variation is stopped and the next variation is started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation of the number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbols is started in the state of the background level of 3, a temporary stop is executed once to display a variable mode with a high degree of expectation for the big win. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to make the player always aware of what the background level is when playing the game.

In addition, in this control example, the background level is used as the overall expectation level when the pseudo stop is performed. It may be configured to be displayed in levels. In this case, the change mode table selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is switched by changing the background level. Specifically, the display of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 without changing the fluctuation time notified from the main controller 110 and the rough display mode (reach, non-reach, etc.) For example, at background level 1, the display area is not divided into single display variations, and at background level 2, the display area is divided into two, and the third pattern is displayed independently in each of them. In the background level 3, it is similarly divided into three and the third pattern is variably displayed in each of them (multi display mode). By configuring in this way, the display of the background level indicates the degree of expectation depending on the contents of the variation mode of the special symbol (whether or not the temporary stop is varied), and the case of indicating the selection mode of the variation pattern. You can switch.

Furthermore, in addition to the configuration of this control example, depending on the game state such as the normal game state and the variable probability game state, it may be configured to vary the frequency of the background level rising, the width of the rise, or the frequency of the background level falling, the width of the fall, etc. . Furthermore, the higher the background level, the easier it is to select a variation pattern for executing a pseudo stop (provisional stop). Conversely, the lower the background level, the more likely it is that the pseudo stop will be performed. Further, a background level may be set in advance for the variation pattern to be variably displayed, and when the variation pattern is variably displayed, the background level may be set to the set background level.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the effect|presentation process (S1314) during a big hit performed by MPU221 in the sound lamp control apparatus 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the effect processing (S1314) during the big hit. This jackpot middle effect process (S1314) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the big-hit production process, first, it is determined whether or not the big-hit effective flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2201). If it is determined that the jackpot valid flag 223e is off (S2201: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot valid flag 223e is ON (S2201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the measurement counter 223i (S2202), and it is determined whether or not the entrance sensor 900a is ON. (S2203). If it is determined that the entrance sensor 900a is off (S2203: No), the process of S2204 and S2205 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2206. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2203 that the entrance sensor 900a is ON (S2203: Yes), the entrance passage process is executed (S2204), the entry command for display is set (S2205), and the process of S2206 is performed. Move to Details of the entrance passage processing (S2204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S2206, it is determined whether or not the detour sensor 900b is on (S2206). If it is determined that the detour sensor 900b is off (S2206: No), the process of S2207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2208. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2206 that the detour sensor 900b is on (S2206: Yes), the escape command for display is set (S2207), and the process proceeds to S2208.

In the process of S2208, it is determined whether or not the exit sensor 900c is on (S2208). If it is determined that the exit sensor 900c is off (S2208: No), the process of S2209 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2210. On the other hand, in the process of S2208, if it is determined that the exit sensor 900c is ON (S2208: Yes), a display failure command is set (S2209), and the process proceeds to S2210.

In the processing of S2210, it is determined whether or not the first ball entering flag 223f is ON (S2210). If it is determined that the first ball entry flag 223f is off (S2210: No), the processing of S2211 and S2212 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, in the process of S2210, if it is determined that the first ball entering flag 223f is ON (S2210: Yes), the first ball entering flag 223f is set to OFF (S2211), and a capture command for display is set. (S2212), and the process proceeds to S2213.

In the process of S2213, it is determined whether or not the second ball entry flag 223g is ON (S2213). If it is determined that the second ball entry flag 223g is off (S2213: No), the processing of S2214 and S2215 is skipped, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2213, if it is determined that the second ball entry flag 223g is ON (S2213: Yes), the second ball entry flag 223g is set to OFF (S2214), and the display recapture command is issued. It sets (S2215) and terminates this processing.

Next, the entrance passage processing (S2204) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing this entrance passage processing (S2204). This entrance passing process (S2204) is executed in the big hit production process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the entrance passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the in-round flag 223m provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2301). This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2301, when it is determined that the in-round flag 223m is ON (S2301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot type is A (S2302).

In the processing of S2302, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not A (S2302: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type is A (S2302: Yes), the passing timing is determined based on the information in the opening/closing pattern storage area 223k and the value of the measurement counter 223i (S2303).

Next, it is determined whether or not the passage timing is the exit passage timing (S2304). If it is determined that the passage timing is not the exit passage timing (S2304: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage timing is the exit passage timing (S2304: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the exit timing counter 223n (S2305), and thereafter the value of the exit timing counter 223n is greater than 10. (S2306).

In the process of S2306, if it is determined that the value of the exit timing counter 223n is 10 or less (S2306: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the exit timing counter 223n is greater than 10 (S2306: Yes), a display timing notification command is set (S2307), and then the value of the exit timing counter 223n is reset (S2308). , the process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 122. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present control example, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2401), and the display control device 114 to start.

Here, the boot processing (S2401) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2401) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2501). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2502). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2502, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S2502, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2503). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2504), the command pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 100) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S2402 in FIG. 100) (S2505), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S2401) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 101, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2503 to S2505 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2501 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a at step S2501. and the processing of S2502 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S2503 to S2505 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S2503 to S2505 without performing the processes of S2501 and S2502 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, returning to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2402). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2403). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2403, then the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2404, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S2405). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 120(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S4802 in FIG. 120A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 72 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2708 in FIG. 102B) and simple display setting processing (see S2709 in FIG. 102B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), and the command to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. It is possible to perform a variable performance. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2405, interrupt permission is set (S2406), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2406, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 102(a). FIG. 102(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2601), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 102(b). FIG. 102(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 76) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 102(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701). If it is off (S2701: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S2702) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2703) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2702), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S2703), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2702), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S2704). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2703) or the simple display setting processing (S2709). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2705). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a rear face change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the continuous notice is sent to the image controller 237 . A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2706). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2704) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2705), 76, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the buffer information to be drawn. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122 .

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2707). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2707, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front and back reach, front and rear reach other than front and back, complete loss, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2701: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 116, the details of the command determination process (S2702), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 103, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2801). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (see FIG. 117) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2802). , for all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the command types are analyzed (S2803).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2804), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2804: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S2805) and returns to the processing of S2801.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S2805) will now be described with reference to FIG. 104(a). FIG. 104(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2901).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2901, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation longer than the set display data table can be actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2901 is turned on, and other variations The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2903). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2903, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2905). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2906), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2905, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S2904 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. 103 . In the process of S2804, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2804: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S2806), If there is a change type command for display (S2806: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2807), and the process returns to S2801.

Details of the stop type command process (S2807) will now be described with reference to FIG. 104(b). FIG. 104(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss, or chance number) is determined (S3001), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S3002).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3002 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to off (S3003), and this processing ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S3002. In the above-described task processing (see S2704 in FIG. 102(b)), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S3002 is identified from the stop design determination flag set by S3003. At the same time, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S3001, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S3002.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description continues. In the process of S2806, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2806: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot related command for display in the unprocessed commands (S2808). If there is a jackpot-related command for display (S2808: Yes), the jackpot display process is executed (S2809), and the process returns to S2801.

Here, with reference to FIG. 105, the details of the big win display process (S2809) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the jackpot display process. In this jackpot display processing, processing corresponding to a jackpot-related command for display received from the sound lamp control device 114 is executed.

In the jackpot display process (S2809), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command for display has been received (S3101). In the process of S3101, if it is determined that the opening command for display has been received (S3101: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S3102), and the process proceeds to S3103. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3101 that the display opening command has not been received (S3101: No), the process of S3102 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3103.

Details of the opening command process (S3102) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106(a) is a flow chart showing the opening command process (S3102). This opening command processing (S3102) is to execute processing corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114. FIG.

In the opening command process (S3102), first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3201). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3202).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3201, time data representing the performance time is set in the timer counter 233h (S3203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S3205), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 105, the description is continued. After completing the processing of S3101 or S3102, it is determined whether or not a display round number command has been received (S3103). In the process of S3103, if it is determined that the display round number command has been received (S3103: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3104), and the process proceeds to S3105. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3103 that the command for the number of rounds for display has not been received (S3103: No), the process of S3104 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3105.

Here, the round number command processing (S3104) will be described with reference to FIG. 106(b). FIG. 106(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. This number-of-rounds command process is for executing a process corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3301). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3302).

Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3301, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3304). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S3305), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 105, the description is continued. After completing the processing of S3103 or S3104, it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3105). In the process of S3105, if there is an ending command for display (S3105: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3106), and the process proceeds to S3107. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3105 that there is no ending command for display (S3105: No), the process of S3106 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3107.

Details of the ending command process (S3106) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3401). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3402). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the processing of S3401 is turned on, The data table discrimination flags corresponding to other ending display data tables are set to OFF (S3403). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3403, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to which ending effect display mode. can be easily determined.

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3404), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3405). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S3406), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 105, the description is continued. After completing the processing of S3105 or S3106, it is then determined whether or not there is a command related to entering a ball among the unprocessed commands (S3107). In the process of S3107, if it is determined that there is a command related to entering the ball (S3107: Yes), the entering effect process is executed (S3108), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no entering-ball-related command (S3107: No), the process of S3108 is skipped and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 108, the details of the ball entry effect processing (S3108) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the ball entry effect process (S3108). This ball-entering effect process executes a process corresponding to a ball-entering-related command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the entering effect process (S3108), first, it is determined whether or not a display appearance command has been received (S3501). In the process of S3501, when it is determined that the display appearance command has been received (S3501: Yes), the appearance effect process is executed (S3502), and the process proceeds to S3503. Details of this appearance effect processing (S3502) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3501 that the display appearance command has not been received, the process of S3502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3503.

After completing the processing of S3501 or S3502, it is then determined whether or not the escape command for display has been received (S3503). In the process of S3503, if it is determined that the escape command for display has been received (S3503: Yes), the escape effect process is executed (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505. The details of this escape effect processing (S3504) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3503 that the escape command for display has not been received (S3503: No), the process of S3504 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3505.

After completing the processing of S3504 or S3505, it is then determined whether or not a display failure command has been received (S3505). In the process of S3505, if it is determined that the display failure command has been received (S3505: Yes), the failure effect process is executed (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3507. Details of this failure rendering process (S3506). This will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3505 that the display failure command has not been received (S3505: No), the process of S3506 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3507.

After completing the processing of S3505 or S3506, it is then determined whether or not a capture command for display has been received (S3507). In the process of S3507, when it is determined that the capture command for display has been received (S3507: Yes), the capture effect process is executed (S3508), and the process proceeds to S3509. The details of this capture rendering process (S3508) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3507 that the capture command for display has not been received (S3507: No), the process of S3508 is skipped. The process proceeds to S3509.

After completing the processing of S3507 or S3508, it is then determined whether or not a recapture command for display has been received (S3509). In the processing of S3509, if it is determined that the recapture command for display has been received (S3509: Yes), recapture effect processing is executed (S3510), and this processing ends. The details of this recapture effect process (S3510) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3509 that the display re-capture command has not been received (S3509: No), the process of S3510 is skipped and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 109, details of the appearance effect processing (S3502) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the appearance effect processing (3102). This appearance effect processing (S3502) is for executing processing corresponding to the display appearance command received from the sound lamp control device 113. During the jackpot game, a game ball enters the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650. It is a process for executing the production in the case of.

In the appearance effect process (S3502), first, it is determined whether or not the appearance effect flag 233m is ON (S3601). In the processing of S3601, when it is determined that the flag during appearance effect is ON (S3601), since the appearance effect has already been executed (see FIG. 57(a)), 1 is added to the appearance counter 233n ( S3602), the display data table corresponding to the value of the on-appearance counter 233n after the addition is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3603). After completing the processing of S3603, the process proceeds to S3609. By the processing of S3602 and S3603, the cat pattern (see FIGS. 57 to 59) in the number of cats appearing displayed during the jackpot game is increased by 1 and displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3601 that the in-appearance effect flag 233m is off (S3601: No), then it is determined whether or not the running counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3604). In the process of S3604, if it is determined that the running counter 233p is 0 (S3604: No), it means that neither the appearance effect nor the escape effect is displayed, so the normal appearance effect is performed. A display data table is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3605).

The normal appearance effect set by the processing of S3605 is, as described above, an effect in which the effect during the jackpot game is displayed on one screen, and either the appearance effect or the escape effect is displayed. is what is displayed. In this control example, the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into two so that two kinds of effects, an appearance effect and an escape effect, can be simultaneously displayed as effects during the jackpot game. However, when only one of the appearance effect and the escape effect should be displayed, only the appearance effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one screen by the normal appearance effect set by the processing of S3605. Therefore, the game machine can be easily understood by the player.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3604, if it is determined that the running counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3604: Yes), the appearance effect is not displayed but the escape effect is being displayed. is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3606). As a result, the state in which only the escape effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one screen can be switched to the state in which the appearance effect and the escape effect are simultaneously displayed.

After completing the process of S4705 or S4706, the in-appearance effect flag 233m is set to ON (S4707), the in-appearance counter 233n is incremented by 1 (S4708), and the process proceeds to S4709.

After completing the process of S4703 or S4708, the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e are cleared by writing Null data (S3609). Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the S display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3610), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3611). . Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S3612), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the details of the escape effect process (S3504) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing the escape effect process (S3504). This runaway effect process is for executing a process corresponding to the runaway command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 , and the game ball entering the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game flows down to the detour channel 653 . It is a process for executing the production in the case of.

In the escape effect process (S3504), first, 1 is subtracted from the appearing counter 233n (S3701), and it is determined whether or not the appearing counter 233n after the subtraction is 0 (S3702). In the process of S3702, when it is determined that the on-appearance counter 233n is 0 (S3702: Yes), there is no appearance effect to be displayed, so the on-appearance effect flag 233m is set to OFF (S3703), and the process of S3704 is performed. Move to On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3702 that the on-appearance counter 233n is not 0, there is an appearance effect to be displayed, so the process of S3703 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3704.

After completing the process of S3702 or S3703, it is determined whether or not the running counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3704). In the processing of S3704, if it is determined that the running counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3704: Yes), 1 is added to the running counter 233p (S3705), and the value of the running counter 233p after the addition corresponds to the value of the running counter 233p. This display data table is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3706), and the process proceeds to S3711. By the processing of S3705 and S3706, the cat pattern (see FIGS. 57 to 59) is increased by 1 and displayed in the running numbers displayed during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the process of S3704, if it is determined that the running counter 233p is 0 (S3704: No), the running counter 233p is incremented by 1 (S3707), and the appearance effect flag 233m is turned on. It is determined whether or not (S3708). In the processing of S3708, if it is determined that the flag 233m during appearance effect is off (S3708: No), there is no appearance effect to be displayed, so the display data table corresponding to the normal escape effect is determined, and the display data is displayed. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3709), and the process proceeds to S3711.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3708, if it is determined that the in-appearance effect flag 233m is ON (S3708: Yes), there is an appearance effect to be displayed, so the display data table corresponding to the special escape effect is determined, It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3710), and the process proceeds to S3711.

The above-described normal escape effect is a effect in which the escape effect is displayed on one screen on the third pattern display device 81, and the special escape effect displays an escape effect and an appearance effect on the third symbol display device 81 on two screens. This is an effect to play (see FIG. 57(b)).

After completing the processing of S3706, S3709 or S3710, the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e are cleared by writing Null data (S3711). Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3712), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3713). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S3714), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, details of the failure rendering process (S3506) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the failure rendering process (S3506). This failure effect process is for executing a process corresponding to a display failure command received from the sound lamp control device 113. A game ball entering the specific winning device 650 during a jackpot game , and the second specific winning opening 650b, and passes through the exit portion 652c.

In the failure effect processing (S3506), first, 1 is subtracted from the running counter 223p (S3801), and it is determined whether or not the appearing effect flag 233m is ON (S3802). In the process of S3802, if it is determined that the in-appearance effect flag 233m is off (S3802: No), there is no appearance effect to be displayed, so the display data table corresponding to the normal failure effect is determined. , is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3803), and the process proceeds to S3805. On the other hand, in the process of S3802, if it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is ON (S3802: Yes), there is an appearance effect to be displayed and the effect is displayed on two screens, so a special failure occurs. A display data table corresponding to the effect is determined, the display data table buffer 233dn is set (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

After completing the process of S3803 or S3804, the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e are cleared by writing Null data (S3805). Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3806), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3807). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S3808), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, details of the capture effect process (S3508) will be described. FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the capture effect process (S3508). This capture effect processing is to execute the processing corresponding to the display capture command received from the sound lamp control processing 113, and the game ball entering the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game This is a process for executing an effect when the ball enters the ball.

In the capture effect process (S3506), first, 1 is added to the capture counter 233r (S3901), and 1 is subtracted from the appearing counter 233n (S3902). Next, it is determined whether or not the on-appearance counter 233n decremented by the process of S3902 is 0 (S3903). In the process of S3903, when it is determined that the on-appearance counter 233n is 0, there is no appearance effect to be displayed, so the on-appearance effect flag 233m is turned off (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3905. On the other hand, in the process of S3903, if it is determined that the on-appearance counter 233n is not 0 (S3903: No), there is an appearance effect to be displayed, so the process of S3904 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3905.

After completing the processing of S3903 or S3904, it is then determined whether or not the running counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3905). In the process of S3905, if it is determined that the running counter 233p is 0 (S3905: No), the normal display indicating the capture counter is executed in order to execute the capture effect on one screen without the escape effect being displayed. A display data table corresponding to the capture effect is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3906), and the process proceeds to S3908.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3905, if it is determined that the running counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3905: Yes), there is an escape effect being displayed and the capture counter is reset to execute the capture effect on two screens. A display data table corresponding to the special capture effect shown is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3907), and the process proceeds to S3908.

After completing the process of S3906 or S3907, the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e are cleared by writing Null data (S3908). Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3909), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3910). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S3911), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the details of the recapture effect process (S3510) will be described. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the recapture effect process (S3510). This recapture effect processing 113 executes processing corresponding to the recapture command for display received from the sound lamp control processing 113, and the game ball entering the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game is the second specific game ball. This is the process for executing the process when the ball enters the winning hole 650b.

In the recapture effect process (S3510), first, 1 is subtracted from the running counter 233p (S4001), and 1 is added to the recapture counter 233s (S4002). Next, it is determined whether or not the appearance effect flag 233m is ON (S4003). In the process of S4003, if it is determined that the appearance effect in progress flag 233m is ON (S4003: No), the recapture counter is set to execute the recapture effect on one screen without the appearance effect being displayed. is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S4004), and the process proceeds to S4006.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4003, if it is determined that the in-appearance effect flag 233m is ON (S4003: Yes), there is an appearance effect being displayed and the recapture effect is executed on two screens. A display data table corresponding to the special re-capture effect indicating the capture counter is determined, set in the display data table buffer (S4005), and the process proceeds to S4006.

After completing the process of S4004 or S4005, the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e are cleared by writing Null data (S4006). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4007), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4008). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S4009), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description continues. In the process of S2808, if it is determined that there is no command related to the big win for display (S2808: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a timing notification command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2810). If there is a display timing notification command (S2810: Yes), timing notification processing is executed (S2811), and the process returns to S2801.

Details of the timing notification process (S2811) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the timing notification process (S2811). This timing notification processing (S2811) executes processing corresponding to the display timing notification command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. This timing notification command is sent when a large number of game balls that enter the specific winning device 650 do not enter the second specific winning port 650b and pass through the exit portion 652c as described above. be.

In the timing notification process (S2811), first, the timing notification display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4101), and the transfer data table corresponding to the timing notification display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102). ). After that, based on the timing notification display data table, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter (S4103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S4105), and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the timing notification display data table set here, an effect display for changing the shooting timing of the game ball by the player is set. A specific example is an effect that prompts the user to press the screen and the frame button 22 at the same time. In order to press the screen and the frame button 22 at the same time with this effect, the player needs to let go of the shooting handle. Therefore, the shooting timing of the game ball can be changed. With this effect, it is possible to save the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 from being shot at a timing when it is difficult to enter the second specific winning port 650b, and it is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S2810 that there is no display timing notification command (S2810: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display background change command among the unprocessed commands (S2812). If there is a display background change command (S2812: Yes), background change command processing is executed (S2813), and the process returns to S2801.

Details of the rear surface change command process (S2815) will now be described with reference to FIG. 115(a). FIG. 115(a) is a flow chart showing the rear face change command process. The back surface change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back surface change command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the back face change command process, first, a back face image change flag is set to ON (S4201) for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S4803) of the change in the back face image that accompanies the reception of the back face change command in the ON state. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back planes A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back plane image type indicated by the back plane change command is turned on, and the other plane image types are turned on. is set to OFF (S4202), the back surface change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S4201 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S4202. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image determination flag set in S4202 is used to determine the The type of the background image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 for normal use or video RAM 236 for normal use) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more back surface change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more commands to change the back face are stored in the command buffer area. There is a possibility that it will be In the process of S4202, if it is determined that two or more back face change commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back face image determination flag corresponding to the back face image type indicated by the previously received back face change command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear surface change command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract any one back face change command and turn on the back face image determination flag corresponding to the back face image type indicated by the command. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description continues. In the process of S2812, if it is determined that there is no back face change command (S2812: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a notice effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2814), and if the notice effect command is If there is (S2814: Yes), the notice effect command process is executed (S2815), and the process returns to S2801.

Details of the advance notice effect command process (S2815) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect command process (S2815). This advance notice effect command processing (S2815) executes processing corresponding to the advance notice effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the advance notice effect command process (S2815), first, it is determined whether or not a SW effect command for display has been received (S4401). In the processing of _S4401, if it is determined that the SW effect command for display has been received (S4401: Yes), the SW effect display data table indicated by the received SW effect command for display is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4402). ), the process proceeds to S4403. On the other hand, in the process of S4401, if it is determined that the SW effect command for display has not been received (S4401: No), the process of S4402 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4403. By executing the processing of S4402, the SW effect (FIGS. 60 and 61) in the above-described accessory-linked effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. The effect pattern of the SW effect displayed by the process of S4402 is stored in the SW scenario setting area 223o in the RAM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, as described above. As a result, the lighting and opening/closing operations of the spherical accessories (330, 340) whose operations are controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 and the lighting operation of the frame button 22 can be interlocked.

When the processing of S4401 or S4402 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the advance notice effect command for display has been received (S4403). In the processing of S4403, if it is determined that the display notice effect command has been received (S4403: Yes), the notice effect display data table indicated by the received display notice effect command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4404). ), the process proceeds to S4405. On the other hand, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that the display preview effect command has not been received (S4403: No), the process of S4404 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4405. The advance notice effect displayed by the processing of S4404 is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, or the like, which does not require operation of the frame button 22. FIG.

After completing the processing of S4403 or S4404, it is then determined whether or not a display press command has been received (S4405). In the process of S4405, if it is determined that the display press command has been received (S4405: Yes), the advance notice display data table corresponding to the press effect of the set SW effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S4406), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4405 that the display press command has not been received (S4405: No), the process of S4406 is skipped and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description continues. In the processing of S2814, if it is determined that there is no advance notice effect command (S2814: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2816), and if there is an error command (S2816: Yes), execute error command processing (S2817), and return to the processing of S2801.

Details of the error command processing (S2817) will now be described with reference to FIG. 115(b). FIG. 115(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 114 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4301). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4302). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4301, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4302, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process of S4302 turns on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 103 . In the process of S2816, if it is determined that there is no error command (S2816: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2818), and the process returns to S2801.

In the process of S2801, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes ), and the processing of S2802 to S2818 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2801 to S2818 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2709) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Only type commands are extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 104 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 104(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S2901, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2902, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119, details of the display setting process (S2703), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 117, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4501). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S4502 to S4504 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S4505. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S4501: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S4502), S4503-S4504 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S4503, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S4503). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4503: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S4504).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S4601).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle are determined. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4601, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4602), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 117 . After the warning image setting process (S4504), or when it is determined in the process of S4503 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S4503: No), the process proceeds to S4505.

In S4505, pointer update processing is executed (S4505). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 119 . FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4701). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S4701, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S4702). As a result, if it is End information (S4702: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4703). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4704), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S4705), and this process ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4703 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S4703: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S4706), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4702, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S4702: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 117, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4506). In the task processing, the type of sprites (display objects) forming the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the process of S4506 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4507), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4508). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4508: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4508: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S4509).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S4509: Yes), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S4510), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the content is cleared (S4511). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4512), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4513). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4514), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4515), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. Further, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

Incidentally, the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4515 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S2704), until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation, from the last time stop design determination flag set by S4515, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4509, if the fixed display flag is not ON but OFF (S4509: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S4516). If the demonstration display flag is off (S4516: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S4517), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4518). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4519). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4520), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4521), this processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S4516, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S4516: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and the demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S2709) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 72(b) or (c)) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 120, details of the transfer setting process (S2705), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 120(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4801). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4801: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. After executing the process (S4802), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not ON as a result of the processing of S4801, that is, if it is OFF (S4801: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4803), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S4802), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 120(b). FIG. 120(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4802).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S4901). ), and further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S4902). In the processing of S4902, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S4902 that the transfer process has not ended (S4902: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4902: Yes), the process proceeds to S4903. Also, as a result of the process of S4901, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4901: No), the process proceeds to S4903.

In the process of S4903, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4903). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4904), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S4903, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S4903: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4905), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in V interrupt processing (see FIG. 102B), command Since determination processing (see FIGS. 103 to 115) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 117 to 119) are executed, normal image drawing is set. A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 120) (see S4801: No in FIG. 120(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, normal image transfer setting processing (S4803), which is one process of the transfer setting processing (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4803).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4505) of the previously executed display setting process (S2703) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S5001). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S5002). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S5003), furthermore, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state is set to ON (S5004), and the process proceeds to S5005.

Also, in the processing of S5002, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S5002: No), the processing of S5003 and S5004 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S5005. In the process of S5005, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S5005), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S5005: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S5006).

In the process of S5006, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S5006 that the transfer process has not ended (S5006: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S5006: Yes), the process proceeds to S5007. Also, as a result of the process of S5005, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S5005: No), the process proceeds to S5007.

In the process of S5007, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S5007). If the transfer start flag is on (S5007: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S5008), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S5003 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S5017. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON but OFF (S5007: No), it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is ON (S5013). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S5009: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S5009: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S5011). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S5012), and the process proceeds to S5013.

In the process of S5013, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5013). The determination in the process of S5013 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the processing in S5013, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5013: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S5013 (S5013: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S5014). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S5014, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S5015), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be the stop type of the big win, the image data used in the performance at the time of the big win can be transferred without delay from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加In addition, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back surface change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the back image in the resident video RAM 235 is selected from the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, details of the drawing process (S2706), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S2704) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the drawing list shown in FIG. 76 is generated (S5101). That is, in the process of S5101, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in task processing (S2704), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S5102). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S5102, the rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated (S5103). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting "1" if the value was "0" and "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 102(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

<Regarding the second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 132. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, when the SW effect is selected based on the variation pattern, the spherical accessory (330, 340) and the SW effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are interlocked. A case has been described in which the performance linked to the character is executed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, when the SW effect is selected based on the variation pattern, the effect of pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times is executed. Specifically, as the SW effect, based on the pressing of the frame button 22, the content of the comment displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the background of the comment suggest the degree of expectation of the big win, and the frame There is provided a repeated hit type performance suggesting the degree of expectation of a big win depending on whether or not a specific pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the depression of the button 22.例文帳に追加The comment-type effect and the continuous-hit-type effect are switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially different. Further, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 is executed instead of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the advance notice effect executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is executed. The difference is that part of the command processing (S2815) is changed, and other various processing is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125, the display contents of the SW effects displayed in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display contents of the SW effect of the comment-based effect.

In the second control example, when the SW effect of the comment type effect is executed, the variable display is reduced and displayed in the lower left part of the third pattern display device 81 . Then, the patterns of the PUSH button corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (four times in this control example) in the SW effect are displayed vertically in the center of the screen. After that, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the picture of the PUSH button is changed to the comment display (see FIG. 123(a)). The comment display displayed based on the depression of this frame button 22 suggests the degree of expectation for a big win by the content of the comment and the background of the comment.

Here, when a comment display suggesting that the expectation of a big win is high is displayed, the comment display displayed based on the subsequent pressing of the frame button 22 is fixed to the one with a high expectation of the big win. be. For example, after the comment display with the background of the school of fish is displayed based on the first pressing of the frame button 22, the background of the comment display displayed based on the second and third pressing of the frame button 22 is also the school of fish. (See FIG. 123(b)). As a result, the player's interest in the game can be improved without lowering the degree of expectation for a big win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the SW effect of the repeated hitting system effect in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 124(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display contents of the SW effect of the repeated hitting system effect.

In the second control example, when the SW effect of the continuous hit type effect is executed, similarly to the SW effect of the comment type effect described above, the variable display is reduced and displayed in the lower left part of the third symbol display device 81, The pattern of the PUSH button corresponding to the number of depressions of the frame button 22 in the SW effect (four times in this control example) is displayed vertically in the center of the screen. After that, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the PUSH button picture is erased, and instead, a part or all of a specific picture (a whale picture in this control example) is displayed (see FIG. 124 ( a) see).

The whale pattern described above moves from the right side of the screen to the center of the screen when the frame button 22 is pressed. For example, based on the first press, 1/4 of the whale pattern is displayed from the right side of the screen, based on the second press, 2/4 of the whale pattern is displayed, and on the third press, , 3/4 of the whale pattern is displayed, and based on the fourth depression, the entire whale pattern is displayed (see FIG. 124(b)). In this way, in the SW effect of the continuous hit type effect, when all the whale patterns are displayed, it is suggested that a big win will occur, and if not, it is suggested that a big win will not occur.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the touch effect executed when there is detection by the touch sensor in the SW effect will be described. This touch effect is executed when the effect with a high degree of expectation of a big win is executed by pressing the frame button 22 in the above-described comment-type effect and continuous-hit-type effect.

First, in the above-described comment-type effect or continuous-hit-type effect, the pattern of the PUSH button corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (four times in this control example) in the SW effect is displayed vertically in the center of the screen ( FIG. 125(a)). After that, when there is detection by the touch sensor, based on the pressing of the frame button 22, the pattern of the PUSH button that displays the highly expected performance of a big win is enlarged and displayed.

For example, in a comment-based effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed four times, if a school of fish is displayed as the background of the comment notice when the frame button 22 is pressed a second time, the second PUSH button from the top is displayed. is displayed in an enlarged manner (FIG. 125(b)). Here, the display content of the SW effect for each number of times of pressing is determined by prefetching and acquiring it at the start of the SW effect. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win (that is, an effect with a low probability of being displayed) will be displayed before the frame button 22 is pressed. Pressing of the button 22 can be prompted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. FIG. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound ramp control device 113 of the second control example.

First, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 126(a). As shown in FIG. 126(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222a, a character interlocking effect table 222b, an opening/closing pattern storage area 222c, a background lottery table 222d, a SW scenario storage area 222e, A SW effect selection table 222f is provided, and in addition, various data and programs necessary for game control are stored. Since the variation pattern selection table 222a to the SW scenario storage area 222e are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The SW effect selection table 222f defines the display contents of the SW effect of the above-mentioned comment type effect and the continuous hit type effect. At least a time comment background table 222f3, a losing time fixed comment background table 222f4, a winning time fixed comment background table 222f5, a comment table 222f6, and a repeated hit type effect lottery table 222f7 are provided. A detailed description of each table will be given later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129. FIG.

The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 126(b). As shown in FIG. 126(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example is provided with a fixed flag 223r and a SW depression counter 223s in addition to the areas of the first control example described above.

The fixed flag 223r is set to ON in the SW effect selection process (see FIG. 131), which will be described later, when the fixed condition of the comment-based effect is satisfied. When this fixed flag 223r is set to ON, the SW effect selected in the subsequent SW effect selection process is selected from the fixed table. As a result, it is possible to prevent switching from the comment-type effect to the continuous-hit-type effect.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the fixation flag 223r may be turned on when it is desired not to switch the effect in the repeated hitting system effect.

The SW pressing counter 223s is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed. The SW pressing counter 223s is incremented by 1 each time the SW effect selection process is executed when the frame button 22 is pressed during the SW effect, and the number of times the SW is pressed is the upper limit value. The SW scenario is reset when

Next, the contents of the SW effect selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 127(a), the contents of the comment background table 222f1 during winning normal reach will be described. FIG. 127(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment background table 222f1 during winning normal reach. The hit normal reach comment background table 222f1 defines the comment background of the comment-based effects to be selected when the hit/fail determination result is hit and the normal reach is executed. This comment background is defined to be selected by the number of presses of the frame button 22 and the effect counter.

Here, as the comment background, the display area of the comment notice display is a blue "blue background", a yellow "yellow background", a red "red background", and a school of fish pattern. There is a "fish school background" to be displayed. Compared to the “blue background”, the expectation of the “yellow background” is higher than the “blue background”, and the “red background” is more expected than the “yellow background”. Expectations are higher for the "fish school background" than for the "red background."

In the hit normal reach comment background table 222f1, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the first time and the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 299", "blue background" is selected, and "300 to 396" is selected. ', 'yellow background' is selected, '397-398' selects 'red background', and '399' selects 'fish school background'. When the frame button 22 is pressed for the second time, the "blue background" is selected when the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 249", and the "yellow background" is selected when it is "250 to 349". is selected, the "red background" is selected in the case of "350-397", and the "fish school background" is selected in the case of "398-399". Furthermore, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the third time, the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149", the "blue background" is selected, and when it is "150 to 299", the "yellow background" is selected. is selected, the "red background" is selected in the case of "300-396", and the "fish school background" is selected in the case of "397-399". When the frame button 22 is pressed four times, the effect counter 223j selects "yellow background" when it is "0 to 249", and selects "red background" when it is "250 to 349". In the case of "350 to 399", the "fish school background" is selected and the "blue background" is not selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127(b), the comment background table 222f2 at winning super reach will be described. FIG. 127(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment background table 222f2 at winning super reach. This winning super reach comment background table 222f2 is defined so as to select a comment background with a high degree of expectation for a big win, compared to the above-described winning normal reach comment background table 222f1.

As for the hit super reach comment table background 222f2, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the first time and the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149", "blue background" is selected, and "150 to 150" is selected. "349" selects "yellow background", "350-397" selects "red background", and "398-399" selects "fish school background". Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the second time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149", the "blue background" is selected, and if it is "150 to 299", the "yellow background" is selected. is selected, the "red background" is selected in the case of "300-396", and the "fish school background" is selected in the case of "397-399". Furthermore, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the third time, the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 249", the "yellow background" is selected, and when it is "250 to 349", the "red background" is selected. is selected, and in the case of "350 to 399", the "fish school background" is selected and the "blue background" is not selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed for the fourth time, the effect counter 223j selects "red background" when it is "0 to 249", and selects "fish school background" when it is "250 to 399". and "blue background" and "yellow background" are not selected.

In this way, the winning super reach comment background table 222f2 is defined so that a comment background with a high degree of expectation for a big win is more likely to be selected than the winning normal reach comment background table 222f1. As a result, in the super reach comment type production, it is possible to make it easier to display what is expected to be a big hit compared to the normal reach. In this control example, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the same (4 times) for super reach and normal reach. . As a result, even if the background display is selected using the same table for super ready-to-win and normal ready-to-win, the area of ROM 222 is reduced while the super ready-to-win is more likely to produce a high-expectation big win compared to normal ready-to-win. can save money.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128(a), the contents of the comment background table 222f3 at the time of disengagement will be described. FIG. 128(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment background table 222f3 when not in use. This comment background table for winning 222f3 is defined so that a comment background with a low expectation of a big win is selected compared to the comment background table for winning normal reach 222f1 and the comment background table for winning super reach 222f2. .

When the frame button 22 is pressed for the first time, the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 349", the "blue background" is selected, and "350 to 396" is selected for the out-of-time comment table background 222f3. In the case of , the "yellow background" is selected, in the case of "397-398", the "red background" is selected, and in the case of "399", the "fish school background" is selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed for the second time, the "blue background" is selected when the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 299", and the "yellow background" is selected when it is "300 to 396". is selected, "red background" is selected for "397 to 398", and "fish school background" is selected for "399". Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the third time, the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 249", the "blue background" is selected, and when it is "250 to 349", the "yellow background" is selected. is selected, the "red background" is selected in the case of "350 to 398", and the "fish school background" is selected in the case of "399". When the frame button 22 is pressed for the fourth time, the effect counter 223j selects "blue background" when it is "0 to 149", and selects "yellow background" when it is "150 to 349". In the case of "350-397", the "red background" is selected, and in the case of "398-399", the "fish school background" is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128(b), the contents of the fixed comment background table 222f4 when out will be described. FIG. 128(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fixed comment background table 222f4 at the time of failure. This out-time fixed comment background table 222f4 is used to select a comment-based effect when the fixed condition of the comment-based effect is satisfied and the fixed flag 223r is turned on (S6103 in FIG. 131). In addition, the fixed comment background table 222f4 at the time of failure defines the comment background to be selected based on the previous background type and the effect counter 223j.

Specifically, when the type of the previous comment background is "red background" and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 7", "red background" is selected and " 8 to 9”, the “fish school background” is selected. Further, when the type of the previous comment background is "background of a school of fish", if the first digit of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 9" (that is, in all cases), the "background of a school of fish" is selected. . As a result, when the fixed condition of the comment-based effect is established, the degree of expectation for the big win suggested by the comment background does not decrease, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128(c), the contents of the winning time fixed comment background table 222f5 will be described. FIG. 128(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit-time fixed comment background table 222f5. This hit fixed comment background table 222f5 is used when a fixed condition for comment-based effects is satisfied, as with the above-described loss fixed comment background table 222f4. Unlike the fixed comment background table 222f4, which is used when the winning judgment result is winning, the winning fixed comment background table 222f5 is used when the winning judgment result is winning.

Specifically, when the type of the previous comment background is "red background" and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "red background" is selected and " 4 to 9”, the “fish school background” is selected. Further, when the type of the previous comment background is "background of a school of fish", if the first digit of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 9" (that is, in all cases), the "background of a school of fish" is selected. . As a result, when the fixed condition of the comment-based effect is established, the degree of expectation for the big win suggested by the comment background does not decrease, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, the contents of the comment table 222f6 will be described with reference to FIG. 129(a). FIG. 129(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment table 222f6. This comment table 222f6 prescribes the contents of the comment notice displayed in the above-described comment-based effect.

The comment table 222f6 defines the content of the comment notice to be displayed based on the background type and the effect counter 223j. Specifically, when the background type is "blue background" and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "Do your best" is selected as the content of the comment notice, and " 4 to 6", "not yet" is selected as the content of the comment notice; if it is "7 to 8", "Ikeike" is selected as the content of the comment notice; "A little more" is selected as the content of the notice. Further, when the background type is "yellow background", if the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "chance?" If it is 6", then ``Oh?'' is selected as the content of the comment notice, if it is ``7-8'', ``What is this? "Could it be?" is selected as the content of the comment notice. Further, when the background type is "red background", if the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "chance!" If the number is 6", "OK!" is selected as the content of the comment notice, if the number is "7-8", "Good!" is selected as the content of the comment notice, and if the number is "9", the comment is made. "That's it!" is selected as the content of the notice. In addition, when the background type is "fish school background", if the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "great chance!!" 4 to 6", "Alright!!" is selected as the content of the comment notice, and if it is "7 to 8", "Amazing!!" is selected as the content of the comment notice, and at "9", If there is, "Extremely Hot!!" is selected as the content of the comment notice.

In this way, since the content of the comment notice to be displayed is selected based on the type of the background, it is possible to match the degree of expectation for the big win suggested by the content of the comment notice and the comment background, and the game is easy for the player to understand. machine. Also, the comment background and the content of the comment notice are selected based on the effect counter 223j. ing. As a result, the contents of the comment background and the comment notice can be selected at random, and the variations displayed in the comment-based presentation can be increased, so that the interest of the player can be improved. In this control example, the content of the comment notice is selected based on the type of the comment background. may Alternatively, the content of the comment notice may be selected first, and then the type of the comment background may be selected based on the content of the comment notice.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129(b), the contents of the repeated-hit effect lottery table 222f7 will be described. FIG. 129(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the repeated-hit effect lottery table 222f7. This repeated hit type effect lottery table 222f7 defines whether or not a specific pattern is displayed based on the success/failure determination result, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and the value of the effect counter 223j.

Specifically, when the hit/fail determination result is a win and the number of presses of the frame button 22 is the first time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 199", the specific design of the whale is 1. /4 is displayed (see FIG. 124(a)), and if it is "200 to 399", it is not displayed. In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the second time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149", the whale pattern is displayed in 2/4, and if it is "150 to 399", it is displayed last time. remains displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the third time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 119", the whale pattern is displayed in 3/4, and if it is "120 to 399", it is displayed the previous time. remains displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the fourth time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 99", all the whale patterns are displayed and a big win is announced (FIG. 124(b)). )), and if it is "100 to 399", the previous display remains as it is. Here, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the fourth time, the value of the effect counter 223j becomes "100 to 399", and if not all the whale patterns are displayed, then it means that a separate jackpot has been won. be notified.

On the other hand, if the determination result is wrong and the number of presses of the frame button 22 is the first, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 199", the whale pattern, which is a specific pattern, is displayed in 1/4. (See FIG. 124(a)), and if it is "200 to 399", it is not displayed. When the frame button 22 is pressed for the second time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 99", the whale pattern is displayed in 2/4, and if it is "100 to 399", the previous remains displayed. Furthermore, when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the third time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 49", the whale pattern is displayed in 3/4, and if it is "50 to 399", the last time is displayed. remains displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the fourth time, the previous display remains as it is regardless of the value of the effect counter 223j, and the notification of the big win is not displayed.

As described above, in the comment-based production, the player recognizes the content of the comment and the degree of expectation for the jackpot by reading the content of the comment. In the control example, it is only necessary to focus on whether or not all of the whale patterns are displayed. Therefore, the comment-type effect must have a longer effect period than the repeated-hit-type effect. In this control example, when the SW valid time is shortened by the process of S6104, which will be described later, a repeated hit type effect that the player can recognize even for a short time is displayed. As a result, the game machine can be easily understood by the player.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example performs the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1350) instead of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. ) are executed, otherwise they are the same. Elements that are the same as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 130, the details of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1350) will be described. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1350). This frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (S1350) is a process executed when a variation pattern command is received from main controller 110 and SW effect is selected.

In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1350), first, it is determined whether or not there is a SW scenario in the SW scenario storage area 223o (S6001). In the process of S6001, if it is determined that there is a SW scenario (S6001: Yes), the SW scenario is updated (S6002), and based on the updated SW scenario, it is determined whether or not the SW valid period is reached ( S6003). On the other hand, in the process of S6001, if it is determined that there is no SW scenario (S6001: No), it means that the SW effect is not being executed, so this process ends.

In the process of S6003, when it is determined that it is the SW effective period (S6003: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223j is obtained (S6004), and the process proceeds to S6005. The value of the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S6004 is used in the SW effect selection process (S6006) described later. On the other hand, in the processing of S6003, if it is determined that the SW valid period is not reached (S6003: No), it is not the timing to execute the effect based on the pressing of the SW, so this processing is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S6005, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6005), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6005: Yes), an effect based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed. Therefore, the SW effect selection process (S6006) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6005 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor is on (S6007).

In the process of S6007, if it is determined that the touch sensor is on (S6007: Yes), in order to display the touch effect (see FIG. 125) in the SW effect described above, a touch sensor command for display is set ( S6008), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6007 that the touch sensor is off (S6007: No), this process ends. Here, the display touch sensor command set in the process of S6008 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 is executed. ) to the display controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the touch sensor command for display, the touch effect (see FIG. 125) in the SW effect described above is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, details of the SW effect selection process (S6006) will be described. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing SW effect selection processing (S6006). This SW effect selection process is a process of selecting an effect to be displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed while the SW effect is being displayed.

In the SW effect selection process (S6006), first, 1 is added to the SW depression counter 223s (S6101), and it is determined whether or not the fixed flag 223r is ON (S6102). In the processing of S6102, if it is determined that the fixed flag 223r is ON (S6102: Yes), it means that the fixed condition for fixing the SW effect is satisfied, so the effect is generated from the fixed table (222f4 or 222f5). is selected, and the process proceeds to S6110.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6102 that the fixed flag 223r is off (S6102: No), the SW scenario stored in the SW scenario storage area 223o will be used if the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less. It is determined whether or not there is (S6104).

In the processing of S6104, if it is determined that the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S6104: Yes), the remaining effect period is short, so a repeated hit type effect that can display a shorter effect period than the comment type effect is performed. In order to execute it, the SW effect is selected from the repeated hit system effect selection table 222f7 based on the effect counter 223j and the SW depression counter 223s. On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effective time is longer than 5 seconds (S6104: No), there is a sufficient remaining effect period, so the comment effect selection table (222f1, 222f2, 222f3, 222f6) and A SW effect is selected based on the SW depression counter 223s. Here, the method of selecting a comment-based effect is to first select a comment background from the comment background table (222f1 to 222f3) corresponding to the result of judgment and the type of variation pattern, and then select the comment background and the value of the effect counter 223j. The content of the comment notice is selected from the comment table according to the situation.

After completing the process of S6106, it is then determined whether or not the fixed condition is established (S6107). Specifically, when the selected comment background is "red background" or "fish school background", it is determined that the fixed condition is satisfied. As a result, even though an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win is displayed, a performance with a significantly low degree of expectation for a big win is subsequently displayed, and this impairs the player's desire to play. can be suppressed. In this control example, the fixed condition is set so as not to impair the expectation of the comment background, but it is not limited to this. The fixed condition may be established when all the contents of the notice are displayed so that the contents can be understood) is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by switching to the repeated hits type effect in the middle even though the contents of the comment notice with a story are displayed.

In the process of S6108, if it is determined that the fixed condition is satisfied (S6107: Yes), the fixed flag 223r is set to ON (S6109), and the process proceeds to S6110. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6108 that the fixed condition is not satisfied (S6108: No), the process of S6109 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6110.

In the process of S6110, a display press effect command indicating the effect selected in the process of S6103, S6106 or S6107 is set (S6110), and based on the SW press counter 223s, the number of SW presses is set to the upper limit value (in this control example, 4 times) is determined (S6111).

In the process of S6111, if it is determined that the number of SW presses is the upper limit (S6111: Yes), the SW scenario storage area 223o is reset (S6112), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S6111, if it is determined that the number of SW presses is not the upper limit value (S6111: No), S6112 is skipped and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the second control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example is different in that part of the processing of the advance notice effect command (S2815) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first control example is changed, and the other points are the same. is. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

Details of the advance notice effect command process (S2815) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect command process (S2815). This notice effect command processing (S2815) is for executing processing corresponding to the notice effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In this advance notice effect command process (S2815), the processes from S4401 to S4405 are executed as in the first control example. In the process of S4405, if it is determined that the display press command has been received (S4405: Yes), the advance notice display data table corresponding to the press effect of the set SW effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S4406), the display data table in which the number of times of pressing has been updated is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4450), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4405 that the display press command has not been received (S4405: No), the processes of S4406 and S4450 are skipped, and this process ends.

By the processing of S4450, it is possible to execute a depression effect (see FIGS. 123 and 124) according to the number of depressions of the frame button 22. FIG. Further, by the processing of S4406, based on the press command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to switch between repeated hit type effects and comment type effects.

<Regarding the third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 141. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above, the case where the effect of pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times is executed when the SW effect is selected based on the variation pattern has been described. Specifically, as the SW effect, based on the pressing of the frame button 22, the content of the comment displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the background of the comment suggest the degree of expectation of the big win, and the frame There is provided a repeated hit type performance suggesting the degree of expectation of a big win depending on whether or not a specific pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the depression of the button 22.例文帳に追加The comment-type effect and the continuous-hit-type effect are switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied. On the other hand, in the third control example, in the effect of hitting the frame button 22 repeatedly, the selection table is controlled so that the probability of selecting the effect is changed depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and the remaining time of the SW valid time. differ. Only points different from the second control example will be described, and descriptions of points that are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the second control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134, an example of a display mode in repeated hit effects using the frame button 22 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the third control example will be described. In the third control example, when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 selects the variation pattern for executing the SW notice effect, the SW notice effect set in the variation pattern is set, and the third pattern is changed. During the display, an effect is executed in which the player is notified to press the frame button 22 repeatedly as shown in FIG. 133(a). In the SW notice effect in the third control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed to win the lottery (lottery for whether or not to display the effect), a display mode indicating the degree of expectation for the big win is displayed.

FIG. 133(a) shows a display mode displayed at the start of the SW foretelling effect. A variation pattern in which the SW notice effect is set is selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and when a predetermined timing comes during the variable display of the third pattern, the frame button 22 is pressed to perform the SW notice effect. A display mode (FIG. 133(a)) for informing the player of the start is displayed. In the SW notice effect in the present third control example, as shown in FIG. 133(a), the third symbol that has been fluctuatingly displayed at high speed is reduced and displayed in the upper right, and the display mode of the SW notice effect is displayed in the other display areas. is configured to be displayed. As shown in FIG. 133(a), an indicator is displayed, and when the frame button 22 is pressed, the indicator (meter) is displayed variably (by pressing the button, the color of the indicator memory is changed). The color of this indicator memory is changed in order from the right memory according to the depression of the frame button 22, and when the color is changed up to the MAX memory, the player is informed that the expectation for a big win is high. (See FIG. 134(a)).

In addition, in the display mode of the SW notice effect, a pattern simulating the frame button 22 is displayed, and the characters "Consecutive hits!!" It is Further, under the pattern simulating the frame button 22, a remaining amount meter M indicating the remaining time (remaining period of the SW effective period) during which the frame button 22 can be pressed is displayed. This remaining amount meter M is configured such that the internal color changes from right to left as the effective time of the SW decreases. At the start of the SW notice effect, the inside of the remaining amount meter M is displayed in red, but the display is changed to white (red display decreases) sequentially from the right side (see FIG. 133(b)). When all the insides are changed to white, the player is informed that the SW effective time has expired. In addition, at the start of the SW notice effect, a game explanation of the SW notice effect (“Make the meter to MAX!”, “When it reaches MAX, it is very hot!!”) is displayed. After that, the SW effective time starts, but until then, the color of the remaining amount meter M is not changed, and the player can recognize that the SW effective time has not started.

FIG. 134(a) is an example of a display mode displayed when the lottery for the effect is won by pressing the frame button 22. FIG. As shown in FIG. 134(a), when the lottery for the effect is won, the color is variable (variable from white to red) up to the MAX memory of the indicator, and "Super hot!!" characters are displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134(b), when the lottery for the effect has not been won even after the SW valid time has passed and the remaining time has run out, the character "Unfortunate!" is displayed and a big win is expected. The effect to inform the degree is not displayed. In this control example, every time the frame button 22 is pressed, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not there is a winning effect. The lottery probability is set higher when the lottery result of the variable pattern displayed is a hit than when it is a loss. It can be expected that a variation pattern that will result in a big win is being executed.

In this control example, the variation patterns for which the SW advance notice effect is set are limited to the winning variation pattern and the losing super reach variation pattern. Therefore, the player can recognize that when the SW notice effect is being executed, it will always be a ready-to-win, and if he can press the frame button 22 to display the characters "Extremely Hot!!" It can be expected that it will be a different variation pattern.

In this control example, the degree of expectation for the big win is displayed while the third symbol is changing. However, the lottery result may be directly notified. Not limited to jackpots, points are given for the performance, and the points are used to give the items for the performance, or display a two-dimensional bar code, etc., and capture it with a mobile phone, etc., to create a standby image on the Internet. You may comprise so that privileges, such as, may be obtained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the electrical configuration in this third control example will be described. In the electrical configuration of the third control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed from those of the second control example. FIG. 135(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example. In the ROM 222 in the third control example, a lottery table 222g is added to the ROM 222 in the second control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second control example, description thereof will be omitted.

The lottery table 222g in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 136(a) to (f). The lottery table 222g is composed of a first lottery table 222g1, a second lottery table 222g2, a third lottery table 222g3, a fourth lottery table 222g4, a fifth lottery table 222g5, and a sixth lottery table 222g6. The first to third lottery tables 222g1 to 222g3 are set so that the number of values of the effect counter 223j determined as winning of the effect is different depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed. In addition, in each lottery table, the number of effect counters 223j determined to be winning is set to be greater when the lottery result of the fluctuating special symbol (third symbol) is winning.

In the first lottery table 222g1 to the third lottery table 222g3, the frame button 22 is pressed 10 times or more when the remaining time of the SW valid time (set to 10 seconds in this control example) is longer than 5 seconds and when it is 5 seconds or less. It is a lottery table that is selected when the The first lottery table 222g1 is selected when the frame button 22 is pressed 1 to 19 times, and the second lottery table 222g2 is selected when the frame button 22 is pressed 20 to 39 times. The third lottery table 222g3 is a lottery table that is selected when the number of presses of the frame button 22 is 40 or more.

The fourth lottery table 222g4 to the sixth lottery table 222g6 are lottery tables selected when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is less than 10 when the remaining time of the SW valid time is 5 seconds or less. A fourth lottery table 222g4 to a sixth lottery table 222g6 have the same lottery probability as the first lottery table 222g1 to the third lottery table 222g3, but the number of presses of the frame button 22 is set to half. Therefore, even for a player who presses the frame button 22 less times, the effect can be easily set.

In this control example, the lottery tables with different selection probabilities are switched according to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed. The lottery tables with different lottery probabilities may be switched depending on the remaining time. Furthermore, the above-described structure for switching the lottery table according to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and the remaining time of the SW valid time may be combined. In this case, the larger the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, the higher the lottery probability is set, and the smaller the remaining time, the higher the lottery probability is set. As a result, a player who presses the frame button 22 can increase the possibility of winning the effect by continuing to press the frame button 22 during the SW valid period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135(b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The RAM 223 in the third control example differs from the above-described first control example in that an interval counter 223t, an indicator level 223u, an adapted flag 223v, and a switching flag 223w are added, but other points are the same. be. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The interval counter 223t is executed periodically (every 4 ms) in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201 of the sound lamp control device 113 during execution of the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133). In the button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (see FIG. 138), 1 is added when the frame button 22 is not pressed. This interval counter 223t is referenced in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3, and when it is determined that the value of the interval counter 223t is the upper limit value (750 in this control example, that is, equivalent to 3 seconds), the indicator level 223u is decremented by one. As a result, if the frame button 22 is not pressed for a predetermined time (three seconds in this control example) during execution of the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133), the display of the indicator level is reduced by one. This effect of displaying the indicator level suggests that the indicator level is increased to the maximum value, so that the expectation of a big win is high. Therefore, the player can be urged to continuously press the frame button 22 so that the indicator level does not decrease, and the player's motivation to press the frame button 22 can be enhanced.

The indicator level 223u is for storing the amount of indicators to be displayed in the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133). Specifically, the indicator displayed in the SW effect is divided into eight regions in the left-right direction, and the left region is lit in order. In this control example, it is determined to what extent the eight areas described above are to be lit based on the value of the indicator level 223u. for example. If the value of the indicator level 223u is "1", only the leftmost area is lit, if it is "4", the fourth to leftmost areas are lit, and if it is "8", all A region is illuminated.

This indicator level 223u is set in frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (FIG. 138), SW effect selection processing 2 (FIG. 140) or SW effect selection processing 3 (FIG. 141), which will be described later.

The adapted flag 223v is a flag used for determining whether or not the lottery table 223g for selecting the SW effect has been switched in the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133). This adapted flag 223v indicates that in the SW pressing adaptation process (FIG. 139), which is executed when the SW effective period of the SW effect is five seconds or less, the frame button 22 is pressed a predetermined number of times (this control 10 times in the example), it is set to ON. In this case, a switching flag 223w, which will be described later, is set to ON, and the table for selecting the SW effect is switched. When the adapted flag 223v is turned on, it can be determined that the table for selecting this SW effect has been switched.

The switch flag 223w is a flag used for determining whether or not to switch the lottery table 223g for selecting the SW effect in the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133). This switching flag 223w is set when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is a predetermined number (this 10 times), it is set to ON. When the switching flag 223w is turned on, the SW effect selection process shifts from the SW effect selection process 2 using the first to third lottery tables to the SW effect selection process 3 using the fourth to sixth lottery tables. will be switched. As a result, it is possible to display an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win even for a player who has not pressed down many times in the SW effect, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, referring to FIGS. 138 to 141, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. Note that the control processing of the main controller 110 is the same as that of the second control example, so the description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 138, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1360) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the contents of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1360). In frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1360), the same processing as frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1350) in the second control example is executed from S6001 to S6004. After the processing of S6004 is executed, it is determined whether the remaining period of the SW valid period is 5 seconds or less (S6050). Note that this SW valid period is set in the SW scenario, and is subtracted when the SW scenario is updated. When it is determined that the remaining period of the SW valid period is 5 seconds or less (S6050: Yes), SW pressing adaptation processing is executed (S6051). The details of this SW pressing adaptation process (S6051) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6050 that the remaining SW valid period is longer than 5 seconds (S6050: No), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6052). In the processing of S6052, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6052: Yes), the interval counter 223t is reset (S6053), SW effect selection processing 2 is executed (S7008), and this processing is terminated. finish. The details of this SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S6052, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S6052: No), 1 is added to the interval counter 223t (S6055), and it is determined whether or not the interval counter 223t is the upper limit ( S6056). In the process of S6056, if it is determined that the interval counter is at the upper limit, the indicator level 223u is decremented by 1 (S6057), a display command indicating the updated indicator level 223u is set (S6058), and the interval counter 223t is reset (S6059), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6056 that the interval counter is not the upper limit value, the processing of S6057 to S6059 is skipped and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 139, the details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1360) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the contents of the SW pressing adaptation process (S6051) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S1360).

In the SW pressing adaptation process (S6051), first, it is determined whether or not the adapted flag 223v is ON. This adapted flag 223v is processed (processing of S7002 to S7004) to determine the player's pressed state based on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the first half of the SW valid period (the remaining period is from 10 seconds to 5 seconds). It is a flag indicating whether or not it is set. If it is determined that the adaptation flag 223v is off (S7001: No), the adaptation flag 223v is set to on (S7002). It is determined whether the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is less than 10 (S7003). If it is determined that the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is less than 10 (S7003: No), the process of S7005 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is 10 or more (S7003: Yes), the switching flag 223w is set to ON (S7004). After that, the process of S7005 is executed. The switching flag 223w is a flag indicating that the lottery table is set to be switched even if the number of presses of the frame button 22 in the first half of the game is small because the number of presses of the frame button 22 by the player is small.

In S7005, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7005). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S7005: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7005: Yes), it is determined whether the switching flag 223w is on (S7006). When it is determined that the switching flag 223w is off (S7006: No), SW effect selection processing 2 is executed (S7008), and this processing ends. The details of this SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7006, when it is determined that the switching flag 223w is ON (S7006: Yes), SW effect selection processing 3 is executed (S7007), and this processing ends. The details of this SW effect selection process 2 (S7007) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the contents of this SW effect selection process 2 (S7008). This SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) is, as described above, a process executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (see FIG. 138) and SW pressing adaptation process (S6051).

In the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008), first, the value of the SW depression counter 223s is updated by adding 1 (S7101). It is determined whether the first lottery table 222g1 is set (S7102). When it is determined that the first lottery table 222g1 is set (S7102: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is less than 20 (S7103). When it is determined that the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is less than 20 (S7103), the process of S7108 is executed without switching the lottery table. On the other hand, in the processing of S7103, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is 20 or more (S7103: Yes), the setting is switched to the second lottery table 222g2 (S7104). After that, the process of S7108 is executed.

In the processing of S7102, when it is determined that the first lottery table 222g1 is not set (S7102: No), it is determined whether the second lottery table 222g2 is set (S7105). When it is determined that the second lottery table 222g2 has been set (S7105: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW pressing frequency counter 223s is less than 40 (S7106). On the other hand, in the process of S7105, when it is determined that the second lottery table 222g2 is not set (S7105: No), the process proceeds to S7108.

In the process of S7106, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is less than 40 (S7106: Yes), the third lottery table 223g3 is set (S7107), and the process proceeds to S7108. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is 40 or more (S7106: No), the process of S7107 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7108.

In the process of S7108, it is determined whether or not the win/loss determination result related to the variable display being executed is a win (S7108). In the processing of S7108, if it is determined that the determination result is a win (S7108: Yes), the indicator level is set to 8 (S7109), and a display command indicating the set indicator level is set (S7110). , notification sound, and lamp data are set (S7111), the SW valid time is reset (S7112), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S7108, when it is determined that the determination result is no win (S7108: No), it is determined whether or not the indicator level 223u is 6 or less (S7113). In the process of S7113, if it is determined that the indicator level 223u is 6 or less (S7113: Yes), 1 is added to the indicator level 223u (S7114), and a display command indicating the added indicator level 223u is set. (S7115), this processing ends.

Here, the display command indicating the indicator level 223u set in S7110 and S7115 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output of the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 is performed. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the process (S1302). When the display control device 114 receives this display command, the SW effect is executed according to the indicator level 223u of the command received by the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 133).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7113 that the indicator level 223u is greater than 6 (S7113: No), the processes of S7114 and S7115 are skipped, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, details of the SW effect selection process 3 (S7007) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing SW effect selection processing 3 (S7007). This SW effect selection process 3 (S7007) is a process executed to select a SW effect when the switching flag 223w is ON in the above-described SW pressing adaptation process (FIG. 139).

This SW effect selection process 3 (S7007) includes a fourth lottery table instead of the above-described SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) and the first lottery table, a fifth lottery table instead of the second lottery table, and a fifth lottery table. The difference is that the 6th lottery table is used instead of the 3rd lottery table, and the other points are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this control example, in the repeated hitting effect of continuously pressing the frame button 22, the process of changing the probability of determining that the effect is displayed according to the number of times of repeated hitting is performed by switching the table. Therefore, since the selection probability can be changed by a simple process, the interest in the game can be changed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the predetermined effect is displayed by repeated hits in the notice effect executed during the fluctuation time of the special symbol has been described, but it is not limited to that, and in the third symbol, when the big hit is achieved Secondly, whether the probability variation is given by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 during the jackpot game or the normal game without notifying whether the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot is given (whether the probability variation game state). may be used in an effect in which the player is notified by lottery. Even in such a case, a period in which the frame button 22 can be hit repeatedly is set, and the lottery table for determining whether or not to notify the effect based on the number of hits in that period, the remaining time of the effective time, etc., is switched and set. By configuring, it is possible to randomize the timing at which the effect is notified when the frame button 22 is pressed. Also, for a player who hits the frame button 22 repeatedly less often or hits slowly, a table with a high selection probability is switched and set, so that an effect suited to the player can be performed.

<Regarding the fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 146. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, the configuration in which the game balls are periodically guided to the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650 and guided to the second specific winning opening 650b has been described. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, in the configuration in which the game ball is randomly guided to the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650, when it becomes easier to enter the second specific winning opening 650b, and when the second specific winning opening 650b The configuration set for the case where it is difficult to enter the ball and is controlled will be described. Only the points that are different from the first control example will be explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

FIG. 142 shows the opening pattern of the entry regulation plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 when the game ball is guided to the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650 in the fourth control example, and the entry of the guided game ball. , and non-entering patterns, respectively. FIG. 142(a) is a timing chart showing how a ball is entered in the 1st and 2nd rounds when the jackpot C (16-round jackpot) is selected. As shown in FIG. 142(a), in the jackpot C, the ball entry regulation plate 654 is opened for 1 second in the first round, and opened for 1.6 seconds in the second round. After that, after an interval of 10 seconds (closing action of the ball entry control plate 654), the third round is executed. From the third round onwards, until 30 seconds of opening or 10 game balls are detected by the first entering ball sensor 652a or the second entering ball sensor 652b (the first specific winning hole 650a or the second specific winning hole 650b until 10 balls are entered).

Note that this is not the only option, and 10 balls may enter the entrance portion 651 a of the specific winning device 650 . In that case, after 10 balls enter the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650, means for restricting balls from entering the entrance portion of the specific winning device 650 may be provided.

The interval time between the first round and the second round (closing time of the ball entry control plate 654) is 1 second. The game ball flowing down to the first specific winning port 650a during that time flows down to the detour channel 653 without being able to enter the first specific winning port 650a. Since the detour time from flowing down the detour passage 653 to reaching the second specific prize winning port 650b is configured to be 1.6 seconds, even if the game ball reaches immediately after closing after one round, By the time it reaches the second specific prize winning opening 650b during the closed time, the ball entry control plate 654 is open. Therefore, the game ball headed for the second specific winning opening 650b can enter the second specific winning opening 650b. In addition, since the opening period of the second round is set to 1.6 seconds, it is a game ball that reaches the first specific prize winning port 650a just before the start of the second round and flows down to the detour channel 653. However, the ball can enter the second specific winning hole 650b. Therefore, all game balls guided to the first specific winning opening 650a during the interval period (during the closing time) can enter the second specific winning opening 650b in the second round.

FIG. 142(b) is a timing chart showing a ball entering the second specific winning hole 650b in the case of a small hit (2 rounds) in the fourth control example. A small win consists of two rounds of play. The open period between the first and second rounds is set to 1 second, and the interval period between the first and second rounds is set to 0.6 seconds. In this way, the 1st to 2nd rounds of the jackpot C and the 1st to 2nd rounds of the small prize are only slightly different in the opening period and the interval period, and this difference is only for a short period of time. Since they are different, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the difference. Therefore, even in the third symbol display device 81, it is difficult to distinguish between the small win and the big win C. It is difficult to determine whether

The interval period of the small hit is 0.6 seconds, and the opening period of the second round is 1 second, so the added time is 1.6 seconds, and the period required for detour is also 1.6 seconds. Since it is configured, the detoured game ball cannot enter the second specific winning hole 650b in the second round. Therefore, in the second round of the small winning game, even if the ball enters the first specific winning hole 650a, it is difficult to enter the second specific winning hole 650b.

In the present fourth control example, the third pattern display device 81 is used to produce whether or not this winning game is the big win C during the interval period (10 seconds) after the end of two rounds of the big win C and the small win. will be In this effect, an effect is displayed that is more advantageous to the player as the number of game balls entering the second specific winning hole 650b increases during the first and second rounds. Specifically, an enemy is displayed, and if the main character fights against the enemy and wins, the big win C is notified. In this case, the main character's life gauge is increased according to the number of balls that enter the second specific winning hole 650b. Therefore, even if it receives an attack from an enemy, it is hard to be defeated. As described above, in this control example, the player is given the right to know at an early stage whether the jackpot is C or not during the first or second round of the game. A player can be made to shoot a game ball and play a game even during a period of an open pattern that cannot be obtained.

Next, referring to FIGS. 143 to 146, control processing in the fourth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 143, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). In the special symbol variation process in the fourth control example, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit in the first control example (S250), and when the lottery result is a small hit (S250: Yes), the only difference is that the start of the small hit is set (S251), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the jackpot control process 2 (S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this fourth control example will be described. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. FIG. In this jackpot control process 2 (S1050), in the first control example, control was performed only for jackpots, but control for small hits is also added. Specifically, it is configured to determine whether it is the start of a big hit or a small hit in the processing of S1150 and S1151, and to determine whether it is in the middle of a big hit or a small hit in the processing of S1151. Other parts are the same, and the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the jackpot command process (S1412) in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing this jackpot command process 2 (S1420). In this jackpot command process 2 (S1420), the process of S1810 is changed to the inter-round process (S1850) with respect to the jackpot command process (S1420) in the first control example. The inter-round processing (S1850) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the contents of this inter-round processing (S1850). In the inter-round process (S1859), first, the in-round flag 223m is set to OFF (S8001). After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit or a big hit C (S8002). When it is determined that it is a small hit or a big hit C (S8002: Yes), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the second round (S8003). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the second round, the type of jackpot being executed (whether it is a jackpot C or a small prize) and the number of balls entering the second specific prize winning port 650b are indicated. A display command is set (S8004). The display command set in S8004 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1402) of the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives this display command, the main character wins or the enemy wins based on the jackpot type, and a life gauge corresponding to the number of balls entered into the second specific winning hole 650b is displayed. display settings are executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S8002, if it is determined that it is not a small hit or a big hit C (S8002: No), in the process of S8003, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the second round (S8003: No), this process is performed. finish.

In addition, in the fourth control example, in the small hit, it is configured so that the game ball between the rounds does not enter the second specific winning hole 650b, but it is not limited to that, so that about one ball can win two rounds The eye open period may be set to 1.2 seconds or the like. By constructing in this way, even if it is a small win, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the big win C.

In addition, in the detour passage 654 described above, for example, a material with a high friction coefficient is used on the road surface, or unevenness is provided on the road surface so that the friction coefficient of the road surface is increased so that the flow speed of the game ball is reduced. may As a result, the game ball stays in the detour passage 654 during the interval time even when the interval time is lengthened by increasing the time required for the game ball to pass through the detour passage 654. Therefore, after that, the interval time ends, and the ball can enter the second specific winning hole 650b.

Furthermore, the detour flow path described above may be configured such that the passage time is variable. For example, a plurality of detour passages with different passage times may be provided so that game balls may be distributed to the detour passages, or a movable wall may be provided in the detour passage, and the movable wall may be movable. By doing so, the time required to pass through the detour channel may be changed. In addition, a mechanism, such as a cloon, may be provided in the detour channel to randomize the passing time of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to provide variation in the passage time of the detour channel, thereby improving the interest of the player.

Further, the number of specific prize winning ports provided in the specific prize winning device 650 described above is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Furthermore, the specific winning opening provided in the specific winning device 650 is not limited to the specific winning opening, and may be a starting winning opening for starting the start of special symbols, or a predetermined winning opening based on winning balls. It may be a general winning slot where is paid, or a combination thereof.

Further, in the above-described first to fourth control examples, a lottery for the same special symbol is performed based on the ball entering the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640, but the first winning Based on the balls entering the opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, for example, the lottery for the first special symbol is performed based on the balls entering the first winning opening 64, and based on the balls entering the second winning opening 640. It may be configured to perform the lottery of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Furthermore, in the above-described first to fourth control examples, various effects are executed by the sound lamp control device 113 that receives commands from the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various effects It may be configured to be executed by main controller 110 . Since this eliminates the need to send and receive commands, it is possible to provide an inexpensive game machine capable of reducing design costs.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<An example of technical concept in which the driving gear 473 overlaps the notch portion 422d>
a first gear member and a second gear member which are supported by a base member and have gear teeth engraved on side surfaces thereof and are meshed with each other; at least the first gear member is formed of a rotating gear; and the second gear member includes a plate-like portion covering the side surface of the gear tooth, the plate-like portion being the gear tooth of the first gear member when viewed in the rotation axis direction of the first gear member, and the second gear tooth In the game machine formed so as to be able to overlap with the gear teeth meshing with the gear member, the plate-shaped portion is scooped out from the tooth tip side to the tooth bottom side of the gear teeth of the second gear member. A cutout portion is formed, and the cutout portion and the first gear member are arranged at predetermined positions, so that at least the first gear member and the plate-like portion are rotated by the first gear member. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is possible to form specific phase positions visually recognized at intervals when viewed in an axial direction.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a plate-like portion is formed on the side surface of a gear tooth of one of a pair of gear members that are meshed with each other. There is a gaming machine that prevents the axial movement of the gear member on the opposite side of one gear member (see, for example, JP-A-2012-217702). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it was necessary to extract one gear member in advance when extracting the other gear member. Therefore, there is a problem that maintainability is low.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, by forming the notch portion in the plate-like portion, at least at the specific phase position, the plate-like portion and the first gear member are aligned when viewed in the rotation axis direction of the first gear member. Viewed at intervals. Therefore, at the specific phase position, the first gear member can be pulled out through the cutout portion of the plate-like portion, so that the first gear member can be replaced without previously pulling out the second gear member. Therefore, it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pair of meshed gear members.

In addition, since the first gear member is formed of a rotating gear, the second gear member on which the plate-like portion is formed may be a rotating gear or a rack gear.

In the game machine A1, the notch portion is formed on the tooth tip side of the second gear member so that the formed width along the continuous direction of the gear teeth of the second gear member is equal to the tooth tip of the second gear member. is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the distance along the direction in which the gear teeth of the second gear member intersect with the addendum circle of the first gear member. Gaming machine A2.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, it is possible to minimize the period in which the first gear member overlaps the notch portion when viewed in the rotation axis direction of the first gear member. Accordingly, the plate-like portion can ensure the function of restricting the movement of the first gear member in the rotation axis direction.

The shape of the notch is not particularly limited, and may be arc-shaped or rectangular.

Also, the size of the gear teeth of the second gear member need not be uniform. For example, when the second gear member is divided into four parts in the circumferential direction, and the size (especially tooth depth) of the gear teeth is formed differently for each divided part, the addendum circle of the small gear teeth and the second gear By forming the notch at the distance between the points where the addendum of the member intersects with the outer shape, the notch is reduced compared to the case where the notch is formed based on the addendum circle of a large gear tooth. It is possible to suppress an increase in the size of the part. Therefore, the plate-like portion can ensure the function of restricting the movement of the first gear member in the rotation axis direction. It should be noted that there may be portions in which gear teeth are not formed in the divided portions described above.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the notch portion is a circle formed coaxially with the first gear member and having a slightly larger diameter than the addendum circle of the first gear member. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is formed in a shape that overlaps when projected onto the plate-like portion from the rotation axis direction of the first gear member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1 or A2, the cutout portion is formed to have a slightly larger diameter than the addendum circle of the first gear member and a circle coaxial with the first gear member. It is formed in a shape that overlaps when projected onto the plate-like portion from the rotation axis direction of the first gear member. Therefore, the size of the notch can be minimized, the formation area of the plate-like portion can be maximized, and the rigidity of the plate-like portion can be improved.

It should be noted that the size of the gear teeth of the second gear member need not be uniform. For example, when the second gear member is divided into four parts in the circumferential direction, and the size (especially tooth depth) of the gear teeth is formed differently for each divided part, the addendum circle of the small gear teeth and the second gear By forming the notch at the distance between the points where the addendum of the member intersects with the outer shape, the notch is reduced compared to the case where the notch is formed based on the addendum circle of a large gear tooth. It is possible to suppress an increase in the size of the part. Therefore, the formation area of the plate-like portion can be maximized, and the rigidity of the plate-like portion can be improved. It should be noted that there may be portions in which gear teeth are not formed in the divided portions described above.

In the game machine A2 or A3, the gear teeth engraved on the first gear member and the gear teeth engraved on the second gear member are in a proper meshing state in which the relationship between the gear teeth is fixed. wherein the proper meshing state is to move the first gear member along the notch formed in the second gear member and to mesh with the second gear member A gaming machine A4 characterized by being formed by:

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2 or A3, the first gear member is moved along the outer shape of the cutout portion of the plate-like portion of the second gear member, and the first gear member and the second gear member are moved. When the gear member is meshed, the gear teeth are meshed in a proper meshing state.

Therefore, when the first gear member and the second gear member are meshed in a proper meshing state, the notch portion of the plate-shaped portion can be used for positioning the first gear member and the second gear member when meshing. It can be carried out. As a result, it is possible to easily adjust the engagement between the first gear member and the second gear member, so that the maintainability of gear replacement can be improved.

In addition, the case where the first gear member and the second gear member mesh with each other in a fixed relationship means that the rotating gear member to be meshed with is an incomplete gear in which teeth are carved on a part of the side surface. Examples include a case where a movable rack member that reciprocates with respect to a rotary gear member is meshed.

When replacing the gears, for example, which tooth of the second gear member should be meshed with each tooth of the first gear member is a problem. In order to engage the gear teeth, it is sufficient to prevent at least one gear tooth from being displaced.

A gaming machine A5, wherein, in the gaming machines A1 to A4, at least at the specific phase position, movement resistance of at least one of the first gear member and the second gear member increases.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A4, the movement resistance of at least one of the first gear member and the second gear member increases at least at the specific phase position. Therefore, the maintenance worker can rely on the increase in movement resistance to facilitate the work of, for example, meshing a pair of gear members (fitting the gear members at proper meshing positions).

That is, in a state in which the first gear member and the second gear member are stopped in the middle of movement, if the cutout portion of the plate-like portion does not match the first gear member, the first gear member is pulled out. Even if you try to pull it out, the plate-shaped part will be in the way and you will not be able to pull it out. Therefore, it is necessary to move the second gear member. In this case, by moving the second gear member to a position where the resistance increases, the cutout portion of the plate-like portion can be formed at a position that matches the first gear member, and the first gear member can be pulled out. becomes easier.

Examples of cases where the movement resistance increases include the case where a friction member that rubs against at least one of the first gear member and the second gear member at a specific phase position is provided, or the case where the first gear member or the second gear member rubs at a specific phase position. A case where at least one of the second gear members reaches the end of movement is exemplified.

In the game machines A1 to A4, the first gear member and the second gear member are formed in such a manner that they are moved to the end of movement, and the first gear member and the second gear member are arranged at the respective end of movement. A game machine A6 characterized in that, when the first gear member is connected, the plate-like portion and the first gear member at least partially overlap when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis of the first gear member.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A4, when the first gear member and the second gear member are arranged at the end of movement, the rotation axis direction view of the first gear member At least a portion of the plate-like portion and the first gear member overlap. That is, a specific phase position (a state in which the cutout portion matches the first gear member) is formed at a position different from the end of movement of the first gear member and the second gear member. Therefore, when the first gear member and the second gear member are moved and the first gear member approaches the specific phase position, the first gear member has a sufficient speed in the rotational direction (direction perpendicular to the axis). . Therefore, the wobble of the first gear member, which tends to occur at a specific phase position, can be mitigated by the force in the rotational direction of the first gear member.

In game machines A1 to A6, a drive motor for generating a driving force is provided, the first gear member is pivotally supported on the drive motor in a withdrawable manner, and a layer between the drive motor and the first gear member is provided. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that the plate-like portion is formed in the .

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A6, the first gear member is axially supported by the drive motor in a drawable manner.

Here, even if an attempt is made to mesh the first gear member with the second gear member from the side where the plate-shaped portion is formed, the first gear member is brought into contact with the plate-shaped portion and prevented from moving. The gear member and the second gear member cannot be meshed. Therefore, when the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor, there is a possibility that the arrangement position of the drive motor is limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A7, since the first gear member can pass through the cutout portion of the plate-shaped portion, the arrangement position of the drive motor is not limited by the relationship with the plate-shaped portion. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the motor.

Further, since the plate-like portion of the second gear member is formed in the layer between the drive motor and the first gear member, when the drive motor is replaced, the drive motor and the first gear member can be removed together. , it is possible to choose whether to remove only the drive motor.

That is, the drive motor and the first gear member can be easily separated by pulling out the drive motor while the first gear member is in contact with the plate-like portion. By exchanging the driving motor in this way, the driving motor can be exchanged while maintaining the meshing state between the first gear member and the second gear member, and the first gear member and the second gear member can be exchanged again. meshing adjustment can be made unnecessary. Thereby, maintainability can be improved.

The first gear member may be axially supported in such a manner that it can be pulled out from the drive motor. A case where a plurality of pins protrude from an arranged adapter and are inserted into the first gear member is exemplified.

In the gaming machine A7, the first gear member includes a shaft portion having one end fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor, and the other end portion of the shaft portion opposite to the one end. and a rotating body portion connected to the end portion, wherein the shaft portion and the rotating body portion are formed separably, and the shaft portion protrudes in the axial direction from the end surface of the other end portion. A plurality of protruding pins are provided, the rotating body portion includes a plurality of fitting portions into which the plurality of protruding pins are fitted, and the coupling between the shaft portion and the rotating body portion is performed by the plurality of protruding pins. A gaming machine A8 characterized by being formed by fitting projecting pins into the plurality of fitting portions.

Here, in order to bring the first gear member into contact with the plate-like portion and pull it out directly from the drive shaft of the drive motor, a force greater than the static friction generated between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member is required. As a result, a force greater than the static friction is applied to the second gear member through the plate-like portion that contacts the first gear member. Since the static friction is set to be large in order to maintain the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member, there is a risk that the plate-like portion will be deformed or excessive stress will be applied to the drive motor. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, a plurality of protruding pins are protruded from the end of the shaft fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor and protrude from the rotating body. A plurality of fitting portions into which the setting pins are fitted are formed. That is, by engaging the shaft portion and the rotating body portion at a plurality of points, the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member can be maintained without increasing the static friction.

Therefore, the force required to separate the drive motor and the rotating body portion of the first gear member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deformation of the plate-like portion of the second gear member and application of excessive stress to the drive motor.

Examples of the fitting portion include a through hole and a hollow formed in a bottomed cylinder.

In the game machine A7 or A8, it is arranged in the vicinity of the drive motor and extends in the direction opposite to the direction in which the drive shaft of the drive motor extends along the side surface of the motor case of the drive motor. A gaming machine A9 characterized by comprising a regulating section.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7 or A8, when the drive motor is pulled out from the first gear member, the drive motor is pressed against the regulation portion extending along the side surface of the drive motor. can be pulled out. As a result, it is possible to suppress the axial center of the drive motor from tilting with respect to the first gear member, thereby suppressing deformation of the first gear member.

In the gaming machine A9, the regulating portions are formed in a pair with the motor case of the drive motor interposed therebetween, and the extended end of one of the pair of regulating portions is connected to the motor case of the drive motor. a game machine A10 formed on the side of the drive shaft from the end face opposite to the end face on which the drive shaft is disposed.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the extending end of one of the paired restricting portions is formed closer to the drive shaft than the end surface of the motor case of the drive motor. Therefore, the extended end of one restricting portion can be effectively used as a fulcrum for pulling out the drive motor. That is, since the extended end of the restriction portion and the side surface of the drive motor are arranged adjacent to each other, the extended end of the restriction portion serves as a fulcrum and the side surface of the drive motor acts as a fulcrum when force is applied to the drive motor. The distance to the point of action can be minimized. As a result, the force required for pulling out can be suppressed.

Further, when the drive motor is pulled out using the extended end of one of the restriction portions as a fulcrum, the drive motor can be pulled out while pressing the drive motor against the restriction portion on the opposite side of the one restriction portion. As a result, the degree of inclination of the drive motor with respect to the other gear can be suppressed when the drive motor is pulled out.

In the gaming machine A10, of the pair of regulation sections, the other regulation section opposite to the one regulation section protrudes to the same extent as the extended end of the one regulation section, or A gaming machine A11 characterized in that the gaming machine A11 is formed to protrude from the extending end of the one restricting portion to the opposite side of the driving shaft of the driving motor.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A11, the other restricting portion against which the driving motor is pressed when the driving motor is pulled out is at least one of the extending end portions of the restricting portion that is closer to the drive shaft of the driving motor. It is formed to protrude to the opposite side. Therefore, when the drive motor is pulled out using the extended end of one of the restricting portions as a fulcrum, the point of action is closest to the other restricting portion (i.e., the point of action is a plane perpendicular to the drive shaft of the drive motor). In a state in which the drive motor is arranged on a plane including the extended end of one of the restricting portions, the movement of the drive motor can be prevented by the other restricting portion.

As a result, when the drive motor is pulled out, it is possible to reliably prevent the drive motor from moving in a direction away from one of the restricting portions.

In game machines A7 to A11, there is provided a moving abutment member arranged to face the second gear member with the first gear member interposed therebetween, and the moving abutment member moves the first gear member at the specific phase position. The plate-like portion of the second gear member is arranged to be spaced apart from the first gear member when viewed in the axial direction, and the plate-like portion of the second gear member overlaps the first gear member when viewed in the axial direction of the first gear member. A gaming machine A12 characterized in that, in at least one of the states, the first gear member and the moving contact member overlap when viewed in the axial direction of the first gear member.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effects achieved by the game machines A7 to A11, the first gear member simultaneously engages with the plate-like portion of the second gear member and the moving abutment member arranged opposite to the second gear member. abutted. As a result, tilting of the first gear member when the first gear member is pulled out from the drive motor can be suppressed.

<Example of Technical Concept of Forming Enlarged Starting Gear Teeth 452b1 for Engagement>
A main driving gear member formed as a rotating gear and a driven gear member that starts meshing during rotation of the main driving gear member, and at least one of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member engages at the start of meshing. A game comprising meshing teeth to be in contact with each other and intermediate teeth to be meshed when the meshing continues after the meshing teeth are meshed, and the meshing teeth are formed to be larger than the intermediate teeth. Machine B1.

Here, there is a game machine in which meshing between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member (the side to which the rotation of the main driving gear member is transmitted) is started while the main driving gear member (the side rotated by the drive motor) is rotating. (See, for example, JP-A-2013-244210). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the teeth that mesh when the main driving gear member and the driven gear member start meshing are subject to collision at the beginning of meshing and are easily damaged. On the other hand, if the gear teeth are made larger, the damage to the gear teeth can be prevented, but the backlash increases, making it difficult to rotate the driven gear member smoothly. Therefore, it has been difficult to achieve both durability and smoothness of rotation.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the meshing teeth are formed larger than the intermediate teeth, at least one of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member has durability of the meshing teeth that mesh at the start of meshing. can be improved and breakage of meshing teeth can be prevented. In addition, since the backlash between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member can be reduced at the intermediate teeth, the rotation of the driven gear member can be smoothed when the intermediate teeth are meshed after the meshing teeth are meshed. can do. As a result, it is possible to achieve both improved durability of the meshing teeth and improved smoothness of rotation of the driven gear member.

The term "at the start of meshing" means a state in which meshing teeth formed on at least one of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member begin to abut against the other gear member on the opposite side of the one gear member.

Forming large meshing teeth means forming at least one of tooth width, tooth thickness and tooth depth larger than that of intermediate teeth.

A game machine B2 characterized in that, in the game machine B1, a holding mechanism for holding the attitude of the driven gear member is provided.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, since it is equipped with a holding mechanism for holding the posture of the driven gear member, the posture of the driven gear member in a state where it is not meshed with the main driving gear member can be stabilized. can be done.

Examples of the holding mechanism include a mechanism that holds the driven gear member by sandwiching it in the axial direction, a mechanism that holds the driven gear member by mechanical alignment, and the like.

In the game machine B2, the driven gear member is provided with a cutout portion that is cut out in a direction in which the driven gear member is retracted from the main driving gear member, and the cutout portion abuts on the outer circumference of the main driving gear member at at least two points. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that the holding mechanism is formed by:

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the holding mechanism for holding the driven gear member can be formed by contacting the main driving gear member and the driven gear member at two points. Accordingly, it is possible to eliminate the need to dispose a separate member for holding the attitude of the driven gear member.

The shape of the cutout portion is not limited as long as it does not interfere with the addendum circle of the main driving gear member. Formed below the radius.

A gaming machine B4 in which the notch portion is formed as an arc-shaped concave portion circumscribing the main driving gear member in the gaming machine B3.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, the notch portion of the driven gear member is brought into contact with the outer circumference of the main driving gear member, thereby improving the effect of maintaining the posture of the driven gear member. can be made

That is, the notched portion of the driven gear member is brought into contact with the outer circumference of the main driving gear member with its surface, thereby suppressing the concentration of the frictional force at one point, and the frictional force is spread over the entire notched portion. can be dispersed. As a result, the number of places where the driven gear member is held by the main driving gear member can be increased, and the effect of maintaining the posture of the driven gear member can be improved.

In addition, the manner in which the notch portion is circumscribed on the main drive gear member is not particularly limited. That is, for example, it may be circumscribed on the addendum circle of the main driving gear member, or may be circumscribed on the surface where the main driving gear member is formed with no gear teeth.

In the gaming machine B4, the main driving gear member and the notch portion of the driven gear member have their mutual contact points drawn from the central axis of the main driving gear member to the surface connecting the tooth roots of the driven gear member. A game machine B5 characterized in that it is formed on at least both sides of a vertical line.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the contact point between the main driving gear member and the notch portion of the driven gear member is the surface connecting the center axis of the main driving gear member and the tooth bottom of the driven gear member. Since it is formed on at least both sides of the drawn perpendicular line, it is possible to prevent rotation (movement) of the driven gear member in both directions when the cutout portion is in contact with the main driving gear member.

Examples of the driven gear member include a rotating gear member formed as a rotating gear and a rack gear formed as a parallel-moving gear.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B5, the driven gear member has an engagement protrusion receiving portion formed to be larger than the meshing teeth, and the engagement protrusion receiving portion is formed with the notch portion. , a game machine B6 characterized in that meshing between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member is started after the meshing teeth of the main driving gear member and the engaging projecting receiving portion abut against each other. .

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B2 to B5, by using the engaging projecting receiving portion as a substitute for the teeth that contact the main driving gear member, the durability of the driven gear member is increased. can improve sexuality.

The engagement projecting receiving portion in which the notch portion is formed is not originally a portion that engages with the gear teeth of the main driving gear member, but is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the main driving gear member to adjust the attitude of the driven gear member. It is part of the role to maintain. Therefore, unlike the gear teeth, the size is not limited according to the size of the gear teeth to be meshed. Therefore, the durability of the driven gear member is improved by using the engagement projecting receiving portion that is stronger than the gear teeth for the portion that abuts when the main driving gear member and the driven gear member start meshing. can be made

In the game machine B6, the main driving gear member has a depression formed adjacent to the meshing tooth, and the meshing tooth of the main driving gear member abuts against the engagement projection receiving portion. The game machine B7 is characterized in that the driven gear member is rotated in such a manner that the engaging projecting receiving portion advances into the recessed portion.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the driven gear member is rotated before the meshing teeth of the main gear member come into contact with the engagement projecting receiving portion of the driven gear member. and the driven gear member can suppress the impact at the start of meshing.

Here, when the driven gear member is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the main driving gear member at two points, the attitude of the driven gear member is maintained even if the main driving gear member rotates. On the other hand, when the meshing tooth of the main driving gear member comes close to the engaging projection receiving portion of the driven gear member, the recess formed adjacent to the meshing tooth faces the engaging projection receiving portion. Since the recessed portion does not come into contact with the engaging projecting receiving portion, the effect of maintaining the posture of the driven gear member is released. Then, the driven gear member is slightly rotated by the frictional force generated between the outer peripheral surface of the main driving gear member and the engagement projection receiving portion, and the engagement projection receiving portion enters the recess. As a result, the driven gear member starts rotating before the meshing teeth of the main driving gear member come into contact with the engagement projecting receiving portion of the driven gear member, so that the main driving gear member and the driven gear member start meshing. It is possible to suppress the impact when doing.

<An example of technical concept in which the projecting gear member 7452e moves in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452>
a driving source that generates a driving force; a main driving gear member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving source; a first moving member that is moved in conjunction with the rotation of the main driving gear member; A driven gear member that starts to move in conjunction with the main driving gear member on the way, a second moving member that moves in conjunction with the movement of the driven gear member, and the interlocking of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. an adjusting device for starting, wherein the first moving member is moved in a moving range from a base end of movement to a terminal end of movement, and the driven gear member starts moving in conjunction with the main driving gear member by the adjusting device. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that a plurality of positions of the first moving member can be formed at a time.

Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that includes a first moving member and a second moving member that are moved by a driving force of a single driving source (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2009-125092). ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the mode of the second moving member at a specific position in the middle of the movement of the first moving member is limited to one way, so there is a problem that the variation of the effect is small.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the adjusting device can form a plurality of positions of the first moving member when the driven gear member starts to move in conjunction with the main driving gear member. A plurality of positions of the first moving member can be formed when the moving member starts to move. Therefore, it is possible to form a plurality of variations of effects of the first moving member and the second moving member.

When the driven gear member starts to move in conjunction with the main driving gear member, the driven gear member is moved by meshing the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. A mode in which the driven gear member is moved by friction generated between the gear members, or a magnetic force generated between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member, which are formed of a magnetic material. A mode in which the driven gear member is moved is exemplified.

Further, as a form of forming the adjusting device, there is a form in which the gear teeth of at least one of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member are formed so as to be able to protrude in the direction away from the rotation shaft, A mode in which the distance can be changed is exemplified.

In the gaming machine C1, the interlocking between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member is due to meshing, and the adjusting device is disposed on the main driving gear member and moves in the radial direction of the main driving gear member. The protruding member has a protruding state in which the protruding member protrudes to a position where it can contact the driven gear member in the rotational direction of the main driving gear member, and a protruding member in which the protruding member contacts the driven gear member in the rotational direction. a retracted state in which the protruding member is placed in an impossible position, and the protruding member abuts the driven gear member when the main driving gear member rotates while the protruding member forms the protruding state. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the main driving gear member and the driven gear member start meshing with each other.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the manner in which the main driving gear member and the driven gear member are interlocked differs depending on whether the protruding member of the adjustment device is in the extended state or the retracted state. can let

Here, the engagement between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member can be started and released by changing the inter-axis distance between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. However, in that case, it is necessary to move the rotating shaft in the direction perpendicular to the axis while maintaining the parallelism of the rotating shaft in order to suppress the meshing resistance between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. requested. Therefore, the mechanism for moving the main driving gear member and the driven gear member may become complicated.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine C2, the main driving gear member has a protruding member that is formed to be movable in the radial direction, and when the protruding member protrudes (when forming a protruding state), the main driving gear member and the driven gear Engagement with the member is started. Therefore, since it is not necessary to move the rotation shafts of the main drive gear member and the driven gear member, the parallelism of the rotation shafts is maintained. Therefore, the mechanism for moving the protruding member does not require high accuracy, and the mechanism for moving the protruding member can be simplified.

In addition, as a method of forming the projecting member in a projecting state, there is a method of projecting the projecting member by centrifugal force generated when the main driving gear member is rotated, a method of projecting the projecting member by a solenoid arranged inside the projecting member, and driving of the solenoid. A method of projecting the protruding member and the like are exemplified. Also, the number of protruding members may be one or plural.

In the gaming machine C2, the protruding member receives an urging force generated toward the rotating shaft of the main driving gear member, thereby forming the recessed state at least when the main driving gear member is stationary, and rotating the main driving gear member. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that it is formed so as to be switchable between the immersed state and the extended state by switching the rotation speed of the game machine.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, by varying the rotation speed of the main driving gear member, the protruding member contacts the driven gear member and the protruding member is in contact with the driven gear member. You can switch between the idle state and the immersive state.

As a result, the control of the operating speed of the drive source and the state of the protruding member can be interlocked. Control can be simplified.

Examples of members that generate the biasing force include elastic springs such as coil springs and torsion springs, and members made of a rubber material having sufficient elasticity.

Also, a plurality of protruding members may be arranged on the main driving gear member with different phases. In this case, the amount by which each projecting member protrudes can be adjusted by adjusting the weight of each projecting member and the biasing force acting on each projecting member.

In game machine C2 or C3, the projecting member comprises a first projecting member and a second projecting member formed out of phase with the first projecting member, and the first projecting member and the second projecting member are are substantially equal in amount to protrude due to the rotation of the main driving gear member, and the main driving gear member has a first rotational speed at which the first protruding member and the second protruding member form the retracted state; a second rotational speed at which the first protruding member and the second protruding member form the overhanging state, and the rotational speed of the main drive gear member is set between the first rotational speed and the second rotational speed; A gaming machine C4 characterized in that it is possible to switch between the main driving gear members during rotation.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, by changing the rotation speed of the main driving gear member during rotation, the phase at which the first projecting member starts contacting the driven gear member The main driving gear member can be brought into contact with the driven gear member in at least two different phases including the phase in which the two protruding members start coming into contact with the driven gear member.

That is, by rotating the main driving gear member at the first rotational speed and changing the rotational speed of the main driving gear member to the second rotational speed immediately before the first protruding member is positioned on the driven gear member side, One protruding member can initiate meshing with the driven gear member. On the other hand, rotating the main driving gear member at the first rotational speed, and changing the rotational speed of the main driving gear member to the second rotational speed immediately before the second protruding member is positioned on the driven gear member side. , the second protruding member can start meshing with the driven gear member.

In other words, by arbitrarily selecting the timing for increasing the rotation speed of the main drive gear member, the timing for extending and retracting the projecting member can be arbitrarily selected. That is, even if the moving speed of the first moving member is the same when the first moving member starts moving, the timing of moving the second moving member can be changed according to the timing of increasing the moving speed of the first moving member. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the subsequent performance only by confirming the speed at which the first moving member starts moving, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention paid to the actions of the first moving member and the second moving member. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the first moving member and the second moving member.

In the case where the first protruding member and the second protruding member protrude by approximately the same protruding amount, the masses of the first protruding member and the second protruding member are the same, and the load applied to each of the first protruding member and the second protruding member is the same. In the case where the forces are equal or the masses of the first protruding member and the second protruding member are different, the radially outward force generated by the rotation of the main driving gear member is different. A case where the urging force acting on the member is changed is exemplified. For example, when the biasing force is generated by an elastic spring, changing the spring constants of the elastic spring that applies the biasing force to the first protruding member and the elastic spring that applies the biasing force to the second protruding member is exemplified.

In the game machine C2 or C3, the projecting member is formed with a first projecting member and a phase difference from the first projecting member, and the first projecting member is formed on the driven gear member during rotation of the main driving gear member. a second protruding member that comes close to the driven gear member after coming close thereto, wherein the first protruding member and the second protruding member are formed to have different amounts of protruding by rotation of the main driving gear member. The main driving gear member has a separation rotational speed at which the first protruding member forms the retracted state and the second protruding member forms the extended state, the first protruding member and A game machine C5 characterized in that both of the second protruding members are capable of forming a joint rotation speed for forming the overhanging state.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, the state in which the first projecting member is brought into contact with the driven gear member without changing the rotation speed of the main driving gear member during rotation, and the second A state in which the protruding member abuts against the driven gear member can be formed.

That is, when the main driving gear member is rotated at the separation rotation speed at a constant speed, the main driving gear member starts meshing with the driven gear member at the second protruding member. On the other hand, by rotating the main driving gear member at the common rotational speed, the main driving gear member starts meshing with the driven gear member at the first protruding member.

That is, it is not necessary to change the rotation speed of the drive source during the rotation of the main driving gear member in order to change the position of the first transfer member when the second transfer member starts to move, so control of the drive source can be simplified. can be

<Feature D group> (Information that the prize was won by detouring)
A ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, a privilege giving means for awarding a privilege advantageous to a player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, and a game ball to the ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed between an open position where the ball can be entered and a regulation position that regulates the entry of a game ball, and the variable means is changed from the regulation position to the open position based on the establishment of a specific condition. a specific game executing means for executing a specific game in which the opening action is set a plurality of times until a predetermined condition is established;
When the specific game is being executed by the specific game executing means, ball entry assisting means for facilitating entry of the game ball on the regulating position of the variable means into the ball entry means by the subsequent release operation. A gaming machine D1 characterized by having:

Here, as one of conventional game machines, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a symbol display device. If the symbols to be stopped after the start and the end of variation are a predetermined combination of symbols, a big win is achieved, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Specifically, in the special game state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is closed after being opened for a predetermined time (or the time until a predetermined number of prizes are won), and such opening and closing operations are performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16 times) are repeated. A large amount of prize balls can be paid out by allowing game balls to enter the large prize winning opening in the open state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-700). However, in such a game machine, when the opening and closing operations are repeatedly performed, the game balls that reach the variable winning device during the closing operation cannot enter, and the game balls that have been shot are wasted. There is a problem that the player loses the interest of the player. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and provides a gaming machine capable of suppressing the waste of game balls shot by a player and enhancing the interest of the player. intended to provide.

According to the gaming machine D1, even a game ball that has flowed down to the regulating position of the variable means is made easier to enter the ball entering means at the next and subsequent open positions by the ball entering assisting means, so that it enters the ball entering means. There is an effect that the number of game balls that do not play can be suppressed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the ball entry assistance means has a guide path for guiding the game ball on the regulation position of the variable means to a position where the ball entry means can enter the game ball. Machine D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the ball entry assist means has a guide path for guiding the game ball on the regulation position of the variable means to a position where the ball entry means can enter. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of game balls entering the ball entering means can be increased.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the ball entry assisting means reduces the flow rate so that the ball can enter the ball entering means until the variable means is changed to the open position. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it has a flow-down speed reducing means for reducing the flow rate.

According to the game machine D3, in the game machine D1 or D2, the flow speed is reduced so that the game ball flows down within the range where the ball can enter the ball entering means until the variable means is changed to the open position. Since the ball-entering assisting means has the flow-down velocity reducing means, the ball-entering means can be made to enter more game balls.

a first detection means for detecting a game ball that could not be entered due to the variable means being in the regulation position when the specific game is being executed in any one of the game machines D1 to D3; a second detecting means capable of detecting a game ball detected by the first detecting means when the game ball enters the ball entering means by the entering ball assist means; and a game ball detected by the first detecting means. an effect executing means for executing a first effect based on the detection of the above, and executing a second effect different from the first effect when the game ball is detected by the second detecting means. A gaming machine D4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specific game is being executed, the first detection means detects the game ball that could not be entered due to the variable means being in the restricted position. When the game ball detected by the first detection means enters the ball entry means by the ball entry assistance means, the game ball is detected by the second detection means. The first effect is executed by the effect execution means based on the game ball being detected by the first detection means. Further, when the game ball is detected by the second detecting means, the second effect different from the first effect is executed by the effect executing means. As a result, when the player enters the game ball into the ball entering means, the effect execution means executes whether or not the game ball that was originally not entered into the ball entering means enters the ball entering means by the ball entering assisting means. It can be determined by the production that is done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can recognize that the player is at an advantage by the second effect.

The gaming machine D4 has display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, and the effect execution means selects a first effect mode corresponding to the first effect and a second effect mode corresponding to the second effect. A game machine D5 characterized in that it is constructed so that it can be displayed on at least the display means.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the presentation modes corresponding to the first presentation and the second presentation are displayed on the display means, so that the meaning of the presentation can be recognized more easily. effective.

In the game machine D4 or D5, the second effect suggests that the game ball is entered into the ball entering means by the ball entering auxiliary means even though the ball entering means is at the regulating position. A game machine D6 characterized in that it is composed of an effect to play.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4 or D5, it can be recognized that the game ball that was on the regulation position by the second effect has entered the ball entering means by the ball entering assisting means. There is an effect that the interest of the person can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines D4 to D6, when the specific game is being executed, a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the second detecting means, and a count value based on the count value by the counting means and an informing means for informing the informing mode.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines D4 to D6, the number detected by the second detection means is notified by the notification means, so the number of game balls advantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to determine

In any one of the game machines D4 to D7, when a game ball is detected by the first detection means, it has a determination means for determining whether the detected game ball has entered the ball entering means, The effect executing means executes a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect when it is determined by the determining means that the game ball has not entered the game ball. Game machine D8 to play.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the game ball that could not be entered due to the regulation position finally failed to enter the ball entry means as a third effect. There is an effect that the game can be recognized by the game, and a sharpness can be given to the game.

In gaming machines D1 to D8, at least the specified game type determination means for determining the type of the specified game executed by the specified game execution means, and the type of the specified game determined by the specified game type determination means, A gaming machine D9 characterized by comprising a specific game storage means storing a plurality of the specific games having different execution intervals of opening actions.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D8, as the type of the specific game, types with different execution intervals of the release operation are set, so that the ease of ball entry by the ball entry assisting means is increased. There is an effect that it can be varied depending on the type of specific game.

In the gaming machine D10, the specific game stored in the specific game storage means is a first specific game in which the execution interval at which the game ball is easily entered into the ball entering means by the ball entering assist means is set to be large. The game includes a game and a second specific game having a shorter execution interval in which the game ball is more likely to be entered into the ball entering means by the entering assisting means than the first specified game. A gaming machine D11.

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D10, there is an effect that the ease with which a ball is entered by the ball entry assist means can be varied according to the type of the specific game.

In the gaming machine D11, the gaming machine D12 is characterized in that the first specific game and the second specific game are set so that the number of opening operations is different.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D11, it is possible to differentiate the values of the first specific game and the second specific game, and to provide the game with more contrast. .

<Characteristic group E> (winning control of jump-up bonus)
A ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a privilege granting means for imparting a privilege advantageous to a player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means, and the game ball entering means being the game ball entering means. A variable means that can be changed between an open position where a game ball can be entered and a regulation position that regulates the entry of a game ball, and an opening that changes the variable means from the regulation position to the open position based on the establishment of a specific condition. Specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the action is set multiple times, specific game type determination means for determining the type of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means, and the specific game type determination means and storage means for storing at least a plurality of the specific games having different opening motion patterns as the specific games.

Here, as one of conventional game machines, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a symbol display device. If the symbols to be stopped after the start and the end of variation are a predetermined combination of symbols, a big win is achieved, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Specifically, in the special game state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is closed after being opened for a predetermined time (or the time until a predetermined number of prizes are won), and such opening and closing operations are performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16 times) are repeated. A large amount of prize balls can be paid out by allowing game balls to enter the large prize winning opening in the open state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 9-700). On the other hand, there is a problem that the opening pattern of the variable prize winning device is constant, the game becomes monotonous, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, when the game ball enters the ball entry means into which the game ball can enter, the privilege giving advantage to the player is given by the privilege giving means. The ball entry means is varied by an open position in which a game ball can enter, a regulation position in which entry of a game ball is restricted, and a variable means. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the specific game executing means executes the specific game in which the opening operation for changing the variable means from the restricted position to the open position is set a plurality of times. The type of the specific game executed by the specific game executing means is determined by the specific game type determining means. As the specific game determined by the specific game type determining means, at least a plurality of specific games having different opening motion patterns are stored by the storage means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the specific game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

In the gaming machine E1, when the specific game is being executed, a ball entry assisting means for making it easier for the game ball on the regulation position of the variable means to enter the ball entry means in the subsequent release operation. A game machine E2 characterized by having

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, when the specific game is being executed, the game ball on the regulating position of the variable means is moved to the ball entering means by the subsequent opening operation by the ball entering assisting means. Since it is easy to enter the ball at , there is an effect that it can be more advantageous to the player.

In the gaming machine E2, in the plurality of specific games stored in the storage means, when the variable means is varied to the open position, a game ball enters the entering means by the entering assist means. A first specific game containing many advantageous opening action patterns, which is one of the opening action patterns that are likely to be played, and a second specific game having fewer advantageous opening action patterns than the first specific game. The game machine E3 is characterized by being set at least.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, it is possible to set a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous to the player, so that the game can be varied. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine E3, in the first specific game, after executing the advantageous opening operation pattern a predetermined number of times, the variable means is variable to the open position for a period longer than the opening operation in the advantageous opening operation pattern. The opening operation is set at least once, and the second specific game is such that a game ball is entered into the ball entry assist means by the ball entry assist means of the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that it is composed of an opening operation of a disadvantageous opening operation pattern that makes it difficult to open the game machine E4.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects of the game machine E3, it is possible to set a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous to the player, so that the game can be varied. has the effect of being able to

In the game machine E4, a detecting means capable of detecting a game ball entered into the entering means by the entering ball assisting means, and an effect for executing a specific effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means. and an execution means.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the specific effect is executed based on the detection of the game ball entering the ball entering means by the ball entering assisting means. There is an effect that it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the state has become advantageous to

In the gaming machine E5, in the first specific game, after the predetermined number of times of the advantageous opening action pattern, the interval until the next opening action is executed is longer than the execution interval of other opening actions. A long long interval is set, and in the second specific game, after the disadvantageous opening action pattern of the predetermined number of times, the end period of the specific game longer than the long interval is set. A gaming machine E6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the first specific game and the second specific game up to the opening operation pattern of a predetermined number of times. There is an effect that it is possible to expect whether the game is the first specific game or the second specific game.

In the gaming machine E6, a ball-entering effect execution means for executing a performance based on the detection result of the game ball by the detection means during the first specific game or the second specific game during the long interval and the end period. A game machine E7 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to identify whether it is the first specific game or the second specific game by the effect executed in the long interval and the end period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the specific game becomes monotonous.

<Feature F group> (SW pressing table switching)
An operation accepting means for accepting an operation by a player, a period setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation can be accepted by the operation accepting means, and an effect is executed when the operation is accepted by the operation accepting means. effect execution means for performing, effect selection means for selecting the effect to be executed by the effect execution means, storage means for storing a plurality of the effects selected by the effect selection means, and the storage means, A specific effect is stored as one of the plurality of effects, and a probability varying means for varying the probability that the specific effect is selected by the selecting means within the effective period. Characteristic game machine F1.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is the mainstream to develop a game while displaying effects on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter abbreviated as "LCD"). What kind of effect is performed is determined, for example, at the timing when the ball shot into the game area enters the starting hole. That is, at the timing when the ball enters the starting hole, it is determined which pattern effect is performed, how and for how many seconds, and what the result of the effect is. Then, an effect pattern is instructed from the main control device that controls the game to the display control device that controls the display, and the effect display that is instructed by the display control device is performed. Since an effect pattern is an instruction for a series of effect displays of the effect pattern, as a result, the effect pattern also includes an instruction for the time required for the effect display (Patent Document 1). This is because the number of seconds required for a series of effect displays is determined in advance. In recent years, a large number of player-participation pachinko machines have been developed. These require a button operation during a predetermined effect period, and develop different effects depending on the timing of the button operation. For example, the effect display is performed such that the pattern is displayed in a part of the effect display, the variable display is stopped according to the button operation, and the so-called jackpot etc. is generated according to the stop result ( For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2000-350846). However, there has been a demand for a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of the game by performing various other effects by button operation. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

According to the gaming machine F1, an operation by the player is accepted by the operation accepting means. A period setting means sets a validity period during which the operation receiving means can receive an operation. When an operation is received by the operation receiving means, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. An effect to be executed by the effect executing means is selected by the effect selecting means. A storage means stores a plurality of effects selected by the effect selecting means. The storage means stores a specific effect as one of a plurality of effects, and the probability that the specific effect is selected by the selection means is varied by the probability variable means within the effective period. As a result, when the player performs an operation, the probability of selecting the specific effect can be set differently, so that the game can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the storage means stores a plurality of effects groups each composed of the plurality of effects having different selection rates of the specific effects, and the probability setting means is configured to store the above-mentioned effects stored in the storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that one effect group is set among a plurality of effect groups, and the effect selecting means selects an effect from the effect group set by the probability setting means. F2.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, by switching and setting the performance group, the probability setting means can change the selection rate of the specific performance by switching and setting the performance group. Therefore, there is an effect that the selection probability of the specific effect can be easily changed.

The gaming machine F2 has counting means for counting the number of operations accepted by the operation accepting means, and the probability setting means switches and sets the effect group based on the count of the counting means. A gaming machine F3 characterized by:

According to the game machine F3, since the effect group is switched according to the number of times the operation is accepted, there is an effect that the game can be given a freshness by the player's operation.

In the game machine F2 or F3, the game machine F4 is characterized in that the probability setting means switches and sets the effect group based on the remaining period of the period set by the period setting means.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2 or F3, the effect group is switched by the probability setting means based on the remaining period set by the period setting means. can be made different.

Any one of the gaming machines F2 to F4 has history storage means capable of storing a reception history when an operation is accepted by the operation acceptance means, and the probability setting means is stored in the history storage means. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the performance group is switched and set based on the received reception history.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F2 to F4, the effect group can be switched according to the reception history, so there is an effect that the probability can be changed according to the player's operation.

<Feature G group> (announced with a tool controlled by a voice lamp during the effective period of SW)
A game having a first control means for executing game control, a second control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the first control means, and an operation section operable by a player. In the machine, the first control means includes reception means for receiving an operation of the operation unit by the player, and based on the reception of the operation by the reception means, notifies the second control means that the operation has been received. reception transmission means for transmitting a reception signal indicating a reception signal; period setting means for setting an effective period during which the reception means can receive the player's operation; and an effective signal indicating the effective period set by the period setting means. to the second control means, and a notification mode indicating that the operation of the operation unit is set to be valid based on the expiration of the valid period set by the period setting means , actuating means operable in at least a first state and a second state different from the second state, and based on the start of the effective period set by the period setting means, the actuating means from the first state to the second state, wherein the second control means includes display means capable of displaying a performance mode, and display control means for causing the display means to display the performance mode and the display control means causes the display means to display a predetermined effect mode based on the reception of the reception signal from the reception transmission means. A game machine G1 characterized in that, based on the valid signal, a presentation mode indicating the valid period is displayed on the display means.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is the mainstream to develop a game while displaying effects on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter abbreviated as "LCD"). What kind of effect is performed is determined, for example, at the timing when the ball shot into the game area enters the starting hole. That is, at the timing when the ball enters the starting hole, it is determined which pattern effect is performed, how and for how many seconds, and what the result of the effect is. Then, an effect pattern is instructed from the main control device that controls the game to the display control device that controls the display, and the effect display that is instructed by the display control device is performed. Since an effect pattern is an instruction for a series of effect displays of the effect pattern, as a result, the effect pattern also includes an instruction for the time required for the effect display (Patent Document 1). Here, a gaming machine has been proposed in which buttons that can be operated by the player are provided in the gaming machine, and are operated by the player to display advance notice effects such as characters on the liquid crystal display device. In such a game machine, when the operation means is operated, there is a game machine in which the effective period during which the notice effect is displayed is displayed to the player on a liquid crystal display device or the like (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2000-350846). However, if the display control device or the like that controls the display device does not distinguish the input of the operation means or manage the valid period, the displayed valid period and the actual valid period will be different, and the player's There was a problem of reducing interest. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

According to the gaming machine G1, game control is controlled by the first control means. Based on the control signal from the first control means, game control is executed by the second control means. In the first control means, the operation of the operating section by the player is received by the receiving means. When the operation is accepted by the accepting means, the acceptance transmitting means transmits an acceptance signal indicating that the operation has been accepted to the second control means. A period setting means sets a validity period during which the reception means can receive the player's operation. A valid signal indicating the valid period set by the period setting means is transmitted to the second control means by the valid signal transmitting means. When the effective period set by the period setting means is reached, the notification means notifies the notification mode indicating that the operation of the operation unit is set to be valid. It is actuated by the actuating means to at least a first state and a second state different from the second state. The operation control means operates the operation means from the first state to the second state based on the start of the valid period set by the period setting means. In the second control means, the presentation mode is displayed by the display means. The presentation mode is displayed on the display means by the display control means. The display control means causes the display control means to display a predetermined presentation mode on the display means based on reception of the reception signal from the reception transmission means. Based on the valid signal transmitted from the valid signal transmitting means, an effect mode indicating the valid period is displayed on the display means. As a result, even if there is a discrepancy between the notification mode for reporting the valid period operated by the second control means and the presentation mode for indicating the valid period controlled by the second control means, the operating means operates in the second state. The validity period can be identified by the timing at which it is sent. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the validity period, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The game machine G1 has main control means capable of outputting a control signal for controlling a game to the first control means, and the main control means executes a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition. lottery means; dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result of the lottery means on the display means; 1 output means capable of outputting a start signal for starting dynamic display of the identification information in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means to the control means; , the period setting means of the first control means sets the effective period within the determined dynamic display period based on the reception of the start signal. G2.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the effective period is set within the dynamic display period based on the start signal received by the main control means for controlling the first control means, so that the effective period is set more accurately. There is an effect that the effective period can be set.

In gaming machine G2,
The game machine G3 is characterized in that the valid signal transmitting means transmits the valid signal to the second control means before dynamic display of the identification information is started.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2, the valid signal is transmitted to the second control means by the valid transmission means before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, so the valid period has the effect of being able to discriminate the start of

The game machine G4 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines G1 to G3, the operating means is operated to a specific state different from the second state before the start of the valid period.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the operating means is operated in a specific state before the valid period starts, so that the player can know in advance that the valid period will start. There is an effect that it is possible to notify

In the gaming machine G4, the operating means is provided so that an operating part that operates on the front side overlapping with the display area of the display means is arranged, and the display control means of the second control means operates during the effective period A game machine G5, characterized in that a specific performance mode is displayed on the display means within a period overlapping with a period in which the operating means is operated in the specific state before the start of.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machine G4, by arranging the operation means and the display means close to each other, it is possible to easily recognize the notification of the effective period by the display means and the notification by the operation means. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine G5, the specific effect mode is an effect in which specific pattern information is variably displayed from a display area overlapping with the operating portion of the operating means.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of the game machine G5, the specific effect is composed of a specific pattern display that is variably displayed from the display area overlapping the operating part, so the operating part and the specific effect are interlocked. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that the

<Characteristic H group> (Interlocking pseudo-ream and background level)
Lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery results of the lottery means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed as identification information indicating a specific lottery result, wherein the dynamic display execution means dynamic display time determination means for determining dynamic display time of the identification information to be dynamically displayed; A plurality of expectation level advance notice display modes in which performance modes are variably set according to expectations indicating that a specific lottery result is obtained, and a comprehensive expectation level notice display indicating a comprehensive expectation level in the plurality of expectation advance notice display forms. and advance notice display control means for causing at least the display means to display the mode of the game machine H1.

Here, there is a gaming machine provided with a display screen such as an LCD. When a pachinko machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, is provided with a display screen, a plurality of symbols may be variably displayed on the display screen based on the establishment of a starting condition. In such a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is conducted based on the fulfillment of the starting condition, and when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery, a predetermined combination of a plurality of symbols displayed in a variable manner (for example, 777, etc., is the same). In many cases, the game is stopped at a combination of numbers), and after that stop, a special game state (for example, a game state called winning) is generated (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-072569) . In such a game machine, the degree of expectation of winning is notified by displaying a character or the like on the display screen. In the gaming machine exemplified above, if a plurality of notice displays or the like indicating the degree of expectation are displayed, it becomes difficult to understand the overall degree of expectation. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by configuring the machine so as to execute an easy-to-understand presentation.

According to the gaming machine H1, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means. When the identification information is displayed with the identification information indicating the result of the specific lottery, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The dynamic display time of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. Within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, a plurality of expectation level advance notices are set by varying the presentation mode according to the expectation level indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result. The display mode and the total expectation level announcement display mode indicating the overall expectation level in the plurality of expectation announcement display modes are displayed at least on the display means by the announcement display control means. As a result, the overall expectation level can be identified by the overall expectation level announcement display mode, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the game machine H1, in the expectation level announcement display mode displayed by the announcement display control means, by being displayed, an overall expectation level higher than the expectation level displayed in the overall expectation level announcement display mode is displayed. The game machine H2 is characterized in that a variable notice display mode is set to be changed to an expectation degree notice display mode.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, by displaying the expectation level notice display mode, it is possible to increase the level of expectation displayed in the overall expectation level notice display mode. There is an effect that the player can also be interested in the expectation level notice display mode.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determination means, the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined based on the determined dynamic display time. dynamic display mode determination means; and expectation level announcement for determining the type of the expectation level announcement display mode to be displayed by the announcement display control means based on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. A gaming machine H3 characterized by comprising display mode determining means.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the type of the expectation degree announcement display mode is determined based on the dynamic display mode. Since the content of the dynamic display mode and the degree of expectation are not accompanied by the content of the dynamic display mode, the feeling of discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

In game machine H2 or H3, after temporarily stopping the identification information in a predetermined manner, a pseudo-stop means for executing at least once an effect for starting dynamic display, and the number of times of temporary stop executed by the pseudo-stop means. based on the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means and the lottery result of the lottery means, and the expectation level notice display control means controls the pseudo stop A gaming machine H4 characterized in that the variable advance notice display mode is displayed on the display means based on the execution of the temporary stop by the means.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2 or the gaming machine H3, it is possible to add value to the temporary stop, and to make the player expect the temporary stop to play the game. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine H3 or H4, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means includes the general expectation level advance notice display mode indicating a predetermined degree of expectation determined by the expectation level advance notice display mode determination means. A game machine H5 characterized in that a specific dynamic display mode is set as follows.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machine H3 or the game machine H4, the dynamic display mode is set in relation to the total expectation level notice display mode. The degree of expectation can be notified to the player, and the content of the dynamic display mode and the total degree of expectation do not accompany each other.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the advance notice display control means controls the advance notice display mode of the general expectation displayed within one dynamic display time to be the following identification when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the overall expectation degree announcement display mode indicating the same degree of expectation is continuously displayed even in the dynamic display of information.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the total expectation level is taken over over a plurality of dynamic displays, so there is an effect that it is possible to enjoy accumulating games. .

In any one of game machines H3 to H6, storage means for storing a plurality of groups of dynamic display modes composed of a plurality of different dynamic display modes as dynamic display modes determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. and setting means for setting the dynamic display mode group for which the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode,
The general expectation level notice display mode displayed within one dynamic display time is displayed as a display mode showing the dynamic display mode group set by the setting means after the dynamic display time. A game machine H7 characterized by:

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines H3 to H6, it is possible to notify the dynamic display mode group set according to the total expectation level, so that various effects can be given to the player. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine H7, when the dynamic display is started by the dynamic display means, the setting means sets the effect mode group corresponding to the type of the displayed general expectation level advance notice display mode. A gaming machine H8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H7, the performance mode group is set in accordance with the overall expectation level, so that the overall expectation level and the performance mode group can be associated with each other. There is an effect that notification can be made in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Game machine Z1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of game machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 to H8, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 to H8, the gaming machine comprises a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being a fusion. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
202 ROM (storage means)
650 Part of entry means 653 Part of entry assistance means 654 Variable means S212 Part of specific game type determination means S1003 Part of privilege provision means S1004 Specific game execution means

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a pattern display device as one of the game machines. In this pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole, a starting condition is established, and the patterns on the pattern display device start to change. If the stop symbols after the variation are a combination of predetermined symbols, a big win is achieved, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

Specifically, in the special game state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is closed after being opened for a predetermined time (or the time until a predetermined number of prizes are won), and such opening and closing operations are performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16 times) are repeated. A large amount of prize balls can be paid out by winning the game balls into the large prize winning opening in the open state.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-700

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is advantageous to the player based on the ball entry means into which the game ball can enter and the game ball entering the ball entry means. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege, variable means capable of changing the ball entry means between an open position where game balls can enter and a restricted position for restricting the entry of game balls, based on the establishment of specific conditions. a specific game executing means for executing a specific game in which the opening operation for varying the variable means from the regulating position to the open position is set a plurality of times; and a type of the specific game executed by the specific game executing means. It has specific game type determining means and storage means for storing at least a plurality of specific games having different opening motion patterns as the specific game determined by the specific game type determining means.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, when the game ball enters the ball entry means into which the game ball can enter, the privilege giving advantage to the player is given by the privilege giving means. The ball entry means is varied by an open position in which a game ball can enter, a regulation position in which entry of a game ball is restricted, and a variable means. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the specific game executing means executes the specific game in which the opening operation for changing the variable means from the restricted position to the open position is set a plurality of times. The type of the specific game executed by the specific game executing means is determined by the specific game type determining means. As the specific game determined by the specific game type determining means, at least a plurality of specific games having different opening motion patterns are stored by the storage means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the specific game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled operation unit viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled operation unit viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; (a) and (b) are front perspective views of a compound action unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the compound action unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the compound action unit; Fig. 2 is a front exploded perspective view of a pair of slide members, a rear cover, a first gear group and a second gear group; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of a pair of slide members, a rear cover, a first gear group and a second gear group; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of a meniscus member; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of a meniscus member; 4 is a partial front view of the compound action unit; FIG. 17(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the compound action unit taken along line XVIIa-XVIIa of FIG. 16, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the compound action unit after the driving device has been moved from (a). 4 is a partial front view of the compound action unit; FIG. (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the compound motion unit taken along line XIXa-XIXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the compound motion unit after separating the drive motor from the drive gear from (a). is. (a) is a front view of a two-layer gear, and (b) is a rear view of the two-layer gear. (a) is a rear view of a compound action unit, and (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a) is a rear view of a compound action unit, and (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a) and (b) are rear views of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a) is a rear view of a compound action unit, and (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a) is a rear view of a compound action unit, and (b) is a rear view of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a) and (b) are partial rear views of the compound action unit. It is a front view of a pair of slide members in a 2nd embodiment. 4 is a front view of a pair of slide members; FIG. (a) is a front view of a two-layer gear in a third embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the two-layer gear, and (c) is a side view of the two-layer gear. (a) is a front view of a reversing gear, (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear, and (c) is a side view of the reversing gear. (a) is a front view of a two-layer gear in a fourth embodiment; (b) is a bottom view of the two-layer gear; It is a sectional view of a layer gear. (a) is a front view of a reversing gear, (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear, and (c) is a partial side view of the reversing gear viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIc in FIG. 32(a). . It is a front view of the two-layer gear in 5th Embodiment. It is a partial front view of a second gear group. It is a partial front view of a second gear group. It is a front exploded perspective view of the two-layer gear in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a) to (c) are rear views of the two-layer gear in the seventh embodiment. (a) to (e) are rear views of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a) and (b) are front views of a compound action unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a compound action unit. (a) to (e) are rear views of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a) and (b) are front views of a compound action unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a compound action unit. It is a graph which shows the speed change of a two-layer gear. (a) and (b) are rear views of the two-layer gear in the eighth embodiment. (a) to (e) are rear views of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. 4 is a graph showing rotational speed of a double layer gear; (a) is a front perspective view of a specific winning opening 650, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the specific winning opening 650. FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the exploded specific winning opening 650. FIG. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the exploded specific winning opening 650. FIG. (a) is a front view of the specific winning device 650 with the front cover removed, (b) is a sectional view taken along line LIIb-LIIb of FIG. 52(a), and (c) is a ) taken along line LIIc-LIIc. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display screen area division setting and effective line setting in a first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen in the first control example. be. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing ball entry timing in the opening/closing operation of the ball entry regulation plate. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ball entry timing in the opening/closing pattern A of the ball entry regulation plate, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the ball entry timing in the opening/closing pattern B of the ball entry regulation plate. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detection timing of various sensors and the content of effect display based on the detection results; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an appearance effect on the normal effect screen during the jackpot game in the first control example, and (b) is an appearance effect on the special effect screen during the jackpot game in the first control example. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation and escape production|presentation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a capture effect and an escape effect on the special effect screen during the jackpot game in the first control example, and (b) is a special effect during the jackpot game in the first control example. It is the figure which showed typically the appearance production|presentation and recapture production|presentation by a screen. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an appearance effect and a failure effect on the special effect screen during the jackpot game in the first control example, and (b) is a normal effect during the jackpot game in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the capture production|presentation by a screen. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the spherical character and the display content in the character-linked production. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the spherical character and the display content in the character-linked production. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents in a background-linked effect. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents in a background-linked effect. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the first control example, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the first control example; It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot determination value in the first control example, and (b) is the first control example in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the hit type counter C2 and the type of the jackpot, and (c) shows the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 in the first embodiment and the determination value of the hit of the normal symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed the relationship typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example, (b) is the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of the big hit in the first control example FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of deviation (normal) in the first control example, (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (variable probability) in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; It is a block diagram showing. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a character-linked effect table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a background lottery table in the first control example. It is a diagram. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a work RAM within the display control device in the first control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image in the first control example. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A in the first control example, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface B in the first control example. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 9 is a flow chart showing a variation pattern setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing background change extraction processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a jackpot command process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flow chart showing a jackpot winning process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. 8 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation process during a big hit performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. 8 is a flowchart showing entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a jackpot display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing a ball entry effect process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing appearance effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing escape effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing failure effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing capture effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a recapture effect process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 7 is a flowchart showing timing notification processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a rear surface change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 10 is a flowchart showing error command processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an advance notice effect command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the SW effect of the comment-based effect in the second control example. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the SW effect of the continuous hit system effect in the second control example. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the SW effect of the touch-based effect in the second control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM within a sound ramp control device in a second control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the sound ramp control device in the second control example; It is a block diagram showing. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a winning normal reach comment background table in the second control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a winning super reach comment background table in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a comment background table at the time of deviation in the second control example; (b) schematically shows the contents of the fixed comment background table at the time of deviation in the second control example; FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram showing the content of a hit time fixed comment background table in the second control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a comment table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a repeated hit type effect lottery table in the second control example. is. 13 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing SW effect selection processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a notice effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing an example of an effect screen of a continuous-hit-type effect in the third control example. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing an example of an effect screen of a continuous-hit-type effect in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the sound ramp control device in the third control example, and (b) shows the contents of the RAM 223 in the sound ramp control device in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first lottery table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a second lottery table in the third control example. FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a third lottery table in the third control example, and FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a fourth lottery table in the third control example (e) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fifth lottery table in the third control example, and (f) is the sixth lottery table in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first remaining time lottery table in a third control example, and (b) shows the contents of a second remaining time lottery table in the third control example. FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a third remaining time lottery table in the third control example. 14 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing SW depression adaptation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing SW effect selection processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing SW effect selection processing 3 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ball entry timing in the opening/closing pattern at the time of the big win C in the fourth control example, (b) is the opening/closing pattern at the time of the small win in the fourth control example, FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing ball entry timing; It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot command process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing inter-round processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 26. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), through gate 67 , variable display unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. , and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 16R probability variable jackpot and a 16R short-time jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “16R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, and the “15R short-time jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds. Later, it is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state and becomes a time saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and allows some of the balls launched to the game board that flow down the right side of the game board to pass through. is configured to When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

As a result, during normal operation, the electric accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Aim the ball so that it passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and by winning in the first winning hole 64, you can get many chances for a big win lottery and win a big win. It is advantageous for the player to aim to become.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second prize-winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by winning the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

It should be noted that the selection ratio of the type of jackpot to be selected in the case of a jackpot may differ between when the ball wins in the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball wins in the second prize winning port 640. . Specifically, the probability of winning the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is compared to the probability of winning the ball in the second winning port 640 when the ball wins in the first winning port 64. set higher than As a result, the change due to the way the ball is hit can be made clearer.

A first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the first variable prize winning device 65 includes a triangular opening/closing plate in a front view that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing to the right around the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the opening/closing plate is tilted to the right by driving the large opening solenoid to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternately repeat the state of

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. In this embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. A first ball sensor 650a and a second ball sensor 650b provided in the specific winning unit 650 are connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and outputs from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 includes the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, the first accessory motor 330c, the second accessory motor 340c, the entrance A sensor 651a, an exit sensor 652a, a detour sensor 653a, etc. are connected respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motor 472 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 26. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, the accommodation structure of each unit 300 and 400 in the rear case 210 will be described.

5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 in which the operation unit 200 is disassembled and viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates a state in which the compound action unit 400 is attached to the rear case 210 .

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 has a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and one side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 6) is open. A rear case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, so that the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third pattern display device 81 can be arranged).

The action unit 200 is configured as one unit by accommodating the front unit 300 and the composite action unit 400 in the inner space of the rear case 210 .

Specifically, the compound action unit 400 is formed with an external shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 , and is surrounded by the outer wall portion 212 while being in contact with the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 . It is disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 in such a manner that the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5) of the compound action unit 400, a rectangular opening is formed at a position coinciding with the opening 211a of the rear case 210 in a front view.

In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the front unit 300 is arranged in a stacked state on the front side of the compound action unit 400 and accommodated in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined action unit (for example, the combined action unit 400) is arranged in a layered state in which another action unit (for example, the front unit 300) is superimposed on the front side. , in a front view, a given action unit can be shielded by another action unit.

In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made of a light-transmissive material and the player can visually recognize the action units arranged on the back side of the game board 13, a predetermined action unit The player can see only the required part of the screen, and the other parts can be shielded from the player by another action unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member that is shielded by the other motion units on the assumption that the entirety of the effect member will be visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in designing can be improved. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, an outline of the operation mode of the compound operation unit 400 will be described. 5 to 7 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG.

FIG. 8 is a front view of the operation unit 200. FIG. Note that FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the pair of slide members 420 of the compound action unit 400 is arranged at the extended position.

At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the pair of slide members 420 of the compound action unit 400 are retracted above and below the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of slide members 420 are slidably moved in directions facing each other, and the pair of slide members 420 are positioned at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the position of the third pattern display device 81). front, see FIG. 2).

These operation units 300 and 400 are formed to be independently operable, and are arranged in a superimposed (stacked) state as described above. Those arranged in different layers can be operated at the same time even if the operating member projects inwardly of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. As shown in FIG. In other words, the action units 300 and 400 can be operated not only individually, but also in combination with each other, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the compound action unit 400, the retracted position and the extended position of the pair of slide members 420 are formed as the ends of the movable range of the pair of slide members 420. As shown in FIG.

Next, the compound action unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 24. FIG. 9(a) and 9(b) are front perspective views of the compound action unit 400. FIG. 9(a) shows a state where the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 9(b) shows a state where the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 are arranged at the extended position. . The projecting position of the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 is formed as the end of the movable range of the slide member 420 located on the opposite side of the retracted position described above.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pair of slide members 420 of the compound action unit 400 are slid vertically, and in the course of the slide movement, the half-moon members 460 move into the shaft support holes 421a of the slide members 420 (see FIG. 12). is rotated around Next, the overall configuration of the composite action unit 400 will be described.

10 is an exploded front perspective view of the compound action unit 400, FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the compound action unit 400, and FIG. 12 is a pair of slide members 420, a back cover 430, and a first gear group. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of 440 and second gear group 450, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the compound action unit 400 includes a pair of base members 410 arranged in a left and right pair and fastened and fixed to the rear case 210. The base members 410 are connected to each other and vertically moved. a pair of slide members 420 that are slidably formed on each other, a rear cover 430 that forms a space between the slide members 420 and the main body 421 by being fastened to the back of the main body 421 of the slide members 420, and the slide member 420 and the rear cover 430, the second gear group 450 is also arranged between the slide member 420 and the rear cover 430, and the second gear group 450 is reversed. It mainly includes a half-moon member 460 engaged with a gear 453 and a driving device 470 for generating driving force for moving the slide member 420 .

The base member 410 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate elongated in the vertical direction and serves as a skeleton of the compound action unit 400. a plurality of slide holes 412 drilled in the thickness direction and extending in the vertical direction; alignment walls 413 formed on opposing surfaces of a pair of base members 410 as wall surfaces parallel to the extending direction of the slide holes 412; A fixed rack gear member 414 having rack gears 414a and 414b formed on the side surface opposite to the side surface that abuts against the alignment wall 413 in the state (see FIG. 9).

The slide holes 412 are elongated holes for regulating the sliding direction of the slide member 420. The pair of intermediate slide holes 412a are connected substantially in the center of each base member 410 and extend in the same direction. An outer slide hole 412b is formed outside the slide hole 412a (opposite side to the side facing the pair of base members 410), and an inner slide hole 412b is formed inside the intermediate slide hole 412a (side facing the pair of base members 410). and an inward slide hole 412c. Note that the outer slide hole 412b and the inner slide hole 412c are alternately formed in the vertical direction. That is, for example, when the outer slide hole 412 b is formed in the upper portion of the base member 410 , the inner slide hole 412 c is formed in the lower portion of the base member 410 .

The fixed rack gear member 414 is fastened to the base member 410 while being in contact with the alignment wall 413 for the purpose of transmitting driving force to the first gear group 440 and the second gear group 450, and has a rod shape with a rectangular cross section. Permanent rack gear 414a which is a member to be formed and which is carved across the outer surface, which is the side surface that abuts against the alignment wall 413, and the surface opposite to the outer surface formed in parallel with the outer surface. and a limited rack gear 414b which is a rack gear carved adjacent to the front side (front side in FIG. 10) of the permanent rack gear 414a and which is carved only near the center of the base member 410.

The permanent rack gear 414a meshes with the second gear group 450, and the limited rack gear 414b meshes with the first gear group 440, the details of which will be described later. In the limited rack gear 414b, the starting gear tooth 414b1 (end gear tooth) arranged on the side where meshing with the deformed gear 441 of the first gear group 440 starts is formed larger than the other gear teeth. (See FIG. 10).

The slide member 420 is a member that has a half-moon member 460 arranged in the center and slides up and down. It should be noted that the slide members 420 are formed as a pair of upper and lower slide members 420, and the structure of each slide member 420 is common (point symmetrical about the central point in front view). Description of the slide member 420 is omitted.

That is, one slide member 420 has a main body portion 421 formed in a rectangular plate shape elongated in the left-right direction and having both ends formed with steps toward the front side, and a main body portion 421 extending vertically downward from both ends of the main body portion 421 . A pair of extended leg portions 422 to be transmitted, a pair of side wall portions 423 extending from the upper and lower ends of the body portion 421 toward the back side (front side in FIG. A first shaft support pin 424 is provided and a plurality of shaft support pins 424 are provided in series in the left-right direction, and a plurality of second shaft support pins 425 are provided so as to protrude from the back surface of one end (the right side in FIG. 11) of the main body portion 421. and are mainly provided.

The body portion 421 has a large-diameter shaft support hole 421a drilled in the central portion, a rotation restriction hole 421b drilled in an arcuate shape coaxial with the shaft support hole 421a, and a side wall portion 423 at the upper end. and a slide restricting wall portion 421c whose central side is one step closer to the side wall portion 423, and slide restricting pins 421d which project toward the back side at both end portions and are formed as a pair of upper and lower slide restricting pins 421d. be.

The shaft support hole 421a is an opening through which the arcuate wall portion 461c of the semicircular member 460 is inserted, and the diameter of the shaft support hole 421a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the arcuate wall portion 461c. The semicircular member 460 and the reversing gear 453 are connected through the shaft support hole 421a so as not to rotate relative to each other.

The rotation restriction hole 421b is an opening through which the locking pin 461e of the semicircular member 460 is inserted, and the width of the rotation restriction hole 421b is slightly larger than the diameter of the locking pin 461e. Further rotation of the half-moon member 460 is restricted by abutting the locking pin 461e on the end of the rotation restricting hole 421b.

The slide restricting wall portion 421c is a portion that accommodates the slide rack 442 of the first gear group 440 between the upper side wall portion 423 of the main body portion 421, and the stepped portion exerts an urging force on the slide rack 442. is formed in such a manner that one end of the urging spring 442c that provides the

The slide regulating pin 421d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the ring-shaped collar member C and is inserted through the intermediate slide hole 412a of the base member 410, and the retaining plate B is fastened and fixed at the tip.

The collar member C (see FIG. 17(a)) is formed in a ring shape having a flange (large diameter portion). The outer diameter of the flange is formed to be larger than the width of each of the slide holes 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a, and the outer diameter of the ring portion in which the flange is formed is each of the slide holes 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a. is formed slightly smaller than the width of Therefore, the flange is interposed between the body portion 421 of the slide member 420 and the body portion 411 of the base member 410, and the ring portion of the collar member C is accommodated in the intermediate slide hole 412a with a slight gap. As a result, the slide restricting pin 421d is formed to be freely movable in the extending direction of the intermediate slide hole 412a, while its movement in the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the intermediate slide hole 412a is restricted.

The retainer plate B (see FIG. 19(a)) has a main body formed with a width larger than the width of each of the slide holes 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a. Therefore, the slide member 420 is connected to the base member 410 so that it cannot be pulled out when the retaining plate B is fastened to the slide restricting pin 421d.

Further, the retainer plate B has a fastening hole formed in the surface that abuts on the end portion of the slide regulating pin 421d, and the circumference of the fastening hole is built up in the same shape as the ring portion of the collar member C. As shown in FIG. The built-up portion is accommodated in the intermediate slide hole 412a. As a result, the collar member C is arranged at the root portion of the slide restricting pin 421d, and the build-up portion of the retainer plate B is arranged at the tip portion thereof, so that the axis of the slide restricting pin 421d is positioned in the intermediate slide hole. It can be stably supported while matching the opening direction of each of the slide holes 412a to 412c including 412a (see FIG. 19(a)).

The transmitted leg portion 422 is a portion to which the driving force of the driving device 470 is transmitted. A protruding slide regulating pin 422b, a front side wall portion 422c covering the side surface of the front side of the rack gear 422a in the tooth width direction (perpendicular to the direction of continuous gear teeth), and and a notch portion 422d that is an arc-shaped notch.

The slide control pin 422b is provided with a collar member C and a retainer plate B similarly to the slide control pin 421d, and is inserted through the slide holes 412b and 412c of the base member 410. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the slide regulating pin 422b of the leg 422 to be transmitted on the right side in front view is inserted through the outer slide hole 412c of the base member 410, and the slide regulating pin 422b of the leg to be transmitted 422 on the left side in front view is inserted. 422 b is inserted through the inner slide hole 412 c of the base member 410 . As a result, in a state where the retaining plate B is fastened to the slide restricting pin 422b, the axis of the slide restricting pin 422b is aligned with the opening direction of each of the slide holes 412b and 412c to stably support the slide member 420 and the base. Member 410 may be non-withdrawable.

The front wall portion 422c is formed so as to overlap the gear teeth of the drive gear 473 when viewed from the front in the assembled state (see FIG. 18).

The cutout portion 422d has a representative circle slightly larger than the addendum circle of the drive gear 473 in a state where the pair of slide members 420 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 9A). are formed in a portion where the representative circle is projected onto the front wall portion 422c in a front view.

The side wall portion 423 is provided with notch portions 423a that are notched above and below a region in which the shaft support hole 421a of the main body portion 421 is formed. The notch portion 423a serves as a portion through which the drive lever 467 of the half-moon member 460 passes.

The first shaft support pins 424 include a plurality of raised shaft support pins 424a (three positions in this embodiment) continuously provided from the rear surface of the slide member 420, and a two-layer gear adjacent to the shaft support hole 421a of the slide member 420. and a pivot pin 424b.

Since the raised shaft support pin 424a has a ring-shaped portion having the same height around it, the second gear group 450 to be inserted is raised from the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420 (a predetermined distance from the main body portion 421). pivoted. Thereby, the first gear group 440 can be arranged in that space.

The rear cover 430 is a member that covers the body portion 421 and the pair of side wall portions 423 of the slide member 420 by being fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the slide member 420, and is a pair of insertion holes through which the slide restriction pins 421d are inserted. A hole 430a is drilled in each one end.

The first gear group 440 is a gear group accommodated between the slide member 420 and the rear cover 430 and meshed with the limited rack gear 414b. A slide rack 442 engraved with a rack gear 442b and slidably moved along the slide restricting wall portion 421c of the slide member 420, a pair of transmission gears 443 for transmitting the rotation of the deformed gear 441 to the slide rack 442, and a deformed gear. 441 and a pair of transmission gears 443, an intermediate plate 444 that is a plate-like member that axially covers the transmission gear 443 disposed on the side of the deformed gear 441 and is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420; , is mainly provided.

The deformed gear 441 has a starting gear tooth 441a which is formed to be larger than the other teeth among the gear teeth which are cut.

The deformed gear 441 and the pair of transmission gears 443 are pivotally supported by the plurality of second pivot pins 425 of the slide member 420, respectively.

The slide rack 442 includes a main body portion 442a formed in a rectangular rod shape, a rack gear 442b formed on one side surface of the main body portion 442a and meshed with the transmission gear 443, and a protruding portion protruding from the side surface of the main body portion 442a. and a biasing spring 442c that is locked to the protrusion that is engaged.

The biasing spring 442c is engaged with the stepped portion of the slide restricting wall portion 421c of the slide member 420 to generate a biasing force that pushes the slide rack 442 back toward the transmission gear 443 side.

The intermediate plate 444 is a plate that divides the first gear group 440 and the second gear group 450 into front and rear, and has a pivot pin 444a protruding toward the front side.

A transmission gear 451 that meshes with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 among the plurality of gears of the second gear group 450 is supported on the shaft support pin 444a.

The second gear group 450 has a role of reversing the half-moon member 460 by rotating the reversing gear 453 using the vertical displacement of the slide member 420, and has a plurality of parts (four in this embodiment) in the left-right direction. ) are continuously provided and the outer end gear is meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410, and the inner end portion of the plurality of transmission gears 451 opposite to the permanent rack gear 414a. A two-layer gear 452 in which gear teeth 452a of the upper layer (back side layer) are meshed with a transmission gear 451 pivotally supported by and a reversing gear 453 to be meshed with.

Among the plurality of gears, the transmission gear 451 is supported by the shaft support pin 444a of the first gear group 440, and the other gears are supported by the slide member 420. It is pivotally supported by pin 424a.

As described above, since the raised shaft support pin 424a has a ring-shaped portion with the same height around it, the transmission gear 451 is raised from the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420 (a predetermined distance from the main body portion 421). pivoted. As a result, the axial heights of the transmission gear 451 pivotally supported by the pivot pin 444a of the first gear group 440 and the other transmission gears 451 can be matched. That is, the plurality of transmission gears 451 are pivotally supported with each other at a predetermined distance from the body portion 421 of the slide member 420 .

The two-layer gear 452 is formed of a resin material, and has gear teeth 452a engraved on the upper layer (back side layer), dividing gear teeth 452b engraved on the lower layer (front side layer), and upper and lower layers. and a sliding wall portion 452d that is an arcuate wall surface that slides on the arcuate recessed portion 453c of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 20).

Since the gear teeth 452a are always meshed with the transmission gear 451, the two-layer gear 452 is always rotated when the slide member 420 slides up and down.

The lower layer of the two-layer gear 452 is composed of an area in which the dividing gear teeth 452b are formed and an area in which the sliding wall portion 452d is formed. A starting gear tooth 452b1, which is larger than the gear tooth 452b2, is engraved. It should be noted that recessed portions 452b3 and 452b4 (see FIG. 20) formed on both sides of the starting gear tooth 452b1 as receiving portions for the gear teeth (see FIG. 20) are formed deeper than the recesses between the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. As a result, starting gear teeth 453b1, which are formed to be larger than intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of a reverse gear 453, which will be described later, can be received in good mesh (a state in which the gear teeth mesh deeply). Therefore, even if the gear teeth have different sizes, the meshing relationship between the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 can be maintained well.

The depressions 452b3 and 452b4 formed on both sides of the starting gear tooth 452b1 serve as receiving portions for the starting gear tooth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23(b)). Of the recessed portions 452b3 and 452b4, the side closer to the sliding wall portion 452d is referred to as a first recessed portion 452b3, and the opposite side of the first recessed portion 452b3 is referred to as a second recessed portion 452b4.

The gear tooth 452b is smaller than the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the dividing gear tooth 452b and larger than the intermediate gear tooth 452b2. As a result, as will be described later, the deviation of engagement between the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the starting gear teeth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 is suppressed, and the accuracy of rotation is improved when the engagement continues. can be made

It should be noted that the time when meshing starts means the time when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 start coming into contact with each other, and is not limited to the time when the gear teeth start coming into contact with each other. In this embodiment, it means the time when the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 come into contact with each other.

Further, the term "continuous meshing" means a state in which the intermediate gear teeth 452b2, 453b2 are meshed after the starting gear teeth 452b1, 453b1 are meshed.

As a method of increasing the size of the starting gear tooth 452b1, a method of increasing the face width (the length along the axial direction of the gear) is also conceivable. However, in the present embodiment, the starting gear teeth 452b1 and the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed to have the same tooth width for the reason that the two-layer gear 452 can be easily formed into a two-layer structure. ) and increased tooth depth.

The disk portion 452c is formed so as to be overlapped with the gear teeth of the transmission gear 451 adjacent to the two-layer gear 452 and the gear teeth of the reversing gear 453 adjacent to the two-layer gear 452 when viewed in the axial direction (FIG. 21(b)). reference). As a result, when the transmission gear 451 and the reversing gear 453 move in the axial direction, the respective gear teeth are brought into contact with the disc portion 452c, thereby suppressing the transmission gear 451 and the reversing gear 453 from wobbling. and further movement of the transmission gear 451 and the reversing gear 453 can be suppressed.

The reversing gear 453 is a member that reverses the half-moon member 460 by being engaged with and rotated by the two-layer gear 452, and is formed in a cylindrical body portion 453a through which the cylindrical main body 462a of the half-moon member 460 can be inserted. and a reverse gear tooth 453b formed outward from one end of the main body portion 453a, and a main body portion 453a formed adjacent to the reverse gear tooth 453b in the direction along the outer circumference of the cylindrical main body 462a. and an arc-shaped recess 453c, which is an arc-shaped wall surface that is arranged axially symmetrically with the two-layer gear 452 and slides on the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, and a wide protrusion in which the arc-shaped recess 453c is formed. It mainly includes an engaging projecting receiving portion 453d and an engaging projecting portion 453e projecting radially from a position obtained by dividing the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 453a into three equal parts.

At both ends of the reverse gear tooth 453b, starting gear teeth 453b1 which are larger (tooth thickness and tooth depth) than the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 (gear teeth other than those at both ends) are engraved. A recess 453b3 formed between the starting gear tooth 453b1 and the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d as a gear tooth receiving portion is deeper than the recess formed between the intermediate gear teeth 453b2. It is formed. As a result, the starting gear teeth 452b1, which are formed to be larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452, can be received with good meshing (a state in which the gear teeth mesh deeply). Therefore, even if the gear teeth have different sizes, the meshing relationship between the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 can be maintained well.

The arc-shaped concave portion 453c is a portion that abuts against the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, and is formed with a curvature radius that is approximately the same as the radius of the sliding wall portion 452d.

The locking protrusion 453e is fitted to an arc-shaped wall portion 461c formed in the main body portion 461 of the half-moon member 460 in a non-rotatable manner. As a result, the reversing gear 453 and the semicircular member 460 are rotated together.

Next, referring to FIGS. 14 and 15, the meniscus member 460 will be described. 14 is a front perspective view of meniscus member 460 and FIG. 15 is a rear perspective view of meniscus member 460. FIG. 14 and 15 illustrate a state in which the front cover 466 is removed from the body portion 461 of the half-moon member 460. As shown in FIG.

The semicircular member 460 is a semicircular plate that is arranged in the center of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 10) and is rotated along with the slide movement of the slide member 420 so that the top and bottom are reversed. A body portion 461 which is a member and forms the skeleton of the half-moon member 460, a central gear 462 having a tubular body 462a inserted through a connecting hole 461a drilled near the center of the body portion 461, and the central gear 462. A crank gear 464 having a plurality of claw members 463 slidably moved along the main body portion 461 with the rotation of the claw members 463, a slide pin 464b inserted through a slide hole 463a formed at the base of the claw members 463, and a center A transmission gear group 465 disposed between the gear 462 and the crank gear 464 and meshing with the central gear 462 and the crank gear 464, a front cover 466 fastened and fixed from the front side of the main body portion 461, and a driving lever 467 (see FIG. 12) fastened and fixed to the end of the tubular body 462 a of the central gear 462 .

The body portion 461 includes a connecting hole 461a through which the central gear 462 is inserted, a plurality of pivot pins 461b through which the crank gear 464 and the transmission gear group 465 are supported, and an inner circumference of the reverse gear 453 around the connecting hole 461a. A circular arc-shaped wall portion 461c protruding with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter and formed with a notch into which the locking projection 453e is fitted, a claw-shaped hook portion 461d on which the biasing spring is hooked, and and a locking pin 461e that protrudes.

The locking pin 461e is inserted through the rotation restricting hole 421b of the slide member 420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 21(a)). Thereby, the rotation angle of the half-moon member 460 is restricted.

The central gear 462 includes a tubular main body 462a inserted through the connecting hole 461a of the main body 461, a flange portion 462b formed radially from one end of the tubular main body 462a, and a flange portion 462b. A gear tooth 462c is formed radially inwardly from the outer peripheral surface of 462b, and a drive lever 467 is formed so as to be fastened and fixed to the other end opposite to one end of cylindrical main body 462a. and a claw-shaped hook portion 462e on which the other end of the urging spring is hooked.

The claw member 463 mainly includes an elongated slide hole 463a through which the slide pin 464b of the crank gear 464 is inserted, and a slide plate portion 463b, which is a long plate-like body projecting toward the front side. .

The slide plate portion 463b is inserted into an elongated slide hole 466a formed in the front cover 466. As shown in FIG. As a result, the claw member 463 is slidably formed in the extension direction of the slide hole 466 a of the front cover 466 .

The crank gear 464 has a main body portion 464a which is supported by the shaft support pin 461b of the main body portion 461 and has gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and a slide projecting eccentrically from the rotating shaft of the main body portion 464a. and a pin 464b.

The main body portion 464a is rotated with the rotation of the central gear 462 by meshing with the central gear 462 and the transmission gear group 465 .

The slide pins 464b are moved about the pivot pins 461b by rotating the main body 464a. Thereby, the slide pin 464b is moved between a first position (see FIG. 14) located close to the central gear 462 and a second position spaced apart from the central gear 462 . This movement of the slide pin 464b causes the claw member 463 to move along the slide hole 466a of the front cover 466 (see FIG. 26(b)).

The front cover 466 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the body portion 461 and accommodates each member of the half-moon member 460 between itself and the body portion 461, and the slide plate portion 463b of the claw member 463 is inserted therethrough. An elongated slide hole 466a is drilled.

The drive lever 467 has a long plate-shaped lever portion 467a (see FIG. 13) extending radially outward and an insertion hole 467b (see FIG. 13) and are mainly provided.

The lever portion 467a (see FIG. 13) is a portion that is pushed by the slide rack 442. When the lever portion 467a is pushed by the slide rack 442, the center gear 462 is rotated.

Returning to FIG. 10 to FIG. 13, description will be made. The driving device 470 includes a fastening plate portion 471 that is raised to the front side in the central portion of the base member 410 and that is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, and a drive motor 472 that is fastened and fixed to the fastening plate portion 471. and a drive gear 473 inserted through the drive shaft of the drive motor 472 .

The fastening plate portion 471 has a pair of restriction wall portions 471a and 471b which are formed to have an arcuate cross section along the outer shape of the motor case of the driving gear 472 and extend toward the front side. The inner side in the assembled state) extends to approximately the middle position of the motor case, and the other regulating wall portion 471b (the outer side in the assembled state) extends longer than the extended end of the one regulating wall portion 471a. These pair of restricting wall portions 471 a and 471 b are used as guides when the driving motor 472 is pulled out from the fastening plate portion 471 .

The drive gears 473 are arranged to face the rack gears 422a of the pair of slide members 420 from both sides and are meshed from both sides.

Next, an outline of movement of the pair of slide members 420 of the compound action unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. FIG. 16 and 18 are partial front views of the compound action unit 400, FIG. 17(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the compound action unit 400 along line XVIIa-XVIIa in FIG. 16, and FIG. 19A is a partial cross-sectional view of the compound action unit 400 after the driving device 470 has been moved from FIG. 17A, and FIG. 19A is a partial cross-sectional view of the compound action unit 400 taken along line XIXa-XIXa of FIG. and FIG. 19(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the compound action unit 400 after the drive motor 472 is separated from the drive gear 473 from FIG. 19(a). 16 and 17 illustrate a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIGS. 18 and 19 illustrate a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18 , the pair of slide members 420 sandwich the drive gear 473 of the drive device 470 between the legs 422 to be transmitted. At this time, the rack gear 422 a of the leg portion 422 to be transmitted, which is arranged to face the drive gear 473 , is meshed with the single drive gear 473 . As a result, the drive gear 473 is rotated by the drive motor 472, so that the legs 422 to be transmitted, which are opposed to each other with the drive gear 473 therebetween, are synchronously slid.

That is, in a state where the slide member 420 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the drive gear 473 is rotated clockwise in a front view, so that the upper slide member 420 moves downward and the lower slide member 420 moves downward. are moved upward with each other at the same speed. At this time, the pair of drive motors 472 arranged on the left and right sides are synchronously controlled, and the pair of slide members can be stably slid.

Also, the respective weights of the pair of slide members 420 are applied to the driving gear 473 in opposite directions. For example, a weight is applied to the drive gear 473 on the right side in front view from the upper slide member 420 in a direction to rotate the drive gear 473 clockwise, and the lower slide member 420 rotates the drive gear 473 counterclockwise. A weight is applied in the direction of rotation. As a result, if the weights of the pair of slide members 420 are made equal, the drive gear 473 can be kept stopped due to the weight balance of the pair of slide members 420 even if the power of the drive motor 472 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power of the drive motor 472 is cut when the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at an arbitrary position, the pair of slide members 420 can be kept stopped at that position.

A pair of transmitted leg portions 422 of the slide member 420 are meshed with the drive gear 473 from the same direction. That is, for example, the pair of left and right transmitted leg portions 422 of the upper slide member 420 are meshed with the drive gear 473 from the right side in front view, and the pair of left and right transmitted leg portions 422 of the lower slide member 420 Both are meshed with the driving gear 473 from the left side in front view.

As a result, even if one of the transmitted legs 422 meshing with the driving gear 473 suddenly moves (for example, moves in a direction in which the distance from the meshing driving gear 473 increases), One of the transmitted leg portions 422 and the other transmitted leg portion 422 connected through the body portion 421 is moved in the same direction as the one of the transmitted leg portions 422 . That is, since it is moved away from the driving gear 473 that meshes with it, it is possible to suppress the application of a large load to the driving gear 473 that meshes with the other leg 422 to be transmitted.

Here, for example, one leg 422 to be transmitted of the slide member 420 meshes with the driving gear 473 from the right side in front view, and the other leg 422 to receive transmission meshes with the driving gear 473 from the left side in front view. Then, one of the transmitted leg portions 422 is moved in a direction in which the distance from the driving gear 473 increases, and the other transmitted leg portion 422 is pressed against the driving gear 473 . As a result, a large load is applied to the drive gear 473 meshing with the other leg 422 to be transmitted.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a large load from being applied to the driving gear 473 as described above. can be improved. Also, the shape of the pair of slide members 420 can be made the same, and the members can be shared.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), the driving gear 473 and the front wall portion 422c interfere with each other in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 19(a)). On the other hand, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state spaced apart from the outline of the notch 422d in a front view. Note that the positional relationship between the slide member 420 and the drive gear 473 that "the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state in which the drive gear 473 is spaced apart from the outer shape of the notch portion 422d in a front view" will be described as a specific phase position.

Therefore, in a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position (specific phase position), which is the end of the movable range, the drive gear 473 can be pulled out through the notch portion 422d formed in the transmission receiving leg portion 422. . Accordingly, the drive gear 473 can be replaced without removing the slide member 420 from the base member 410 (see FIG. 17(b)). Therefore, the maintainability of the driving gear 473 can be improved.

Here, the pair of slide members 420 are arranged opposite to each other with the drive gear 473 interposed therebetween, and are meshed with the drive gear 473 by the rack gears 422 a of the respective leg portions 422 to be transmitted. In this state, both of the pair of slide members 420 need to be similarly arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 16), so the driving gear 473 and the rack gear 422a are meshed with arbitrary gear teeth. It's not a good thing. That is, the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420 have a fixed relationship between the gear teeth that mesh with each other (the representative gear teeth of the rack gear 422a contacting the representative gear teeth of the drive gear 473 when meshed). is defined) to form a proper meshing condition.

The notch 422d of the slide member 420 can be used to form the proper meshing state. That is, as described above, the cutout portion 422d has a representative circle slightly larger than the addendum circle of the drive gear 473 when the pair of slide members 420 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 16). It is formed in a portion projected onto the front wall portion 422c in the front-rear direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 16) when the shaft and the central axis are aligned with each other.

Therefore, in a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the cutout portions 422d are arranged to face each other. In this state, the drive gear 473 is moved through the notch 422d (moved in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 16), so that the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a can be meshed in a proper meshing state.

In a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position (specific phase position), the pair of slide members 420 are blocked from moving outward in the vertical direction (the upper slide member 420 moves upward and the lower slide member 420 moves upward). 420 is blocked from further movement downward). That is, when the slide member 420 is randomly moved toward the retracted position, the slide member 420 is stopped at least at the retracted position (movement resistance increases).

Therefore, in the position adjustment of the slide member 420 when the maintenance worker replaces the drive gear 473, even if the slide member 420 is moved in the retraction direction at random, the slide member 420 remains at the retraction position (specific phase shift) at the end of the movable range. position). As a result, the drive gear 473 can be easily taken out through the notch 422d, and in this state, the drive gear 473 can be easily meshed with the rack gears 422a of the pair of slide members 420. As shown in FIG. Therefore, maintainability can be improved.

The arrangement of the driving device 470 will be described with reference to FIG. 17(a). As described above, the notch portion 422d is formed in the pair of slide members 420, so that the drive device 470 in the assembled state is fastened and fixed to the base member 410 with the pair of slide members 420 arranged at the retracted position. be able to. Thereby, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the driving device 470 can be improved.

That is, when the notch portion 422d is not formed in the front wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 (for example, when the front wall portion 422c is formed in the entire area of the rack gear 422a), the driving device 470 is attached to the base member 410. Even if an attempt is made to assemble the driving device 470, the drive gear 473 abuts against the front wall portion 422c, and the driving device 470 cannot be assembled to the base member 410. FIG. Therefore, the driving device 470 had to be arranged on the opposite side of the front wall portion 422c, and the degree of freedom in arranging the driving device 470 was low.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a notch portion 422d is formed in the front wall portion 422c. It can be arranged on the front side (the side on which the front wall portion 422c is arranged). Therefore, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the driving device 470 can be improved.

A front wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 is formed in a layer between the drive gear 473 and the drive motor 472, and by moving the slide member 420 from the retracted position, the drive gear 473 and the front wall portion 422c move forward and backward. They can be superimposed in a direction view (a view perpendicular to the page of FIG. 16). As a result, when replacing the drive device 470, it is possible to select whether to remove the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 together, or to remove only the drive motor 472 while leaving the drive gear 473.

That is, the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 can be separated by pulling out the drive motor 472 while the drive gear 473 is in contact with the front wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 19B). . As a result, the driving motor 472 can be replaced while maintaining the meshing state between the driving gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the leg 422 to be transmitted. Therefore, before and after replacement of the drive motor 472, it is possible to eliminate the need for re-engagement adjustment between the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the transmission receiving leg 422, thereby improving maintainability.

At this time, the driving gear 473 overlaps the front wall portion 422c of the pair of leg portions 422 to be transmitted facing each other with the driving gear 473 interposed therebetween when viewed in the front-rear direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 18) (see FIG. 18). Therefore, when the drive gear 473 is pulled out from the drive motor 472, force is applied to the drive gear 473 from at least two points arranged opposite to each other with the rotation shaft interposed therebetween. Therefore, tilting of the drive motor 472 with respect to the drive gear 473 is suppressed.

Further, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out from the fastening plate portion 471, the drive motor 472 can be moved along the regulation wall portions 471a and 471b while being pressed against the regulation wall portions 471a and 471b. Inclination of the axis with respect to the drive gear 473 can be suppressed. Accordingly, deformation of the drive gear 473 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 19( a ), one regulation wall portion 471 a is formed so as to retreat toward the fastening plate portion 471 from the front end surface of the motor case of the drive motor 472 . As a result, the drive motor 472 can be pulled out using the extended end of one of the regulation wall portions 471a as a fulcrum S. That is, since the extended end of the one regulation wall portion 471a and the side surface of the drive motor 472 are arranged adjacent to each other, the extended end of the one regulation wall portion 471a serves as the fulcrum S and the side surface of the drive motor 472 (see FIG. 19). In (a), the point of action W is shown inside the drive motor 472 for easy understanding). can be As a result, the force required to pull out the drive motor 472 can be suppressed depending on the setting of the power point. FIG. 19(a) shows the relationship between the fulcrum S and the point of action W and a virtual lever.

In addition, the drive motor 472 can be pulled out while pressing the drive motor 472 against the other regulation wall portion 471b arranged to face the one regulation wall portion 471a. As a result, the degree of inclination of the drive motor 472 with respect to the drive gear 473 when the drive motor 472 is pulled out can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), the other restricting wall portion 471b is formed to protrude forward (upward in FIG. 19(a)) from the extending end portion of the restricting wall portion 471a. As a result, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out with the one regulation wall portion 471a as the fulcrum S, in a state W1 where the point of action W is closest to the other regulation wall portion 471b, the drive motor 472 is pulled out from the other regulation wall portion 471b. It is possible to apply a force directed in the direction of pushing back to the point of action W. Therefore, the movement of the drive motor 472 in the direction perpendicular to the drive shaft can be prevented by the other regulation wall portion 471b. As a result, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out, it is possible to reliably prevent the drive motor 472 from moving in the direction away from the one regulation wall portion 471a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the two-layer gear 452 involved in rotation of the half-moon member 460 of the compound action unit 400 will be described. 20(a) is a front view of the two-layer gear 452, and FIG. 20(b) is a rear view of the two-layer gear 452. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the two-layer gear 452 is a gear member in which different gear teeth are engraved on the front side and the back side with the disk portion 452c as a boundary. As shown in FIG. 20(a), the starting gear tooth 452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d is formed larger than the intermediate gear tooth 452b2. Therefore, as will be described later, the starting gear tooth 452b1 can be endowed with durability to withstand collision (abutment) with the reverse gear 453. FIG. In this embodiment, only the starting gear teeth 452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d are formed large, and the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed small, so that durability is improved and material costs are reduced. It is possible to achieve both.

The two-layer gear 452 includes a depression bottom wall portion 452e as a wall surface that forms the bottoms of the first depression portion 452b3 and the second depression portion 452b4, and a push-back rib 452f that connects the depression bottom wall portion 452e and the ring-shaped rib. , provided.

Here, the second recess 452b4 is required to be deep enough as a recess to receive the starting gear tooth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23), while the first recess 452b3 is designed to engage the reversing gear 453. It is a recess into which the projecting receiving portion 453d enters. Therefore, the depth of the second recessed portion 452b4 is not required, but in the present embodiment, the depths of the first recessed portion 452b3 and the second recessed portion 452b4 are substantially the same. As a result, the amount of heat shrinkage of the resin material near the first recessed portion 452b3 and the second recessed portion 452b4 during molding of the two-layer gear 452 can be made uniform, and the moldability of the two-layer gear 452 can be improved. can.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), a space is formed in an area surrounded by the sliding wall portion 452d, the wall portion formed by the bottom of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2, and the recessed bottom wall portion 452e. At this time, the slide wall portion 452d and the recessed bottom wall portion 452e are formed to have substantially the same plate thickness, thereby suppressing the occurrence of sink marks peculiar to resin molding. Also, the material cost of the resin material can be suppressed.

Here, the recessed bottom wall portion 452e is not necessarily required to ensure the function of the two-layer gear 452. On the other hand, the starting gear tooth 452b1 and the sliding wall portion 452d are formed in a manner in which they are connected by the recessed bottom wall portion 452e. Therefore, it is possible to disperse the impact when the starting gear tooth 452b1 comes into contact with the reverse gear 453 (see FIG. 23(b)).

The pushback rib 452f is connected to the recess bottom wall portion 452e of the second recess portion 452b4. Here, the direction of the line of force of the force F generated when the reverse gear 453 is brought into contact with the starting gear tooth 452b1 (see FIG. 23(b)) is directed toward the pushback rib 452f. As a result, even when a space is formed in an area surrounded by the sliding wall portion 452d of the double-layer gear 452, the wall portion formed by the tooth bottom of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2, and the recessed bottom wall portion 452e, the push-back rib 452f is formed. can improve the resistance against the force F. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deformation of the starting gear tooth 452b1 due to the impact at the time of contact.

As shown in FIG. 20(b), gear teeth 452a are formed around the circumference of the two-layer gear 452. As shown in FIG. Since the gear teeth 452a are always meshed with the transmission gear 451 (see FIG. 21(b)), the two-layer gear 452 is always rotated when the sliding member 420 slides up and down (see FIG. 21(a)). .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 26, the details of the movement of the compound action unit 400, that is, the actions of the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 that are moved by transmission of the driving force of the driving device 470 will be described. do. 21 to 26 describe the operation of the compound action unit 400 in chronological order. 21 to 26, illustration of the rear cover 430 is omitted in order to facilitate understanding.

21(a) and 22(a) are rear views of the compound action unit 400, and FIGS. 21 shows a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. A state in which the end portion of the shape receiving portion 453d is arranged to face the first recess portion 452b3 of the two-layer gear 452 is illustrated. 21(b) and 22(b), in the two-layer gear 452, the dividing gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d are illustrated by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are illustrated by imaginary lines. be.

As shown in FIG. 21(b), in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position, the reversing gear 453 is such that the arc-shaped concave portion 453c of the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d prevents the two-layer gear 452 from sliding. The surface is circumscribed by the wall portion 452d. Thereby, the posture of the reversing gear 453 can be maintained.

In this case, the mechanical engagement between the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d and the sliding wall portion 452d acts as a holding mechanism for maintaining the attitude of the reversing gear 453. As shown in FIG. Therefore, in order to maintain the posture of the reversing gear 453, it is not necessary to dispose other members such as elastic springs.

Also, the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 and the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 abut on both sides of a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the two-layer gear 452 and the rotation axis of the reversing gear 453. be done. Therefore, the rotation of the reversing gear 453 can be prevented regardless of the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453, and the posture of the reversing gear 453 can be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 22(b), when the pair of slide members 420 is moved, the transmission gear 451 that meshes with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 among the plurality of transmission gears 451 is rotated. Along with the rotation, the other transmission gear 451 and the two-layer gear 452 meshing with the transmission gear 451 with the gear teeth 452 are also rotated. On the other hand, since the reverse gear 453 is not meshed with the two-layer gear 452, it is maintained in the same posture as the retracted position.

While the pair of slide members 420 are moving, the arcuate recess 453c of the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d receives sliding friction from the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452. As shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the arc-shaped concave portion 453c of the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d is in contact with the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, thereby suppressing the concentration of sliding friction in one place. Frictional force can be distributed over the entire arcuate recess 453c. As a result, it is possible to suppress local application of a large force to the reversing gear 453 from the two-layer gear 452 . In addition, the effect of maintaining the attitude of the reversing gear 453 can be improved by increasing the contact points between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 .

23(a) and 23(b) are rear views of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453. FIG. Note that FIG. 23(a) shows a state in which the two-layer gear 452 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise from FIG. 22(b) in a rear view, and FIG. A state in which the two-layer gear 452 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the rear view is illustrated. In FIG. 23, the dividing gear tooth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 are illustrated by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As described above with reference to FIG. 22(b), before the reversing gear 453 abuts against the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452, the end of the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 contacts the two-layer gear. 452 is arranged to face the first recessed portion 452b3.

At this time, since the end of the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d arranged to face the first recessed portion 452b3 is not in contact with the two-layer gear 452, the effect of maintaining the posture of the reverse gear 453 is canceled, and at least 1 rotation direction (clockwise direction on the paper in FIG. 22(b)).

As shown in FIG. 23(a), the two-layer gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. is rotated before That is, the reversing gear 453 is rotated by the sliding friction applied from the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 to the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 . At this time, the reversing gear 453 is rotated in such a manner that the engaging projecting receiving portion 453 d enters the first recessed portion 452 b 3 of the two-layer gear 452 .

That is, the reversing gear 453 is slightly rotated by the sliding friction applied from the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 to the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23(a)), and then It abuts on the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the layer gear 452 (see FIG. 23(b)). This can suppress the impact when the reversing gear 453 and the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 come into contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 23(b), the position where the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 begin to abut is the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the two-layer gear 452 and the rotation axis of the reversing gear 453. It is formed at a position (upper in FIG. 23(b)) returned to the opposite side of the two-layer gear 452 in the rotational direction.

As a result, the force applied to the reversing gear 453 when the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 begin to abut each other has a component directed in the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 and It is transmitted separately to the component that goes to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress excessive rotation of the reversing gear 453 when the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start contacting each other.

That is, when the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 begins to abut against the reverse gear 453, the teeth do not mesh with each other from the beginning. Therefore, if the force applied in the rotational direction of the reversing gear 453 when it abuts against the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 is excessive, the reversing gear 453 rotates at a higher speed than the two-layer gear 452 ( move). In that case, there is a possibility that meshing between the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 may fail.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the force applied from the two-layer gear 452 to the reversing gear 453 at the start of contact is also generated in the direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 (direction toward the rotation axis). , the rotational resistance of the reversing gear 453 can be temporarily increased. That is, the rotation resistance can be increased by pressing the reversing gear 453 against the rotating shaft. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive rotation of the reversing gear 453 when the two-layer gear 452 starts contacting the starting gear teeth 452b1.

In addition, since the starting gear teeth 452b1 and 453b1 are formed to be larger than the gear teeth 452a of the two-layer gear 452, it is possible to prevent disengagement of the teeth when the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 start meshing. .

Here, the larger the gear teeth, the greater the play (backlash) that is formed. become. That is, when the gear teeth are miniaturized, even a slight deviation in the positional relationship (phase relationship) between the meshed gears may cause the meshed teeth to be shifted by one tooth.

In this embodiment, the transmission gear 451 to which the driving force of the driving device 470 (see FIG. 10) is transmitted is more important than the play (backlash) generated between the transmission gear 451 and the gear teeth 452a of the double-layer gear 452. The play (backlash) generated between the starting gear tooth 452b1 and the starting gear tooth 453b1 of the reverse gear 453 is larger. That is, the phase shift of the two-layer gear 452 caused by the relationship with the transmission gear 451 is smaller than the phase shift between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 and is permissible. As a result, it is possible to prevent deviation of the teeth when the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 start meshing.

When the two-layer gear 452 begins to abut against the reversing gear 453 in the rotational direction, the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 begins to abut against the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 . That is, the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d is used as a substitute for the gear tooth that begins to mesh with the starting gear tooth 452b1. Thereby, the durability of the reversing gear 453 can be improved.

That is, the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d formed with the arc-shaped concave portion 453c is not a portion that engages with the gear teeth of the two-layer gear 452, but contacts the outer peripheral surface of the two-layer gear 452 to act as a reverse gear. It is part of the role of maintaining the posture of 453. Therefore, unlike the gear teeth, the size is not limited according to the size of the mating gear teeth. In addition, it is desirable that the portion that abuts when the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start contacting is large and strong, and the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d is attached to that portion. By using it, the durability of the reversing gear 453 can be improved.

When the slide member 420 is moved by the driving force of the driving device 470 (see FIG. 10), the transmission gear 451 meshing with the permanent rack gear 414a is rotated, and the two-layer gear 452 is rotated accordingly. That is, the driving device 470 and the two-layer gear 452 are not directly meshed, but at least the transmission leg 422 meshing with the driving gear 473 is interposed between the driving device 470 and the two-layer gear 452. do. As a result, the impact when the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 abut against each other is transmitted to the driving device 470 in a relaxed state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving device 470 from being damaged by the impact at the time of contact.

24(a) and 25(a) are rear views of the compound action unit 400, and FIGS. 24(b) and 25(b) are rear views of the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453. FIG. 24 shows a state in which the pair of half-moon members 460 are rotated by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 22(a), and FIG. The state immediately after completing 180 degree rotation is illustrated. 24(b) and 25(b), in the two-layer gear 452, the dividing gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d are illustrated by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are illustrated by imaginary lines. be.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), when the half-moon member 460 is rotated, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reverse gear 453 are meshed.

In this embodiment, the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 are formed larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear tooth 452b1 that abuts against the reversing gear 453 at the start of abutment with the reversing gear 453 is improved, and damage to the two-layer gear 452 can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24(b), the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 are meshed with the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 and 453b2, so that the backlash is greater when the meshing continues than when the meshing starts. can be made smaller. As a result, the rotation of the reversing gear 453 can be made smooth when the meshing continues. Therefore, it is possible to improve both the durability of the starting gear tooth 452b1 that collides at the start of meshing and the smoothness of rotation of the reverse gear 453 .

In addition, since the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 are formed smaller than the gear teeth 452a, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reverse gear 453 mesh in the circumferential direction. error (play) is smaller than the error in meshing between the gear teeth 452 a and the transmission gear 451 . As a result, the accuracy of the operation of the reversing gear 453 when meshing continues can be maintained below the meshing error between the gear teeth 452 a and the transmission gear 451 .

As shown in FIG. 25, when the half-moon member 460 has finished rotating 180 degrees, the engagement between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 is released, and the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 and the circle of the reversing gear are separated. The arc-shaped concave portion 453c abuts on the surface. Therefore, the posture of the reversing gear 453 is maintained, and the half-moon member 460 in which the locking protrusion 453e (see FIG. 12) of the reversing gear 453 and the arcuate wall portion 461c (see FIG. 15) are fitted so as not to rotate relative to each other. attitude is maintained.

Next, referring to FIG. 26, the operation of the pawl member 463 of the half-moon member 460 will be described. 26(a) and 26(b) are partial rear views of the compound motion unit 400. FIG.

26, the illustration of the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 is partially omitted, and the limited rack gear 414b is visible and is enlarged. 26(a) shows the state immediately before the starting gear tooth 441a of the irregular gear 441 comes into contact with the starting gear tooth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b, and FIG. 26(b) shows the slide rack 442 moving. The state reached to the end is illustrated.

The engagement between the deformed gear tooth 441 and the limited rack gear 414b becomes defective if the deformed gear 441 is not brought into contact with the limited rack gear 414b in an appropriate posture. That is, if the deformed gear 441 contacts the limited rack gear 414b in a posture in which the starting gear teeth 441a of the deformed gear 441 and the starting gear teeth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b abut, they are meshed well. On the other hand, for example, if the gear teeth of the deformed gear 441 other than the starting gear teeth 441a and the starting gear teeth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b are in contact with each other, a meshing failure occurs in the middle of the meshing. , the rotation of the deformed gear 441 cannot be continued. In this case, since the sliding movement of the slide member 420 is also stopped, the slide member 420 malfunctions.

In this embodiment, the slide rack 442 is maintained in the laterally outward direction by the biasing force of the biasing spring 442c. The deformed gear 441 receives force from the slide rack 442 via the transmission gear 443 . Therefore, the posture of the deformed gear 441 can be maintained in the appropriate posture described above.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the deformed gear 441 is engaged with the limited rack gear 414b and rotated, thereby rotating the transmission gear 443 and moving the slide rack 442. As shown in FIG. The slide rack 442 comes into contact with the driving lever 467 during movement, and the driving lever 467 rotates. Since the drive lever 467 is fastened and fixed to the center gear 462 (see FIG. 15) of the half-moon member 460, the rotation of the drive lever 467 causes the center gear 462 to rotate. As a result, the crank gear 464 is rotated (see FIG. 14), and the claw member 463 is moved in the direction in which it protrudes. Therefore, the claw member 463 can be moved in conjunction with the movement of the slide member 420 .

Next, a compound action unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the cutout portion 422d of the leg 422 to be transmitted is arranged to face the front side of the drive gear 473 when the slide member 420 is arranged at the retracted position. 24, the notch 2422d of the leg 2422 to be transmitted faces the front side of the drive gear 473 while the slide member 2420 moves from the retracted position to the extended position. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

27 and 28 are front views of a pair of slide members 2420. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. A state in which the gear 453b1 (see FIG. 23(b)) begins to abut is illustrated. Also, the illustration of the driving device 470 is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIG. 27, in a state where the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged at the retracted position, the front side of the drive gear 473 (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 27) is covered with the front tooth width direction side surface of the rack gear 422a. The front wall portion 2422c is overlapped.

As shown in FIG. 28, the pair of slide members 2420 is placed at a position where the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the starting gear teeth 453b1 of the reverse gear 453 (see FIG. 23(b)) begin to abut. In this state, a notch portion 2422d is formed on the front side of the driving gear 473 (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 27). The notch portion 2422d is formed in a circular shape slightly larger than the addendum circle of the driving gear 473 .

As shown in FIG. 28, the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state separated from the outline of the notch 2422d in a front view (specific phase position). Therefore, the drive gear 473 can be pulled out through the notch 2422 d formed in the transmitted leg 2422 , so that the drive gear 473 can be replaced without removing the slide member 2420 from the base member 2410 . Therefore, the maintainability of the driving gear 473 can be improved.

In this embodiment, the pair of slide members 2420 is moved from the retracted position, and the specific phase position is set in a state where the starting gear teeth 452b1 and the starting gear teeth 453b1 (see FIG. 23(a)) of the second gear group 450 begin to abut. Therefore, the maintenance worker can move the slide member 2420 to the specific phase position by relying on the increase in resistance when moving the slide member 2420 .

That is, when the slide member 2420 is moved, the transmission gear 451 (see FIG. 24(a)) is always in mesh with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 2410. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the resistance to rotation of the transmission gear 451 increases, it can be grasped as movement resistance of the slide member 2420 . Here, since the transmission gear 451 meshes with the two-layer gear 452 , the resistance generated when the two-layer gear 452 and the reverse gear 453 start meshing is transmitted to the transmission gear 451 . Then, the resistance to rotation of the transmission gear 451 increases, so the movement resistance of the slide member 2420 increases. As a result, the maintenance worker can move the slide member 2420 to the specific phase position by relying on the increased movement resistance of the slide member 2420 .

Here, since the front wall portion 2422c does not overlap the driving gear 473 at the specific phase position, the effect of suppressing the wobbling of the driving gear 473 by bringing the front wall portion 2422c into contact with the driving gear 473 is weakened.

In this embodiment, a specific phase position (a state in which the cutout portion 2422d matches the drive gear 473) is formed during the movement of the pair of slide members 2420, that is, while the drive gear 473 is rotating. Therefore, when the drive gear 473 approaches the specific phase position, the drive gear 473 has a sufficient speed in the rotational direction (axis-perpendicular direction). Therefore, the wobble of the drive gear 473, which tends to occur at a specific phase position, can be alleviated by the momentum of the drive gear 473 in the rotational direction.

The base member 2410 has a triangular protrusion 2415 protruding toward the center (the center in FIG. 27) in the assembled state. It is possible to easily move the pair of slide members 2420 to the specific phase position by relying on the triangular protrusion 2415 .

Here, when removing the drive motor 472 together with the drive gear 473 in maintenance of the game machine 13, it is necessary to arrange the slide member 2420 at a specific phase position. However, since the drive motor 472 is arranged on the front side in such a manner as to hide the slide member 2420 (see FIG. 9), it is difficult to visually confirm that the notch 2422d is aligned with the drive gear 473 from the front side. be. Therefore, it is difficult to dispose the slide member 2420 at the specific phase position.

On the other hand, since the triangular projection 2415 is arranged at a position visible from the front side, it is possible to easily align the slide member 2410 with the aid of the triangular projection 2415 in maintenance. In this embodiment, when the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged at a specific phase position, the triangular projections 2415 and the triangular patterns formed at the ends of the slide members 2420 form a series of patterns. This makes it easier for maintenance workers to remove the driving gear 473 and perform maintenance.

Next, the two-layer gear 3452 and the reverse gear 3453 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case where the starting gear teeth 452b1 and 453b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 are formed large as viewed in the rotation axis direction, that is, the case where the tooth depth and tooth thickness are increased has been described. , In the double layer gear 3452 and the reverse gear 3453 in the third embodiment, the starting gear teeth 3452b1 and 3453b1 are formed to have the same shape as the other gear teeth when viewed in the rotation axis direction, but are formed to be large in the axial direction. That is, the tooth width is formed large. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

29(a) is a front view of the two-layer gear 3452, FIG. 29(b) is a bottom view of the two-layer gear 3452, and FIG. 29(c) is a side view of the two-layer gear 3452. .

As shown in FIG. 29, the two-layer gear 3452 includes a starting gear tooth 3452b1 which is disposed adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d and has a large tooth width, and a tooth root side of the starting gear tooth 3452b1. A circumferential rib 3452e extending from the circumferential side along the concentric circle of the two-layer gear 3452 and fixed to the front end face of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the starting gear tooth 3452b1 on the root side, and the starting gear. It mainly includes a radial rib 3452f that extends from the radial side surface of the tooth root side of the tooth 3452b1 toward the rotation shaft and is fixed to the front side end surface of the main body of the two-layer gear 3452.

The starting gear tooth 3452b1 has substantially the same tooth depth and tooth thickness as the intermediate gear tooth 452b2, but has a larger tooth width than the intermediate gear tooth 452b2. As a result, the rigidity of the starting gear teeth 3452b1 can be improved, and breakage of the starting gear teeth 3452b1 at the start of meshing with the reverse gear 3453 can be suppressed.

The circumferential rib 3452e is widest in the axial direction of the two-layer gear 3452 at the side surface of the starting gear tooth 3452b1, that is, the extension base point, and the width gradually decreases as the distance from the starting gear tooth 3452b1 increases. That is, as shown in FIG. 29(b), it is visually recognized in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The circumferential rib 3452e can improve the rigidity of the starting gear tooth 3452b along the circumferential direction of the two-layer gear 3452, and can prevent the starting gear tooth 3452b1 from bending in the rotational direction.

Circumferential rib 3452e extends to intermediate gear tooth 452b2 in the vicinity of starting gear tooth 3452b1 (in this embodiment, up to two adjacent to starting gear tooth 3452b1). This makes it possible to use the circumferential rib 3452e to generate a force that pulls the root of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 toward the starting gear tooth 3452b1.

That is, when the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the starting gear tooth 3452b1 and the reverse gear 3453 mesh with each other, the deformation (deformation in the direction away from the starting gear tooth 3452b1) occurring in the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 is caused by the circumferential rib 3452e. can be suppressed by

The reason why the circumferential rib 3452e is fixed only up to the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the starting gear tooth 3452b1 is that the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 located away from the starting gear tooth 3452b1 is reversed after rotation reaches a steady state. By meshing with the gear 3453 .

That is, when the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 distant from the starting gear tooth 3452b1 (for example, the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the middle of the pair of starting gear teeth 3452b1) meshes with the reverse gear 3453, the rotation is already in a steady state. , the reversing gear 3453 has a sufficient rotational speed. Therefore, the force that the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 receives from the reverse gear 3453 is small, and reinforcement by the circumferential rib 3452e is unnecessary.

The radial rib 3452f extends from the radial side surface of the tooth root side of the starting gear tooth 3452b1 toward the rotation shaft and is fixed to the front end surface of the main body of the two-layer gear 3452. The radial stiffness of 3452b1 can be improved. As a result, the reverse gear 3453 meshing with the two-layer gear 3452 is moved in the axial direction, and the rattling causes the front end of the starting gear tooth 3452b1 (upper end in FIG. 29(b)) to move toward the rotation shaft. It is possible to prevent the starting gear tooth 3452b1 from falling down even if it receives the force. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear teeth 3452b1 can be improved.

30(a) is a front view of the reversing gear 3453, FIG. 30(b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear 3453, and FIG. 30(c) is a side view of the reversing gear 3453. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 30, the reversing gear 3453 extends along the concentric circle of the reversing gear 3453 from the start gear tooth 3453b1 adjacent to the arcuate recess 453c and the side surface of the start gear tooth 3453b1 on the root side. and a circumferential rib 3453 f fixed to the main body of the reversing gear 3453 .

The starting gear tooth 3453b1 has substantially the same tooth depth and tooth thickness as the other intermediate gear teeth 453b2, but has a larger tooth width than the other intermediate gear teeth 453b2. This can improve the rigidity of the starting gear tooth 3453b1.

The circumferential rib 3453f is axially widest at the side surface of the starting gear tooth 3453b1, that is, at the extension base point, and the width gradually decreases with increasing distance from the starting gear tooth 3453b1. That is, as shown in FIG. 30(b), it is visually recognized in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The circumferential rib 3453f can prevent the starting gear tooth 3453b1 from bending in the rotational direction.

In addition, the circumferential rib 3453f extends toward the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d adjacent to the starting gear tooth 3453b1. This improves the rigidity of the starting gear tooth 3453b1 in the direction in which force is applied from the two-layer gear 3452 (the direction from the starting gear tooth 3453b1 toward the adjacent engaging projecting receiving portion 453d). Therefore, the durability of the starting gear tooth 3453b1 can be improved.

Next, the two-layer gear 4452 and the reverse gear 4453 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case where the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 is formed large as viewed in the rotation axis direction, that is, the case where the tooth depth and the tooth thickness are increased has been described. In the two-layer gear 4452, the starting gear teeth 4452b1 are formed to have the same shape as the other gear teeth when viewed in the rotation axis direction, but are formed to have a large tooth width. The face width is formed in such a way that it becomes more shortened away from the starting gear tooth 4452b1. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

31(a) is a front view of the two-layer gear 4452, FIG. 31(b) is a bottom view of the two-layer gear 4452, and FIG. 31(c) is XXXIc-XXXIc of FIG. 31(b). 4452 is a cross-sectional view of double layer gear 4452 at line.

As shown in FIG. 31, the two-layer gear 4452 includes a pair of starting gear teeth 4452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d, an intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 formed between the starting gear teeth 4452b1, and a starting gear tooth 4452b1. and a plate-like portion 4452e covering the front side surface of the teeth 4452b1 and the intermediate gear teeth 4452b2.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), the tooth width of the dividing gear tooth 4452b composed of the starting gear tooth 4452b1 and the intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 is the largest at the starting gear tooth 4452b1, and the tooth width of the intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 is the starting gear tooth 4452b1. It is shortened stepwise with reference to the starting gear tooth 4452b1 as it goes away from the gear tooth 4452b1.

The plate-like portion 4452e is formed in a manner to protrude from the tooth bottom side of the dividing gear tooth 4452b to a position equivalent to the addendum circle in a front view, and covers the front side surface of the dividing gear tooth 4452b. The plate-like portion 4452e is formed to draw a smooth curve when viewed from the bottom in accordance with the forming position of the front side surface of the dividing gear tooth 4452b (see FIG. 31(b)).

Here, consider the case where the front side surface of the dividing gear tooth 4452b is formed on the same plane, and the plate-like portion 4452e is also formed on the same plane. In this case, the disc portion 452c and the plate-like portion 4452e are arranged in order to increase the allowable amount of displacement of the reversing gear 4453 in the axial direction of the two-layer gear 4452 when the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 start meshing. , the axial position of the reversing gear 4453 during rotation is not fixed. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to accurately determine the axial position of the rotating reversing gear 4453, the reversing gear 4453 is slightly displaced in the axial direction at the start of meshing, causing the reversing gear 4453 to move toward the outer periphery of the plate-like portion 4452e. It may come into contact with the surface and cause misalignment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the positional deviation in the axial direction (upward in FIG. can be maximally allowed near start gear tooth 4452b1 where .

In addition, the plate-like portion 4452e is formed in a manner of drawing a smooth curve in which the distance from the disc portion 452c is shortened as the plate-like portion 4452e is separated from the starting gear tooth 4452b1 in a bottom view (see FIG. 31(b)). Therefore, as the reversing gear 4453 is brought into contact with the plate-like portion 4452e, the axial position of the reversing gear 4453 can be corrected more greatly as the engagement progresses (Fig. 31(b), moving downward). can be done). Therefore, the positional deviation in the axial direction when the two-layer gear 4452 and the reverse gear 4453 are meshed can be corrected as the meshing progresses.

32(a) is a front view of the reversing gear 4453, FIG. 32(b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear 4453, and FIG. FIG. 14 is a partial side view of a reversing gear 4453;

As shown in FIG. 32, the reversing gear 4453 includes a pair of starting gear teeth 4453b1 arranged adjacent to each other in the pair of arcuate recesses 453c and an intermediate gear formed in a region sandwiched between the starting gear teeth 4453b1. and gear teeth 4453b2.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), the reverse gear 4453 is formed in such a manner that the width of the starting gear teeth 4453b1 is maximized, and the width of the intermediate gear teeth 4453b2 decreases as the distance from the starting gear teeth 4453b1 increases. . The degree of shortening (inclination of the line connecting the upper ends of each gear tooth in FIG. 32(b)) is the degree of shortening of the face width of the dividing gear tooth 4452b of the double-layer gear 4452 (each gear tooth in FIG. 31(b) It is formed gently compared to the slope of the line connecting the upper ends of the

As shown in FIG. 32(c), the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 have widthwise end faces except for the intermediate gear teeth 4453b2 which are formed farthest from the pair of engagement projecting receiving portions 453d. (Fig. 32(b) upper end face) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the engagement projecting receiving portion side. As a result, it is possible to more rapidly correct the positional deviation while maintaining a large allowable amount of relative positional deviation in the axial direction when the reverse gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 start meshing.

That is, when the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reverse gear 4453 are meshed with the two-layer gear 4452, the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 are located on the engagement protruding receiving portion side (the shortest tooth width side, FIG. 32(c)). right side). Therefore, for example, compared to the case where the dimensions in the tooth width direction of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 are constant on the longest tooth width side (left side in FIG. 32(c)), the plate-like portion 4452e at the start of meshing A large gap (play) between the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to ensure a large allowable amount of positional deviation in the axial direction when the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 start meshing.

On the other hand, when the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reverse gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 are engaged with each other, the tooth width longest side of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 (the left side in FIG. It enters into the back side of the plate-like portion 4452e (downward in FIG. 31(b)). As a result, for example, compared to the case where the dimensions in the tooth width direction of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 are constant on the shortest side of the tooth width (the right side in FIG. It is possible to reduce the interval (play) between the immediately preceding plate-like portion 4452e and the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 (when escaping).

Therefore, when the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 mesh with the two-layer gear 4452, there is a gap between the plate-like portion 4452e and the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 from the start of meshing of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 to the release of meshing. The gap (play) can be reduced. This makes it possible to more rapidly correct the positional deviation between the reverse gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 .

Further, in this embodiment, the inclination of the plate-like portion 4452e (see FIG. 31(b)) is opposite to the inclination of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 (see FIG. 32(c)). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of rapidly correcting the positional deviation while maintaining a large allowable amount of positional deviation in the axial direction at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 .

The widthwise end surface of the intermediate gear tooth 4453b2 (upper end surface in FIG. 32(b)) formed farthest from the pair of engaging projecting receiving portions 453d is formed of a plane perpendicular to the rotating shaft of the reversing gear 4453. be.

Next, the second gear group 5450 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case where the two-layer gear 452 is formed only from a single resin material has been described. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

33 is a front view of the double layer gear 5452. FIG. As shown in FIG. 33, the two-layer gear 5452 has an embedding hole 5452g formed in a starting gear tooth 5452b1 along a direction parallel to the rotation axis, and an embedding member 5452h is embedded in the embedding hole 5452g.

The embedding hole 5452g is formed in the shape of a bottomed hole having a circular cross-sectional diameter, and the embedding member 5452h is formed in the shape of a column having a diameter equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the embedding hole 5452g. Thereby, the embedding member 5452h is fitted and fixed in the embedding hole 5452g.

The embedded member 5452h is a columnar member made of a metal magnetic material or a plastic magnetic material, and is divided into an S pole and an N pole on a plane along the axis. In FIGS. 33 to 35, the black-painted side of the embedded member 5452h is the N pole, and the opposite side is the S pole.

34 is a partial front view of the second gear group 5450. FIG. 34 shows the state immediately before the starting gear tooth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 abuts on the engaging projection receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 5453. FIG. Also, the disc portion 452c and the gear teeth 452a of the two-layer gear 5452 and the transmission gear 451 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 34, the reverse gear 5453 has an embedding hole 5453f drilled in the starting gear tooth 5453b1 along a direction parallel to the axis, and an embedding member 5453g is embedded in the embedding hole 5453f. As a result, the embedding member 5453g is fitted and fixed in the embedding hole 5453f.

The embedded member 5453g is a columnar member made of a metal magnetic material or a plastic magnetic material, and is divided into an S pole and an N pole on a plane along the axis.

As shown in FIG. 34, the plane that bisects the magnetic pole is a plane formed along the radial direction and passing through the axis, and the starting gear teeth 5452b1, 5453b1 are embedded with opposite poles facing each other. That is, the starting gear tooth 5452b1 has an N pole formed on the side facing the starting gear tooth 5453b1 when engaged (upper side in FIG. 34), and the starting gear tooth 5453b1 is formed on the side facing the starting gear tooth 5452b1 when engaged (lower side in FIG. 34). side) is formed with an S pole. As a result, in the meshing between the two-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453, a magnetic force is generated that attracts the meshing gear teeth 5452b1 and 5453b1.

That is, as the two-layer gear 5452 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 34 from the state shown in FIG. Attracted to 5452b1. As a result, the reversing gear 5453 is attracted by the magnetic force and rotated before the starting gear teeth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 and the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453 come into contact with each other. Therefore, compared to the case where the starting gear tooth 5452b1 abuts on the reversing gear 5453 in a stationary state, the impact at the time of contact and the load received by the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 at the time of contact can be reduced.

35 is a partial front view of the second gear group 5450. FIG. 35 illustrates a state in which the two-layer gear 5452 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 35 by a predetermined amount from the state in FIG. Also, the disc portion 452c and the gear teeth 452a of the two-layer gear 5452 and the transmission gear 451 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 35, a gap is formed between the two-layer gear 5452 and the reverse gear 5453 in front of the two-layer gear 5452 in the rotational direction. As a result, a load is applied to the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d not only when the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 start contacting each other, but also while the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 are being rotated by meshing. can be suppressed. Therefore, the strength required for the engaging projection receiving portion 453d can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the engaging projection receiving portion 453d can be improved.

Next, the second gear group 6450 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case where the two-layer gear 452 is integrally formed has been described, but the two-layer gear 6452 in the sixth embodiment does not have the starting gear teeth 452b1, and the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are separated. body profiled gear tooth member 6452g. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

36 is a front exploded perspective view of the dual layer gear 6452. FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 36 illustrates a state in which the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is removed from the disc portion 452c. In the present embodiment, the variant gear tooth member 6452g is formed of a metal material such as iron, so that the portion other than the variant gear tooth member 6452g of the two-layer gear 6452 is compared to the portion integrally formed of a resin material. The rigidity of the profiled gear tooth member 6452g is increased. In addition, by partially using a metal material, the weight can be reduced compared to the case where the entire two-layer gear 6452 is formed of a metal material, and the driving force required to rotate the two-layer gear 6452 can be suppressed. can.

As shown in FIG. 36, the two-layer gear 6452 includes a pair of deformed gear tooth members 6452g, an insertion hole 6452c1 which is a hole through which the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is inserted, and which is bored in the disc portion 452c, A gear tooth side cutout 6452b5 formed between the first recessed portion 452b3 and the second recessed portion 452b4 and sandwiching the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g, and the sliding wall portion 452d. A sliding part notch 6452d1 in which the sliding receiving part 6452g3 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is sandwiched, and L-shaped hooks formed at both ends of the sliding wall part 452d. A mold receiving portion 6452d2 is mainly provided.

The deformed gear tooth member 6452g includes a gear tooth body portion 6452g1 having a shape in which the starting gear tooth 452b1 in the first embodiment is extended to the tooth bottom side, and a gear tooth body portion 6452g1 extending from the end opposite to the tip of the gear tooth body portion 6452g1 to the back surface. A cylindrical insertion pin 6452g2 protruding from the side, a sliding receiving portion 6452g3 whose side surface forms part of the sliding wall portion 452d in the assembled state (see FIG. 37), and a gear tooth main portion 6452g1 slide against each other. A connecting portion 6452g4 that connects with the receiving portion 6452g3 is mainly provided.

The gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is formed such that the tooth thickness of the portion sandwiched between the gear tooth side cutouts 6452b5 is equal to or slightly larger than the size of the gear tooth side cutouts 6452b5. As a result, the gear tooth body portion 6452g1 is sandwiched between the gear tooth side notches 6452b5 in the assembled state (see FIG. 37).

The sliding receiving portion 6452g3 is formed such that its outer peripheral surface is smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the sliding wall portion 452d in the assembled state (see FIG. 37). The outer peripheral surface of the connecting portion 6452g4 faces the recessed bottom wall portion 452e with a slight gap in the assembled state (see FIG. 37).

In the assembled state (see FIG. 37), the insertion pin 6452g2 is inserted into the insertion hole 6452c1, and the gear tooth body portion 6452g1 is sandwiched between the gear tooth side notches 6452b5. Further, the connecting portion 6452g4 is arranged to face the recess bottom wall portion 452e of the second recess portion 452b4 with a slight gap therebetween, and the inner peripheral side of the sliding receiving portion 6452g3 is brought into contact with the hook-shaped receiving portion 6452d2. As a result, the gear tooth body portion 6452g1 is brought into contact with the reverse gear 453, so that the amount of rotation around the insertion hole 6452c1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 37 is a front view of the two-layer gear 6452 and the reversing gear 453. FIG. 37 shows a state in which the gear tooth body portion 6452g1 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is in contact with the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 453, and the disc portion 452c is shown by imaginary lines. be done.

As shown in FIG. 37, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g can cause the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 to receive the load applied from the reversing gear 453. As shown in FIG.

That is, even if the variant gear tooth member 6452g is made of a metal material, the portion supporting the variant gear tooth member 6452g is made of a resin material. In addition, the two-layer gear 6452 is formed to have a substantially uniform thickness in the radial direction in order to prevent the occurrence of sink marks during molding, so the rigidity is not sufficient. Therefore, when the deformed gear tooth member 6452g moves (rotates about the insertion hole 6452c1) due to the load generated when the two-layer gear 6452 and the reverse gear 453 are brought into contact with each other, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g presses against There is a risk that parts other than the deformed gear tooth member 6452g (the recessed bottom wall portion 452e, etc.) that receive the deformation will be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g begins to move in a direction to fill a slight gap formed between the outer peripheral surface of the connecting portion 6452g4 and the recess bottom wall portion 452e (with the insertion hole 6452c1 as the axis). ), the sliding receiving portion 6452g3 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is pressed against the arcuate recess 453c of the reversing gear 453. As shown in FIG. The arc-shaped concave portion 453c is a portion having sufficient radial thickness and high rigidity.

As a result, the odd-shaped gear tooth member 6452g can receive the load applied from the reversing gear 453 to the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453, and the portion of the two-layer gear 6452 other than the odd-shaped gear tooth member 6452g can receive the load. (the recessed bottom wall portion 452e, etc.) can be suppressed. Also, the arc-shaped concave portion 453c of the reverse gear 453 can be used to support the deformed gear tooth member 6452g.

Next, a compound action unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case where the position of the slide member 420 when the meniscus member 460 rotates is limited to one way has been described. At least two positions of the sliding member 420 can be formed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

38(a) to 38(c) are rear views of the dual layer gear 7452. FIG. Note that FIG. 38(a) shows a stationary state in which the rotation of the two-layer gear 7452 is stopped, and FIG. A state in which the speed is V1 is illustrated, and FIG. 38(c) illustrates a state in which the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is a second rotational speed V2 higher than the boundary speed Vb.

For ease of understanding, illustration of the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c is omitted. This also applies to subsequent drawings. Also, the boundary speed Vb means the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 when the projecting gear member 7452e is switched from the recessed state to the extended state.

As shown in FIG. 38, the two-layer gear 7452 is formed with a guide groove 7452d, which is a groove with a rectangular cross section formed radially outward from the rotating shaft, and a width slightly smaller than the groove width of the guide groove 7452d. and a protruding gear member 7452e having a gear-tooth-shaped tip, and an urging spring 7452f connecting the protruding gear member 7452e and the rotating shaft of the two-layer gear 7452.

Three guide grooves 7452d are formed by dividing the outer periphery of the two-layer gear 7452 into three equal parts in the circumferential direction, and a projecting gear member 7452e and a biasing spring 7452f are provided in each of the guide grooves 7452d. Intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the two-layer gear 7452 connecting the guide grooves 7452d.

As for the projecting gear members 7452e, the projecting gear members 7452e1 to 7452e3 are formed with the same mass, and the biasing springs 7452f are formed with the same spring constant.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), when the two-layer gear 7452 is in a stopped state, the projecting gear member 7452e is retracted toward the rotation shaft from the surface where the bottoms of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected. At this time, the irregular spring 7452f has a natural length.

As shown in FIG. 38(b), when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotational speed V1 lower than the boundary speed Vb, the projecting gear member 7452e is moved radially outward of the two-layer gear 7452. the power to do so. The projecting gear member 7452e is extended to a position where this force and the biasing force of the biasing spring 7452f are balanced. In the overhanging state, the protruding gear member 7452e is located closer to the rotation shaft than the surface where the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected (retracted state).

Therefore, as will be described later, when the two-layer gear 7452 rotates at the first rotation speed V1, the two-layer gear 7452 does not start meshing with the reverse gear 7453 (see FIG. 42). That is, the two-layer gear 7452 idles with respect to the reverse gear 7453 .

As shown in FIG. 38(c), when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotational speed V2 higher than the boundary speed Vb, the protruding gear member 7452e attempts to move radially outward of the two-layer gear 7452. the power to do so. The projecting gear member 7452e is extended to a position where this force and the biasing force of the biasing spring 7452f are balanced. In the overhanging state, the protruding gear member 7452e projects radially outward beyond the surface where the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected (overhanging state).

Therefore, as will be described later, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2, the projecting gear member 7452e of the two-layer gear 7452 contacts the reverse gear 7453 (see FIG. 39), Layer gear 7452 begins to mesh with reversing gear 7453 .

That is, whether or not the two-layer gear 7452 starts meshing with the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39) is determined by setting the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 higher or lower than the boundary speed Vb. can be selected. Therefore, by changing the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 during rotation (by changing the movement speed of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40) during movement), the half-moon member 460 (see FIG. 40) A plurality of variations of the placement of the slide member 420 when the is rotated can be prepared.

39-44, variations in placement of slide member 420 as meniscus member 460 begins to rotate will now be described. First, referring to FIGS. 39 to 41, a case (first speed pattern) in which the main driving gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2 immediately after the movement of the moving member 420 from the retracted position will be described.

FIGS. 39(a) to 39(e) are rear views of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 illustrating the rotation of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 in chronological order, FIG. 40(b), FIG. 41(a), and FIG. 41(b) are front views of the compound action unit 7400 showing the slide movement of the slide member 420 and the posture change of the meniscus member 460 in chronological order. To facilitate understanding, the illustration of the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c is omitted in FIG. 39, and the illustration of the fastening plate portion 471 and the drive motor 472 is omitted in FIGS.

39(a) and 40(a), 39(b) and 40(b), 39(c) and 41(a), and 39(d) and 41(b) are diagrams at approximately the same point in time, and are in correspondence with each other. In FIG. 39, the direction of rotation of the two-layer gear 7452 is indicated by an arrow, and as shown in FIG. formed in a manner that

As shown in FIG. 39(a), the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2 immediately after the start of movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40(a)), and the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated by a predetermined amount. , and the first protruding gear member 7452e1 abuts against the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39(b)). As a result, the reversing gear 7453 begins to rotate, and the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture (see FIG. 40(b)).

After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, so that the reversing gear 7453 continues to rotate and the posture of the half-moon member 460 changes. is continued (see FIGS. 39(c) and 41(a)).

After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 are meshed with each other, the second-layer gear 7452 is further rotated, so that the arc-shaped recessed portion 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is again engaged with the two-layer gear 7452. (see FIG. 39(d)), the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the semicircular member 460 with respect to the slide member 420 is fixed (see FIG. 41(b)).

After that, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26(b)), and stops rotating when the slide member 420 is stopped (see FIG. 39(e)). Thereafter, the protruding gear member 7452e is moved radially inward of the two-layer gear 7452 by the biasing force of the biasing spring 7452f.

Here, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated from FIG. 39(d) to the state of FIG. 39(e), the third protruding member 7452e3 and the first protruding member 7452e1 come into contact with the engaging projection receiving portion 453d. contact, and there is a possibility that the two-layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 will mesh again.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, an arc-shaped chamfered portion 7453e is formed at one end (upper end in FIG. 39(e)) of the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d.

When the third protruding member 7452e3 and the first protruding member 7452e1 are brought into contact with the chamfered portion 7453e, a radially inward force of the two-layer gear 7452 is applied to the third protruding member 7452e3 and the first protruding member 7452e1. As a result, before the third projecting member 7452e3 and the first projecting member 7452e1 mesh with the reversing gear 745, the third projecting member 7452e3 and the first projecting member 7452e1 can be respectively retracted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the two-layer gear 7452 and the reverse gear 7453 from meshing again.

Next, referring to FIGS. 42 to 44, immediately after the start of movement of moving member 420 from the retracted position, double layer gear 7452 rotates at first rotation speed V1, and during rotation, double layer gear 7452 rotates at the second rotation. A case (second speed pattern) in which rotation is performed at speed V2 (rotational speed V is changed) will be described.

42(a) to 42(e) are rear views of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 illustrating the rotation of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 in chronological order. 43(b), FIG. 44(a), and FIG. 44(b) are front views of the compound action unit 7400 showing the slide movement of the slide member 420 and the posture change of the meniscus member 460 in chronological order. 42, illustration of the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c is omitted, and illustrations of the fastening plate portion 471 and the drive motor 472 are omitted in FIGS.

42(a) and FIGS. 40(a), 42(b) and 43(a), FIGS. 42(c) and 43(b), FIGS. 42(d) and 44(a) ), and FIGS. 42(e) and 44(b) are diagrams at approximately the same point in time, and have a corresponding relationship with each other. In FIG. 42, the direction of rotation of the two-layer gear 7452 is indicated by an arrow, and as shown in FIG. is formed in a manner circumscribing the

As shown in FIG. 42(a), the two-layer gear 7452 rotates at the first rotational speed V1 immediately after the start of movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40(a)). Form.

Therefore, even if the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first protruding gear member 7452e1 does not come into contact with the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 7453. It is not started (see FIG. 42(b)). As a result, the slide member 420 is moved while the posture of the half-moon member 460 is maintained (see FIG. 43(a)).

The two-layer gear 7452 continues to rotate, and the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is changed to the second rotation speed V2 by the time the second protruding gear member 7452e2 approaches the engaging projection receiving portion 453d of the reverse gear 7453. be done. As a result, the protruding gear member 7452e forms an overhanging state (see FIG. 42(c)), and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 comes into contact with the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d, thereby rotating the reversing gear 7453. As soon as it starts, the semicircular member 460 begins to change its posture (see FIG. 43(b)).

After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, so that the reversing gear 7453 continues to rotate and the posture of the half-moon member 460 changes. is continued (see FIGS. 42(d) and 44(a)).

After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 are meshed with each other, the second-layer gear 7452 is further rotated, so that the arc-shaped recessed portion 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is again engaged with the two-layer gear 7452. (see FIG. 42(e)), the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the semicircular member 460 with respect to the slide member 420 is fixed (see FIG. 44(b)).

After that, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26(b)), and the rotation is stopped when the slide member 420 is stopped.

Since the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 and the moving speed of the slide member 420 are in a proportional relationship, the rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 can be easily changed by changing the rotational speed of the drive motor 472. can be done.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the position of the slide member 420 is changed in at least two ways when the half-moon member 460 starts rotating while the slide member 420 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position. be able to. That is, compared to the case where the two-layer gear 7452 rotates at the second rotation speed V2 from the start of rotation (see FIGS. 39 to 41), the speed changes from the first rotation speed V1 to the second rotation speed V2 during rotation. When changed (see FIGS. 42 to 44), the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the semicircular member 460 rotates can be moved toward the center side (vertical direction center side) (FIGS. 40(b) and 40(b) and FIG. 43(b)). As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

Next, representative examples of the above-described first speed pattern and second speed pattern will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a graph showing the speed change of the double layer gear 7452. FIG. 45, the horizontal axis indicates the position (P) of the slide member 420 between the retracted position (P=0) and the extended position (P=Pmax), and the vertical axis indicates the sliding position of the slide member 420. The rotational speed V of the double layer gear 7452 rotated during movement is shown.

45, the first position P1 means the position where the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is initially arranged to face the reverse gear 7453 (see FIG. 39(b)), and the second position P2 means , the position where the second protruding gear member 7452e2 is initially arranged to face the reversing gear 7453 (FIG. 42(c)). shown.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated in the first speed pattern, the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the first position P1. In contrast, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated in the second speed pattern, the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the second position P2.

That is, by changing the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 while the slide member 420 is sliding, it is possible to change the position of the slide member 420 when the posture of the half-moon member 460 starts to change. Therefore, the variation of presentation of the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 can be increased.

Next, a compound action unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48. FIG.

In the seventh embodiment, the position of the slide member 420 when the half-moon member 460 rotates is changed by changing the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 during rotation. The compound action unit 8400 is formed such that the position of the slide member 420 when the half-moon member 460 rotates can be changed while maintaining the rotation speed of the two-layer gear 8452 at a constant speed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

46(a) and 46(b) are rear views of the dual layer gear 8452. FIG. 46(a) shows a state in which the two-layer gear 8452 rotates at the separation rotation speed V3, and FIG. 46(b) shows a state in which the two-layer gear 8452 rotates at the joint rotation speed V4. be done. The stationary state in which the rotation of the two-layer gear 8452 is stopped is the same as in FIG.

For ease of understanding, illustration of the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c is omitted. This also applies to subsequent drawings. Further, the separation rotation speed V3 means the rotation speed at which the first protruding gear member 7452e1 forms the retracted state while the second protruding gear member 7452e2 forms the protruding state, and the joint rotation speed V4 means the second protruding gear member 7452e2. It means the rotational speed at which both the first protruding gear member 7452e1 and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 form the protruding state.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotation speed V3, the protruding gear members 7452e are moved radially outward of the two-layer gear 8452 with different protrusion amounts. (at least the second protruding gear member 7452e2 has a greater amount of movement than the first protruding gear member 7452e1).

In this embodiment, the spring constants of the urging springs 8452f that connect the protruding gear members 7452e and the rotating shafts of the two-layer gears 7452 are formed differently. That is, the spring constant of the first biasing spring 8452f1 that connects the first projecting gear member 7452e1 and the rotating shaft of the two-layer gear 8452 is the second spring constant that connects the second projecting gear member 7452e2 and the rotating shaft of the two-layer gear 8452. 2 is made larger than the spring constant of the biasing spring 8452f2. The spring constant of the third biasing spring 8452f3 is made larger than the spring constant of the first biasing spring 8452f1.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the separation rotation speed V3, the first projecting gear member 7452e1 is positioned closer to the rotation shaft than the surface where the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected. (retracted state), and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 protrudes radially outward from the surface where the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected (protruded state).

Therefore, as will be described later, when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotation speed V3, the two-layer gear 8452 does not start meshing with the reverse gear 7453 at the first protruding gear member 7452e1, and the second protruding gear The member 7452e2 meshes with the reversing gear 7453. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the common rotational speed V4, a force tends to move the projecting gear member 7452e radially outward of the two-layer gear 8452. As shown in FIG. The projecting gear member 7452e is extended to a position where this force and the biasing force of the biasing spring 8452f are balanced. In the overhanging state, at least the first protruding gear member 7452e1 and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 protrude radially outward beyond the surface where the tooth tops of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are connected (protruding state).

Therefore, when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the common rotational speed V4, the first protruding gear member 7452e1 of the protruding gear member 7452e of the two-layer gear 8452 contacts the reverse gear 7453 so that the two-layer gear 7452 begins to mesh with the reversing gear 7453 .

Note that the operations of the two-layer gear 8452, the reversing gear 7453, and the slide member 420 when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the common rotational speed V4 are the same as the operations shown in FIGS. Description is omitted.

FIGS. 47(a) to 47(e) are rear views of the two-layer gear 8452 and the reversing gear 7453 showing the rotation of the two-layer gear 8452 and the reversing gear 7453 in chronological order. 40, 43 and 44 will be referred to in the description of FIG. 47, and the illustration of the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c will be omitted in FIG. 47 for easy understanding.

47(a) and the above-described FIGS. 40(a), 47(b) and 43(a), 47(c) and 43(b), 47(d) and 44(a) ), and FIGS. 47(e) and 44(b) are diagrams at approximately the same point in time, and have a corresponding relationship. 47, the directions of rotation of the two-layer gear 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 are indicated by arrows, and as shown in FIG. It is formed in a manner circumscribing a circle.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotation speed V3 immediately after the start of movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40(a)), so that the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is in the retracted state. , and the second projecting gear member 7452e2 forms a flared state.

Therefore, even if the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first projecting gear member 7452e1 does not come into contact with the engaging projection receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453. It is not started (see FIG. 47(b)). As a result, the slide member 420 is moved while the posture of the half-moon member 460 is maintained (see FIG. 43(a)).

The two-layer gear 8452 continues to rotate at the separation rotation speed V3, and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 comes into contact with the engaging protruding receiving portion 453d. It starts to change (see FIG. 43(b)).

After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 8452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, thereby continuing the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 and changing the attitude of the half-moon member 460. is continued (see FIGS. 47(d) and 44(a)).

After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 8452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 are meshed with each other, the second-layer gear 8452 is further rotated, so that the arc-shaped concave portion 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is again engaged with the two-layer gear 8452. (see FIG. 47(e)), the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is stopped, and the attitude of the semicircular member 460 is fixed (see FIG. 44(b)).

After that, the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26(b)), and stops rotating when the slide member 420 is stopped.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the position of the slide member 420 is changed in at least two ways when the half-moon member 460 starts rotating while the slide member 420 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position. so that no speed change is required during sliding movement of the slide member 420 .

That is, compared to the case where the two-layer gear 8452 rotates at the joint rotation speed V4 at a constant speed (see FIGS. 40 and 41), the case where the two-layer gear 8452 rotates at the separation rotation speed V3 at a constant speed (see FIG. 43) and FIG. 44), the arrangement of the slide member 420 can be moved toward the center side (the center side in the vertical direction) when the half-moon member 460 rotates (see FIGS. 40(b) and 43(b)). As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the separation rotation speed V3 and the joint rotation speed V4 mentioned above will be described by graphing them. FIG. 48 is a graph showing the rotational speed V of the double layer gear 7452. As shown in FIG. 48, the horizontal axis indicates the position (P) of the slide member 420 between the retracted position (P=0) and the extended position (P=Pmax), and the vertical axis indicates the position (P) of the slide member 420. In FIG. A rotational speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 rotated during the slide movement of is shown.

On the horizontal axis of FIG. 48, the first position P1 means the position where the first projecting gear member 7452e1 first faces the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39(b)), and the second position P2 means , means the position where the second protruding gear member 7452e2 is first arranged to face the reversing gear 7453 (FIG. 42(c)).

As described above, in this embodiment, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the joint rotation speed V4, the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the first position P1. On the other hand, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the separation rotation speed V3, the half-moon member 460 starts to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the second position P2.

That is, if two kinds of slide movement speeds of the slide member 420 are set, the slide member 420 can be adjusted when the posture of the half-moon member 460 starts to change without changing the slide movement speed of the slide member 420 during movement. position can be changed. Therefore, the variation of presentation of the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 can be increased.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the claw member 463 of the semicircular member 460 moves due to the movement of the slide rack 442 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, when the half-moon member 460 is rotated, a locking pin is arranged in a rotational trajectory along which the drive lever 467 is rotated. A mode in which the claw member 463 is moved due to a rotation angle difference between the . In this case, the rotation of the half-moon member 460 and the movement of the claw member 463 can be interlocked.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the cutout portion 422d of the slide member 420 is formed in an arc shape, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be cut in a rectangular shape in a direction away from the drive gear 473 . As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the notch portion 422d can be improved, and the material required for the slide member 420 can be reduced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the shape of the tooth tip of the drive gear 473 is substantially circular has been described, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driving gear 473 may be divided into four parts in the circumferential direction, and the tooth depth of the gear teeth may be different for each divided part. In this case, by mounting the drive gear 473 with the short tooth depth of the gear teeth directed toward the leg 422 to be transmitted, the required size of the notch 422d of the leg 422 to be transmitted for passing the drive gear 473 can be achieved. can be reduced. On the other hand, it is possible to ensure the transmission of the driving force to the transmitted leg portion 422 at the portion where the tooth depth of the gear teeth is long. It should be noted that there may be portions in which gear teeth are not formed in the divided portions described above.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the driving gear 473 is attached and detached through the cutout portions 422d formed in the pair of transmitted leg portions 422 arranged to face each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the notch portion 422d may not be formed in the leg portion 422 to be transmitted, and the leg portion 422 to be transmitted may be formed so as to be movable in a direction (a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction) away from each other. In this case, the driving gear 473 cannot be removed when the pair of leg portions 422 to be transmitted are arranged close to each other, while the driving gear 473 can be removed when the pair of leg portions to be transmitted 422 are arranged with a distance therebetween. can do.

In the fifth embodiment, the embedding member 5452h made of a magnetic material is embedded in the embedding hole 5452g of the two-layer gear 5452, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration in which the periphery of the starting gear tooth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 is covered with a magnetic material may be used. As a result, the magnetic material can be arranged outside the starting gear teeth 5452b1, so that the distance between the reversing gear 5453 and the magnetic material can be shortened, and the magnetic material will work when the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 start meshing. The magnetic force can be made stronger.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the embedding hole 5453f is formed in the starting gear tooth 5453b1 of the reverse gear 5453 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the embedding hole 5453f may be formed in the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d and the embedding member 5453g may be embedded therein. In this case, the embedded members 5452h and 5453g are embedded so that the magnetic force of the embedded member 5453g and the magnetic force of the embedded member 5452h embedded in the two-layer gear 5452 repel each other. The impact when the gear 5453 abuts can be mitigated. That is, before the starting gear tooth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 abuts against the engagement projecting receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453, the reversing magnetic force rotates the reversing gear 5453 away from the starting gear tooth 5452b1. can be done. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear tooth 5452b1 can be improved.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding gear members 7452e have the same mass, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, each protruding gear member 7452e may be formed with a different mass, and the spring constant of the urging spring 7452f that urges the protruding gear member 7452e having a larger mass may be formed larger. As a result, the difference in how the projecting gear member 7452e protrudes due to the magnitude of the mass can be alleviated by the magnitude of the biasing force of the biasing spring 7452f.

In the seventh and eighth embodiments, the projecting gear member 7452e of the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 is formed to be movable, so that the contact timing between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 can be changed. Although a case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reverse gear 7453 may be formed so as to be movable in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 . In this case, by moving the reverse gear 7453 away from the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452, it is possible to form a state in which they are not in contact with each other. can be Therefore, even if the movable projecting gear member 7452e is not required, the contact timing between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 can be changed.

In the seventh and eighth embodiments, the projecting gear member 7452e of the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 is formed to be movable, so that the contact timing between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 can be changed. Although a case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 may form a first state in which they do not mesh with the reversing gear 7453 and transmission gear 451 and a second state in which they mesh with the reversing gear 7453 and transmission gear 451 . In this case, while the drive force is not transmitted to the two-layer gears 7452, 8452 in the first state, the drive force can be transmitted to the two-layer gears 7452, 8452 in the second state. Therefore, even if the movable projecting gear member 7452e is not required, the timing at which the reverse gear 7453 starts operating can be changed.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the projecting gear members 7452e have the same mass and the urging springs 8452f have different spring constants, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, each biasing spring 8452f may have the same spring constant, and each projecting gear member 7452e may have a different mass. This makes it possible to adjust the amount of protrusion of each projecting gear member 7452e more easily than adjusting the spring constant.

Although the drive gear 473 is supported at one point on the drive shaft of the drive motor 472 in each of the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of pins are protruded from the end of a shaft support member fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 472, and a plurality of fitting portions are formed in which the pins are fitted to the rotating body portion of the drive gear 473. Alternatively, the shaft support member and the driving gear 473 may be engaged at a plurality of points. In this case, since the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 can be maintained by the pin being caught by the drive gear 473 in the rotational direction, the drive gear 473 and the plurality of pins are loosely fitted. can do.

As a result, the force required to separate the driving motor 472 and the rotating body portion of the driving gear 473 can be reduced, so that the front wall portion 422c of the transmitted leg portion 422 is deformed and excessive stress is applied to the driving motor 472. It is possible to prevent it from being added.

<First control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 121. FIG. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in each of the above-described embodiments, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted. In this control example, unlike each of the above-described embodiments in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed at the time of the big win, the entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened and closed at the time of the big win. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this control example, the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is configured to be opened and closed at the time of the big win, but this is not the only option. Whether or not the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened or closed may be changed, or may be changed for each round in one jackpot. As a result, the variation of the game is increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

First, the specific winning device 650 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52. FIG. 49(a) is a front perspective view of the specific winning device 650, and FIG. 49(b) is a rear perspective view of the specific winning device 650. FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled specific winning device 650, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the disassembled specific winning device 650. FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 52 is a front view and side cross-sectional view of the specific winning device 650. FIG. Note that FIG. 52 shows a state in which the front cover body 651 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 49(a) and 49(b), the specific winning device 650 includes a front cover body 651, a base member 652, and a rear cover body 655. As shown in FIGS. The front cover body 651 and the rear cover body 655 are respectively fastened with screws from the rear side of the base member 652, the front cover body 651 is fastened to the front side of the base member 652, and the rear cover body 655 is fastened to the rear side of the base member 652. is calculated to be As a result, an area in which game balls can flow is formed inside the specific winning device 650 . Also, the base member 652 is attached to the game board 13 while being inserted into an opening hole machined by a router. As a result, the specific winning device 650 is attached to the game board 13 .

In addition, although the details will be described later, a plurality of sensors are provided inside the specific winning device 650 for detecting that the game ball has flowed down, and based on the detection results of these sensors, the effect during the jackpot game is configured to change.

Details of the specific winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52 . 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the specific winning device 650 disassembled into a front cover body 651, a base member 652 and a rear cover body 655. FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the specific prize winning device 650 exploded in the same manner as in FIG. FIG. 52(a) is a front view of the specific winning device 650 with the front cover removed, FIG. 52(b) is a sectional view taken along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. 52(a), and FIG. 52(c). 52(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LIIc--LIIc of FIG. 52(a).

The front cover body 651 includes a front cover and an outer wall portion erected from the outer edge thereof, and is formed of a light-transmitting material in a box-like shape with one side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 50) open. In addition, openings with a width that allows game balls to flow down are provided in the upper right portion and the central left portion of the outer wall. As a result, when the front cover body 651 and the base member 652 are fitted together, the upper right opening serves as an entrance 651a through which game balls can flow down into the specific winning device 650, and the left central opening is A game ball inside the specific winning device 650 becomes an outlet portion 652c that can flow down to the outside. In addition, a guide wall is formed from the upper right opening to the central portion, and is configured to guide a game ball entered into the entrance portion 651a to the first specific winning port 650a, which will be described later. An entrance sensor 900a and an exit sensor 900c are arranged at the entrance portion 651a and the exit portion 652c, respectively, so that a game ball passing therethrough can be detected.

A second prize winning opening is provided in the upper part of the base member 652. A first specific winning opening 650a is formed in the lower right part, and a second specific winning opening 650b is formed in the lower left part so as to protrude from the front and rear sides. ing. A first ball entry sensor 652a and a second ball entry sensor 652b are provided above the first specific prize winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b, respectively, to detect the entry of a ball into each of the specific winning openings. be done. Above the first ball sensor 652a and the second ball sensor 652b, a ball ball restricting plate 654 that can slide in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. By sliding this ball entry control plate, the game ball can be entered into the first specific prize winning port 650a or the second specific prize winning port 650b, and can be changed to a state in which it is impossible to enter the game ball.

A detour channel 653 is provided near the upper portion of the entering ball restricting plate 654 and between the first specific winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b. A game ball that enters the inlet 651 a of the specific winning device 650 first flows down to above the first specific winning port 650 a and before the detour 653 . Here, when the ball entry regulation plate 654 is open (slid to the back), the game ball enters the first specific winning hole 650a, while the ball entry regulation plate 654 is closed. (Sliding forward), the game ball flows down to the detour channel 653 . A detour sensor 900b is provided at the upstream entrance portion 653a of the detour passage 653, and can detect passing game balls.

The game ball that has flowed down the detour channel 653 flows down to above the second specific winning port 650b and in front of the exit portion 652c. Here, when the ball entry regulation plate 654 is open (slid to the back), the game ball enters the second specific winning hole 650b, while the ball entry regulation plate 654 is closed. (Sliding forward), the game ball flows down to the outside of the specific winning device 650 from the exit portion 652c.

Here, both the first specific winning hole 650a and the second specific winning hole 650b pay out prize balls (game balls) based on winning. That is, even if the game ball enters the specific winning port 650 at the timing when the ball entry control plate 654 is closed and does not enter the first specific winning port 650a, it enters after passing through the detour channel 653. If it is time for the ball control plate 654 to open, the ball will enter the second specific prize winning opening 650b, and the prize balls will be paid out based on the winning. Therefore, based on the game ball that entered the specific winning device 650, it is possible to facilitate the payout of prize balls.

The detour channel 653 is formed on the front side and the back side of the base member 652 so that the game ball meanders and flows down. As a result, compared with the case where the game ball flows down without meandering, the path length of the detour channel can be lengthened, and the time for the game ball to flow down the detour channel can be lengthened. Therefore, even if the opening timing of the entrance ball restricting plate 654 is late, the game ball that has passed through the detour channel 653 can enter the second specific winning hole 650b.

Although the details will be described later, by determining the opening/closing pattern of the ball entry control plate 654 according to the time for the game ball to pass through the detour path 653, the game ball passing through the detour path 653 It is possible to determine an opening/closing pattern in which it is easy to enter a ball and an opening/closing pattern in which it is difficult to enter a ball. Further, if the path length of the detour path 653 can be adjusted, it is possible to adjust whether or not the game ball passing through the detour path 653 is likely to enter the second specific winning hole 650b. It should be noted that the passage time of the detour route 653 is not limited to the length of the route, and may be adjusted by changing the coefficient of friction of the road surface on which the game ball flows (for example, using a non-slip material).

A protrusion 652d is formed on the upper portion of the second prize winning port 640, and electric accessories 640a are arranged on the left and right. As a result, the game ball can enter the second winning hole 640 only when the electric accessory 640a is open. In addition, without being limited to this, it is also possible to allow the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 without forming the protrusion 652d and even when the electric accessory 640a is not opened.

The back cover body 655 is formed with a discharge passage through which game balls entering the above-described second winning port 640, the first specific winning port 650a and the second specific winning port 650b flow down, and the electric accessory 640a. and a variable solenoid 670 for varying the entry control plate 654 are provided.

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 53(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.53(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol consists of numbers from "0" to "9". Incidentally, each main pattern may be displayed with a pattern or the like attached together with the number.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) to be described later is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is "jackpot A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. Further, if it is a "jackpot B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned. In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, there is a SW effect and a background change effect that suggest (notice) that there is a high possibility that the special symbol will be a big hit. In that case, the display area in which the variable display is performed may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this control example) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls that entered the first winning hole 64, and the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 is an area for displaying a preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 53(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy wearing a headband in this control example) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action other than the predetermined action, or another character appears. A notice effect is performed by putting out.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball patterns are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In this control example, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is suspended up to four times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, the opening/closing pattern of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 and the game ball entry timing will be described. FIG. 54 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ball entry timing in the opening/closing operation of the ball entry restricting plate 654. As shown in FIG. The upper part of FIG. 54 shows the open/closed state of the entering ball regulation plate 654, and the middle part shows the timing at which the launched game ball enters the entrance part 651a of the specific winning device 650. The lower stage shows the timing at which the game ball that has not entered the first specific winning hole 650a and flowed down to the detour channel finishes flowing down the detour channel.

The timing at which the ball entry control plate 654 is open is the timing (first ball entry timing) at which the launched game ball enters the first specific winning hole 650a. On the other hand, the timing when the ball entry control plate 654 is closed is the timing when the launched game ball does not enter the first specific winning port 650a, and the game ball flowing down the detour channel 653 is the second specific winning port 650b. There is a timing (second ball entry timing) when the ball enters the second specific prize winning opening 650b and a timing (exit passage timing) when the ball does not enter the second specific prize winning opening 650b and flows down to the outside from the exit portion 652c.

The second ball entry timing and the exit passage timing are determined by whether or not the ball entry regulation plate 654 is open at the timing when the game ball finishes flowing down the detour path 653 . In FIG. 54, the second ball entry timing is reached after the first ball entry timing has elapsed, and the game ball launched at this timing does not enter the first specific winning hole 650a, and passes through the detour channel 653. It will flow down. After that, when the game ball finishes flowing down the detour channel 653, it is time to open the ball entry control plate 654, so the game ball enters the second specific winning hole 650b. On the other hand, at the exit passage timing after the second ball entry timing has elapsed, when the game ball finishes flowing down the detour channel 653, the ball entry regulation plate 654 is not at the timing to open (that is, it is closed), so the game ball does not enter the second specific winning hole 650b, but passes through the exit portion 652c.

Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball that has not entered the first specific winning hole 650a wins the second specific winning hole 650b by the opening/closing timing of the winning control plate 654.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the opening/closing pattern of the winning regulating plate 654 in this control example will be described. FIG. 55(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an opening/closing pattern A in which a game ball that has not entered the first specific winning hole 650a is likely to enter the second specific winning hole 650b. b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an opening/closing pattern B in which a game ball that has not entered the first specific winning opening 650a is less likely to enter the second specific winning opening 650b.

Although the details will be described later, this opening/closing pattern is selected based on the jackpot type. In this control example, the opening/closing pattern is configured to be selected based on the jackpot type, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured to be selected regardless of the jackpot type. As a result, even if the jackpot type is the same, the game value that the player can acquire varies depending on the opening/closing pattern, so that the player's interest can be improved.

The upper, middle, and lower stages of FIGS. 55(a) and (b) show the same timings as in FIG. 54, respectively, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the opening/closing pattern A shown in FIG. 55(a), one out of two game balls shot at regular intervals enters when the winning regulation plate 654 is open, and the other ball wins. It is opened and closed so that the ball enters when the regulation plate 654 is closed. Here, as shown in the figure, the detoured game ball enters the second specific winning hole 650b because the winning restriction plate 654 is in an open state after finishing flowing down the detouring channel 653.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing pattern B shown in FIG. 55(b), one out of two game balls launched at regular intervals enters the specific winning device 650 at the timing when the winning control plate 654 is open. is similar. However, as compared with the opening/closing pattern A, the timing at which the entering ball restricting plate 654 is opened for the second time is earlier, and the timing at which the first detoured game ball finishes flowing down the detouring channel 653 is as shown in the figure. Since the ball restricting plate 654 is closed, the ball does not enter the second specific prize winning opening 650b. Therefore, compared to the opening/closing pattern A, the opening/closing pattern B is an opening/closing pattern in which game balls are less likely to enter the specific winning opening.

It should be noted that the opening/closing timing of the ball entrance restricting plate 654 may be appropriately set without being limited to the opening/closing pattern described above. For example, it may be set so that all game balls that do not enter the first specific winning hole 650a enter the second specific winning hole 650b, or all balls enter the second specific winning hole 650b. It may be set not to (that is, all pass through the exit portion 652c). In addition, the opening/closing timing of the entrance ball restricting plate 654 is appropriately set according to the shape and length of the detour channel (required time required for the game ball to pass through).

Furthermore, a plurality of detour routes with different times for game balls to pass may be provided, and game balls that do not enter the first specific winning hole 650a may be distributed to those detour routes. For example, a detour route may be provided in which game balls that do not enter the first specific winning port 650a are more likely to enter the second specific winning port 650b, and detour routes are less likely to enter the second specific winning port 650b. As a result, even if the opening/closing pattern is the same, the ease with which a ball can be entered can be changed, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Furthermore, in this control example, one ball entry regulation plate 654 is used to regulate the entry of balls into the first specific prize winning port 650a and the second specific prize winning port 650b. A ball entry regulation plate may be provided individually to regulate the entry of the ball. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of variations for regulating the entry of a ball into each specific winning hole, and to improve the interest of the player.

Also, in this control example, entry of a ball into the first specific winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b, which are part of the specific winning openings, is restricted by the ball entry regulation plate 654 in the specific winning device 650. Although the case has been described, it is not limited to this, and instead of the first specific prize winning port 650a or the second specific prize winning port 650b, the second prize winning port 640 may be provided, or the general prize winning port 63 or the like may be provided. good too.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59, the detection results of various sensors provided inside the specific winning device 650 and the effect display during the jackpot game based on the detection results will be described. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detection timings of various sensors and the content of effect display based on the detection results. 57 to 59 are schematic diagrams exemplifying the contents of each effect display.

After the start of the jackpot game, when the first game ball enters the specific winning device 650, the entering ball is detected by the entrance sensor 900a (when the first ball entrance sensor in FIG. 56 is detected). As a result, an effect based on the first game ball (first ball effect in FIG. 56) is started, and an appearance effect is displayed (see FIG. 57(a)). The effect screen in this case is a normal effect screen displayed on one screen, as shown at the bottom.

Next, when the entrance sensor 900a detects the second ball and the third ball during the appearance effect display (in FIG. 56, when the entrance sensor detects the second ball and when the entrance sensor detects the third ball). , 2nd and 3rd game balls (2nd ball effect, 3rd ball effect in FIG. 56) are started, and the appearance medium number effect is displayed based on the respective detection results. As shown in FIG. 57(a), a design of a cat indicating the number of cats appearing is displayed in the lower right part by the medium number of appearances effect. This number of cats appearing indicates the number of pending effects, and when the effect based on the first game ball is completed, the number of cats appearing is reduced by 1 and the effect based on the second game ball is executed. It will be done.

When the detour sensor 900b detects that the first game ball does not enter the first specific winning port 650a and passes through the detour inlet 653a of the detour passage 653 (at the time of detection of the detour sensor in FIG. 56 ), the effect based on the first game ball is changed from the appearance effect to the escape effect (see FIG. 57(b)). The effect screen in this case is a special effect screen displayed on two screens, as shown at the bottom. With this special effect screen, an effect based on the first game ball (escape effect) can be displayed on the left side of the screen, and an effect based on the second game ball (appearance effect) can be displayed on the right side of the screen. (See FIG. 57(b)).

After that, when the first ball entry sensor 652a detects that the second game ball has entered the first specific winning hole 650a, the appearance effect based on the second game ball on the right side of the screen changes to a capture effect. (see FIG. 58(a)). When this capture effect ends, an appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed on the right side of the screen.

Next, when the second ball sensor 652b detects that the first game ball has finished flowing down the detour channel 653 and entered the second specific winning hole 650b, the game of the first ball on the left side of the screen is detected. The escape effect based on the ball is changed to a recapture effect (see FIG. 58(b)). When this recapture effect ends, there is no effect displayed on the left side of the screen, so the effect screen becomes a normal effect screen displayed on one screen as shown at the bottom, and the appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed. It will be done.

On the other hand, when the first game ball has finished flowing down the detour channel 653 and has passed through the exit portion 652c without entering the second specific winning opening 650b, the exit sensor 900c detects that the exit sensor 900c detects the 1 ball on the left side of the screen. The escape effect based on the game ball of the ball is changed to the capture failure effect (see FIG. 59(a)). When this capture failure effect ends, the effect displayed on the left side of the screen disappears as in FIG. 58(b) described above, so the appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed as the normal effect screen. .

Here, with reference to FIG. 59(b), a case where the capture effect is executed on the normal effect screen will be described. FIG. 59(b) is an effect display displayed when the first game ball enters the first specific winning hole 650a when the above-described FIG. 57(a) is displayed. As described above, when there is a game ball flowing down the detour channel 653 and a game ball between the entrance part 651a and the detour channel 653, the special effect screen displays an effect based on each game ball. visible at the same time. On the other hand, when there is a game ball in only one of them, the normal effect screen is configured to display an effect based on the corresponding game ball.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the display contents of the character-linked effect will be described. FIGS. 60 and 61 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and the first spherical role object 330 and the second spherical role object 340. FIG.

The character-linked effect is a effect that is executed during variable display. When this character-linked effect is executed, the variable display being executed is reduced and displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 60(a). Also, the first spherical role object 330 and the second spherical role object 340 are lit, and a pattern (PUSH pattern) in which the letters PUSH are surrounded in a circle is displayed on the upper right and upper left of the screen (see FIG. 60(a)). . The PUSH pattern displayed on the upper left moves to the lower right, and the PUSH pattern displayed on the upper right moves to the lower left (FIG. 60(b)).

Then, the two PUSH patterns are moved so as to overlap each other in the center of the screen (see FIG. 61(a)). The object 340 is extinguished, and a gauge indicating the remaining button pressing time is displayed at the lower right of the screen (see FIG. 61(b)). Here, the first spherical role object 330 and the second spherical role object each have a first spherical cover body (330a, 330b) and a second spherical cover body (340a, 340b). At the timing when the object 330 and the second spherical accessory 340 are turned off, they are moved to a position covering the front surface of the spherical accessory. These spherical cover bodies are movable by a first accessory motor 330c and a second accessory motor 340c (not shown).

Next, the background-linked effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 63 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display contents of the background interlocking effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

In this control example, a display suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed on the upper right of the screen as part of the background display. Specifically, background levels of “level 1”, “level 2”, “level 3” and “level 4” are displayed in the upper right portion of the third pattern display device 81 . The background level of "Level 1" is a display suggesting that the expectation of a big win is lowest, and the background level of "Level 4" is a display that suggests that the expectation of a big win is the highest. This background level is changed during the variable display or at the start of the variable display, and is changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the background change lottery process (see FIG. 92). A detailed description will be given later.

Here, with reference to FIG. 62, a case where the background level is changed during variable display will be described. When the background level is "level 1", the patterns on the left and right columns of the variable display are stopped, and the characters "continuous level 2" are displayed in the center (see FIG. 62(a)). After that, the variable display is started again and the background level is changed to "level 2" (see FIG. 62(b)). Here, the case where the background level is changed from "level 1" to "level 2" was explained, but it is also possible to change from "level 1" to "level 3" or "level 4" during the change display of 1 be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the case where the background level is changed at the start of the variable display will be described. In FIG. 62(b) described above, the variable display is stopped after the background level is changed to "level 2" (see FIG. 63(a)). After that, the next variable display is started, the characters "Level up!" are displayed on the upper part of the screen, and the background level is changed to "Level 3".

As described above, in this control example, it is possible to change the background level during the variable display of 1 as described with reference to FIG. 62, and as described with reference to FIG. can also be used continuously. As a result, even in the variable display after the first variable display in which the high expectation of the big win is displayed, the state of the high expectation of the big win can be continuously maintained, thereby enhancing the player's interest. can be improved.

In this control example, the explanation is omitted, but usually, in the game machine, when executing the variation of the special symbols, the characters indicating the degree of expectation of various jackpots, the display of comments, and the effects such as sound are executed. In such a configuration, since the notice display modes showing various different expectations are displayed, the player does not know which degree of expectation should be used to determine the degree of expectation for the big win. There is a problem that the player loses interest in the game or gets bored with the game early because the content of the notice cannot be understood. However, in this control example, since the background level is displayed on the background screen as the overall expectation level during the variable display of the special symbols, the game can be played with reference to the expectation level. Therefore, the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, since the background level is changed each time the pseudo-stop in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped is executed, it can be understood that the overall expectation has changed from the expectation in the pseudo-stop notice. can play games in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, the background level is changed by performing a pseudo-stop, but the background level is changed based on the display of an advance notice such as a character or a comment. It may be configured as Furthermore, the degree of expectation is not limited to being displayed on the background level. Then, by changing the display mode of the character (for example, by changing the pattern or color of the clothes), the character may be displayed so as to represent the overall degree of expectation.

Furthermore, in this control example, the background level is configured to be displayed not only in the current variation, but also when the current variation is stopped and the next variation is started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation of the number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbols is started in the state of the background level of 3, a temporary stop is executed once to display a variable mode with a high degree of expectation for the big win. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to make the player always aware of what the background level is when playing the game.

In addition, in this control example, the background level is used as the overall expectation level when the pseudo stop is performed. It may be configured to be displayed in levels. In this case, the change mode table selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is switched by changing the background level. Specifically, the display of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 without changing the fluctuation time notified from the main controller 110 and the rough display mode (reach, non-reach, etc.) For example, at background level 1, the display area is not divided into single display variations, and at background level 2, the display area is divided into two, and the third pattern is displayed independently in each of them. In the background level 3, it is similarly divided into three and the third pattern is variably displayed in each of them (multi display mode). By configuring in this way, the display of the background level indicates the degree of expectation depending on the contents of the variation mode of the special symbol (whether or not the temporary stop is varied), and the case of indicating the selection mode of the variation pattern. You can switch.

Furthermore, in addition to the configuration of this control example, depending on the game state such as the normal game state and the variable probability game state, it may be configured to vary the frequency of the background level rising, the width of the rise, or the frequency of the background level falling, the width of the fall, etc. . Furthermore, the higher the background level, the easier it is to select a variation pattern for executing a pseudo stop (provisional stop). Conversely, the lower the background level, the easier it is for a pseudo-stop to be performed. Further, a background level may be set in advance for the variation pattern to be variably displayed, and when the variation pattern is variably displayed, the background level may be set to the set background level.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 64 to 76. FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, and since it is the same as each control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the electrical configuration of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. FIG. In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display in the second symbol display device (not shown), and the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting in . The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display in the second symbol display device (not shown), and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to set the display in the .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of out of special symbols, and first initial value random number used for initial value setting of 1st per random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 77), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 86). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203j set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. FIG. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball corresponding to the winning in the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). An area 203a is provided, and in each of these areas, a first winning random number counter C1 and a first winning type counter C2 are set in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. and each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in time with the timing of passing through the starting port (through gate) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 77) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 86).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit. In addition, this first hit random number table is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special symbols The number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The first winning random number table 202a for the high probability of special symbols and the first random number table 202a for the low probability of special symbols are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (FIG. 66). reference).

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is one of "0 to 9" in the special symbol lottery. , "0 to 9", it is determined to be a jackpot. Also, when the game state is the normal game state, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0".

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and the ball enters the left first winning hole 64a or the right first winning hole 64b. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a deviation from the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode will be the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-399. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the probability of special symbols is low, there is one random number that becomes a jackpot of special symbols. stored. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 1 among the total number of random number values of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/400".

On the other hand, when the probability of special symbols is high, there are 10 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the first winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 10 among the total number of random numbers of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/40".

In addition, in this control example, the random numbers for the jackpot stored in the first winning random number table for the low probability and the random numbers for the jackpot stored in the first random number table for the high probability are used. In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set for each jackpot. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this control example, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), the random number value that becomes a big hit is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that fraud can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, in the first win type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number is any one of "0 to 49" is "jackpot A". Also, when the random number is any one of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". In this control example, the number of types of jackpots is two, but the number of types is not limited to two. In addition, even if the value of the first win type counter C2 is the same, different jackpot types are selected for the jackpot based on the ball entering the first prize winning port 64 and the jackpot based on the ball entering the second prize winning port 640. may be configured to be With this configuration, for example, when a big win is achieved based on the ball entering the second winning port 640, the player can easily select a winning type that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player expect a big hit based on the ball entering the ball. Here, the second winning hole 640 is a winning hole that makes it easier to enter a ball in a time-saving game state, which will be described later. Therefore, when shifting to the time-saving game state, the state can be more advantageous for the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3. ” (for example, the range of 90-99) and “Completely out of reach” (for example, the range of 0-89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is used by the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into one for when the probability of special symbols is high and one for when the probability of special symbols is low. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In addition, in the low probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is narrow, 0 to 79, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64. table is selected, making it difficult for “completely out” to be selected.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time lag, long-time lag, normal reach, super reach, and the like. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 86), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 67(a)) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is provided in

In the fluctuation pattern table 202d, for example, as fluctuation patterns for failure, "loss (for long time)", "loss (for short time)", various types of "loss normal reach", and various types of "loss super reach" are defined, As variation patterns of the jackpot A, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined. Then, a variation pattern is selected from various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table 202d according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). A variation pattern table 222a is also set in the sound ramp control device 113, and more detailed variation pattern contents corresponding to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output by the main controller 110 are stored in the variation pattern table 222a. more selected.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this example of control, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the normal symbol win is set by a normal symbol random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the normal symbol. If the winning random number value matches the winning random number set by the winning random number table, it is determined as a winning of the normal design. In addition, this random number table per normal design is for normal design low probability (normal state of normal design) and high probability of normal design hit than low probability (normal design) It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 66(c), when the probability of normal symbols is low, there are 24 random numbers that will win normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per normal symbol for low probability. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbols is displayed on the second symbol display device. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. , and the passage port 645 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the passage opening 645 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when normal symbols are won. and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per normal symbol for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variable display of the normal symbols is displayed on the second symbol display device. Runs for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. , and the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds→3 seconds". Since the opening period of the electric accessory becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640 . A table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202, which stores random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbols are won. However, the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 26).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device can be executed.

Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. FIG. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with a ROM 202 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data.

FIG. 65(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 65(a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. .

The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 66(a)) is, as described above, a table in which values of random numbers that are special symbol jackpots are defined. When the random value defined in the first winning random number table 202a and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, the first random number table 202a includes a table (first random number table 202a for low probability) for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit when the probability of the special symbol is low, and a high probability of the special symbol. A table (first winning random number table 202a for high probability) is provided for determining whether or not a special pattern is a jackpot at the time of probability, and the number of random numbers to be a jackpot included in each table is different. there is In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66(b)) is set so that the jackpot A and the jackpot B can be selected. Specifically, as the judgment value of the big win A, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to "0 to 49", and as the judgment value of the big win B is set to "50 to 99".

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 66(c), when the probability of the normal design is low (during the normal state of the normal design), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the second winning random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of , it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design. In addition, as described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory associated with the passage port 645 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 67(a)) is a data table used for determining the display form of the fluctuation pattern, and the display form is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this fluctuation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(a), a big hit variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 67(b)), a losing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 67(c)), At least a deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 67(d)) is defined. Although illustration is omitted, in addition to this, a variation pattern table and the like in the time saving game state are set.

With reference to FIG. 67(b), the big winning variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 67(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202d1. The large winning variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a large winning is set. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as variation patterns of the jackpot. For each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value.

Specifically, for the variation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", for the variation pattern of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds ), “180 to 198” are set as determination values of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the judgment value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set is selected as a big hit. Select from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 67(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is loss is set. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete failure is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", failure reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time and a long failure (10 seconds) with a long variation time are set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for outlier reach, "0 to 149" for different normal reach (30 seconds), "150 to 197" for different super reach (60 seconds), and special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 67(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be a deviation when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the aforementioned deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 65, the description is continued. FIG. 65(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller. The RAM 203 stores various counters shown in FIG. 64, the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, a stack area, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 86) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up processing (see FIG. 85) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 84) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a variable probability flag 203e. , a counter 203f during time saving, and a memory area 203z.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on winning the second winning opening 640 is stored.

More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is obtained at the timing when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 (start winning), and the obtained data is converted into four Among the vacant areas of the reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area (moved), determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area ) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Shift processing is performed to pack the data into a reserved area with an area number that is one smaller. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of variable display (variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero. 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S404 in FIG. 80). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 78).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 78 and S405 in FIG. 80). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the holding ball of the variable display held by the main controller 110 You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual variable display pending ball number held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203d increases the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to a maximum of 4 times. It is a counter that counts. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S704 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 82).

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is obtained. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (see S705 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S703 in FIG. 83: No).

The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state (probability variation gaming state). If the variable probability flag 203e is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is a low probability gaming state (including the time saving gaming state). In this control example, when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variable flag 203e is set to ON (see S1114 in FIG. 87). Then, it is set to OFF when a jackpot game is started (see S1102 in FIG. 87). In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

The counter 203f during time saving is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. This time-saving counter 203f is set to 100 when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot B (16R time-shortening jackpot) at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in this control example, when the variable probability game state is not set after the jackpot game, the game shifts to the time saving game state of 100 times.

The other memory area 203z is for setting (storing) other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device will be described. The input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via the bus line 224 composed of the address bus and the data bus as described above. The input/output port 225 includes the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, other devices 228, the first accessory motor 330c, the second accessory motor 340c, the entrance A center 900a, a detour sensor 900b, an exit sensor 900c, etc. are connected (see FIG. 4).

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . As described above, the rear image in this control example includes an indication (level indication) indicating the degree of expectation for a big win.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 68(a). As shown in FIG. 68(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222a, a character interlocking effect table 222b, an opening/closing pattern storage area 222c, a background lottery table 222d, a SW scenario storage area 222e, In addition, various data and programs required for game control are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (off, reach out, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

The role-linked effect table 222b is a table that defines the operation patterns of the spherical accessories (330, 340) and the pattern of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for executing the above-described role-linked effect. is. By setting the motion of the spherical role and the display effect based on this table, it is possible to execute the performance linked with the motion of the spherical role and the display effect. Details of the character-linked effect table 222b will be described later with reference to FIG. 69(a).

The opening/closing pattern storage area 222c defines the relationship between the opening/closing pattern of the ball entry control plate 653 of the specific winning device 650 and the jackpot type during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the case of a big win A, the opening/closing pattern A is selected, and in the case of a big win B, the opening/closing pattern B is selected. As described above, the jackpot A is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B in that it is in a variable probability state. In addition, as described above, the opening/closing pattern A is more advantageous to the player than the opening/closing pattern B in that the game ball easily enters the second specific winning hole 650b. Therefore, since the opening/closing pattern A is selected for the big win A, the big win A becomes a big win more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player will play the game in anticipation of a larger hit A, and the player's interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the opening/closing pattern B may be selected in the case of a big win A, and the opening/closing pattern A may be selected in the case of a big win B, without being limited to the above. Moreover, the selection of the opening/closing pattern may not be based on the jackpot type, and may be selected based on the value of the effect counter 223j, which will be described later, for example. As a result, even if the jackpot type is the same, whether or not it is advantageous to the player changes depending on the selected opening/closing pattern, so that the player is interested in both the jackpot type and the opening/closing pattern. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved. Furthermore, the opening/closing pattern may be selected based on the above-described jackpot type and the production counter, or the jackpot types and opening/closing patterns may be further increased, for example, the jackpot type C and opening/closing pattern C may be increased. .

The background lottery table 222d prescribes the background level to be shifted based on the winning/failure determination result, the current background level, and the value of the effect counter 223j, which will be described later. Based on this table, the background level can be changed in the background change lottery process (see FIG. 92). Details of the background lottery table 222d will be described later with reference to FIG. 69(b).

The SW scenario storage area 222e is an area that stores a SW scenario that defines a period during which pressing of the SW is effective in the above-described character-linked production. Based on this SW scenario, by controlling the lighting operation of the spherical accessories (330, 340) and the frame button 22, the effect content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 113 and the spherical accessory are displayed. (330, 340) and the lighting operation of the frame button 22 can be interlocked to produce an effect.

Here, the frame button 22 is lit during the SW valid period based on the SW scenario. By turning on the frame button 22, the player can be made to recognize that it is a period in which SW can be pressed.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 68(b). As shown in FIG. 68(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a jackpot effective flag 223e. , first ball entry flag 223f, second ball entry flag 223g, remaining counter 223h, measurement counter 223i, production counter 223j, open/close pattern storage area 223k, round flag 223m, exit timing counter 223n, SW scenario setting area 223o, continuous At least a background flag 223p, a background flag 223q, a power-off processing flag 223x, a power-off flag 223y, and a memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It's becoming

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, the number of pending balls displayed in a variable display is added, or the main controller 110 changes in the special symbol When the display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 90). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 203c, its value can be updated.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of , a command for the number of pending balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled so that the pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1603 in FIG. 91), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (See S2102 in FIG. 97). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 89). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 90), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S2108 in FIG. 97). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The jackpot valid flag 223e is turned on when the first round of the jackpot game is started and the jackpot effect becomes effective (see S1808 in FIG. 94), and is turned off five seconds after the jackpot game ends. (See S1819 in FIG. 94). By turning on this jackpot valid flag 223e, in the jackpot during production process (FIG. 98), a jackpot production based on the detection results of various sensors provided in the specific winning device 650 (see FIGS. 57 to 59). will be executed.

The first ball entering flag 223f is turned on when the first ball entering command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1903 in FIG. 95), and the process based on the reception of the first ball entering command is performed in the jackpot medium effect process. It is turned off when executed (see 2211 in FIG. 98). The first ball entry command is a command transmitted when a game ball enters the first specific winning hole 650a by the first ball entry sensor 650a. When the first ball entry flag 223f is turned on, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a capture command for display to the display control device 114 based on the game ball detection result by the first ball entry sensor 650a of the main controller 110. can be sent to When the display control device 114 receives the capture command for display, it executes a process of displaying a capture effect (see FIG. 58(a)) on the third symbol display device.

The second ball entering flag 223g is turned on when the second ball entering command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1905 in FIG. 95), and the processing based on the reception of the second ball entering command is executed in the effect processing during the jackpot. is turned off (see S2214 in FIG. 98). The second ball entry command is a command sent when a game ball enters the second specific winning hole 650b by the second ball entry sensor 650b. By turning on the second ball entry flag 223g, based on the detection result of the game ball by the second ball entry sensor 650b of the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 issues a display recapture command to the display controller. 114. When the display control device 114 receives the recapture command for display, it executes a process of displaying a recapture effect (see FIG. 58(b)) on the third symbol display device.

The remaining counter 223h is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after execution of the ending effect in the big win effect, and is incremented by 1 every time the big win command process is executed after the ending effect is executed. (See S1816 in FIG. 94). Also, when the remaining counter reaches a value of 5 seconds or more in the jackpot command process, it is reset (see S1818 in FIG. 94).

The measurement counter 223i is a counter for measuring the opening/closing timing of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 which is opened/closed by the main controller 110. When the game is being executed, 1 is added each time the effect processing during the jackpot is executed (see S2202 in FIG. 98). Also, when the above-described jackpot effective flag 223e is turned off, both are reset (see S1817 in FIG. 94). This measurement counter 223i is referenced together with the information of the opening/closing pattern storage area in the entrance passage process (FIG. 99), and is used to determine the timing at which the game ball enters the specific winning device 650. (See S2303 in FIG. 99).

The effect counter 223j is a counter used for various lotteries such as character-linked effects and background lottery, and is repeatedly updated within a range of 0-399. This effect counter 223j is updated by one by the process of S1315 each time the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

The opening/closing pattern storage area 223k stores information of the opening/closing pattern storage area 222c corresponding to the jackpot type when an opening command is received from the main controller 110 (S1802 in FIG. 94). As described above, the opening/closing pattern storage area 223k is referred to together with the measurement counter 223i in the entrance passage process, and is used to determine the timing at which the game ball enters the specific winning device 650. (See S2303 in FIG. 99). In this control example, the opening/closing pattern storage area is updated as well as cleared when an opening command is received, which is the timing at which the big win is started. may be cleared.

The in-round flag 223m is a flag indicating whether or not it is in the middle of a round of the jackpot game (during opening of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650). This in-round flag 223m is set to ON when a round start command is received from main controller 110 (S1806 in FIG. 94), and is set to OFF when a round end command is received from main controller 110 ( S1810 in FIG. 94).

The exit timing counter 223n counts the number of game balls whose timing of entering the specific prize winning device 650 during the round of the jackpot game is exit passage timing. The exit timing counter 223n is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the passage timing is the exit timing in the entrance passage processing executed when the ball entering the specific winning device 650 is detected (Fig. 99 S2305). Also, in the entrance passage process, when the jackpot game ends and the jackpot effective flag 223e is turned off, both are reset (S1817 in FIG. 94).

This exit timing counter is referenced in the entrance passage process, and when the exit timing counter reaches a predetermined number or more during the round of the jackpot game in the opening/closing pattern A in which the ball is likely to enter the second specific winning opening 650b (that is, the second 2 When the number of game balls passing through the exit portion 652c without entering the specific winning hole 650b is greater than a predetermined number), a display timing notification command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2307 in FIG. 99). . When the display control device 114 receives the display timing notification command, the display control device 114 executes an effect display for changing the player's firing timing. As a result, in spite of the opening/closing pattern A that makes it easy for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650b, the player who is shooting the game ball at a timing that makes it difficult to enter the second specific winning opening 650b, Since the firing timing can be changed, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

The continuous background flag 223p indicates that when a winning command based on the starting winning of a jackpot is received from the main controller 110, the background level suggesting the degree of expectation of the winning of the above-mentioned jackpot is expected before the start of the variable display based on the starting winning of the jackpot. This is a flag for continuously changing (raising) the level. This continuous background flag 223p is set to ON when the effect counter is "0 to 49" when it is determined in the winning command reception process that a command for a big win has been received (see S1708 in FIG. 93). When the continuous background flag 223p is set to ON, background change data is set for each of the held balls (see S1707 in FIG. 93). Therefore, in the background change lottery process executed thereafter, the continuous background flag 223p is referred to, and if it is ON, the background change process is skipped (see S1601 in FIG. 92). It should be noted that the continuous background flag 223p is a flag that is automatically turned off at the start of the jackpot game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the winning command is received, if the result is a jackpot, the effect is performed to continuously increase the expectation level of the background. can be configured to run. In this case, by continuously changing the background in the case of losing reach or losing super reach, it is possible to maintain the degree of expectation for a bigger win even when the change is started.

The background flag 223q stores the set background level when the background is changed in the background change lottery process (FIG. 92) or the variable display setting process (FIG. 97). This background flag 223q is referred to in the background change lottery process, and a process corresponding to the current background level is executed (see S1604 in FIG. 92).

When main controller 110 detects a power cutoff, power cutoff processing flag 223x sends a power cutoff command to sound lamp control device 113, and when sound lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command, power cutoff flag 223y is turned on. It is set to ON, and power-off processing is executed (S1318 in FIG. 89). Then, when the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag 223x is set to OFF (S1320 in FIG. 89). This power-off processing in-progress flag 223x is referred to in the start-up processing (see S1202 in FIG. 88), and if it is on, the power has been turned off during execution of the power-off processing (that is, the RAM has been destroyed). Then, without checking for RAM destruction, the processing in the case of RAM destruction is executed.

When main controller 110 detects a power cutoff, a power cutoff command is sent to audio lamp control device 113, and when audio lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command, power cutoff flag 223y is turned on. It is set, and power-off processing is executed (S1318 in FIG. 89). Then, in the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (FIG. 88), if the power-off flag 223y is ON, the working area of the RAM is cleared, and the power-off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1210 in FIG. 88). ).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 90) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and the processing according to the command is performed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 69(a), details of the character linked effect table 222b will be described. FIG. 69(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character-linked effect table 222b.

This accessory-linked production table 222b defines the production selected by the variation pattern type and the value of the production counter. Specifically, when the variation pattern type is "normal reach", SW effect A1 is selected if the effect counter is "0 to 199", and SW effect A2 is selected if the effect counter is "200 to 349". is selected, and if the effect counter is "350 to 399", the SW effect A3 is selected. Further, when the variation pattern type is "super reach", if the effect counter is "0 to 199", the SW effect B1 is selected, and if the effect counter is "200 to 349", the SW effect B2 is selected. If the effect counter is "350 to 399", the SW effect B3 is selected. Furthermore, when the type of variation pattern is "special reach", if the effect counter is "0 to 199", the SW effect C1 is selected, and if the effect counter is "200 to 349", the SW effect C2 is selected. If the effect counter is "350 to 399", the SW effect C3 is selected.

Here, as described above, different fluctuation times are set for each fluctuation pattern type. In this control example, it is configured to change the selected SW effect according to the variation pattern type. As a result, it is possible to select a SW effect with an appropriate effect time according to the variation pattern.

Next, details of the background lottery table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 69(b). FIG. 69(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the background lottery table 222d.

The background lottery table 222d prescribes the background level of the transition destination based on the current background level and the effect counter 223j, and is prescribed so that the win/loss determination result differs between hit and miss.

Specifically, first, the case where the win/loss determination result is a hit will be described. If the result of the win/fail judgment is "win" and the current background level is "level 1", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 199", the transition destination background level will be "level 2" and " 200", the background level of the transition destination is "level 4", and if it is "201 to 399", the background level is not changed. Also, when the current background level is "level 2", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 19", the transition destination background level is "level 1", and if it is "20 to 159", The background level of the transition destination is "level 3", and if it is "200", the background level of the transition destination is "level 4", and if it is "201 to 399", the background level is not changed. Furthermore, when the current background level is "level 3", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 29", the transition destination background level will be "level 2", and if it is "30 to 139". For example, the background level of the transition destination is "level 4", and if it is "140 to 399", the background level is not changed. Further, when the current background level is "level 4", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 39", the background level to be transitioned to is "level 3", and if it is "40 to 399", It is specified that the background level is not changed.

Next, a description will be given of the case in which the result of the judgment is "out". If the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149" when the result of the judgment is "no" and the current background level is "level 1", the transition destination background level is "level 2". 150 to 399", the background level is not changed. Further, when the current background level is "level 2", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 49", the background level to be transitioned to is "level 1", and if it is "50 to 99", The background level of the migration destination is "level 3", and if it is "100 to 399", the background level is not changed. Furthermore, when the current background level is "level 3", the background level to be transitioned to is "level 2" if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 79", and if it is "80 to 99". For example, the background level of the transition destination is "level 4", and if it is "100 to 399", the background level is not changed. Further, when the current background level is "level 4", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 299", the transition destination background level is "level 3", and if it is "300 to 399", It is specified that the background level is not changed.

In this way, if the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, the background level is defined to increase easily and not to decrease, and if the result of the hit/fail judgment is to fail, the background level is defined to be less likely to increase and more likely to decrease. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the background level indicating the degree of expectation for a big win from frequently rising despite the fact that the result of the win/fail determination is a failure.

Next, referring to FIG. 70, the electrical configuration of display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read out the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 100) executed after the boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 101) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 76) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process during the image display time of one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 102(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. In addition to an area 235d, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b is provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variable image area 235 b , a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 , and the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 by means of a fluctuation effect when a ball entry is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on changing image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2403 and S2404 in FIG. 100).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 72 . FIG. 72 shows a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 72(a). The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 executes the command shown in FIG. 72(b). As shown in FIG. 72( c ), on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, there is a power-on variation image with a symbol "○" at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" as shown in FIG. 72(c). A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, in the case of "special design jackpot", the image shown in Fig. 72 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the fluctuation effect, and in the case of "special design omission", it is displayed in Fig. 72 (c) The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. 72(b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 73, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 73A and 73B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. FIG. 73(b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage", respectively.

As shown in FIG. 73, the back images corresponding to the backs A and B of the backs A and B are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81. It is prepared in the ROM 234 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to "town stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 shifts the corresponding rear image from position a to position a' to the initial position of the display area. , and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . As time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling smoothly in a leftward direction.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 73(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the town stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as for the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage, as shown in FIG. back image area 235c.

Here, the operation of the frame button 22 by the player to change the stage is performed at arbitrary timing based on the player's will. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from position a to position a', and the position from position a including the initial position is fixed. Since the image data corresponding to the image during b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the player can press the frame button. When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of 22, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial position of the back B is immediately displayed in the third pattern. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing color tone over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 on the rear surface B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear-surface image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 70) of the normal-use video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between positions b' and positions b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns (see FIG. 53) with numerals "0" to "9" as the third pattern are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device 81 changes. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the performance is not started immediately.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern imitating the . These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by storing data corresponding to these characters in the character design area 235e. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

By providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, as described above, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

Next, the work RAM 233 provided in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, an appearing effect flag 223m, an appearing counter 223n, an escape counter 223p, a capture counter 233r, a recapture counter 223s, and a storage area 223z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is a effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state and that the entry regulation plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. , the round effect is a effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and notifies the player of the game value (short period of time of normal symbols) given to the player after the end of the big win, or the reserved special symbol. This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big win in the lottery.

A player can easily recognize the time period of normal symbols by informing the time period of normal symbols in the ending effect. The longer the time period of the normal pattern is, the more chances the ball passes through the through gate 67, so the chances of lottery of the normal pattern are increased and the chance of winning the normal pattern is also increased. Therefore, there are more chances that the electric accessory will be released as a jackpot of the normal symbols, so that the ball will easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the lottery for the special symbols will be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first prize winning port 64 is a prize winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the first prize winning port 64, a normal pattern jackpot is generated, and the electric accessory is released, and the balls enter the first prize winning port. As it becomes easier to enter 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand, or in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if the game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that any one of the pending special symbol lotteries will result in a special symbol jackpot, the player can receive special symbols in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that a big win will occur, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will surely win a big win. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of the back surface is to display either back surface A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "town stage" or "empty stage"), or to display a back surface different from back surfaces A and B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of the back surface specifies that one of the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A and B as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A and B, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In this example of control, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 14) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 76), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 75). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 75).

The transfer data information includes the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 75, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 76) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 75, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2405 in FIG. 100). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S4905 in FIG. 120(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 36( )). When the display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination processing (see S2708 in FIG. 102(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see FIG. (b) S2709) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 103 to 116) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 117 to 119) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see 2705 in FIG. 102(b)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 120(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 121) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 76) described later is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 76), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 76) describing the contents of image rendering instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 102(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S4505 in FIG. 117) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 76), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. Therefore, the type and address of the storage RAM where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, . . . , error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see (b )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4507 in FIG. 117). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233j is set to indicate whether the image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by initial setting processing (see S2402 in FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 121) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S5013 in FIG. 121). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S5014 in FIG. 121). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing for that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k selects a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233k is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5102 in FIG. 122).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the buffer flag 233k to be drawn, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 102(b)) is executed (see S5102 in FIG. 122).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of image in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of image.

Returning to FIG. 71, the description is continued. The in-appearance effect flag 233m is a flag indicating whether or not the above-described appearance effect (see FIGS. 57(a) and (b)) is being displayed during the jackpot game. This appearing effect in progress flag 233m is set to ON in the appearing effect process (S3607 in FIG. 109) when an appearing command for display is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and escape effect process (FIG. 110) or capture effect process. (FIG. 112) is set to OFF.

The on-appearance counter 233n is a counter indicating the above-described appearance effects and the number of pending appearance effects (see FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b)). This on-appearance counter 233n is incremented by 1 when a display appearance command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (S3608 in FIG. 109), and is subtracted by 1 in the escape effect processing (FIG. 110) or capture effect processing (FIG. 112). be done.

The escaping counter 233n is a counter that indicates the above-described escape effect and the number of pending escape effects (see FIG. 57(b), FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b)). This running counter 233p is incremented by 1 when a display escape command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (S3705 or S3707 in FIG. 110), and failure effect processing (FIG. 111) or re-capturing effect processing (FIG. 113). 1 is subtracted at

The capture counter 233r counts the number of times the above-described capture effects (see FIGS. 58(a) and 59(b)) have been executed, that is, the number of game balls entering the first specific winning hole 650a. is a counter. This catch counter 223r is incremented by 1 when a display catch command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (see S3901 in FIG. 112), and is reset at the end of the jackpot game.

The re-capture counter 233s is a counter for counting the number of times the above-described re-capture effect (see FIG. 58(b)) has been executed, that is, the number of game balls entering the second specific winning hole 650b. This re-capture counter 233s is incremented by 1 when a display re-capture command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (S4002 in FIG. 113), and is reset at the end of the jackpot game.

The other storage area 233z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 103) of the display control device 113 is executed, the first stored command among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing determines that command. The command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 77 to 87. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize-winning switches are read (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Although not shown, in the process of S101, when the first ball entering sensor 652a detects the ball entering the first specific winning hole 650a in the specific winning device 650, the first ball entering command is set, A second ball entry command is set when the second ball entry sensor 652b detects that the ball has entered the second specific winning hole 650b. The first entering command and the second entering command set here are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and the external output processing (see FIG. 86) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 86). S1001), it is sent to the audio lamp controller 113. FIG.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example, 399, 99, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the starting winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. After executing the through-gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and further, other processing that should be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. In the shooting control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of suspensions of variable display in special symbols) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S208), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B will be given.

Incidentally, in this control example, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 lights the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S211). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), jackpot data is set based on the jackpot type (S212).

Then, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S213), and the process proceeds to S216. When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the processing of S217, it is determined that the jackpot has started in the jackpot control processing (S1004) of the main processing (see FIG. 86) (S1101: Yes). As a result, an opening command is set by the process of S1103, and an opening effect for notifying the start of a big win is executed. After the jackpot game is started, it is determined that the jackpot is in progress in the process of S1104 until the jackpot game ends (S1104: Yes). After that, when it comes time to end the jackpot game, it is determined in the process of S1111 that it is time to start the ending effect, and the ending command is set, and whether the probability variation flag is turned on according to the jackpot type (S1114). , the time saving medium counter is set (S1115).

In the process of S211, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S214), and the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 If it is above (S214: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203f (S215), and the process proceeds to S216. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and the process proceeds to S216.

After completing the processing of S213, S214 or S215, a stop command is set (S216), and this processing ends. The stop command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output by the voice during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the stop command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 executes a process of stopping the variable display being executed with the stop type received by the stop type command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 78) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and is the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the "big hit of the special design" or "out of the special design" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81 perform It is a process for determining the production pattern (variation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be performed.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). If the variable probability flag 203e is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state with special symbols, and if the value of the variable probability flag 203e is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state with special symbols.

When the value of the variable probability flag 203e is ON (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the value of the high probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for use, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol jackpot is won is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become the winning match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the variable probability flag 203e is off (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and , the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol big win is obtained based on the special symbol big win random number table for low probability (S304). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. One of "0" is set as the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol. It is judged to be a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and three types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, It is determined what the jackpot type is among the jackpots B). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot It is determined to be B (16R short working hours jackpot) (see FIG. 66(b)).

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of symbol variations such as normal reach and super reach is determined. Note that the relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

For example, as the variation pattern for failure, "miss (for long time)", "miss (for short time)", "miss normal reach", "miss super reach", and "miss special reach" are defined. , As a variation pattern for both jackpot A and jackpot B, various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified. Various types, "common super reach" types, and "common special reach" types are defined.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is changed. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order, or a complete out-of-order.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", set the complete out. , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. to decide.

After the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 86). be. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, for convenience of explanation, first the starting prize winning information processing (S105) will be explained, and then the look-ahead processing (S407) will be explained. First, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. If there is, it is a process for prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol from the reservation processing of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the reserved various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N) is changed. Acquire (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether there is no winning to the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning to the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, the number of special symbol reserved balls If the value (N) of the counter 203c is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area. Next, the prefetching process of S407, which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

Next, details of the prefetching process (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the prefetching process (S407). This look-ahead process (S407) is executed in the start-up winning process (see FIG. 80) described above, and performs look-ahead of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by various random number counters acquired based on the start-up winning. This process is for

In the look-ahead process (S407), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). In the process of S501, if it is determined that there is no new winning (S501: No), there is no need to execute the prefetching process, so this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that there is a new winning (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time when the variation based on the winning is started is the probability variable gaming state. (S502).

In the process of S502, if it is determined that the game state at the time of start of variation is variable probability (S502: Yes), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the start winning process (see FIG. 80) and , and the first winning random number table for high probability (see FIG. 66(a)) to acquire the lottery result.

On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the game state at the start of the fluctuation is not the probability change (S502: No), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 80) and the first winning random number table for low probability (see FIG. 66(a)), the lottery result is obtained.

Since the method of acquiring the lottery result in the process of S503 or S504 is the same as the process of S303 or S304 of the above-described special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the process of S503 or S504 is finished, a winning information command is set based on the result of the lottery (S505), and this process is finished. The prize winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . By receiving this prize winning information command, the audio ramp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball before the change starts. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute a background-linked effect, which will be described later. The winning information command set here may include information such as a variation pattern in addition to the result of the lottery. Thereby, in the sound ramp control device 113, it is possible to determine the fluctuation time and the fluctuation performance based on the held ball before the start of the fluctuation.

Next, referring to FIG. 82, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the electric This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the win of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the win, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is performed. Including during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S601: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203f during time saving in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). In addition, the time-saving counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols. If the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols.

When the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In this control example, during the special symbol jackpot, the normal symbol lottery is less likely to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to make the specific winning device 650 win. However, when the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is released, the ball that is to be made to win the specific prize winning device 650 enters the second prize winning port 640 . Therefore, this is to suppress the opening of the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640, and make the state in which the specific prize winning device 650 is likely to win. In addition, since the specific winning device 650 is provided immediately below the second winning hole 640, even if the ball is prevented from entering the second winning hole 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the second winning hole A lot of balls enter the 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second winning hole 640 becomes maximum (4 times).

In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning random number table for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 66(c)).

In the process of S608, when the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 (S608:No), it transfers to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the low A lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained based on the normal symbol winning random number table for the probability time (S611). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 66(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S612: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "o" is set to light up as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present is a special symbol jackpot. (S615). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second winning hole 640 as much as possible, even if the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol comes off. , the number of times of opening the electric accessary and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols, so the second winning port 640 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 (S614:No), it transfers to the process of S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, the opening period of the electric role product associated with the second winning opening 640 is set to 0.00. The time is set to 2 seconds, and the number of opening times is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the processing of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the second symbol display device 83 changes The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second pattern display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the opening period of the electric accessory becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640 .

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display.

In the process of S622, if the variable time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 86) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process ends. When the start of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 86) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is performed. is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This thru gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 77) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the thru gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S703).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703 : No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d 1 is added to the value (M) (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. area (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S912.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S913, S914) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 77). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 78) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 80). Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 87) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the ball entry regulation plate 654 of the specific prize winning device 650 is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the ball entry regulation plate 654 of the specific prize winning device 650 has passed or the first specific prize winning port 650a is opened. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have entered the second specific winning hole 650b. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the ball entry regulation plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is closed. The opening and closing of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product associated with the second winning port 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S625 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 82), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the open time and the number of open times set in the process of S616 or S617 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79) ends, the first symbol display device 37 ends the variation display being executed, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 79). Stop display (illumination display) is performed on the device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 82), the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 82), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 82). (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1008, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 84 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1012), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1013). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt processing (see FIG. 86), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning, etc. This is a process for opening or closing the ball entry regulation plate 654 of the device 650 .

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the process of S208 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 78) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot will start. In the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), the variable probability flag 203e is turned off (S1102), the opening command is set (S1103), and this process is finished.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 86). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the processing of S1104, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S1104: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1105). If it is time to start a new round (S1105: Yes), the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened (S1106), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1107). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1105, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the ball entry regulation plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is met (S1108). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the ball entry regulation plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened, or when the ball enters the first specific winning hole 650a and the second specific winning hole 650b is won by a predetermined number (for example, 10 in total), it is determined that the closing condition is met.

In the processing of S1108, if the closing condition of the ball entry regulation plate 654 of the specific prize winning device 650 is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the ball entry regulation plate 654 of the specific prize winning device 650 is closed (S1109), and the round ends. A command is set (S1110), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is not satisfied (S1108: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1111). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the processing of S1111, if it is time to start the ending effect (S1111: Yes), an ending command is set (S1112), and it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was a jackpot A (S1113). In the process of S1113, if it is determined that the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) was determined (S1113: Yes), the probability variable flag 203e is set to ON (S1114), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1113, if it is determined that the jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot) was determined (S1113: No), 100 is set to the time-saving medium counter 203f (S1115), and this processing ends.

The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 86). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. FIG. Then, an ending command for display corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect. On the other hand, in the process of S1111, if it is not the timing to start the ending (S1111: No), the process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 99. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 88, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S1319 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 89, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1316 in FIG. 89), it executes power-off processing in S1319. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1319 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1319. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), it will transfer to S1204 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1319 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1319 is executed (see S1318 in FIG. 89). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1319 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1319 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the power off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1210). Thereafter, after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1211), interrupt permission is set (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely cut off, for example. or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 and S1210, which are clearing processing of the working area of the RAM 223, are skipped, and the processing shifts to S1211. After setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1211), interrupt is set (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1209 is skipped is that when the process of S1208 is reached from S1204 via the process of S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1311. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1302 to S1311 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1312 command determination processing, S1313 variable display setting processing, S1314 jackpot middle effect processing, and S1315 counter value updating processing are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated. The details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1309, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1310), then role product action processing is executed (S1311), and the process proceeds to S1312. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the process of S1310 is finished, the role product action process is executed (S1311), and the process proceeds to the process of S1312. In the character object motion processing, actions such as spherical character objects (330, 340) are controlled based on the character object movement data set in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Fig. 96) and the variable display setting process (Fig. 97). It is a process for controlling. Here, since the role movement data is set based on the SW scenario in the SW effect, the SW effect and the spherical role (330, 340) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. ) can be interlocked with the operation of

In the process of S1312, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S1312). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the command determination process, in the process of S1313, a variable display setting process is executed (S1313). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an effect process during a big hit is performed (S1314). The details of the effect processing during the jackpot will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the process of S1314 is finished, the performance counter 223j, which is a counter used for the above-described accessory-linked performance and background level lottery, is updated (S1315). Specifically, the value of the effect counter 223j is read from the RAM 223, 1 is added to it, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the effect counter 223j is stored in the effect counter 223j.

When the process of S1315 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1316). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1316 (S1316: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1318), and the power-off processing is executed (S1319). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1320), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1316 (S1316: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1317), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1317: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1317: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1312). This command determination process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Further, in this process, when a command for the number of reserved balls is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1401). When a variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), variation pattern setting processing is performed (S1402), then background change lottery processing is performed (S1403), and the process returns to the main processing. Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91, and details of the background change lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1404). When the stop type command is received (S1404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1405), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1406), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 97) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1404: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1407). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1407: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol ) is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1408). In addition, in the processing of S1408, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1408 ends, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (start winning), or when a lottery for special symbols is performed. Therefore, each time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1408. It is possible to match the value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice ramp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc., At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110.例文帳に追加Incidentally, when the process of S1408 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of S1407, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1407: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1409). Then, when the winning command is received (S1409: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S1410), and the process returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (start winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained in the main controller 110, and Each value of each of the acquired counters C1 to C3 is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In addition, as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired in the main control device 110, apart from the original special symbol jackpot lottery, from each value of each counter C1 to C3 acquired, the original lottery Various information obtained when is performed is read ahead (predicted). When main controller 110 completes the prefetching, a winning command including various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by prefetching is sent from main controller 110 to sound lamp controller 113 .

In the winning command process, various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by pre-reading in the main controller 110 is extracted as winning information from the received winning command, and the extracted winning information is stored in the RAM 223 as winning information. Store in area 223a. Then, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the value of the performance counter 223j, Decide whether or not to perform a series of productions. Details of this winning command process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1409, if the winning command has not been received (S1409: No), then it is determined whether or not a command related to the big win has been received from the main controller 110 (S1411). Then, when a jackpot-related command is received (S1411: Yes), the jackpot command process is executed (S1412), and the process returns to the main process. Further, the details of this jackpot command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1411, if no jackpot-related command has been received (S1411), then it is determined whether or not the first ball-entering command or the second ball-entering command has been received (S1413). Then, when the first ball-entering command or the second ball-entering command is received (S1413: Yes), the jackpot winning process is executed (S1414), and the process returns to the main process. Details of this jackpot winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S1413, if the first ball-entering command or the second ball-entering command has not been received (S1413: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1415), and the main process is executed. return. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the variation pattern setting process (S1402) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 90) will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (see S1402). This variation pattern setting process (S1402) is a process that is executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. Based on the received command, a variation pattern is selected, and a required effect command (SW effect command , advance notice effect command).

In this variation pattern setting process (S1402), first, the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1501), and a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table 222a based on the received variation pattern command ( S1502). Next, it is determined whether or not the selected variation pattern is the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1503). In the processing of S1503, when it is determined that the selected variation pattern is the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1503: Yes), the processing of S1504 to S1506 is executed to execute the SW effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1503, when it is determined that the selected variation pattern is not the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1503: No), since there is no need to execute the SW effect, the processing of S1504 to S1506 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S1507.

In the process of S1504, based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S1502 and the effect counter 223j, a SW effect is selected from the character linked effect table (S1504). Next, a SW effect command for display indicating the SW effect selected by the process of S1504 is set (S1505), a SW scenario is acquired from the SW scenario storage area 222e based on the SW effect selected by the process of S1504, The acquired SW scenario is stored in the SW scenario storage area 223o (S1506), and the process proceeds to S1507.

Here, the SW scenario is a period in which the frame button 22 is set to be valid according to the period of fluctuation of the special symbol, the content of the notice display, the display content to be displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed, etc. are set. It is what is done. This SW scenario is sequentially updated by the process of S2002 in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S1307), and the updated scenario is set. As a result, when the updated and set scenario is a scenario in which the effective period of the frame button 22 is set, it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 is valid. In the SW scenario, movable data of the spherical accessories 330 and 340 are also set, and the timing of moving the accessories is set to coincide with the start timing of the SW valid time.

In the processing of S1507, a notice effect is selected (S1507), a display notice effect command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S1508), and this processing ends. It should be noted that, when the SW effect is selected, the advance notice effect may not be selected and may not be executed. As a result, the SW effect and the advance notice effect are not executed at the same time, and the game machine can be easily understood by the player. Further, when the SW effect and the advance notice effect are executed at the same time, the degree of expectation for the big win suggested by each may be the same or similar. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game machine from becoming incomprehensible to the player, for example, by executing an effect with a high degree of expectation in the SW effect and executing an effect with a low degree of expectation in the advance notice effect. can do.

Next, the background change extraction process (S1403) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 90) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the background change lottery process (S1403).

In this background change lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous background flag 223q is on (S1601). If it is determined that the continuous background flag 223q is ON (S1601: Yes), background change data has already been set for the ball on hold, so background change lottery is not performed and the process proceeds to S1602. . In the process of S1602, it is determined whether or not the current background level is "level 4" (S1602). If it is determined that the current background level is "level 4" (S1602: Yes), there is no need to change the background level, so this processing ends. If it is determined that the current background level is not the background of "level 4" (S1602: No), the process proceeds to S1605.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if it is determined that the continuous background flag 223q is off (S1601: No), the background change data is not set for the held ball, and background change lottery is performed. The process proceeds to S1603. In the process of S1603, it is determined whether or not the pseudo variation of the hit is a variation pattern of one time (1603), and if it is determined that the pseudo variation of the hit is not a variation pattern of one time (S1603: No), S1606 to process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo-hit variation is a one-time variation pattern (S1603: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current background level is level 2 or less (S1604).

In the process of S1604, when it is determined that the current background level is level 2 or lower (S1604: No), the process proceeds to S1605. If it is determined in the process of S1604 that the current background level is level 3 or higher (S1604: No), the process proceeds to S1606.

When the processing of S1602 or S1604 is finished, the background with one level added is set, and the process proceeds to S1609.

On the other hand, in the process of S1606 executed after the process of S1603 or S1604, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S1606), and based on the result of the success/failure determination and the value of the effect counter 223j, the background lottery is drawn from the background lottery table 222d. (S1607). After that, it is determined whether or not the background has been changed (S1608). Go to processing.

In the process of S1609, the set background flag 223q is turned on (S1609), a display background change command indicating the set background is set (S1610), and the process ends. By setting this display background change command, the background is changed to the one set by the display control device 114 .

Next, the winning command process (S1410) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the winning command process (S1410). The winning command process (S1410) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1410 in FIG. 90). It is determined whether or not to start the effect of changing the background.

In this winning command process, first, winning information based on the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 (S1701), and it is determined whether or not the continuous background flag 223p is ON (S1702). If it is determined that the continuous background flag 223p is ON (1702: Yes), this processing ends. If it is determined that the continuous background flag 223p is off (S1702: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit in other winning information (S1703). If it is determined that there is a win in other prize information (S1703: Yes), a big win will occur before the starting prize based on that prize is executed, and the effect of continuously changing the background cannot be executed, so this processing is performed as it is. exit. If it is determined that there is no hit in the other prize information (S1703: No), then it is determined whether or not the win is determined (S1704). If it is determined that the winning/failing determination is not winning (S1704: No), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the win/loss determination is a win (1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1705.

In the processing of S1705, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223j is within the range of "0 to 49" (S1706). ” (1706: No), this process is terminated. In the processing of S1706, if the value of the effect counter 223j is in the range of "0 to 49" (S1706: Yes), the background change data is set for each of the held balls (S1707), then the continuous background flag 223p is turned on (S1708), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the jackpot command processing (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the jackpot command process (S1412). This jackpot command process (S1412) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1412 in FIG. 90). This is processing for determining the display mode of the ending effect.

In this control example, when the main control device 110 determines a "special symbol jackpot", the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state after the variation effect corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is completed. , the third symbol display device 81 starts a big win effect. The jackpot performance is divided into three periods of opening performance, round performance, and ending performance. When the jackpot performance is started, the opening performance is first performed, and the player is notified that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state. Next, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, a round effect is started, and each time a new round is started, the player is notified of the current round number. Then, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) ends, an ending effect is finally performed, and the player is notified of the end of the special game state. In this example of control, when this ending effect is performed, a fixed effect display notifying that there is a starting prize that is a "special symbol jackpot" among the pending starting prizes, or A short period of time display for announcing the short period of time of the normal pattern corresponding to the "jackpot of the special pattern" is performed.

In the jackpot command process, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S1801). In the process of S1801, when it is determined that an opening command has been received (S1801: Yes), information on the opening/closing pattern in the opening/closing pattern storage area 222c corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the opening/closing pattern storage area 223k (S1802 ), an opening command for display is set (S1803), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1801 that the opening command has not been received (S1801: No), it is determined whether or not the round start command has been received (S1804). If it is determined that the round start command has been received (S1804: Yes), the display round command is set (S1805), and the in-round flag 223m is set to ON (S1806). After that, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first round command (S1807). When it is determined that the current is the first round (S1807: Yes), the big hit valid flag 223e is set to ON (S1808), and the process is terminated. Also, in the processing of S1807, even if it is determined that the current round is not the first round (S1807: No), this processing ends as it is.

If it is determined in the process of S1804 that the round start command has not been received (S1804: No), it is determined whether or not the round end command has been received (S1809). If it is determined that the round end command has been received (S1809: Yes), the in-round flag 223m is set to OFF (S1810), and this process ends.

In the processing of S1809, if it is determined that the round end command has not been received (S1809: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S1811). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S1811: Yes), a display ending command is set (S1812), 1 is added to the value of the remaining counter 223h (S1813), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S1811, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1811: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining counter 223h is greater than 0 (S1814). If it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is 0 (S1814: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1814 that the value of the remaining counter 223h is greater than or equal to 1 (S1814: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining counter 223h is greater than or equal to 5 seconds. (S1815). Specifically, since the remaining counter 223h is incremented by 1 each time the jackpot command process executed every 4 ms is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining counter 223h is 1250 or more. .

In the process of S1815, if it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is less than the value indicating 5 seconds (S1815: No), it means that 5 seconds have not passed since the end of the jackpot game, so the remaining counter 1 is added to the value of 223h (S1816), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1815, if it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is 5 seconds or more (S1815: Yes), it means that 5 seconds have passed since the end of the jackpot game, so the measurement counter 223i and , the value of the timing change counter is reset (S1817), then the value of the remaining counter 223h is reset (S1818), the jackpot effective flag 223e is set to OFF (S1819), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the jackpot winning process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the jackpot winning process (S1414). This jackpot winning process (S1414) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1414 in FIG. 90). Alternatively, it is a process executed when the second ball entering command is received.

In the jackpot winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot valid flag 223e is ON (S1901). In the processing of S1901, when it is determined that the jackpot valid flag 223e is off (S1901: No), the player enters the first specific winning port 650a or the second specific winning port 650b even though the jackpot game is not in progress. Since there is a ball, an error notification is made (S1906), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1901, if it is determined that the jackpot effective flag 223e is ON (S1901: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the first ball entering command has been received (S1902). In the process of S1902, if it is determined that the first ball entering command has been received (S1902: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the first specific winning hole 650a, so the effect based on the entering ball is executed. For execution, the first ball entry flag 223f is set to ON (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first ball entering command has not been received (S1902: No), the process of S1903 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1904.

After completing the processing of S1902 or S1903, it is then determined whether or not the second ball-entering command has been received (S1904). In the process of S1904, if it is determined that the second ball entry command has been received (S1904: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the second specific winning hole 650b, so an effect based on the entry is produced. For execution, the second ball entry flag 223f is set to ON (S1905), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1904 that the second ball-entering command has not been received (S1904: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1307) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1307). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1307) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not a SW scenario is set in the SW scenario setting area 223o (S2001). If it is determined that there is no SW scenario setting (S2001: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW scenario is set (S2001: Yes), the SW scenario is updated (S2002), and the accessory movement data set in the updated scenario is set (S2003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the SW valid period is now (S2004), and if it is determined that it is not the SW valid period (S2004: No), the process proceeds to S2007. On the other hand, in the process of S2004, if it is determined that the SW valid period is reached (S2004: No), it is determined whether or not the SW has been pressed (S2005). If it is determined that SW has been pressed (S2005: Yes), a display pressing command indicating SW pressing is set (S2006), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If it is determined in the process of S2005 that the SW is not pressed (S2005: No), the process proceeds to S2007.

In the process of S2007, it is determined whether or not the updated SW scenario is the end data of the SW scenario (S2007). If it is determined not to be the end data of the SW scenario (S2007: No), this process is terminated as it is. Since it is the end timing, the value of the SW scenario setting area 223o is reset (S2008), and this processing ends.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1313). This variable display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2101). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2101: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S2107. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S2102), and then in the process of S1502 of the fluctuation pattern setting process (see FIG. 91), the selection The variation pattern type in the variation production performed is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

Then, based on the selected variation pattern, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2104). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2105). In the process of S2105, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the character object movement data is set based on the SW scenario in the SW scenario storage area (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2107. The accessory movable data set by the processing of S2106 is referred to by the accessory action processing (S1311 in FIG. 89), and based on the set accessory movable data, the action and frame of the spherical accessory (330, 340) are determined. The lighting operation of the button 22 is set.

In the processing of S2107, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S2107). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2107: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2107: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S2108). The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2109).

Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2110), and is displayed based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notification to the control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2111). In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern of pseudo variation (S2112), and if it is determined that the variation pattern is not a variation pattern of pseudo variation (S2112: No), this process is terminated as it is . On the other hand, in the process of S2112, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is a pseudo fluctuation fluctuation pattern (S2112), the background flag 223q obtained by adding the background level corresponding to the number of pseudo fluctuations is set to ON (S2113), End this process.

Here, when the pseudo change is performed, the display data set in the display control device 114 are set in advance so that the background level is increased by one. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load without monitoring the temporary stop timing in the pseudo fluctuation and increasing (variable) the background level.

In this control example, the explanation is omitted, but usually, in the game machine, when executing the variation of the special symbols, the characters indicating the degree of expectation of various jackpots, the display of comments, and the effects such as sound are executed. In such a configuration, since the notice display modes showing various different expectations are displayed, the player does not know which degree of expectation should be used to determine the degree of expectation for the big win. There is a problem that the player loses interest in the game or gets bored with the game early because the content of the notice cannot be understood. However, in this control example, since the background level is displayed on the background screen as the overall expectation level during the variable display of the special symbols, the game can be played with reference to the expectation level. Therefore, the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, since the background level is changed each time the pseudo-stop in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped is executed, it can be understood that the overall expectation has changed from the expectation in the pseudo-stop notice. can play games in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, the background level is changed by performing a pseudo-stop, but the background level is changed based on the display of an advance notice such as a character or a comment. It may be configured as Furthermore, the degree of expectation is not limited to being displayed on the background level. Then, by changing the display mode of the character (for example, by changing the pattern or color of the clothes), the character may be displayed so as to represent the overall degree of expectation.

Furthermore, in this control example, the background level is configured to be displayed not only in the current variation, but also when the current variation is stopped and the next variation is started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation of the number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbols is started in the state of the background level of 3, a temporary stop is executed once to display a variable mode with a high degree of expectation for the big win. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to make the player always aware of what the background level is when playing the game.

In addition, in this control example, the background level is used as the overall expectation level when the pseudo stop is performed. It may be configured to be displayed in levels. In this case, the change mode table selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is switched by changing the background level. Specifically, the display of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 without changing the fluctuation time notified from the main controller 110 and the rough display mode (reach, non-reach, etc.) For example, at background level 1, the display area is not divided into single display variations, and at background level 2, the display area is divided into two, and the third pattern is displayed independently in each of them. In the background level 3, it is similarly divided into three and the third pattern is variably displayed in each of them (multi display mode). By configuring in this way, the display of the background level indicates the degree of expectation depending on the content of the variation mode of the special symbol (whether or not the temporary stop is varied), and the case of indicating the selection mode of the variation pattern. You can switch.

Furthermore, in addition to the configuration of this control example, depending on the game state such as the normal game state and the variable probability game state, it may be configured to vary the frequency of the background level rising, the width of the rise, or the frequency of the background level falling, the width of the fall, etc. . Furthermore, the higher the background level, the easier it is to select a variation pattern for executing a pseudo stop (provisional stop). Conversely, the lower the background level, the easier it is for a pseudo-stop to be performed. Further, a background level may be set in advance for the variation pattern to be variably displayed, and when the variation pattern is variably displayed, the background level may be set to the set background level.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the effect|presentation process (S1314) during a big hit performed by MPU221 in the sound lamp control apparatus 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the effect processing (S1314) during the big hit. This jackpot middle effect process (S1314) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the big-hit production process, first, it is determined whether or not the big-hit effective flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2201). If it is determined that the jackpot valid flag 223e is off (S2201: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot valid flag 223e is ON (S2201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the measurement counter 223i (S2202), and it is determined whether or not the entrance sensor 900a is ON. (S2203). If it is determined that the entrance sensor 900a is off (S2203: No), the process of S2204 and S2205 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2206. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2203 that the entrance sensor 900a is ON (S2203: Yes), the entrance passage process is executed (S2204), the entry command for display is set (S2205), and the process of S2206 is performed. Move to Details of the entrance passage processing (S2204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S2206, it is determined whether or not the detour sensor 900b is on (S2206). If it is determined that the detour sensor 900b is off (S2206: No), the process of S2207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2208. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2206 that the detour sensor 900b is on (S2206: Yes), the escape command for display is set (S2207), and the process proceeds to S2208.

In the process of S2208, it is determined whether or not the exit sensor 900c is on (S2208). If it is determined that the exit sensor 900c is off (S2208: No), the process of S2209 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2210. On the other hand, in the process of S2208, if it is determined that the exit sensor 900c is ON (S2208: Yes), a display failure command is set (S2209), and the process proceeds to S2210.

In the processing of S2210, it is determined whether or not the first ball entering flag 223f is ON (S2210). If it is determined that the first ball entry flag 223f is off (S2210: No), the processing of S2211 and S2212 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, in the process of S2210, if it is determined that the first ball entering flag 223f is ON (S2210: Yes), the first ball entering flag 223f is set to OFF (S2211), and a capture command for display is set. (S2212), and the process proceeds to S2213.

In the process of S2213, it is determined whether or not the second ball entry flag 223g is ON (S2213). If it is determined that the second ball entry flag 223g is off (S2213: No), the processing of S2214 and S2215 is skipped, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2213, if it is determined that the second ball entry flag 223g is ON (S2213: Yes), the second ball entry flag 223g is set to OFF (S2214), and the display recapture command is issued. It sets (S2215) and terminates this processing.

Next, the entrance passage processing (S2204) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing this entrance passage processing (S2204). This entrance passing process (S2204) is executed in the big hit production process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the entrance passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the in-round flag 223m provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2301). This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2301, when it is determined that the in-round flag 223m is ON (S2301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot type is A (S2302).

In the processing of S2302, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not A (S2302: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type is A (S2302: Yes), the passing timing is determined based on the information in the opening/closing pattern storage area 223k and the value of the measurement counter 223i (S2303).

Next, it is determined whether or not the passage timing is the exit passage timing (S2304). If it is determined that the passage timing is not the exit passage timing (S2304: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage timing is the exit passage timing (S2304: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the exit timing counter 223n (S2305), and thereafter the value of the exit timing counter 223n is greater than 10. (S2306).

In the process of S2306, if it is determined that the value of the exit timing counter 223n is 10 or less (S2306: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the exit timing counter 223n is greater than 10 (S2306: Yes), a display timing notification command is set (S2307), and then the value of the exit timing counter 223n is reset (S2308). , the process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 122. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present control example, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2401), and the display control device 114 to start.

Here, the boot processing (S2401) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2401) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2501). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2502). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2502, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S2502, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2503). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2504), the command pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 100) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S2402 in FIG. 100) (S2505), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S2401) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 101, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2503 to S2505 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2501 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a at step S2501. and the processing of S2502 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S2503 to S2505 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S2503 to S2505 without performing the processes of S2501 and S2502 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, returning to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2402). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2403). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2403, then the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2404, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S2405). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 120(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S4802 in FIG. 120A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 72 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2708 in FIG. 102B) and simple display setting processing (see S2709 in FIG. 102B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), and the command to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. It is possible to perform a variable production. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2405, interrupt permission is set (S2406), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2406, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 102(a). FIG. 102(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2601), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 102(b). FIG. 102(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 76) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 102(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701). If it is off (S2701: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S2702) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2703) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2702), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S2703), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2702), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S2704). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2703) or the simple display setting processing (S2709). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2705). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a rear face change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the continuous notice is sent to the image controller 237 . A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2706). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2704) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2705), 76, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the buffer information to be drawn. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122 .

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2707). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2707, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front and back reach, front and rear reach other than front and back, complete loss, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2701: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 116, the details of the command determination process (S2702), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 103, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2801). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (see FIG. 117) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2802). , for all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the command types are analyzed (S2803).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2804), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2804: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S2805) and returns to the processing of S2801.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S2805) will now be described with reference to FIG. 104(a). FIG. 104(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2901).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2901, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation longer than the set display data table can be actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2901 is turned on, and other variations The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2903). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2903, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2905). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2906), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2905, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S2904 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. 103 . In the process of S2804, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2804: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S2806), If there is a change type command for display (S2806: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2807), and the process returns to S2801.

Details of the stop type command process (S2807) will now be described with reference to FIG. 104(b). FIG. 104(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss, or chance number) is determined (S3001), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S3002).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3002 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to off (S3003), and this processing ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S3002. In the above-described task processing (see S2704 in FIG. 102(b)), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S3002 is identified from the stop design determination flag set by S3003. At the same time, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S3001, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S3002.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description continues. In the process of S2806, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2806: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot related command for display in the unprocessed commands (S2808). If there is a jackpot-related command for display (S2808: Yes), the jackpot display process is executed (S2809), and the process returns to S2801.

Here, with reference to FIG. 105, the details of the big win display process (S2809) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the jackpot display process. In this jackpot display processing, processing corresponding to a jackpot-related command for display received from the sound lamp control device 114 is executed.

In the jackpot display process (S2809), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command for display has been received (S3101). In the process of S3101, if it is determined that the opening command for display has been received (S3101: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S3102), and the process proceeds to S3103. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3101 that the display opening command has not been received (S3101: No), the process of S3102 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3103.

Details of the opening command process (S3102) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106(a) is a flow chart showing the opening command process (S3102). This opening command processing (S3102) is to execute processing corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114. FIG.

In the opening command process (S3102), first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3201). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3202).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3201, time data representing the performance time is set in the timer counter 233h (S3203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S3205), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 105, the description is continued. After completing the processing of S3101 or S3102, it is determined whether or not a display round number command has been received (S3103). In the process of S3103, if it is determined that the display round number command has been received (S3103: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3104), and the process proceeds to S3105. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3103 that the command for the number of rounds for display has not been received (S3103: No), the process of S3104 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3105.

Here, the round number command processing (S3104) will be described with reference to FIG. 106(b). FIG. 106(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. This number-of-rounds command process is for executing a process corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3301). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3302).

Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3301, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3304). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S3305), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 105, the description is continued. After completing the processing of S3103 or S3104, it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3105). In the process of S3105, if there is an ending command for display (S3105: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3106), and the process proceeds to S3107. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3105 that there is no ending command for display (S3105: No), the process of S3106 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3107.

Details of the ending command process (S3106) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3401). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3402). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the processing of S3401 is turned on, The data table discrimination flags corresponding to other ending display data tables are set to OFF (S3403). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3403, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to which ending effect display mode. can be easily determined.

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3404), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3405). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S3406), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 105, the description is continued. After completing the processing of S3105 or S3106, it is then determined whether or not there is a command related to entering a ball among the unprocessed commands (S3107). In the process of S3107, if it is determined that there is a command related to entering the ball (S3107: Yes), the entering effect process is executed (S3108), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no entering-ball-related command (S3107: No), the process of S3108 is skipped and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 108, the details of the ball entry effect processing (S3108) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the ball entry effect process (S3108). This ball-entering effect process executes a process corresponding to a ball-entering-related command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the entering effect process (S3108), first, it is determined whether or not a display appearance command has been received (S3501). In the process of S3501, when it is determined that the display appearance command has been received (S3501: Yes), the appearance effect process is executed (S3502), and the process proceeds to S3503. Details of this appearance effect processing (S3502) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3501 that the display appearance command has not been received, the process of S3502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3503.

After completing the processing of S3501 or S3502, it is then determined whether or not the escape command for display has been received (S3503). In the process of S3503, if it is determined that the escape command for display has been received (S3503: Yes), the escape effect process is executed (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505. The details of this escape effect processing (S3504) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3503 that the escape command for display has not been received (S3503: No), the process of S3504 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3505.

After completing the processing of S3504 or S3505, it is then determined whether or not a display failure command has been received (S3505). In the process of S3505, if it is determined that the display failure command has been received (S3505: Yes), the failure effect process is executed (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3507. Details of this failure rendering process (S3506). This will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3505 that the display failure command has not been received (S3505: No), the process of S3506 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3507.

After completing the processing of S3505 or S3506, it is then determined whether or not a capture command for display has been received (S3507). In the process of S3507, when it is determined that the capture command for display has been received (S3507: Yes), the capture effect process is executed (S3508), and the process proceeds to S3509. The details of this capture rendering process (S3508) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3507 that the capture command for display has not been received (S3507: No), the process of S3508 is skipped. The process proceeds to S3509.

After completing the processing of S3507 or S3508, it is then determined whether or not a recapture command for display has been received (S3509). In the processing of S3509, if it is determined that the recapture command for display has been received (S3509: Yes), recapture effect processing is executed (S3510), and this processing ends. The details of this recapture effect process (S3510) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3509 that the display re-capture command has not been received (S3509: No), the process of S3510 is skipped and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 109, details of the appearance effect processing (S3502) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the appearance effect processing (3102). This appearance effect processing (S3502) is for executing processing corresponding to the display appearance command received from the sound lamp control device 113. During the jackpot game, a game ball enters the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650. It is a process for executing the production in the case of.

In the appearance effect process (S3502), first, it is determined whether or not the appearance effect flag 233m is ON (S3601). In the processing of S3601, when it is determined that the flag during appearance effect is ON (S3601), since the appearance effect has already been executed (see FIG. 57(a)), 1 is added to the appearance counter 233n ( S3602), the display data table corresponding to the value of the on-appearance counter 233n after the addition is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3603). After completing the processing of S3603, the process proceeds to S3609. By the processing of S3602 and S3603, the cat pattern (see FIGS. 57 to 59) in the number of cats appearing displayed during the jackpot game is increased by 1 and displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3601 that the in-appearance effect flag 233m is off (S3601: No), then it is determined whether or not the running counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3604). In the process of S3604, if it is determined that the running counter 233p is 0 (S3604: No), it means that neither the appearance effect nor the escape effect is displayed, so the normal appearance effect is performed. A display data table is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3605).

The normal appearance effect set by the processing of S3605 is, as described above, an effect in which the effect during the jackpot game is displayed on one screen, and either the appearance effect or the escape effect is displayed. is what is displayed. In this control example, the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into two so that two kinds of effects, an appearance effect and an escape effect, can be simultaneously displayed as effects during the jackpot game. However, when only one of the appearance effect and the escape effect should be displayed, only the appearance effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one screen by the normal appearance effect set by the processing of S3605. Therefore, the game machine can be easily understood by the player.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3604, if it is determined that the running counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3604: Yes), the appearance effect is not displayed but the escape effect is being displayed. is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3606). As a result, the state in which only the escape effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one screen can be switched to the state in which the appearance effect and the escape effect are simultaneously displayed.

After completing the process of S4705 or S4706, the in-appearance effect flag 233m is set to ON (S4707), the in-appearance counter 233n is incremented by 1 (S4708), and the process proceeds to S4709.

After completing the process of S4703 or S4708, the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e are cleared by writing Null data (S3609). Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the S display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3610), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3611). . Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S3612), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the details of the escape effect process (S3504) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing the escape effect process (S3504). This runaway effect process is for executing a process corresponding to the runaway command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 , and the game ball entering the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game flows down to the detour channel 653 . It is a process for executing the production in the case of.

In the escape effect process (S3504), first, 1 is subtracted from the appearing counter 233n (S3701), and it is determined whether or not the appearing counter 233n after the subtraction is 0 (S3702). In the process of S3702, when it is determined that the on-appearance counter 233n is 0 (S3702: Yes), there is no appearance effect to be displayed, so the on-appearance effect flag 233m is set to OFF (S3703), and the process of S3704 is performed. Move to On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3702 that the on-appearance counter 233n is not 0, there is an appearance effect to be displayed, so the process of S3703 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3704.

After completing the process of S3702 or S3703, it is determined whether or not the running counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3704). In the processing of S3704, if it is determined that the running counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3704: Yes), 1 is added to the running counter 233p (S3705), and the value of the running counter 233p after the addition corresponds to the value of the running counter 233p. This display data table is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3706), and the process proceeds to S3711. By the processing of S3705 and S3706, the cat pattern (see FIGS. 57 to 59) is increased by 1 and displayed in the running numbers displayed during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the process of S3704, if it is determined that the running counter 233p is 0 (S3704: No), the running counter 233p is incremented by 1 (S3707), and the appearance effect flag 233m is turned on. It is determined whether or not (S3708). In the processing of S3708, if it is determined that the flag 233m during appearance effect is off (S3708: No), there is no appearance effect to be displayed, so the display data table corresponding to the normal escape effect is determined, and the display data is displayed. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3709), and the process proceeds to S3711.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3708, if it is determined that the in-appearance effect flag 233m is ON (S3708: Yes), there is an appearance effect to be displayed, so the display data table corresponding to the special escape effect is determined, It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3710), and the process proceeds to S3711.

The above-described normal escape effect is a effect in which the escape effect is displayed on one screen on the third pattern display device 81, and the special escape effect displays an escape effect and an appearance effect on the third symbol display device 81 on two screens. This is an effect to play (see FIG. 57(b)).

After completing the processing of S3706, S3709 or S3710, the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e are cleared by writing Null data (S3711). Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3712), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3713). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S3714), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, details of the failure rendering process (S3506) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the failure rendering process (S3506). This failure effect process is for executing a process corresponding to a display failure command received from the sound lamp control device 113. A game ball entering the specific winning device 650 during a jackpot game , and the second specific winning opening 650b, and passes through the exit portion 652c.

In the failure effect processing (S3506), first, 1 is subtracted from the running counter 223p (S3801), and it is determined whether or not the appearing effect flag 233m is ON (S3802). In the process of S3802, if it is determined that the in-appearance effect flag 233m is off (S3802: No), there is no appearance effect to be displayed, so the display data table corresponding to the normal failure effect is determined. , is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3803), and the process proceeds to S3805. On the other hand, in the processing of S3802, if it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is ON (S3802: Yes), there is an appearance effect to be displayed and the effect is displayed on two screens, so a special failure occurs. A display data table corresponding to the effect is determined, the display data table buffer 233dn is set (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

After completing the process of S3803 or S3804, the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e are cleared by writing Null data (S3805). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3806), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3807). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S3808), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, details of the capture effect process (S3508) will be described. FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the capture effect process (S3508). This capture effect processing is to execute the processing corresponding to the display capture command received from the sound lamp control processing 113, and the game ball entering the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game This is a process for executing an effect when the ball enters the ball.

In the capture effect process (S3506), first, 1 is added to the capture counter 233r (S3901), and 1 is subtracted from the appearing counter 233n (S3902). Next, it is determined whether or not the on-appearance counter 233n decremented by the process of S3902 is 0 (S3903). In the process of S3903, when it is determined that the on-appearance counter 233n is 0, there is no appearance effect to be displayed, so the on-appearance effect flag 233m is turned off (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3905. On the other hand, in the process of S3903, when it is determined that the on-appearance counter 233n is not 0 (S3903: No), there is an appearance effect to be displayed, so the process of S3904 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3905.

After completing the processing of S3903 or S3904, it is then determined whether or not the running counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3905). In the process of S3905, if it is determined that the running counter 233p is 0 (S3905: No), the normal display indicating the capture counter is executed in order to execute the capture effect on one screen without the escape effect being displayed. A display data table corresponding to the capture effect is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3906), and the process proceeds to S3908.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3905, if it is determined that the running counter 233p is greater than 0 (S3905: Yes), there is an escape effect being displayed and the capture counter is reset to execute the capture effect on two screens. A display data table corresponding to the special capture effect shown is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3907), and the process proceeds to S3908.

After completing the process of S3906 or S3907, the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e are cleared by writing Null data (S3908). Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3909), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3910). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S3911), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the details of the recapture effect process (S3510) will be described. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the recapture effect process (S3510). This recapture effect processing 113 executes processing corresponding to the recapture command for display received from the sound lamp control processing 113, and the game ball entering the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game is the second specific game ball. This is the process for executing the process when the ball enters the winning hole 650b.

In the recapture effect process (S3510), first, 1 is subtracted from the running counter 233p (S4001), and 1 is added to the recapture counter 233s (S4002). Next, it is determined whether or not the appearance effect flag 233m is ON (S4003). In the process of S4003, if it is determined that the appearance effect in progress flag 233m is ON (S4003: No), the recapture counter is set to execute the recapture effect on one screen without the appearance effect being displayed. is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S4004), and the process proceeds to S4006.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4003, if it is determined that the in-appearance effect flag 233m is ON (S4003: Yes), there is an appearance effect being displayed and the recapture effect is executed on two screens. A display data table corresponding to the special re-capture effect indicating the capture counter is determined, set in the display data table buffer (S4005), and the process proceeds to S4006.

After completing the process of S4004 or S4005, the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e are cleared by writing Null data (S4006). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4007), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4008). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S4009), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description continues. In the process of S2808, if it is determined that there is no big win related command for display (S2808: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a timing notification command for display in the unprocessed commands (S2810). If there is a display timing notification command (S2810: Yes), timing notification processing is executed (S2811), and the process returns to S2801.

Details of the timing notification process (S2811) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the timing notification process (S2811). This timing notification processing (S2811) executes processing corresponding to the display timing notification command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. This timing notification command is sent when a large number of game balls that enter the specific winning device 650 do not enter the second specific winning port 650b and pass through the exit portion 652c as described above. be.

In the timing notification process (S2811), first, the timing notification display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4101), and the transfer data table corresponding to the timing notification display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102). ). After that, based on the timing notification display data table, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter (S4103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S4105), and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the timing notification display data table set here, an effect display for changing the shooting timing of the game ball by the player is set. A specific example is an effect that prompts the user to press the screen and the frame button 22 at the same time. In order to press the screen and the frame button 22 at the same time with this effect, the player needs to let go of the shooting handle. Therefore, the shooting timing of the game ball can be changed. With this effect, it is possible to save the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 from being shot at a timing when it is difficult to enter the second specific winning port 650b, and it is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description continues. In the processing of S2810, if it is determined that there is no display timing notification command (S2810: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display background change command among the unprocessed commands (S2812). If there is a display background change command (S2812: Yes), background change command processing is executed (S2813), and the process returns to S2801.

Details of the rear surface change command process (S2815) will now be described with reference to FIG. 115(a). FIG. 115(a) is a flow chart showing the rear face change command process. The back surface change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back surface change command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the back face change command process, first, a back face image change flag is set to ON (S4201) for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S4803) of the change in the back face image that accompanies the reception of the back face change command in the ON state. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back planes A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back plane image type indicated by the back plane change command is turned on, and the other plane image types are turned on. is set to OFF (S4202), the back surface change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S4201 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S4202. . Then, when the specified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image discrimination flag set in S4202 is used to determine the back face image discrimination flag. The type of background image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 for normal use or video RAM 236 for normal use) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more back surface change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, the command buffer area should not contain two or more commands to change the back face, but part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a command to change the back face. There is a possibility that it will be In the process of S4202, if it is determined that two or more back face change commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back face image determination flag corresponding to the back face image type indicated by the previously received back face change command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear surface change command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract any one back face change command and turn on the back face image determination flag corresponding to the back face image type indicated by the command. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description continues. In the processing of S2812, if it is determined that there is no back face change command (S2812: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a notice effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2814), and if the notice effect command is If there is (S2814: Yes), the notice effect command process is executed (S2815), and the process returns to S2801.

Details of the advance notice effect command process (S2815) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect command process (S2815). This advance notice effect command processing (S2815) executes processing corresponding to the advance notice effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the advance notice effect command process (S2815), first, it is determined whether or not a SW effect command for display has been received (S4401). In the processing of _S4401, if it is determined that the SW effect command for display has been received (S4401: Yes), the SW effect display data table indicated by the received SW effect command for display is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4402). ), the process proceeds to S4403. On the other hand, in the process of S4401, if it is determined that the SW effect command for display has not been received (S4401: No), the process of S4402 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4403. By executing the process of S4402, the SW effect (FIGS. 60 and 61) in the above-described accessory-linked effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. The effect pattern of the SW effect displayed by the process of S4402 is stored in the SW scenario setting area 223o in the RAM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, as described above. As a result, the lighting and opening/closing operations of the spherical accessories (330, 340) whose operations are controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 and the lighting operation of the frame button 22 can be interlocked.

When the processing of S4401 or S4402 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the advance notice effect command for display has been received (S4403). In the processing of S4403, if it is determined that the display notice effect command has been received (S4403: Yes), the notice effect display data table indicated by the received display notice effect command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4404). ), the process proceeds to S4405. On the other hand, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that the display preview effect command has not been received (S4403: No), the process of S4404 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4405. The advance notice effect displayed by the processing of S4404 is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, or the like, which does not require operation of the frame button 22. FIG.

After completing the processing of S4403 or S4404, it is then determined whether or not a display press command has been received (S4405). In the processing of S4405, if it is determined that the display press command has been received (S4405: Yes), the advance notice display data table corresponding to the press effect of the set SW effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S4406), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4405 that the display press command has not been received (S4405: No), the process of S4406 is skipped and the present process ends.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description continues. In the processing of S2814, if it is determined that there is no advance notice effect command (S2814: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2816), and if there is an error command (S2816: Yes), execute error command processing (S2817), and return to the processing of S2801.

Details of the error command processing (S2817) will now be described with reference to FIG. 115(b). FIG. 115(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 114 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4301). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4302). End the process and return to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4301, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4302, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, then in the process of S4302, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 103 . If it is determined in the process of S2816 that there is no error command (S2816: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2818), and the process returns to the process of S2801.

In the process of S2801, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes ), and the processing of S2802 to S2818 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2801 to S2818 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2709) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Only type commands are extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 104 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 104(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S2901, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2902, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119, details of the display setting process (S2703), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 117, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4501). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S4502 to S4504 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S4505. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S4501: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S4502), S4503-S4504 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S4503). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4503: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S4504).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S4601).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, along with specifying the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image, for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4601, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4602), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 117 . After the warning image setting process (S4504), or when it is determined in the process of S4503 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S4503: No), the process proceeds to S4505.

In S4505, pointer update processing is executed (S4505). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 119 . FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4701). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S4701, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S4702). As a result, if it is End information (S4702: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4703). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4704), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S4705), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4703 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S4703: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S4706), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always developed, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4702, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S4702: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 117 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4506). In task processing, the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S4506 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4507), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4508). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4508: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4508: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S4509).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S4509: Yes), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S4510), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4511). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4512), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4513). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4514), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4515), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thereby, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, by only changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, unlike the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4515 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the fluctuation performance performed one before is described. In the task processing (S2704), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S4515, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S4509, if the fixed display flag is not ON but OFF (S4509: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S4516). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S4516: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S4517), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4518). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4519). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4520), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4521), this processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81. , you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S4516, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S4516: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and that demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S2709) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images according to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 72(b) or (c)) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 120, details of the transfer setting process (S2705), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 120(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4801). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4801: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. After executing the process (S4802), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not ON as a result of the processing of S4801, that is, if it is OFF (S4801: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4803), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S4802), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 120(b). FIG. 120(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4802).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S4901). ), and further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S4902). In the processing of S4902, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S4902 that the transfer process has not ended (S4902: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4902: Yes), the process proceeds to S4903. Also, as a result of the processing of S4901, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4901: No), the process proceeds to S4903.

In the process of S4903, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4903). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4904), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S4903, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S4903: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4905), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in V interrupt processing (see FIG. 102B), command Since determination processing (see FIGS. 103 to 115) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 117 to 119) are executed, normal image drawing is set. A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 120) (see S4801: No in FIG. 120(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some image.

Next, referring to FIG. 120, normal image transfer setting processing (S4803), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4803).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4505) of the previously executed display setting process (S2703) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S5001). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S5002). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S5003), furthermore, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state is set to ON (S5004), and the process proceeds to S5005.

Also, in the processing of S5002, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S5002: No), the processing of S5003 and S5004 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S5005. In the process of S5005, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S5005), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S5005: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S5006).

In the process of S5006, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S5006 that the transfer process has not ended (S5006: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S5006: Yes), the process proceeds to S5007. Also, as a result of the process of S5005, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S5005: No), the process proceeds to S5007.

In the processing of S5007, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S5007). is turned off (S5008), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S5003 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S5017. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON but OFF (S5007: No), it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is ON (S5013). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S5009: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S5009: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S5011). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S5012), and the process proceeds to S5013.

In the process of S5013, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5013). The determination in the process of S5013 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the processing in S5013, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5013: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S5013 (S5013: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S5014). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S5014, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S5015), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be the stop type of the big win, the image data used in the performance at the time of the big win can be transferred without delay from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back surface change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the back image in the resident video RAM 235 is selected from the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, details of the drawing process (S2706), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S2704) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the drawing list shown in FIG. 76 is generated (S5101). That is, in the process of S5101, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in task processing (S2704), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately identified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S5102). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ) and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and drawing processing and display processing can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S5102, the rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated (S5103). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting "1" if the value was "0" and "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 102(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

<Regarding the second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 132. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, when the SW effect is selected based on the variation pattern, the spherical accessory (330, 340) and the SW effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are interlocked. A case has been described in which the performance linked to the character is executed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, when the SW effect is selected based on the variation pattern, the effect of pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times is executed. Specifically, as the SW effect, based on the depression of the frame button 22, the content of the comment displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the background of the comment suggest the degree of expectation of the big win, and the frame There is provided a repeated hit type performance suggesting the degree of expectation of a big win depending on whether or not a specific pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the depression of the button 22.例文帳に追加The comment-type effect and the continuous-hit-type effect are switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially different. Further, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 is executed instead of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the advance notice effect executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is executed. The difference is that part of the command processing (S2815) is changed, and other various processing is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125, the display contents of the SW effects displayed in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 123(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display contents of the SW effect of the comment-based effect.

In the second control example, when the SW effect of the comment type effect is executed, the variable display is reduced and displayed in the lower left portion of the third pattern display device 81 . Then, the patterns of the PUSH buttons corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (four times in this control example) in the SW effect are displayed vertically in the center of the screen. After that, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the picture of the PUSH button is changed to the comment display (see FIG. 123(a)). The comment display displayed based on the depression of this frame button 22 suggests the degree of expectation for a big win by the content of the comment and the background of the comment.

Here, when a comment display suggesting that the expectation of a big win is high is displayed, the comment display displayed based on the subsequent pressing of the frame button 22 is fixed to the one with a high expectation of the big win. be. For example, after the comment display with the background of the school of fish is displayed based on the first pressing of the frame button 22, the background of the comment display displayed based on the second and third pressing of the frame button 22 is also the school of fish. (See FIG. 123(b)). As a result, the player's interest in the game can be improved without lowering the degree of expectation for a big win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the SW effect of the repeated hitting system effect in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 124(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display contents of the SW effect of the repeated hitting system effect.

In the second control example, when the SW effect of the continuous hit type effect is executed, similarly to the SW effect of the comment type effect described above, the variable display is reduced and displayed in the lower left part of the third symbol display device 81, The pattern of the PUSH button corresponding to the number of depressions of the frame button 22 in the SW effect (four times in this control example) is displayed vertically in the center of the screen. After that, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the picture of the PUSH button is erased, and instead, a part or all of a specific picture (a whale picture in this control example) is displayed (Fig. 124 ( a) see).

The whale pattern described above moves from the right side of the screen to the center of the screen when the frame button 22 is pressed. For example, based on the first press, 1/4 of the whale pattern is displayed from the right side of the screen, based on the second press, 2/4 of the whale pattern is displayed, and on the third press, , 3/4 of the whale pattern is displayed, and based on the fourth depression, the entire whale pattern is displayed (see FIG. 124(b)). In this way, in the SW effect of the continuous hit type effect, when all the whale patterns are displayed, it is suggested that a big win will occur, and if not, it is suggested that a big win will not occur.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the touch effect executed when there is detection by the touch sensor in the SW effect will be described. This touch effect is executed when the effect with a high degree of expectation of a big win is executed by pressing the frame button 22 in the comment-type effect and the continuous-hit-type effect described above.

First, in the above-described comment-type effect or continuous-hit-type effect, the pattern of the PUSH button corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the SW effect (four times in this control example) is displayed vertically in the center of the screen ( FIG. 125(a)). After that, when there is detection by the touch sensor, based on the pressing of the frame button 22, the pattern of the PUSH button that displays the highly expected performance of a big win is enlarged and displayed.

For example, in a comment-based effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed four times, if a school of fish is displayed as the background of the comment notice when the frame button 22 is pressed a second time, the second PUSH button from the top is displayed. is displayed in an enlarged manner (FIG. 125(b)). Here, the display content of the SW effect for each number of times of pressing is determined by prefetching and acquiring it at the start of the SW effect. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win (that is, an effect with a low probability of being displayed) will be displayed before the frame button 22 is pressed. Pressing of the button 22 can be prompted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. FIG. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound ramp control device 113 of the second control example.

First, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 126(a). As shown in FIG. 126(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222a, a character interlocking effect table 222b, an opening/closing pattern storage area 222c, a background lottery table 222d, a SW scenario storage area 222e, A SW effect selection table 222f is provided, and in addition, various data and programs required for game control are stored. Since the variation pattern selection table 222a to the SW scenario storage area 222e are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The SW effect selection table 222f defines the display contents of the SW effect of the above-mentioned comment type effect and the continuous hit type effect. At least a time comment background table 222f3, a losing time fixed comment background table 222f4, a winning time fixed comment background table 222f5, a comment table 222f6, and a repeated hitting effect lottery table 222f7 are provided. A detailed description of each table will be given later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129. FIG.

The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 126(b). As shown in FIG. 126(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example is provided with a fixed flag 223r and a SW depression counter 223s in addition to the areas of the first control example described above.

The fixed flag 223r is set to ON in the SW effect selection process (see FIG. 131), which will be described later, when the fixed condition of the comment-based effect is satisfied. When this fixed flag 223r is set to ON, the SW effect selected in the subsequent SW effect selection process is selected from the fixed table. As a result, it is possible to prevent switching from the comment-type effect to the continuous-hit-type effect.

It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to this, and the fixed flag 223r may be turned on when it is desired to prevent the effect from being switched in the repeated hitting system effect.

The SW pressing counter 223s is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed. The SW pressing counter 223s is incremented by 1 each time the SW effect selection process is executed when the frame button 22 is pressed during the SW effect, and the number of times the SW is pressed is the upper limit value. The SW scenario is reset when

Next, the contents of the SW effect selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 127(a), the contents of the winning normal reach comment background table 222f1 will be described. FIG. 127(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment background table 222f1 during winning normal reach. The hit normal reach comment background table 222f1 defines the comment background of the comment-based effects to be selected when the hit/fail determination result is hit and the normal reach is executed. This comment background is defined to be selected by the number of presses of the frame button 22 and the effect counter.

Here, as the comment background, the display area of the comment notice display is a blue "blue background", a yellow "yellow background", a red "red background", and a school of fish pattern. There is a "fish school background" to be displayed. Compared to the “blue background”, the expectation of the “yellow background” is higher than the “blue background”, and the “red background” is more expected than the “yellow background”. Compared to the "red background", the "school of fish background" is more expected.

In the hit normal reach comment background table 222f1, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the first time and the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 299", "blue background" is selected, and "300 to 396" is selected. ', 'yellow background' is selected, '397-398' selects 'red background', and '399' selects 'fish school background'. Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the second time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 249", the "blue background" is selected, and if it is "250 to 349", the "yellow background" is selected. is selected, the "red background" is selected in the case of "350-397", and the "fish school background" is selected in the case of "398-399". Furthermore, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the third time, the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149", the "blue background" is selected, and when it is "150 to 299", the "yellow background" is selected. is selected, the "red background" is selected in the case of "300-396", and the "fish school background" is selected in the case of "397-399". When the frame button 22 is pressed four times, the effect counter 223j selects "yellow background" when it is "0 to 249", and selects "red background" when it is "250 to 349". In the case of "350 to 399", the "fish school background" is selected and the "blue background" is not selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127(b), the comment background table 222f2 at winning super reach will be described. FIG. 127(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment background table 222f2 at winning super reach. This winning super reach comment background table 222f2 is defined so as to select a comment background with a high degree of expectation for a big win, compared to the above-described winning normal reach comment background table 222f1.

As for the hit super reach comment table background 222f2, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the first time and the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149", "blue background" is selected, and "150 to 150" is selected. "349" selects "yellow background", "350-397" selects "red background", and "398-399" selects "fish school background". Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the second time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149", the "blue background" is selected, and if it is "150 to 299", the "yellow background" is selected. is selected, the "red background" is selected in the case of "300-396", and the "fish school background" is selected in the case of "397-399". Furthermore, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the third time, the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 249", the "yellow background" is selected, and when it is "250 to 349", the "red background" is selected. is selected, and in the case of "350 to 399", the "fish school background" is selected and the "blue background" is not selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed for the fourth time, the effect counter 223j selects "red background" when it is "0 to 249", and selects "fish school background" when it is "250 to 399". and "blue background" and "yellow background" are not selected.

In this way, the winning super reach comment background table 222f2 is defined so that a comment background with a high expectation of a big win is more likely to be selected than the winning normal reach comment background table 222f1. As a result, in the super-reach comment-based production, it is possible to make it easier to display what is expected to be a big hit compared to the normal reach. In this control example, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the same (four times) in the super reach and the normal reach, but the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the normal reach may be reduced. . As a result, even if the background display is selected using the same table for super ready-to-win and normal ready-to-win, the area of ROM 222 is reduced while making it easier for super ready-to-win to produce a high-expectation big win compared to normal ready-to-win. can save money.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128(a), the contents of the comment background table 222f3 when out of line will be described. FIG. 128(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment background table 222f3 at the time of failure. This comment background table 222f3 at the time of winning is defined so that a comment background with a low expectation of a big win is selected as compared with the comment background table 222f1 at the time of winning normal reach and the comment background table 222f2 at the time of winning super reach. .

When the frame button 22 is pressed for the first time and the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 349", the "blue background" is selected for the out-of-time comment table background 222f3, and "350 to 396" is selected. In the case of , the "yellow background" is selected, in the case of "397-398", the "red background" is selected, and in the case of "399", the "fish school background" is selected. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the second time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 299", the "blue background" is selected, and if it is "300 to 396", the "yellow background" is selected. is selected, "red background" is selected for "397 to 398", and "fish school background" is selected for "399". Furthermore, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the third time, the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 249", the "blue background" is selected, and when it is "250 to 349", the "yellow background" is selected. is selected, the "red background" is selected in the case of "350 to 398", and the "fish school background" is selected in the case of "399". When the frame button 22 is pressed for the fourth time, the effect counter 223j selects "blue background" when it is "0 to 149", and selects "yellow background" when it is "150 to 349". In the case of "350-397", the "red background" is selected, and in the case of "398-399", the "fish school background" is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128(b), the contents of the fixed comment background table 222f4 when out will be described. FIG. 128(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fixed comment background table 222f4 at the time of failure. This out-time fixed comment background table 222f4 is used to select a comment-based effect when the fixed condition of the comment-based effect is satisfied and the fixed flag 223r is turned on (S6103 in FIG. 131). In addition, the fixed comment background table 222f4 at the time of failure defines the comment background to be selected based on the previous background type and the effect counter 223j.

Specifically, when the type of the previous comment background is "red background" and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 7", "red background" is selected and " 8 to 9”, the “fish school background” is selected. Further, when the type of the previous comment background is "background of a school of fish", if the first digit of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 9" (that is, in all cases), the "background of a school of fish" is selected. . As a result, when the fixed condition of the comment-based effect is established, the degree of expectation for the big win suggested by the comment background does not decrease, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128(c), the contents of the winning time fixed comment background table 222f5 will be described. FIG. 128(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit-time fixed comment background table 222f5. This hit fixed comment background table 222f5 is used when the fixed condition of the comment-based effect is met, like the above-described loss fixed comment background table 222f4. Unlike the fixed comment background table 222f4, which is used when the hit/fail judgment result is a hit, the hit/failure fixed comment background table 222f5 is used when the hit/fail judgment result is a hit.

Specifically, when the type of the previous comment background is "red background" and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "red background" is selected and " 4 to 9”, the “fish school background” is selected. Further, when the type of the previous comment background is "background of a school of fish", if the first digit of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 9" (that is, in all cases), the "background of a school of fish" is selected. . As a result, when the fixed condition of the comment-based effect is established, the degree of expectation for the big win suggested by the comment background does not decrease, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, the contents of the comment table 222f6 will be described with reference to FIG. 129(a). FIG. 129(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment table 222f6. This comment table 222f6 prescribes the contents of the comment notice displayed in the above-described comment-based effect.

The comment table 222f6 defines the content of the comment notice to be displayed based on the background type and the effect counter 223j. Specifically, when the background type is "blue background" and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "Do your best" is selected as the content of the comment notice, and " 4 to 6", "not yet" is selected as the content of the comment notice; if it is "7 to 8", "Ikeike" is selected as the content of the comment notice; "A little more" is selected as the content of the notice. Further, when the background type is "yellow background", if the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "chance?" If it is 6", then ``Oh?'' is selected as the content of the comment notice; "Could it be?" is selected as the content of the comment notice. Furthermore, when the background type is "red background", if the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "chance!" If the number is 6", "OK!" is selected as the content of the comment notice, if the number is "7-8", "Good!" is selected as the content of the comment notice, and if the number is "9", the comment "That's it!" is selected as the content of the notice. In addition, when the background type is "fish school background", if the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "great chance!!" 4 to 6", "OK!" If there is, "Extremely Hot!!" is selected as the content of the comment notice.

In this way, since the content of the comment notice to be displayed is selected based on the background type, it is possible to match the degree of expectation for the big win suggested by the content of the comment notice and the comment background, thereby making the game easy for the player to understand. machine. In addition, the comment background and the content of the comment notice are selected based on the effect counter 223j. In selecting the content of the comment notice, the selection is made based on the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j. ing. As a result, the contents of the comment background and the comment notice can be selected at random, and the variations displayed in the comment-based presentation can be increased, so that the interest of the player can be improved. In this control example, the content of the comment notice is selected based on the type of the comment background. may Alternatively, the content of the comment notice may be selected first, and then the type of the comment background may be selected based on the content of the comment notice.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129(b), the contents of the repeated-hit effect lottery table 222f7 will be described. FIG. 129(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the repeated-hit effect lottery table 222f7. This repeated hit type effect lottery table 222f7 defines whether or not a specific pattern is displayed based on the success/fail determination result, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and the value of the effect counter 223j.

Specifically, when the hit/fail determination result is a win and the number of presses of the frame button 22 is the first time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 199", the specific design of the whale is 1. /4 is displayed (see FIG. 124(a)), and if it is "200 to 399", it is not displayed. When the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the second time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149", the whale pattern is displayed in 2/4, and if it is "150 to 399", the previous remains displayed. Furthermore, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the third time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 119", the whale pattern is displayed in 3/4, and if it is "120 to 399", the last time is displayed. remains displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the fourth time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 99", all the whale patterns are displayed and a big win is notified (FIG. 124(b)). )), and if it is "100 to 399", the previous display remains as it is. Here, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the fourth time, the value of the effect counter 223j becomes "100 to 399", and when all the whale patterns are not displayed, it means that a separate big win has been made thereafter. be notified.

On the other hand, when the decision result is wrong and the number of presses of the frame button 22 is the first time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 199", the whale pattern, which is a specific pattern, is displayed in 1/4. (see FIG. 124(a)), and if it is "200 to 399", it is not displayed. When the frame button 22 is pressed for the second time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 99", the whale pattern is displayed in 2/4, and if it is "100 to 399", the previous remains displayed. Furthermore, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the third time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 49", the whale pattern is displayed in 3/4, and if it is "50 to 399", the last time is displayed. remains displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the fourth time, the previous display remains as it is regardless of the value of the effect counter 223j, and the notification of the big win is not displayed.

As described above, in the comment-based production, the player recognizes the content of the comment and the degree of expectation for the jackpot by reading the content of the comment. In the control example, it is only necessary to focus on whether or not all of the whale patterns are displayed. Therefore, the comment-type effect must have a longer effect period than the repeated hit-type effect. In this control example, when the SW valid time is shortened by the processing of S6104, which will be described later, a repeated hit type effect that the player can recognize even for a short time is displayed. As a result, the game machine can be easily understood by the player.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example performs the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1350) instead of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. ) are executed, otherwise they are the same. Elements that are the same as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 130, the details of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1350) will be described. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1350). This frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (S1350) is a process executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 and SW effect is selected.

In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1350), first, it is determined whether or not there is a SW scenario in the SW scenario storage area 223o (S6001). In the process of S6001, if it is determined that there is a SW scenario (S6001: Yes), the SW scenario is updated (S6002), and based on the updated SW scenario, it is determined whether or not the SW valid period is reached ( S6003). On the other hand, in the processing of S6001, if it is determined that there is no SW scenario (S6001: No), it means that the SW effect is not being executed, so this processing ends.

In the process of S6003, when it is determined that it is the SW effective period (S6003: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223j is obtained (S6004), and the process proceeds to S6005. The value of the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S6004 is used in the SW effect selection process (S6006) described later. On the other hand, in the processing of S6003, if it is determined that the SW valid period is not reached (S6003: No), it is not the timing to execute the effect based on pressing of the SW, so this processing is terminated as it is.

In the process of S6005, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6005), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6005: Yes), an effect based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed. Therefore, the SW effect selection process (S6006) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6005 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor is on (S6007).

In the process of S6007, if it is determined that the touch sensor is on (S6007: Yes), in order to display the touch effect (see FIG. 125) in the SW effect described above, a touch sensor command for display is set ( S6008), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6007 that the touch sensor is turned off (S6007: No), this process ends. Here, the display touch sensor command set in the process of S6008 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 is executed. ) to the display controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the touch sensor command for display, the touch effect (see FIG. 125) in the SW effect described above is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, details of the SW effect selection process (S6006) will be described. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing SW effect selection processing (S6006). This SW effect selection process is a process of selecting an effect to be displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed while the SW effect is being displayed.

In the SW effect selection process (S6006), first, 1 is added to the SW depression counter 223s (S6101), and it is determined whether or not the fixed flag 223r is ON (S6102). In the processing of S6102, if it is determined that the fixed flag 223r is ON (S6102: Yes), it means that the fixed condition for fixing the SW effect is satisfied, so the effect is generated from the fixed table (222f4 or 222f5). is selected, and the process proceeds to S6110.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6102 that the fixed flag 223r is off (S6102: No), the SW scenario stored in the SW scenario storage area 223o will be used if the SW valid time is 5 seconds or less. It is determined whether or not there is (S6104).

In the processing of S6104, if it is determined that the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S6104: Yes), the remaining effect period is short, so a repeated hit type effect that can display a shorter effect period than the comment type effect is performed. In order to execute it, the SW effect is selected from the repeated hit system effect selection table 222f7 based on the effect counter 223j and the SW depression counter 223s. On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effective time is longer than 5 seconds (S6104: No), since there is a sufficient remaining effect period, the comment system effect selection table (222f1, 222f2, 222f3, 222f6) and A SW effect is selected based on the SW depression counter 223s. Here, the method of selecting the comment-based effect is to first select a comment background from the comment background table (222f1 to 222f3) corresponding to the result of judgment and the type of variation pattern, and then select the comment background and the value of the effect counter 223j. The content of the comment notice is selected from the comment table according to the situation.

After completing the process of S6106, it is then determined whether or not the fixed condition is established (S6107). Specifically, when the selected comment background is "red background" or "fish school background", it is determined that the fixed condition is satisfied. As a result, even though an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win is displayed, a performance with a significantly low degree of expectation for a big win is displayed after that, which impairs the player's desire to play. can be suppressed. In this control example, the fixed condition is set so as not to impair the expectation of the comment background, but it is not limited to this. The fixed condition may be established when all the contents of the notice are displayed so that the contents can be understood) is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by switching to the continuous hitting type effect in the middle of the display despite the fact that the content of the comment notice with a story is displayed.

In the process of S6108, if it is determined that the fixed condition is satisfied (S6107: Yes), the fixed flag 223r is set to ON (S6109), and the process proceeds to S6110. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6108 that the fixed condition is not satisfied (S6108: No), the process of S6109 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6110.

In the processing of S6110, a display pressing effect command indicating the effect selected in the processing of S6103, S6106 or S6107 is set (S6110), and based on the SW pressing counter 223s, the SW pressing count is set to the upper limit value (in this control example, 4 times) (S6111).

In the process of S6111, if it is determined that the number of SW presses is the upper limit (S6111: Yes), the SW scenario storage area 223o is reset (S6112), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S6111, if it is determined that the number of SW presses is not the upper limit value (S6111: No), S6112 is skipped and this process ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the second control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example is different in that part of the processing of the advance notice effect command (S2815) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first control example is changed, and the other points are the same. is. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

Details of the advance notice effect command process (S2815) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect command processing (S2815). This notice effect command processing (S2815) is for executing processing corresponding to the notice effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In this advance notice effect command process (S2815), the processes from S4401 to S4405 are executed as in the first control example. In the processing of S4405, if it is determined that the display press command has been received (S4405: Yes), the advance notice display data table corresponding to the press effect of the set SW effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S4406), the display data table in which the number of times of pressing has been updated is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4450), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4405 that the display press command has not been received (S4405: No), the processes of S4406 and S4450 are skipped, and this process ends.

By the processing of S4450, it is possible to execute a depression effect (see FIGS. 123 and 124) according to the number of depressions of the frame button 22. FIG. Further, by the processing of S4406, based on the press command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to switch between repeated hit type effects and comment type effects.

<Regarding the third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 141. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above, the case where the effect of pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times is executed when the SW effect is selected based on the variation pattern has been described. Specifically, as the SW effect, based on the pressing of the frame button 22, the content of the comment displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the background of the comment suggest the degree of expectation of the big win, and the frame There is provided a repeated hit type performance suggesting the degree of expectation of a big win depending on whether or not a specific pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the depression of the button 22.例文帳に追加The comment-type effect and the continuous-hit-type effect are switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied. On the other hand, in the third control example, in the effect of hitting the frame button 22 repeatedly, the selection table is controlled so that the probability of selecting the effect is changed depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and the remaining time of the SW valid time. differ. Only points different from the second control example will be described, and descriptions of points that are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the second control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134, an example of a display mode in repeated hitting effects using the frame button 22 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third control example will be described. In the third control example, when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the variation pattern for executing the SW notice effect, the SW notice effect set in the variation pattern is set, and the third pattern is changed. During the display, an effect is executed in which the player is notified to press the frame button 22 repeatedly as shown in FIG. 133(a). In the SW notice effect in the third control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed to win the lottery (lottery for whether or not to display the effect), a display mode showing the degree of expectation for the big win is displayed.

FIG. 133(a) shows a display mode displayed at the start of the SW foretelling effect. A variation pattern in which the SW notice effect is set is selected by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and when a predetermined timing comes during the variable display of the third symbol, the frame button 22 is pressed to perform the SW notice effect. A display mode (FIG. 133(a)) for informing the player of the start is displayed. In the SW notice effect in the present third control example, as shown in FIG. 133(a), the third symbol, which has been fluctuated and displayed at high speed, is reduced and displayed in the upper right, and the display mode of the SW notice effect is displayed in the other display areas. is configured to be displayed. As shown in FIG. 133(a), an indicator is displayed, and when the frame button 22 is pressed, the indicator (meter) is displayed variably (by pressing the button, the color of the indicator memory is changed). The color of this indicator memory is changed in order from the right memory according to the depression of the frame button 22, and when the color is changed up to the MAX memory, the player is notified that the expectation for a big win is high. (See FIG. 134(a)).

In addition, in the display mode of the SW notice effect, a pattern simulating the frame button 22 is displayed, and the characters "Consecutive hits!!" It is Further, under the pattern simulating the frame button 22, a remaining amount meter M indicating the remaining time (remaining period of the SW effective period) during which the frame button 22 can be pressed is displayed. This remaining amount meter M is configured such that the internal color changes from right to left as the effective time of the SW decreases. At the start of the SW notice effect, the inside of the remaining amount meter M is displayed in red, but the display is changed to white (red display decreases) sequentially from the right side (see FIG. 133(b)). When all the insides are changed to white, the player is informed that the SW effective time has expired. In addition, at the start of the SW notice effect, a game explanation of the SW notice effect (“Make the meter to MAX!”, “When it reaches MAX, it is very hot!!”) is displayed. After that, the SW effective time starts, but until then, the color of the remaining amount meter M is not changed, and the player can recognize that the SW effective time has not started.

FIG. 134(a) is an example of a display mode displayed when the lottery for the effect is won by pressing the frame button 22. FIG. As shown in FIG. 134(a), when the lottery for the effect is won, the color is variable (variable from white to red) up to the MAX memory of the indicator, and "Super hot!!" characters are displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134(b), when the lottery for the effect has not been won even after the SW valid time has passed and the remaining time has run out, the character "Unfortunate!" is displayed and a big win is expected. The effect to inform the degree is not displayed. In this control example, every time the frame button 22 is pressed, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not there is a winning effect. The lottery probability is set higher when the lottery result of the variable pattern displayed is a hit than when it is a loss. It can be expected that a variation pattern that will result in a big win is being executed.

In this control example, the variation patterns for which the SW advance notice effect is set are limited to the winning variation pattern and the losing super reach variation pattern. Therefore, the player can recognize that when the SW notice effect is being executed, it will always be a ready-to-win, and if he can press the frame button 22 to display the characters "Extremely Hot!!" It can be expected that it will be a different variation pattern.

In this control example, the degree of expectation for the big win is displayed while the third symbol is changing. However, the lottery result may be directly notified. Not limited to jackpots, points are given for the performance, and the points are used to give the items for the performance, or display a two-dimensional bar code, etc., and capture it with a mobile phone, etc., to create a standby image on the Internet. You may comprise so that privileges, such as, may be obtained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the electrical configuration in this third control example will be described. In the electrical configuration of the third control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed from those of the second control example. FIG. 135(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example. In the ROM 222 in the third control example, a lottery table 222g is added to the ROM 222 in the second control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second control example, description thereof will be omitted.

The lottery table 222g in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 136(a) to (f). The lottery table 222g is composed of a first lottery table 222g1, a second lottery table 222g2, a third lottery table 222g3, a fourth lottery table 222g4, a fifth lottery table 222g5, and a sixth lottery table 222g6. The first to third lottery tables 222g1 to 222g3 are set so that the number of values of the effect counter 223j determined as winning of the effect is different depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed. In addition, in each lottery table, the number of effect counters 223j determined to be winning is set to be greater when the lottery result of the fluctuating special symbol (third symbol) is winning.

In the first lottery table 222g1 to the third lottery table 222g3, the frame button 22 is pressed 10 times or more when the remaining time of the SW valid time (set to 10 seconds in this control example) is longer than 5 seconds and when it is 5 seconds or less. It is a lottery table that is selected when the The first lottery table 222g1 is selected when the frame button 22 is pressed 1 to 19 times, and the second lottery table 222g2 is selected when the frame button 22 is pressed 20 to 39 times. The third lottery table 222g3 is a lottery table that is selected when the number of presses of the frame button 22 is 40 or more.

The fourth lottery table 222g4 to the sixth lottery table 222g6 are lottery tables selected when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is less than 10 when the remaining time of the SW valid time is 5 seconds or less. A fourth lottery table 222g4 to a sixth lottery table 222g6 have the same lottery probability as the first lottery table 222g1 to the third lottery table 222g3, but the number of presses of the frame button 22 is set to half. Therefore, even for a player who presses the frame button 22 less times, the effect can be easily set.

In this control example, the lottery tables with different selection probabilities are switched according to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed. The lottery tables with different lottery probabilities may be switched depending on the remaining time. Furthermore, the above-described structure for switching the lottery table according to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and the remaining time of the SW valid time may be combined. In this case, the larger the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, the higher the lottery probability is set, and the smaller the remaining time, the higher the lottery probability is set. As a result, a player who presses the frame button 22 can increase the possibility of winning the effect by continuing to press the frame button 22 during the SW valid period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135(b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The RAM 223 in the third control example differs from the above-described first control example in that an interval counter 223t, an indicator level 223u, an adapted flag 223v, and a switching flag 223w are added, but other points are the same. be. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The interval counter 223t is executed periodically (every 4 ms) in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201 of the sound lamp control device 113 during execution of the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133). In the button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (see FIG. 138), 1 is added when the frame button 22 is not pressed. This interval counter 223t is referenced in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3, and when it is determined that the value of the interval counter 223t is the upper limit value (750 in this control example, that is, equivalent to 3 seconds), the indicator level 223u is decremented by one. As a result, if the frame button 22 is not pressed for a predetermined time (three seconds in this control example) during execution of the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133), the display of the indicator level is reduced by one. This effect of displaying the indicator level suggests that the indicator level is increased to the maximum value, so that the expectation of a big win is high. Therefore, the player can be urged to continuously press the frame button 22 so that the indicator level does not decrease, and the player's motivation to press the frame button 22 can be enhanced.

The indicator level 223u is for storing the amount of indicators to be displayed in the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133). Specifically, the indicator displayed in the SW effect is divided into eight regions in the left-right direction, and the left region is lit in order. In this control example, it is determined to what extent the eight areas described above are to be lit based on the value of the indicator level 223u. for example. If the value of the indicator level 223u is "1", only the leftmost area is lit, if it is "4", the fourth to leftmost areas are lit, and if it is "8", all A region is illuminated.

This indicator level 223u is set in frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (FIG. 138), SW effect selection processing 2 (FIG. 140) or SW effect selection processing 3 (FIG. 141), which will be described later.

The adapted flag 223v is a flag used for determining whether or not the lottery table 223g for selecting the SW effect has been switched in the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133). This adapted flag 223v indicates that in the SW pressing adaptation process (FIG. 139), which is executed when the SW effective period of the SW effect is five seconds or less, the frame button 22 is pressed a predetermined number of times (this control 10 times in the example), it is set to ON. In this case, a switching flag 223w, which will be described later, is set to ON, and the table for selecting the SW effect is switched. When the adapted flag 223v is turned on, it can be determined that the table for selecting this SW effect has been switched.

The switch flag 223w is a flag used for determining whether or not to switch the lottery table 223g for selecting the SW effect in the above-described SW effect (see FIG. 133). This switching flag 223w is set when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is a predetermined number (this 10 times), it is set to ON. When the switching flag 223w is turned on, the SW effect selection process shifts from the SW effect selection process 2 using the first to third lottery tables to the SW effect selection process 3 using the fourth to sixth lottery tables. will be switched. As a result, it is possible to display an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win even for a player who has not pressed down many times in the SW effect, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, referring to FIGS. 138 to 141, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. Note that the control processing of the main controller 110 is the same as that of the second control example, so the description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 138, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1360) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the contents of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1360). In frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1360), the same processing as frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1350) in the second control example is executed from S6001 to S6004. After the processing of S6004 is executed, it is determined whether the remaining period of the SW valid period is 5 seconds or less (S6050). Note that this SW valid period is set in the SW scenario, and is subtracted when the SW scenario is updated. When it is determined that the remaining period of the SW valid period is 5 seconds or less (S6050: Yes), SW pressing adaptation processing is executed (S6051). The details of this SW pressing adaptation process (S6051) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6050 that the remaining SW valid period is longer than 5 seconds (S6050: No), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6052). In the processing of S6052, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6052: Yes), the interval counter 223t is reset (S6053), SW effect selection processing 2 is executed (S7008), and this processing is terminated. finish. The details of this SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S6052, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S6052: No), 1 is added to the interval counter 223t (S6055), and it is determined whether or not the interval counter 223t is the upper limit ( S6056). In the process of S6056, if it is determined that the interval counter is at the upper limit, the indicator level 223u is decremented by 1 (S6057), a display command indicating the updated indicator level 223u is set (S6058), and the interval counter 223t is reset (S6059), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6056 that the interval counter is not the upper limit value, the processing of S6057 to S6059 is skipped and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 139, the details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1360) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the contents of the SW pressing adaptation process (S6051) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S1360).

In the SW pressing adaptation process (S6051), first, it is determined whether or not the adapted flag 223v is ON. This adapted flag 223v is processed (processing of S7002 to S7004) to determine the player's pressed state based on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the first half of the SW valid period (the remaining period is from 10 seconds to 5 seconds). It is a flag indicating whether or not it is set. If it is determined that the adaptation flag 223v is off (S7001: No), the adaptation flag 223v is set to on (S7002). It is determined whether the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is less than 10 (S7003). If it is determined that the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is less than 10 (S7003: No), the process of S7005 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is 10 or more (S7003: Yes), the switching flag 223w is set to ON (S7004). After that, the process of S7005 is executed. The switching flag 223w is a flag indicating that the lottery table is set to be switched even if the number of presses of the frame button 22 in the first half of the game is small because the number of presses of the frame button 22 by the player is small.

In S7005, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7005). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S7005: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7005: Yes), it is determined whether the switching flag 223w is on (S7006). When it is determined that the switching flag 223w is off (S7006: No), SW effect selection processing 2 is executed (S7008), and this processing ends. The details of this SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7006, when it is determined that the switching flag 223w is ON (S7006: Yes), SW effect selection processing 3 is executed (S7007), and this processing ends. The details of this SW effect selection process 2 (S7007) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the contents of this SW effect selection process 2 (S7008). This SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) is, as described above, a process executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (see FIG. 138) and SW pressing adaptation process (S6051).

In the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008), first, the value of the SW depression counter 223s is updated by adding 1 (S7101). It is determined whether the first lottery table 222g1 is set (S7102). When it is determined that the first lottery table 222g1 is set (S7102: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is less than 20 (S7103). When it is determined that the value of the SW pressing number counter 223s is less than 20 (S7103), the process of S7108 is executed without switching the lottery table. On the other hand, in the processing of S7103, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is 20 or more (S7103: Yes), the setting is switched to the second lottery table 222g2 (S7104). After that, the process of S7108 is executed.

In the processing of S7102, when it is determined that the first lottery table 222g1 is not set (S7102: No), it is determined whether the second lottery table 222g2 is set (S7105). When it is determined that the second lottery table 222g2 has been set (S7105: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW pressing frequency counter 223s is less than 40 (S7106). On the other hand, in the process of S7105, when it is determined that the second lottery table 222g2 is not set (S7105: No), the process proceeds to S7108.

In the process of S7106, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is less than 40 (S7106: Yes), the third lottery table 223g3 is set (S7107), and the process proceeds to S7108. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is 40 or more (S7106: No), the process of S7107 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7108.

In the process of S7108, it is determined whether or not the win/loss determination result related to the variable display being executed is a win (S7108). In the processing of S7108, if it is determined that the determination result is a win (S7108: Yes), the indicator level is set to 8 (S7109), and a display command indicating the set indicator level is set (S7110). , notification sound, and lamp data are set (S7111), the SW valid time is reset (S7112), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S7108, when it is determined that the determination result is no win (S7108: No), it is determined whether or not the indicator level 223u is 6 or less (S7113). In the process of S7113, if it is determined that the indicator level 223u is 6 or less (S7113: Yes), 1 is added to the indicator level 223u (S7114), and a display command indicating the added indicator level 223u is set. (S7115), this processing ends.

Here, the display command indicating the indicator level 223u set in S7110 and S7115 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output of the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 is performed. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the process (S1302). When the display control device 114 receives this display command, the SW effect is executed according to the indicator level 223u of the command received by the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 133).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7113 that the indicator level 223u is greater than 6 (S7113: No), the processes of S7114 and S7115 are skipped, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, details of the SW effect selection process 3 (S7007) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing SW effect selection processing 3 (S7007). This SW effect selection process 3 (S7007) is a process executed to select a SW effect when the switching flag 223w is ON in the above-described SW pressing adaptation process (FIG. 139).

This SW effect selection process 3 (S7007) includes a fourth lottery table instead of the above-described SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) and the first lottery table, a fifth lottery table instead of the second lottery table, and a fifth lottery table. The difference is that the 6th lottery table is used instead of the 3rd lottery table, and the other points are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this control example, in the repeated hitting effect of continuously pressing the frame button 22, the process of changing the probability of determining that the effect is displayed according to the number of times of repeated hitting is performed by switching the table. Therefore, since the selection probability can be changed by a simple process, the interest in the game can be changed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the predetermined effect is displayed by repeated hits in the notice effect executed during the fluctuation time of the special symbol has been described, but it is not limited to that, and in the third symbol, when the big hit is achieved Secondly, whether the probability variation is given by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 during the jackpot game or the normal game without notifying whether the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot is given (whether the probability variation game state). may be used in an effect in which the player is notified by lottery. Even in such a case, a period in which the frame button 22 can be hit repeatedly is set, and the lottery table for determining whether or not to notify the effect based on the number of hits in that period, the remaining time of the effective time, etc., is switched and set. By configuring, it is possible to randomize the timing at which the effect is notified when the frame button 22 is pressed. Also, for a player who hits the frame button 22 repeatedly less often or hits slowly, a table with a high selection probability is switched and set, so that an effect suited to the player can be performed.

<Regarding the fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 146. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, the configuration in which the game balls are periodically guided to the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650 and guided to the second specific winning opening 650b has been described. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, in the configuration in which the game ball is randomly guided to the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650, when it becomes easier to enter the second specific winning opening 650b, and when the second specific winning opening 650b The configuration set for the case where it is difficult to enter the ball and is controlled will be described. Only the points that are different from the first control example will be explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

FIG. 142 shows the opening pattern of the entry regulation plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 when the game ball is guided to the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650 in the fourth control example, and the entry of the guided game ball. , and non-entering patterns, respectively. FIG. 142(a) is a timing chart showing how a ball is entered in the 1st and 2nd rounds when the jackpot C (16-round jackpot) is selected. As shown in FIG. 142(a), in the jackpot C, the ball entry regulation plate 654 is opened for 1 second in the first round, and opened for 1.6 seconds in the second round. After that, after an interval of 10 seconds (closing action of the ball entry control plate 654), the third round is executed. From the third round onwards, until 30 seconds of opening or 10 game balls are detected by the first entering ball sensor 652a or the second entering ball sensor 652b (the first specific winning hole 650a or the second specific winning hole 650b until 10 balls are entered).

Note that this is not the only option, and 10 balls may enter the entrance portion 651 a of the specific winning device 650 . In that case, after 10 balls enter the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650, means for restricting balls from entering the entrance portion of the specific winning device 650 may be provided.

The interval time between the first round and the second round (closing time of the ball entry control plate 654) is 1 second. The game ball flowing down to the first specific winning port 650a during that time flows down to the detour channel 653 without being able to enter the first specific winning port 650a. Since the detour time from flowing down the detour passage 653 to reaching the second specific prize winning port 650b is configured to be 1.6 seconds, even if the game ball reaches immediately after closing after one round, By the time it reaches the second specific prize winning opening 650b during the closed time, the ball entry control plate 654 is open. Therefore, the game ball headed for the second specific winning opening 650b can enter the second specific winning opening 650b. In addition, since the opening period of the second round is set to 1.6 seconds, it is a game ball that reaches the first specific prize winning port 650a just before the start of the second round and flows down to the detour channel 653. However, the ball can enter the second specific winning hole 650b. Therefore, all game balls guided to the first specific winning opening 650a during the interval period (during the closing time) can enter the second specific winning opening 650b in the second round.

FIG. 142(b) is a timing chart showing a ball entering the second specific winning hole 650b in the case of a small hit (2 rounds) in the fourth control example. A small win consists of two rounds of play. The open period between the first and second rounds is set to 1 second, and the interval period between the first and second rounds is set to 0.6 seconds. In this way, the 1st to 2nd rounds of the jackpot C and the 1st to 2nd rounds of the small prize are only slightly different in the opening period and the interval period, and this difference is only for a short period of time. Since they are different, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the difference. Therefore, even in the third symbol display device 81, it is difficult to distinguish between the small win and the big win C. It is difficult to determine whether

The interval period of the small hit is 0.6 seconds, and the opening period of the second round is 1 second, so the added time is 1.6 seconds, and the period required for detour is also 1.6 seconds. Since it is configured, the detoured game ball cannot enter the second specific winning hole 650b in the second round. Therefore, in the second round of the small winning game, even if the ball enters the first specific winning hole 650a, it is difficult to enter the second specific winning hole 650b.

In the present fourth control example, the third pattern display device 81 is used to produce whether or not this winning game is the big win C during the interval period (10 seconds) after the end of two rounds of the big win C and the small win. will be In this effect, an effect is displayed that is more advantageous to the player as the number of game balls entering the second specific winning hole 650b increases during the first and second rounds. Specifically, an enemy is displayed, and if the main character fights against the enemy and wins, the big win C is notified. In this case, the main character's life gauge is increased according to the number of balls that enter the second specific winning hole 650b. Therefore, even if it receives an attack from an enemy, it is hard to be defeated. As described above, in this control example, the player is given the right to know at an early stage whether the jackpot is C or not during the first or second round of the game. A player can be made to shoot a game ball and play a game even during a period of an open pattern that cannot be obtained.

Next, referring to FIGS. 143 to 146, control processing in the fourth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 143, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). In the special symbol variation process in the fourth control example, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit in the first control example (S250), and when the lottery result is a small hit (S250: Yes), the only difference is that the start of the small hit is set (S251), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the jackpot control process 2 (S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this fourth control example will be described. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. FIG. In this jackpot control process 2 (S1050), in the first control example, control was performed only for jackpots, but control for small hits is also added. Specifically, it is configured to determine whether it is the start of a big hit or a small hit in the processing of S1150 and S1151, and to determine whether it is in the middle of a big hit or a small hit in the processing of S1151. Other parts are the same, and the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the jackpot command process (S1412) in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing this jackpot command process 2 (S1420). In this jackpot command process 2 (S1420), the process of S1810 is changed to the inter-round process (S1850) with respect to the jackpot command process (S1420) in the first control example. The inter-round processing (S1850) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the contents of this inter-round processing (S1850). In the inter-round process (S1859), first, the in-round flag 223m is set to OFF (S8001). After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit or a big hit C (S8002). When it is determined that it is a small hit or a big hit C (S8002: Yes), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the second round (S8003). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the second round, the type of jackpot being executed (whether it is a jackpot C or a small prize) and the number of balls entering the second specific prize winning port 650b are indicated. A display command is set (S8004). The display command set in S8004 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1402) of the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives this display command, the main character wins or the enemy wins based on the jackpot type, and a life gauge corresponding to the number of balls entered into the second specific winning hole 650b is displayed. display settings are executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S8002, if it is determined that it is not a small hit or a big hit C (S8002: No), in the process of S8003, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the second round (S8003: No), this process is performed. finish.

In addition, in the fourth control example, in the small hit, it is configured so that the game ball between the rounds does not enter the second specific winning hole 650b, but it is not limited to that, so that about one ball can win two rounds The eye open period may be set to 1.2 seconds or the like. By constructing in this way, even if it is a small win, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the big win C.

In addition, in the detour passage 654 described above, for example, a material with a high friction coefficient is used on the road surface, or unevenness is provided on the road surface so that the friction coefficient of the road surface is increased so that the flow speed of the game ball is reduced. may As a result, the game ball stays in the detour passage 654 during the interval time even when the interval time is lengthened by increasing the time required for the game ball to pass through the detour passage 654. Therefore, after that, the interval time ends, and the ball can enter the second specific winning hole 650b.

Furthermore, the detour flow path described above may be configured such that the passage time is variable. For example, a plurality of detour passages with different passage times may be provided so that game balls may be distributed to the detour passages, or a movable wall may be provided in the detour passage, and the movable wall may be movable. By doing so, the time required to pass through the detour channel may be changed. In addition, a mechanism, such as a cloon, may be provided in the detour channel to randomize the passing time of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to provide variation in the passage time of the detour channel, thereby improving the interest of the player.

Further, the number of specific prize winning ports provided in the specific prize winning device 650 described above is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Furthermore, the specific winning opening provided in the specific winning device 650 is not limited to the specific winning opening, and may be a starting winning opening for starting the start of special symbols, or a predetermined winning opening based on winning balls. It may be a general winning slot where is paid, or a combination thereof.

Further, in the above-described first to fourth control examples, a lottery for the same special symbol is performed based on the ball entering the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640, but the first winning Based on the balls entering the opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, for example, the lottery for the first special symbol is performed based on the balls entering the first winning opening 64, and based on the balls entering the second winning opening 640. It may be configured to perform the lottery of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Furthermore, in the above-described first to fourth control examples, various effects are executed by the sound lamp control device 113 that receives commands from the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various effects It may be configured to be executed by main controller 110 . Since this eliminates the need to send and receive commands, it is possible to provide an inexpensive game machine capable of reducing design costs.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<An example of technical concept in which the driving gear 473 overlaps the notch portion 422d>
a first gear member and a second gear member which are supported by a base member and have gear teeth engraved on side surfaces thereof and are meshed with each other; at least the first gear member is formed of a rotating gear; and the second gear member includes a plate-like portion covering the side surface of the gear tooth, the plate-like portion being the gear tooth of the first gear member when viewed in the rotation axis direction of the first gear member, and the second gear tooth In the game machine formed so as to be able to overlap with the gear teeth meshing with the gear member, the plate-shaped portion is scooped out from the tooth tip side to the tooth bottom side of the gear teeth of the second gear member. A cutout portion is formed, and the cutout portion and the first gear member are arranged at predetermined positions, so that at least the first gear member and the plate-like portion are rotated by the first gear member. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is possible to form specific phase positions visually recognized at intervals when viewed in an axial direction.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a plate-like portion is formed on the side surface of a gear tooth of one of a pair of gear members that are meshed with each other. There is a gaming machine that prevents the axial movement of the gear member on the opposite side of one gear member (see, for example, JP-A-2012-217702). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it was necessary to extract one gear member in advance when extracting the other gear member. Therefore, there is a problem that maintainability is low.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, by forming the notch portion in the plate-like portion, at least at the specific phase position, the plate-like portion and the first gear member are aligned when viewed in the rotation axis direction of the first gear member. Viewed at intervals. Therefore, at the specific phase position, the first gear member can be pulled out through the cutout portion of the plate-like portion, so that the first gear member can be replaced without previously pulling out the second gear member. Therefore, it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pair of meshed gear members.

In addition, since the first gear member is formed of a rotating gear, the second gear member on which the plate-like portion is formed may be a rotating gear or a rack gear.

In the game machine A1, the notch portion is formed on the tooth tip side of the second gear member so that the formed width along the continuous direction of the gear teeth of the second gear member is equal to the tooth tip of the second gear member. is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the distance along the direction in which the gear teeth of the second gear member intersect with the addendum circle of the first gear member. Gaming machine A2.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, it is possible to minimize the period in which the first gear member overlaps the notch portion when viewed in the rotation axis direction of the first gear member. Accordingly, the plate-like portion can ensure the function of restricting the movement of the first gear member in the rotation axis direction.

The shape of the notch is not particularly limited, and may be arc-shaped or rectangular.

Also, the size of the gear teeth of the second gear member need not be uniform. For example, when the second gear member is divided into four parts in the circumferential direction, and the size (especially tooth depth) of the gear teeth is formed differently for each divided part, the addendum circle of the small gear teeth and the second gear By forming the notch at the distance between the points where the addendum of the member intersects with the outer shape, the notch is reduced compared to the case where the notch is formed based on the addendum circle of a large gear tooth. It is possible to suppress an increase in the size of the part. Therefore, the plate-like portion can ensure the function of restricting the movement of the first gear member in the rotation axis direction. It should be noted that there may be portions in which gear teeth are not formed in the divided portions described above.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the notch portion is a circle formed coaxially with the first gear member and having a slightly larger diameter than the addendum circle of the first gear member. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is formed in a shape that overlaps when projected onto the plate-like portion from the rotation axis direction of the first gear member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1 or A2, the cutout portion is formed to have a slightly larger diameter than the addendum circle of the first gear member and a circle coaxial with the first gear member. It is formed in a shape that overlaps when projected onto the plate-like portion from the rotation axis direction of the first gear member. Therefore, the size of the notch can be minimized, the formation area of the plate-like portion can be maximized, and the rigidity of the plate-like portion can be improved.

It should be noted that the size of the gear teeth of the second gear member need not be uniform. For example, when the second gear member is divided into four parts in the circumferential direction, and the size (especially tooth depth) of the gear teeth is formed differently for each divided part, the addendum circle of the small gear teeth and the second gear By forming the notch at the distance between the points where the addendum of the member intersects with the outer shape, the notch is reduced compared to the case where the notch is formed based on the addendum circle of a large gear tooth. It is possible to suppress an increase in the size of the part. Therefore, the formation area of the plate-like portion can be maximized, and the rigidity of the plate-like portion can be improved. It should be noted that there may be portions in which gear teeth are not formed in the divided portions described above.

In the game machine A2 or A3, the gear teeth engraved on the first gear member and the gear teeth engraved on the second gear member are in a proper meshing state in which the relationship between the gear teeth is fixed. wherein the proper meshing state is to move the first gear member along the notch formed in the second gear member and to mesh with the second gear member A gaming machine A4 characterized by being formed by:

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2 or A3, the first gear member is moved along the outer shape of the cutout portion of the plate-like portion of the second gear member, and the first gear member and the second gear member are moved. When the gear member is meshed, the gear teeth are meshed in a proper meshing state.

Therefore, when the first gear member and the second gear member are meshed in a proper meshing state, the notch portion of the plate-shaped portion can be used for positioning the first gear member and the second gear member when meshing. It can be carried out. As a result, it is possible to easily adjust the engagement between the first gear member and the second gear member, so that the maintainability of gear replacement can be improved.

In addition, the case where the first gear member and the second gear member mesh with each other in a fixed relationship means that the rotating gear member to be meshed with is an incomplete gear in which teeth are carved on a part of the side surface. Examples include a case where a movable rack member that reciprocates with respect to a rotary gear member is meshed.

When replacing the gears, for example, which tooth of the second gear member should be meshed with each tooth of the first gear member is a problem. In order to engage the gear teeth, it is sufficient to prevent at least one gear tooth from being displaced.

A gaming machine A5, wherein, in the gaming machines A1 to A4, at least at the specific phase position, movement resistance of at least one of the first gear member and the second gear member increases.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A4, the movement resistance of at least one of the first gear member and the second gear member increases at least at the specific phase position. Therefore, the maintenance worker can rely on the increase in movement resistance to facilitate the work of, for example, meshing a pair of gear members (fitting the gear members at proper meshing positions).

That is, in a state in which the first gear member and the second gear member are stopped in the middle of movement, if the cutout portion of the plate-like portion does not match the first gear member, the first gear member is pulled out. Even if you try to pull it out, the plate-shaped part will be in the way and you will not be able to pull it out. Therefore, it is necessary to move the second gear member. In this case, by moving the second gear member to a position where the resistance increases, the cutout portion of the plate-like portion can be formed at a position that matches the first gear member, and the first gear member can be pulled out. becomes easier.

Examples of cases where the movement resistance increases include the case where a friction member that rubs against at least one of the first gear member and the second gear member at a specific phase position is provided, or the case where the first gear member or the second gear member rubs at a specific phase position. A case where at least one of the second gear members reaches the end of movement is exemplified.

In the game machines A1 to A4, the first gear member and the second gear member are formed in such a manner that they are moved to the end of movement, and the first gear member and the second gear member are arranged at the respective end of movement. A game machine A6 characterized in that, when the first gear member is connected, the plate-like portion and the first gear member at least partially overlap when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis of the first gear member.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A4, when the first gear member and the second gear member are arranged at the end of movement, the rotation axis direction view of the first gear member At least a portion of the plate-like portion and the first gear member overlap. That is, a specific phase position (a state in which the cutout portion matches the first gear member) is formed at a position different from the end of movement of the first gear member and the second gear member. Therefore, when the first gear member and the second gear member are moved and the first gear member approaches the specific phase position, the first gear member has a sufficient speed in the rotational direction (direction perpendicular to the axis). . Therefore, the wobble of the first gear member, which tends to occur at the specific phase position, can be alleviated by the force in the rotational direction of the first gear member.

In game machines A1 to A6, a drive motor for generating a driving force is provided, the first gear member is pivotally supported on the drive motor in a withdrawable manner, and a layer between the drive motor and the first gear member is provided. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that the plate-like portion is formed in the .

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A6, the first gear member is axially supported by the drive motor in a drawable manner.

Here, even if an attempt is made to mesh the first gear member with the second gear member from the side where the plate-shaped portion is formed, the first gear member is brought into contact with the plate-shaped portion and prevented from moving. The gear member and the second gear member cannot be meshed. Therefore, when the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor, there is a possibility that the arrangement position of the drive motor is limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A7, since the first gear member can pass through the cutout portion of the plate-shaped portion, the arrangement position of the drive motor is not limited by the relationship with the plate-shaped portion. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the motor.

Further, since the plate-like portion of the second gear member is formed in the layer between the drive motor and the first gear member, when the drive motor is replaced, the drive motor and the first gear member can be removed together. , it is possible to choose whether to remove only the drive motor.

That is, the drive motor and the first gear member can be easily separated by pulling out the drive motor while the first gear member is in contact with the plate-like portion. By exchanging the driving motor in this way, the driving motor can be exchanged while maintaining the meshing state between the first gear member and the second gear member, and the first gear member and the second gear member can be exchanged again. meshing adjustment can be made unnecessary. Thereby, maintainability can be improved.

The first gear member may be axially supported in such a manner that it can be pulled out from the drive motor. A case where a plurality of pins protrude from an arranged adapter and are inserted into the first gear member is exemplified.

In the gaming machine A7, the first gear member includes a shaft portion having one end fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor, and the other end portion of the shaft portion opposite to the one end. and a rotating body portion connected to the end portion, wherein the shaft portion and the rotating body portion are formed separably, and the shaft portion protrudes in the axial direction from the end surface of the other end portion. A plurality of protruding pins are provided, the rotating body portion includes a plurality of fitting portions into which the plurality of protruding pins are fitted, and the coupling between the shaft portion and the rotating body portion is performed by the plurality of protruding pins. A gaming machine A8 characterized by being formed by fitting projecting pins into the plurality of fitting portions.

Here, in order to bring the first gear member into contact with the plate-like portion and pull it out directly from the drive shaft of the drive motor, a force greater than the static friction generated between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member is required. As a result, a force greater than the static friction is applied to the second gear member through the plate-like portion that contacts the first gear member. Since the static friction is set to be large in order to maintain the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member, there is a risk that the plate-like portion will be deformed or excessive stress will be applied to the drive motor. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, a plurality of protruding pins are protruded from the end of the shaft fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor and protrude from the rotating body. A plurality of fitting portions into which the setting pins are fitted are formed. That is, by engaging the shaft portion and the rotating body portion at a plurality of points, the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member can be maintained without increasing the static friction.

Therefore, the force required to separate the drive motor and the rotating body portion of the first gear member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deformation of the plate-like portion of the second gear member and application of excessive stress to the drive motor.

Examples of the fitting portion include a through hole and a hollow formed in a bottomed cylinder.

In the game machine A7 or A8, it is arranged in the vicinity of the drive motor and extends in the direction opposite to the direction in which the drive shaft of the drive motor extends along the side surface of the motor case of the drive motor. A gaming machine A9 characterized by comprising a regulating section.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7 or A8, when the drive motor is pulled out from the first gear member, the drive motor is pressed against the regulation portion extending along the side surface of the drive motor. can be pulled out. As a result, it is possible to suppress the axial center of the drive motor from tilting with respect to the first gear member, thereby suppressing deformation of the first gear member.

In the gaming machine A9, the regulating portions are formed in a pair with the motor case of the drive motor interposed therebetween, and the extended end of one of the pair of regulating portions is connected to the motor case of the drive motor. a game machine A10 formed on the side of the drive shaft from the end face opposite to the end face on which the drive shaft is disposed.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the extending end of one of the paired restricting portions is formed closer to the drive shaft than the end surface of the motor case of the drive motor. Therefore, the extended end of one restricting portion can be effectively used as a fulcrum for pulling out the drive motor. That is, since the extended end of the restriction portion and the side surface of the drive motor are arranged adjacent to each other, the extended end of the restriction portion serves as a fulcrum and the side surface of the drive motor acts as a fulcrum when force is applied to the drive motor. The distance to the point of action can be minimized. As a result, the force required for pulling out can be suppressed.

Further, when the drive motor is pulled out using the extended end of one of the restriction portions as a fulcrum, the drive motor can be pulled out while pressing the drive motor against the restriction portion on the opposite side of the one restriction portion. As a result, the degree of inclination of the drive motor with respect to the other gear can be suppressed when the drive motor is pulled out.

In the gaming machine A10, of the pair of regulation sections, the other regulation section opposite to the one regulation section protrudes to the same extent as the extended end of the one regulation section, or A gaming machine A11 characterized in that the gaming machine A11 is formed to protrude from the extending end of the one restricting portion to the opposite side of the driving shaft of the driving motor.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A11, the other restricting portion against which the driving motor is pressed when the driving motor is pulled out is at least one of the extending end portions of the restricting portion that is closer to the drive shaft of the driving motor. It is formed to protrude to the opposite side. Therefore, when the drive motor is pulled out using the extended end of one of the restricting portions as a fulcrum, the point of action is closest to the other restricting portion (i.e., the point of action is a plane perpendicular to the drive shaft of the drive motor). In a state in which the drive motor is arranged on a plane including the extended end of one of the restricting portions, the movement of the drive motor can be prevented by the other restricting portion.

As a result, when the drive motor is pulled out, it is possible to reliably prevent the drive motor from moving in a direction away from one of the restricting portions.

In game machines A7 to A11, a moving abutting member arranged to face the second gear member with the first gear member interposed therebetween is provided, and the moving abutting member moves the first gear member at the specific phase position. The plate-like portion of the second gear member is arranged to be spaced apart from the first gear member when viewed in the axial direction, and the plate-like portion of the second gear member overlaps the first gear member when viewed in the axial direction of the first gear member. A gaming machine A12 characterized in that, in at least one of the states, the first gear member and the moving contact member overlap when viewed in the axial direction of the first gear member.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effects achieved by the game machines A7 to A11, the first gear member simultaneously engages with the plate-like portion of the second gear member and the moving abutment member arranged opposite to the second gear member. abutted. As a result, tilting of the first gear member when the first gear member is pulled out from the drive motor can be suppressed.

<Example of Technical Concept of Forming Enlarged Starting Gear Teeth 452b1 for Engagement>
A main driving gear member formed as a rotating gear and a driven gear member that starts meshing during rotation of the main driving gear member, and at least one of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member engages at the start of meshing. A game comprising a meshing tooth to be brought into contact and an intermediate tooth to be meshed when the meshing continues after the meshing tooth is meshed, and the meshing tooth is formed to be larger than the intermediate tooth. Machine B1.

Here, there is a game machine in which meshing between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member (the side to which the rotation of the main driving gear member is transmitted) is started while the main driving gear member (the side rotated by the drive motor) is rotating. (See, for example, JP-A-2013-244210). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the teeth that mesh when the main driving gear member and the driven gear member start meshing are subject to collision at the beginning of meshing and are easily damaged. On the other hand, if the gear teeth are made larger, the damage to the gear teeth can be prevented, but the backlash increases, making it difficult to rotate the driven gear member smoothly. Therefore, it has been difficult to achieve both durability and smoothness of rotation.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the meshing teeth are formed larger than the intermediate teeth, at least one of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member has durability of the meshing teeth that mesh at the start of meshing. can be improved and breakage of meshing teeth can be prevented. In addition, since the backlash between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member can be reduced at the intermediate teeth, the rotation of the driven gear member can be smoothed when the intermediate teeth are meshed after the meshing teeth are meshed. can do. As a result, it is possible to achieve both improved durability of the meshing teeth and improved smoothness of rotation of the driven gear member.

The term "at the start of meshing" means a state in which meshing teeth formed on at least one of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member begin to abut against the other gear member on the opposite side of the one gear member.

Forming large meshing teeth means forming at least one of tooth width, tooth thickness and tooth depth larger than that of intermediate teeth.

A game machine B2 characterized in that, in the game machine B1, a holding mechanism for holding the attitude of the driven gear member is provided.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, since it is equipped with a holding mechanism for holding the posture of the driven gear member, the posture of the driven gear member in a state where it is not meshed with the main driving gear member can be stabilized. can be done.

Examples of the holding mechanism include a mechanism that holds the driven gear member by sandwiching it in the axial direction, a mechanism that holds the driven gear member by mechanical alignment, and the like.

In the game machine B2, the driven gear member is provided with a cutout portion that is cut out in a direction in which the driven gear member is retracted from the main driving gear member, and the cutout portion abuts on the outer circumference of the main driving gear member at at least two points. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that the holding mechanism is formed by:

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the holding mechanism for holding the driven gear member can be formed by contacting the main driving gear member and the driven gear member at two points. Accordingly, it is possible to eliminate the need to dispose a separate member for holding the attitude of the driven gear member.

The shape of the cutout portion is not limited as long as it does not interfere with the addendum circle of the main driving gear member. Formed below the radius.

A gaming machine B4 in which the notch portion is formed as an arc-shaped concave portion circumscribing the main driving gear member in the gaming machine B3.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, the notch portion of the driven gear member is brought into contact with the outer circumference of the main driving gear member, thereby improving the effect of maintaining the posture of the driven gear member. can be made

That is, the notched portion of the driven gear member is brought into contact with the outer circumference of the main driving gear member with its surface, thereby suppressing the concentration of the frictional force at one point, and the frictional force is spread over the entire notched portion. can be dispersed. As a result, the number of places where the driven gear member is held by the main driving gear member can be increased, and the effect of maintaining the posture of the driven gear member can be improved.

In addition, the manner in which the notch portion is circumscribed on the main drive gear member is not particularly limited. That is, for example, it may be circumscribed on the addendum circle of the main driving gear member, or may be circumscribed on the surface where the main driving gear member is formed with no gear teeth.

In the gaming machine B4, the main driving gear member and the notch portion of the driven gear member have their mutual contact points drawn from the central axis of the main driving gear member to the surface connecting the tooth roots of the driven gear member. A game machine B5 characterized in that it is formed on at least both sides of a vertical line.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the contact point between the main driving gear member and the notch portion of the driven gear member is the surface connecting the center axis of the main driving gear member and the tooth bottom of the driven gear member. Since it is formed on at least both sides of the drawn perpendicular line, it is possible to prevent rotation (movement) of the driven gear member in both directions when the cutout portion is in contact with the main driving gear member.

Examples of the driven gear member include a rotating gear member formed as a rotating gear and a rack gear formed as a parallel-moving gear.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B5, the driven gear member has an engagement protrusion receiving portion formed to be larger than the meshing teeth, and the engagement protrusion receiving portion is formed with the notch portion. , a game machine B6 characterized in that meshing between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member is started after the meshing teeth of the main driving gear member and the engaging projecting receiving portion abut against each other. .

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B2 to B5, by using the engaging projecting receiving portion as a substitute for the teeth that contact the main driving gear member, the durability of the driven gear member is increased. can improve sexuality.

The engagement projecting receiving portion in which the notch portion is formed is not originally a portion that engages with the gear teeth of the main driving gear member, but is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the main driving gear member to adjust the posture of the driven gear member. It is part of the role to maintain. Therefore, unlike the gear teeth, the size is not limited according to the size of the gear teeth to be meshed. Therefore, the durability of the driven gear member is improved by using the engagement projecting receiving portion that is stronger than the gear teeth for the portion that abuts when the main driving gear member and the driven gear member start meshing. can be made

In the game machine B6, the main driving gear member has a depression formed adjacent to the meshing tooth, and the meshing tooth of the main driving gear member abuts against the engagement projection receiving portion. The game machine B7 is characterized in that the driven gear member is rotated in such a manner that the engaging projecting receiving portion advances into the recessed portion.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the driven gear member is rotated before the meshing teeth of the main gear member come into contact with the engagement projecting receiving portion of the driven gear member. and the driven gear member can suppress the impact at the start of meshing.

Here, when the driven gear member is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the main driving gear member at two points, the attitude of the driven gear member is maintained even if the main driving gear member rotates. On the other hand, when the meshing tooth of the main driving gear member comes close to the engaging projection receiving portion of the driven gear member, the recess formed adjacent to the meshing tooth faces the engaging projection receiving portion. Since the recessed portion does not come into contact with the engaging projecting receiving portion, the effect of maintaining the posture of the driven gear member is released. Then, the driven gear member is slightly rotated by the frictional force generated between the outer peripheral surface of the main driving gear member and the engagement projection receiving portion, and the engagement projection receiving portion enters the recess. As a result, the driven gear member starts rotating before the meshing teeth of the main driving gear member come into contact with the engagement projecting receiving portion of the driven gear member, so that the main driving gear member and the driven gear member start meshing. It is possible to suppress the impact when doing.

<An example of technical concept in which the projecting gear member 7452e moves in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452>
a driving source that generates a driving force; a main driving gear member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving source; a first moving member that is moved in conjunction with the rotation of the main driving gear member; A driven gear member that starts to move in conjunction with the main driving gear member on the way, a second moving member that moves in conjunction with the movement of the driven gear member, and the interlocking of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. an adjusting device for starting, wherein the first moving member is moved in a moving range from a base end of movement to a terminal end of movement, and the driven gear member starts moving in conjunction with the main driving gear member by the adjusting device. A game machine C1 characterized in that a plurality of positions of the first moving member can be formed at a time.

Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that includes a first moving member and a second moving member that are moved by a driving force of a single driving source (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2009-125092). ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the mode of the second moving member at a specific position in the middle of the movement of the first moving member is limited to one way, so there is a problem that the variation of the effect is small.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the adjusting device can form a plurality of positions of the first moving member when the driven gear member starts to move in conjunction with the main driving gear member. A plurality of positions of the first moving member can be formed when the moving member starts to move. Therefore, it is possible to form a plurality of variations of effects of the first moving member and the second moving member.

When the driven gear member starts to move in conjunction with the main driving gear member, the driven gear member is moved by meshing the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. A mode in which the driven gear member is moved by friction generated between the gear members, or a magnetic force generated between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member, which are formed of a magnetic material. A mode in which the driven gear member is moved is exemplified.

Further, as a form of forming the adjusting device, there is a form in which the gear teeth of at least one of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member are formed so as to protrude in a direction away from the rotation shaft, and a form in which the gear teeth of at least one of the main driving gear member and the driven gear member are formed to be able to protrude. A mode in which the distance can be changed is exemplified.

In the gaming machine C1, the interlocking between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member is due to meshing, and the adjusting device is disposed on the main driving gear member and moves in the radial direction of the main driving gear member. The protruding member has a protruding state in which the protruding member protrudes to a position where it can contact the driven gear member in the rotational direction of the main driving gear member, and a protruding member in which the protruding member contacts the driven gear member in the rotational direction. a retracted state in which the protruding member is placed in an impossible position, and the protruding member abuts the driven gear member when the main driving gear member rotates while the protruding member forms the protruding state. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the main driving gear member and the driven gear member start meshing with each other.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the manner in which the main driving gear member and the driven gear member are interlocked differs depending on whether the protruding member of the adjustment device is in the extended state or the retracted state. can let

Here, the engagement between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member can be started and released by changing the inter-axis distance between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. However, in that case, it is necessary to move the rotating shaft in the direction perpendicular to the axis while maintaining the parallelism of the rotating shaft in order to suppress the meshing resistance between the main driving gear member and the driven gear member. requested. Therefore, the mechanism for moving the main driving gear member and the driven gear member may become complicated.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine C2, the main driving gear member has a protruding member that is formed to be movable in the radial direction, and when the protruding member protrudes (when forming a protruding state), the main driving gear member and the driven gear Engagement with the member is started. Therefore, since it is not necessary to move the rotation shafts of the main drive gear member and the driven gear member, the parallelism of the rotation shafts is maintained. Therefore, the mechanism for moving the protruding member does not require high accuracy, and the mechanism for moving the protruding member can be simplified.

In addition, as a method of forming the projecting member in a projecting state, there is a method of projecting the projecting member by centrifugal force generated when the main driving gear member is rotated, a method of projecting the projecting member by a solenoid arranged inside the projecting member, and driving of the solenoid. A method of projecting the protruding member and the like are exemplified. Also, the number of protruding members may be one or plural.

In the gaming machine C2, the protruding member receives an urging force generated toward the rotating shaft of the main driving gear member, thereby forming the recessed state at least when the main driving gear member is stationary, and rotating the main driving gear member. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that it is formed so as to be switchable between the immersed state and the extended state by switching the rotation speed of the game machine.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, by varying the rotation speed of the main driving gear member, the protruding member contacts the driven gear member and the protruding member is in contact with the driven gear member. You can switch between the idle state and the immersive state.

As a result, the control of the operating speed of the drive source and the state of the protruding member can be interlocked. Control can be simplified.

Examples of members that generate the biasing force include elastic springs such as coil springs and torsion springs, and members made of a rubber material having sufficient elasticity.

Also, a plurality of protruding members may be arranged on the main driving gear member with different phases. In this case, the amount by which each projecting member protrudes can be adjusted by adjusting the weight of each projecting member and the biasing force acting on each projecting member.

In game machine C2 or C3, the projecting member comprises a first projecting member and a second projecting member formed out of phase with the first projecting member, and the first projecting member and the second projecting member are are substantially equal in amount to protrude due to the rotation of the main driving gear member, and the main driving gear member has a first rotational speed at which the first protruding member and the second protruding member form the retracted state; a second rotational speed at which the first protruding member and the second protruding member form the overhanging state, and the rotational speed of the main drive gear member is set between the first rotational speed and the second rotational speed; A gaming machine C4 characterized in that it is possible to switch between the main driving gear members during rotation.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, by changing the rotation speed of the main driving gear member during rotation, the phase at which the first projecting member starts contacting the driven gear member The main driving gear member can be brought into contact with the driven gear member in at least two different phases including the phase in which the two protruding members start coming into contact with the driven gear member.

That is, by rotating the main driving gear member at the first rotational speed and changing the rotational speed of the main driving gear member to the second rotational speed immediately before the first protruding member is positioned on the driven gear member side, One protruding member can initiate meshing with the driven gear member. On the other hand, rotating the main driving gear member at the first rotational speed, and changing the rotational speed of the main driving gear member to the second rotational speed immediately before the second protruding member is positioned on the driven gear member side. , the second protruding member can start meshing with the driven gear member.

In other words, by arbitrarily selecting the timing for increasing the rotation speed of the main drive gear member, the timing for extending and retracting the projecting member can be arbitrarily selected. That is, even if the moving speed of the first moving member is the same when the first moving member starts moving, the timing of moving the second moving member can be changed according to the timing of increasing the moving speed of the first moving member. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the subsequent performance only by confirming the speed at which the first moving member starts moving, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention paid to the actions of the first moving member and the second moving member. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the first moving member and the second moving member.

In the case where the first projecting member and the second projecting member project with approximately the same projecting amount, the mass of the first projecting member and the second projecting member are made equal and the load applied to each of them is set to be the same. In the case where the forces are equal, or the masses of the first protruding member and the second protruding member are different, the radially outward force generated by the rotation of the main drive gear member is different. A case where the urging force acting on the member is changed is exemplified. For example, when the biasing force is generated by an elastic spring, changing the spring constants of the elastic spring that applies the biasing force to the first protruding member and the elastic spring that applies the biasing force to the second protruding member is exemplified.

In the game machine C2 or C3, the projecting member is formed with a first projecting member and a phase difference from the first projecting member, and the first projecting member is formed on the driven gear member during rotation of the main driving gear member. a second protruding member that comes close to the driven gear member after coming close thereto, wherein the first protruding member and the second protruding member are formed to have different amounts of protruding by rotation of the main driving gear member. The main driving gear member has a separation rotational speed at which the first protruding member forms the retracted state and the second protruding member forms the extended state, the first protruding member and A game machine C5 characterized in that both of the second protruding members are capable of forming a joint rotation speed for forming the overhanging state.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, the state in which the first projecting member is brought into contact with the driven gear member without changing the rotation speed of the main driving gear member during rotation, and the second A state in which the protruding member abuts against the driven gear member can be formed.

That is, when the main driving gear member is rotated at the separation rotation speed at a constant speed, the main driving gear member starts meshing with the driven gear member at the second protruding member. On the other hand, by rotating the main driving gear member at the common rotational speed, the main driving gear member starts meshing with the driven gear member at the first protruding member.

That is, it is not necessary to change the rotation speed of the drive source during the rotation of the main driving gear member in order to change the position of the first transfer member when the second transfer member starts to move, so control of the drive source can be simplified. can be

<Feature D group> (Information that the prize was won by detouring)
A ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, a privilege giving means for awarding a privilege advantageous to a player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, and a game ball to the ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed between an open position where the ball can be entered and a regulation position that regulates the entry of a game ball, and the variable means is changed from the regulation position to the open position based on the establishment of a specific condition. a specific game executing means for executing a specific game in which the opening action is set a plurality of times until a predetermined condition is established;
When the specific game is being executed by the specific game executing means, ball entry assisting means for facilitating entry of the game ball on the regulating position of the variable means into the ball entry means by the subsequent release operation. A gaming machine D1 characterized by having:

Here, as one of conventional game machines, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a symbol display device. If the symbols to be stopped after the start and the end of variation are a predetermined combination of symbols, a big win is achieved, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Specifically, in the special game state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is closed after being opened for a predetermined time (or the time until a predetermined number of prizes are won), and such opening and closing operations are performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16 times) are repeated. A large amount of prize balls can be paid out by allowing game balls to enter the large prize winning opening in the open state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-700). However, in such a game machine, when the opening and closing operations are repeatedly performed, the game balls that reach the variable winning device during the closing operation cannot enter, and the game balls that have been shot are wasted. There is a problem that the player loses the interest of the player. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and provides a gaming machine capable of suppressing the waste of game balls shot by a player and enhancing the interest of the player. intended to provide.

According to the gaming machine D1, even a game ball that has flowed down to the regulating position of the variable means is made easier to enter the ball entering means at the next and subsequent open positions by the ball entering assisting means, so that it enters the ball entering means. There is an effect that the number of game balls that do not play can be suppressed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the ball entry assistance means has a guide path for guiding the game ball on the regulation position of the variable means to a position where the ball entry means can enter the game ball. Machine D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the ball entry assist means has a guide path for guiding the game ball on the regulation position of the variable means to a position where the ball entry means can enter. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of game balls entering the ball entering means can be increased.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the ball entry assisting means reduces the flow rate so that the ball can enter the ball entering means until the variable means is changed to the open position. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it has a flow-down speed reducing means for reducing the flow rate.

According to the game machine D3, in the game machine D1 or D2, the flow speed is reduced so that the game ball flows down within the range where the ball can enter the ball entering means until the variable means is changed to the open position. Since the ball-entering assisting means has the flow-down velocity reducing means, the ball-entering means can be made to enter more game balls.

a first detection means for detecting a game ball that could not be entered due to the variable means being in the regulation position when the specific game is being executed in any one of the game machines D1 to D3; a second detecting means capable of detecting a game ball detected by the first detecting means when the game ball enters the ball entering means by the entering ball assist means; and a game ball detected by the first detecting means. an effect executing means for executing a first effect based on the detection of the above, and executing a second effect different from the first effect when the game ball is detected by the second detecting means. A gaming machine D4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specific game is being executed, the first detection means detects the game ball that could not be entered due to the variable means being in the restricted position. When the game ball detected by the first detection means enters the ball entry means by the ball entry assistance means, the game ball is detected by the second detection means. The first effect is executed by the effect execution means based on the game ball being detected by the first detection means. Further, when the game ball is detected by the second detecting means, the second effect different from the first effect is executed by the effect executing means. As a result, when the player enters the game ball into the ball entering means, the effect execution means executes whether or not the game ball that was originally not entered into the ball entering means enters the ball entering means by the ball entering assisting means. It can be determined by the production that is done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can recognize that the player is at an advantage by the second effect.

The gaming machine D4 has display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, and the effect execution means selects a first effect mode corresponding to the first effect and a second effect mode corresponding to the second effect. A game machine D5 characterized in that it is constructed so that it can be displayed on at least the display means.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the presentation modes corresponding to the first presentation and the second presentation are displayed on the display means, so that the meaning of the presentation can be recognized more easily. effective.

In the game machine D4 or D5, the second effect suggests that the game ball is entered into the ball entering means by the ball entering auxiliary means even though the ball entering means is at the regulating position. A game machine D6 characterized in that it is composed of an effect to play.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4 or D5, it can be recognized that the game ball that was on the regulation position by the second effect has entered the ball entering means by the ball entering assisting means. There is an effect that the interest of the person can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines D4 to D6, when the specific game is being executed, a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the second detecting means, and a count value based on the count value by the counting means and an informing means for informing the informing mode.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines D4 to D6, the number detected by the second detection means is notified by the notification means, so the number of game balls advantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to determine

In any one of the game machines D4 to D7, when a game ball is detected by the first detection means, it has a determination means for determining whether the detected game ball has entered the ball entering means, The effect executing means executes a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect when it is determined by the determining means that the game ball has not entered the game ball. Game machine D8 to play.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the game ball that could not be entered due to the regulation position finally failed to enter the ball entry means as a third effect. There is an effect that the game can be recognized by the game, and a sharpness can be given to the game.

In gaming machines D1 to D8, at least the specified game type determination means for determining the type of the specified game executed by the specified game execution means, and the type of the specified game determined by the specified game type determination means, A gaming machine D9 characterized by comprising a specific game storage means storing a plurality of the specific games having different execution intervals of opening actions.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D8, as the type of the specific game, types with different execution intervals of the release operation are set, so that the ease of ball entry by the ball entry assisting means is increased. There is an effect that it can be varied depending on the type of specific game.

In the gaming machine D10, the specific game stored in the specific game storage means is a first specific game in which the execution interval at which the game ball is easily entered into the ball entering means by the ball entering assist means is set to be large. The game includes a game and a second specific game having a shorter execution interval in which the game ball is more likely to be entered into the ball entering means by the entering assisting means than the first specified game. A gaming machine D11.

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D10, there is an effect that the ease with which a ball is entered by the ball entry assist means can be varied according to the type of the specific game.

In the gaming machine D11, the gaming machine D12 is characterized in that the first specific game and the second specific game are set so that the number of opening operations is different.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D11, it is possible to differentiate the values of the first specific game and the second specific game, and to provide the game with more contrast. .

<Characteristic group E> (winning control of jump-up bonus)
A ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a privilege granting means for imparting a privilege advantageous to a player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means, and the game ball entering means being the game ball entering means. A variable means that can be changed between an open position where a game ball can be entered and a regulation position that regulates the entry of a game ball, and an opening that changes the variable means from the regulation position to the open position based on the establishment of a specific condition. Specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the action is set multiple times, specific game type determination means for determining the type of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means, and the specific game type determination means and storage means for storing at least a plurality of the specific games having different opening motion patterns as the specific games.

Here, as one of conventional game machines, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a symbol display device. If the symbols to be stopped after the start and the end of variation are a predetermined combination of symbols, a big win is achieved, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Specifically, in the special game state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is closed after being opened for a predetermined time (or the time until a predetermined number of prizes are won), and such opening and closing operations are performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16 times) are repeated. A large amount of prize balls can be paid out by allowing game balls to enter the large prize winning opening in the open state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 9-700). On the other hand, there is a problem that the opening pattern of the variable prize winning device is constant, the game becomes monotonous, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, when the game ball enters the ball entry means into which the game ball can enter, the privilege giving advantage to the player is given by the privilege giving means. The ball entry means is varied by an open position in which a game ball can enter, a regulation position in which entry of a game ball is restricted, and a variable means. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the specific game executing means executes the specific game in which the opening operation for changing the variable means from the restricted position to the open position is set a plurality of times. The type of the specific game executed by the specific game executing means is determined by the specific game type determining means. As the specific game determined by the specific game type determining means, at least a plurality of specific games having different opening motion patterns are stored by the storage means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the specific game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

In the gaming machine E1, when the specific game is being executed, a ball entry assisting means for making it easier for the game ball on the regulation position of the variable means to enter the ball entry means in the subsequent release operation. A game machine E2 characterized by having

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, when the specific game is being executed, the game ball on the regulating position of the variable means is moved to the ball entering means by the subsequent opening operation by the ball entering assisting means. Since it is easy to enter the ball at , there is an effect that it can be more advantageous to the player.

In the gaming machine E2, in the plurality of specific games stored in the storage means, when the variable means is varied to the open position, a game ball enters the entering means by the entering assist means. A first specific game containing many advantageous opening action patterns, which is one of the opening action patterns that are likely to be played, and a second specific game having fewer advantageous opening action patterns than the first specific game. The game machine E3 is characterized by being set at least.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, it is possible to set a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous to the player, so that the game can be varied. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine E3, in the first specific game, after executing the advantageous opening operation pattern a predetermined number of times, the variable means is variable to the open position for a period longer than the opening operation in the advantageous opening operation pattern. The opening operation is set at least once, and the second specific game is such that a game ball is entered into the ball entry assist means by the ball entry assist means of the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that it is composed of an opening operation of a disadvantageous opening operation pattern that makes it difficult to open the game machine E4.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects of the game machine E3, it is possible to set a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous to the player, so that the game can be varied. has the effect of being able to

In the game machine E4, a detecting means capable of detecting a game ball entered into the entering means by the entering ball assisting means, and an effect for executing a specific effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means. and an execution means.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the specific effect is executed based on the detection of the game ball entering the ball entering means by the ball entering assisting means. There is an effect that it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the state has become advantageous to

In the gaming machine E5, in the first specific game, after the predetermined number of times of the advantageous opening action pattern, the interval until the next opening action is executed is longer than the execution interval of other opening actions. A long long interval is set, and in the second specific game, after the disadvantageous opening action pattern of the predetermined number of times, the end period of the specific game longer than the long interval is set. A gaming machine E6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the first specific game and the second specific game up to the opening operation pattern of a predetermined number of times. There is an effect that it is possible to expect whether the game is the first specific game or the second specific game.

In the gaming machine E6, a ball-entering effect execution means for executing a performance based on the detection result of the game ball by the detection means during the first specific game or the second specific game during the long interval and the end period. A game machine E7 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to identify whether it is the first specific game or the second specific game by the effect executed in the long interval and the end period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the specific game becomes monotonous.

<Feature F group> (SW pressing table switching)
An operation accepting means for accepting an operation by a player, a period setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation can be accepted by the operation accepting means, and an effect is executed when the operation is accepted by the operation accepting means. effect execution means for performing, effect selection means for selecting the effect to be executed by the effect execution means, storage means for storing a plurality of the effects selected by the effect selection means, and the storage means, A specific effect is stored as one of the plurality of effects, and a probability varying means for varying the probability that the specific effect is selected by the selecting means within the effective period. Characteristic game machine F1.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is the mainstream to develop a game while displaying effects on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter abbreviated as "LCD"). What kind of effect is performed is determined, for example, at the timing when the ball shot into the game area enters the starting hole. That is, at the timing when the ball enters the starting hole, it is determined which pattern effect is performed, how and for how many seconds, and what the result of the effect is. Then, an effect pattern is instructed from the main control device that controls the game to the display control device that controls the display, and the effect display that is instructed by the display control device is performed. Since an effect pattern is an instruction for a series of effect displays of the effect pattern, as a result, the effect pattern also includes an instruction for the time required for the effect display (Patent Document 1). This is because the number of seconds required for a series of effect displays is determined in advance. In recent years, a large number of player-participation pachinko machines have been developed. These require a button operation during a predetermined effect period, and develop different effects depending on the timing of the button operation. For example, the effect display is performed such that the pattern is displayed in a part of the effect display, the variable display is stopped according to the button operation, and the so-called jackpot etc. is generated according to the stop result ( For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2000-350846). However, there has been a demand for a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of the game by performing various other effects by button operation. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

According to the gaming machine F1, an operation by the player is accepted by the operation accepting means. A period setting means sets a validity period during which the operation receiving means can receive an operation. When an operation is received by the operation receiving means, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. An effect to be executed by the effect executing means is selected by the effect selecting means. A storage means stores a plurality of effects selected by the effect selecting means. The storage means stores a specific effect as one of a plurality of effects, and the probability that the specific effect is selected by the selection means is varied by the probability variable means within the effective period. As a result, when the player performs an operation, the probability of selecting the specific effect can be set differently, so that the game can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the storage means stores a plurality of effects groups each composed of the plurality of effects having different selection rates of the specific effects, and the probability setting means is configured to store the above-mentioned effects stored in the storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that one effect group is set among a plurality of effect groups, and the effect selecting means selects an effect from the effect group set by the probability setting means. F2.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, by switching and setting the performance group, the probability setting means can change the selection rate of the specific performance by switching and setting the performance group. Therefore, there is an effect that the selection probability of the specific effect can be easily changed.

The game machine F2 has counting means for counting the number of operations accepted by the operation accepting means, and the probability setting means switches and sets the effect group based on the count of the counting means. A gaming machine F3 characterized by:

According to the game machine F3, since the effect group is switched according to the number of times the operation is accepted, there is an effect that the game can be given a freshness by the player's operation.

In the game machine F2 or F3, the game machine F4 is characterized in that the probability setting means switches and sets the effect group based on the remaining period of the period set by the period setting means.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2 or F3, the effect group is switched by the probability setting means based on the remaining period set by the period setting means. can be made different.

Any one of the gaming machines F2 to F4 has history storage means capable of storing a reception history when an operation is accepted by the operation acceptance means, and the probability setting means is stored in the history storage means. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the performance group is switched and set based on the received reception history.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F2 to F4, the effect group can be switched according to the reception history, so there is an effect that the probability can be changed according to the player's operation.

<Feature G group> (announced with a tool controlled by a voice lamp during the effective period of SW)
A game having a first control means for executing game control, a second control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the first control means, and an operation section operable by a player. In the machine, the first control means includes reception means for receiving an operation of the operation unit by the player, and based on the reception of the operation by the reception means, notifies the second control means that the operation has been received. reception transmission means for transmitting a reception signal indicating a reception signal; period setting means for setting an effective period during which the reception means can receive the player's operation; and an effective signal indicating the effective period set by the period setting means. to the second control means, and a notification mode indicating that the operation of the operation unit is set to be valid based on the expiration of the valid period set by the period setting means , actuating means operable in at least a first state and a second state different from the second state, and based on the start of the effective period set by the period setting means, the actuating means from the first state to the second state, wherein the second control means includes display means capable of displaying a performance mode, and display control means for causing the display means to display the performance mode and the display control means causes the display means to display a predetermined effect mode based on the reception of the reception signal from the reception transmission means. A game machine G1 characterized in that, based on the valid signal, a presentation mode indicating the valid period is displayed on the display means.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is the mainstream to develop a game while displaying effects on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter abbreviated as "LCD"). What kind of effect is performed is determined, for example, at the timing when the ball shot into the game area enters the starting hole. That is, at the timing when the ball enters the starting hole, it is determined which pattern effect is performed, how and for how many seconds, and what the result of the effect is. Then, an effect pattern is instructed from the main control device that controls the game to the display control device that controls the display, and the effect display that is instructed by the display control device is performed. Since an effect pattern is an instruction for a series of effect displays of the effect pattern, as a result, the effect pattern also includes an instruction for the time required for the effect display (Patent Document 1). Here, a gaming machine has been proposed in which buttons that can be operated by the player are provided in the gaming machine, and are operated by the player to display advance notice effects such as characters on the liquid crystal display device. In such a game machine, when the operation means is operated, there is a game machine in which the effective period during which the notice effect is displayed is displayed to the player on a liquid crystal display device or the like (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2000-350846). However, if the display control device or the like that controls the display device does not distinguish the input of the operation means or manage the valid period, the displayed valid period and the actual valid period will be different, and the player's There was a problem of reducing interest. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

According to the gaming machine G1, game control is controlled by the first control means. Based on the control signal from the first control means, game control is executed by the second control means. In the first control means, the operation of the operating section by the player is received by the receiving means. When the operation is accepted by the accepting means, the acceptance transmitting means transmits an acceptance signal indicating that the operation has been accepted to the second control means. A period setting means sets a validity period during which the reception means can receive the player's operation. A valid signal indicating the valid period set by the period setting means is transmitted to the second control means by the valid signal transmitting means. When the effective period set by the period setting means is reached, the notification means notifies the notification mode indicating that the operation of the operation unit is set to be valid. It is actuated by the actuating means to at least a first state and a second state different from the second state. The operation control means operates the operation means from the first state to the second state based on the start of the valid period set by the period setting means. In the second control means, the presentation mode is displayed by the display means. The presentation mode is displayed on the display means by the display control means. The display control means causes the display control means to display a predetermined presentation mode on the display means based on reception of the reception signal from the reception transmission means. Based on the valid signal transmitted from the valid signal transmitting means, an effect mode indicating the valid period is displayed on the display means. As a result, even if there is a discrepancy between the notification mode for reporting the valid period operated by the second control means and the presentation mode for indicating the valid period controlled by the second control means, the operating means operates in the second state. The validity period can be identified by the timing at which it is sent. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the validity period, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The game machine G1 has main control means capable of outputting a control signal for controlling a game to the first control means, and the main control means executes a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition. lottery means; dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result of the lottery means on the display means; 1 output means capable of outputting a start signal for starting dynamic display of the identification information in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means to the control means; , the period setting means of the first control means sets the effective period within the determined dynamic display period based on the reception of the start signal. G2.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the effective period is set within the dynamic display period based on the start signal received by the main control means for controlling the first control means, so that the effective period is set more accurately. There is an effect that the effective period can be set.

In gaming machine G2,
The game machine G3 is characterized in that the valid signal transmitting means transmits the valid signal to the second control means before dynamic display of the identification information is started.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2, the valid signal is transmitted to the second control means by the valid transmission means before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, so the valid period has the effect of being able to discriminate the start of

The game machine G4 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines G1 to G3, the operating means is operated to a specific state different from the second state before the start of the valid period.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the operating means is operated in a specific state before the valid period starts, so that the player can know in advance that the valid period will start. There is an effect that it is possible to notify the

In the gaming machine G4, the operating means is provided so that an operating part that operates on the front side overlapping with the display area of the display means is arranged, and the display control means of the second control means operates during the effective period A game machine G5, characterized in that a specific performance mode is displayed on the display means within a period overlapping with a period in which the operating means is operated in the specific state before the start of.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machine G4, by arranging the operation means and the display means close to each other, it is possible to easily recognize the notification of the effective period by the display means and the notification by the operation means. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine G5, the specific effect mode is an effect in which specific pattern information is variably displayed from a display area overlapping with the operating portion of the operating means.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of the game machine G5, the specific effect is composed of a specific pattern display that is variably displayed from the display area overlapping the operating part, so the operating part and the specific effect are interlocked. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that the

<Characteristic H group> (Interlocking pseudo-ream and background level)
Lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery results of the lottery means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed as identification information indicating a specific lottery result, wherein the dynamic display execution means dynamic display time determination means for determining dynamic display time of the identification information to be dynamically displayed; A plurality of expectation level advance notice display modes in which performance modes are variably set according to expectations indicating that a specific lottery result is obtained, and a comprehensive expectation level notice display indicating a comprehensive expectation level in the plurality of expectation advance notice display forms. and advance notice display control means for causing at least the display means to display the mode of the game machine H1.

Here, there is a gaming machine provided with a display screen such as an LCD. When a pachinko machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, is provided with a display screen, a plurality of symbols may be variably displayed on the display screen based on the establishment of a starting condition. In such a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is conducted based on the fulfillment of the starting condition, and when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery, a predetermined combination of a plurality of symbols displayed in a variable manner (for example, 777, etc., is the same). A combination of numbers lined up), and after that stop, a special game state (for example, a game state called winning) is often played (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-072569). . In such a game machine, the degree of expectation for winning is notified by displaying a character or the like on the display screen. In the gaming machine exemplified above, if a plurality of notice displays or the like indicating expectations are displayed, it becomes difficult to understand the overall expectations. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by configuring the machine so as to execute an easy-to-understand presentation.

According to the gaming machine H1, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means. When the identification information is displayed with the identification information indicating the result of the specific lottery, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The dynamic display time of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. Within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, a plurality of expectation level advance notices are set by varying the presentation mode according to the expectation level indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result. The display mode and the total expectation level announcement display mode indicating the overall expectation level in the plurality of expectation announcement display modes are displayed at least on the display means by the announcement display control means. As a result, the overall expectation level can be identified by the overall expectation level announcement display mode, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the game machine H1, in the expectation level announcement display mode displayed by the announcement display control means, by being displayed, an overall expectation level higher than the expectation level displayed in the overall expectation level announcement display mode is displayed. The game machine H2 is characterized in that a variable notice display mode is set to be changed to an expectation degree notice display mode.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, by displaying the expectation level notice display mode, it is possible to increase the level of expectation displayed in the overall expectation level notice display mode. There is an effect that the player can also be interested in the expectation level notice display mode.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determination means, the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined based on the determined dynamic display time. dynamic display mode determination means; and expectation level announcement for determining the type of the expectation level announcement display mode to be displayed by the announcement display control means based on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. A gaming machine H3 characterized by comprising display mode determining means.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the type of the expectation degree announcement display mode is determined based on the dynamic display mode. Since the content of the dynamic display mode and the degree of expectation are not accompanied by the content of the dynamic display mode, the feeling of discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

In game machine H2 or H3, after temporarily stopping the identification information in a predetermined manner, a pseudo-stop means for executing at least once an effect for starting dynamic display, and the number of times of temporary stop executed by the pseudo-stop means. based on the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means and the lottery result of the lottery means, and the expectation level notice display control means controls the pseudo stop A gaming machine H4 characterized in that the variable advance notice display mode is displayed on the display means based on the execution of the temporary stop by the means.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2 or the gaming machine H3, it is possible to add value to the temporary stop, and to make the player expect the temporary stop to play the game. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine H3 or H4, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means includes the general expectation level advance notice display mode indicating a predetermined degree of expectation determined by the expectation level advance notice display mode determination means. A game machine H5 characterized in that a specific dynamic display mode is set as follows.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machine H3 or the game machine H4, the dynamic display mode is set in relation to the total expectation level notice display mode. The degree of expectation can be notified to the player, and the content of the dynamic display mode and the total degree of expectation do not accompany each other.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the advance notice display control means controls the advance notice display mode of the general expectation displayed within one dynamic display time to be the following identification when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the overall expectation degree announcement display mode indicating the same degree of expectation is continuously displayed even in the dynamic display of information.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the total expectation level is taken over over a plurality of dynamic displays, so there is an effect that it is possible to enjoy accumulating games. .

In any one of game machines H3 to H6, storage means for storing a plurality of groups of dynamic display modes composed of a plurality of different dynamic display modes as dynamic display modes determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. and setting means for setting the dynamic display mode group for which the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode,
The general expectation level notice display mode displayed within one dynamic display time is displayed as a display mode showing the dynamic display mode group set by the setting means after the dynamic display time. A game machine H7 characterized by:

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines H3 to H6, it is possible to notify the dynamic display mode group set according to the total expectation level, so that various effects can be given to the player. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine H7, when the dynamic display is started by the dynamic display means, the setting means sets the effect mode group corresponding to the type of the displayed general expectation level advance notice display mode. A gaming machine H8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H7, the effect mode group is set in accordance with the overall expectation level, so that the overall expectation level and the performance mode group can be associated with each other. There is an effect that notification can be made in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Game machine Z1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of game machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 to H8, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, on the condition that winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening) is a necessary condition. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning balls is provided. Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 to H8, the gaming machine comprises a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being a fusion. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a pattern display device as one of the game machines. In this pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole, a starting condition is established, and the patterns on the pattern display device start to change. If the stop symbols after the variation are a combination of predetermined symbols, a big win is achieved, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.
Specifically, in the special game state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is closed after being opened for a predetermined time (or the time until a predetermined number of prizes are won), and such opening and closing operations are performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16 times) are repeated. A large amount of prize balls can be paid out by allowing game balls to enter the large prize winning opening in the open state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-700).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 is advantageous to the player based on the ball entry means into which the game ball can enter and the game ball entering the ball entry means. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege, variable means capable of changing the ball entry means between an open position where game balls can enter and a restricted position for restricting the entry of game balls, based on the establishment of specific conditions. a specific game executing means for executing a specific game in which the opening operation for varying the variable means from the regulating position to the open position is set a plurality of times; and a type of the specific game executed by the specific game executing means. It has specific game type determining means and storage means for storing at least a plurality of specific games having different opening motion patterns as the specific game determined by the specific game type determining means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, when the specific game is being executed, the game ball on the regulation position of the variable means is released by the opening operation after the next. It has a ball entry assisting means for making it easier to enter the ball into the ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the plurality of specific games stored in the storage means include a game when the variable means is varied to the open position. A first specific game containing many advantageous opening operation patterns, which is one of the opening operation patterns in which the ball is easily entered into the ball entering means by the entering ball assisting means, and the first specific game more than the first specified game. At least a second specific game configured with a small number of advantageous opening action patterns is set.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, wherein the first specific game executes the advantageous opening operation pattern a predetermined number of times, and then performs the advantageous opening operation pattern. The opening operation in which the variable means is changed to the open position in a period longer than the opening operation is set at least once, and the second specific game is the predetermined number of times of the entering ball assistance It is composed of an opening operation of a disadvantageous opening operation pattern that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry assisting means by means.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, when the game ball enters the ball-entering means that allows the game ball to enter, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is granted by the privilege granting means. The ball entry means is varied by an open position in which a game ball can enter, a regulation position in which entry of a game ball is restricted, and a variable means. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the specific game executing means executes the specific game in which the opening operation for changing the variable means from the restricted position to the open position is set a plurality of times. The type of the specific game executed by the specific game executing means is determined by the specific game type determining means. As the specific game determined by the specific game type determining means, at least a plurality of specific games having different opening motion patterns are stored by the storage means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the specific game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, when the specific game is being executed, the game ball on the regulation position of the variable means is entered by the ball entry assisting means As a result, it is possible to easily enter the ball into the ball entering means in the next and subsequent opening operations, which is advantageous for the player.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, it is possible to set a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous than that. Therefore, there is an effect that sharpness can be imparted to the game.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, it is possible to set a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous than that. Therefore, there is an effect that sharpness can be imparted to the game.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
202 ROM (storage means)
650 Part of entry means 653 Part of entry assistance means 654 Variable means S212 Part of specific game type determination means S1003 Part of privilege provision means S1004 Specific game execution means

Claims (4)

a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering means;
a variable means capable of changing the ball entry means between an open position where a game ball can enter and a regulation position where entry of a game ball is restricted;
a specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which an opening operation for varying the variable means from the restricted position to the open position is set a plurality of times based on the establishment of a specific condition;
a specific game type determination means for determining the type of the specific game to be executed by the specific game execution means;
and storage means for storing at least a plurality of specific games having different opening motion patterns as the specific games determined by the specific game type determining means. When the specific game is being executed, it has a ball entry assisting means for making it easier for the game ball on the regulation position of the variable means to enter the ball entry means in the subsequent release operation. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, characterized by: In the plurality of specific games stored in the storage means, when the variable means is changed to the open position, the game ball is easily entered by the entering means by the entering assist means. At least a first specific game containing many advantageous opening action patterns, which is one of the action patterns, and a second specific game having fewer advantageous opening action patterns than the first specific game are set. 3. The game machine according to claim 2, characterized by: In the first specific game, after executing the advantageous opening operation pattern a predetermined number of times, the opening operation in which the variable means is varied to the open position for a period longer than the opening operation in the advantageous opening operation pattern is set at least once, and
The second specific game is composed of an opening operation of a disadvantageous opening operation pattern that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering assist means by the ball entering assist means of the predetermined number of times. 4. The game machine according to claim 3, characterized in that it is a game machine.

Images